JP7409433B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, execute performances that indicate a predetermined value (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-179176

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machines, there has been a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a first mode that changes the performance mode from at least a first mode to any second mode among a plurality of second modes different from the first mode. The first performance execution means includes a first performance execution unit that executes a performance, and a second performance execution unit that executes a second performance different from the first performance, and the first performance execution unit is configured such that the execution position of the first performance is The first performance can be executed so as to hide the second performance in a situation that overlaps with the execution position of the second performance, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the first performance in the first manner. The second effect can be executed with the execution position set at a position where the first effect is more easily visible to the player in a situation where the first effect is executed in the second mode than in a situation where the first effect is executed in the second mode , The second effect can be executed at a predetermined execution position that cannot be hidden by the first effect as a position where the second effect can be easily recognized, and the gaming machine is configured such that the effect mode of the first aspect is the same as the first effect. It has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that is not variable into two modes .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first effect is executed to change the effect mode from at least the first mode to any second mode among a plurality of second modes different from the first mode. and a second performance execution means that executes a second performance different from the first performance, and the first performance execution means is configured such that the execution position of the first performance is the same as the second performance. The first performance can be executed so as to hide the second performance in a situation that overlaps with the execution position , and the second performance execution means The second performance can be executed with the execution position set at a position that is easier for the player to visually recognize when the first performance is executed in the second mode, and the position that is easier for the player to visually recognize. The second performance can be executed at a predetermined execution position that cannot be hidden by the first performance, and the gaming machine is capable of changing the performance mode of the first mode to the second mode. It has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that is not performed .

Therefore , there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slide unit. (a) is a front view of the upper combined unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper combined unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper combined unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper combined unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the upper combined unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the upper combined unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower combined unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower combined unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combined unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower combined unit. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the drive arm in a retracted rotation position, a horizontal rotation position, a vertical rotation position, and an extended rotation position. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged schematic front view of the drive arm when it is rotated from a retracted rotational position to an extended rotational position. It is a front view of an upper combined unit and a lower combined unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the base member and the elevating base. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base and the rotating member. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base and the rotating member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the elevating base and the rotating member. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotating member. (a) is a front view of the drive body in a state arranged at the first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state arranged at the second rotation position. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of a rotating member. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of a rotating member. (a) is a front view of the lifting unit, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit. It is a front view of the elevating unit in a first state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in a 2nd state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in a third state. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the elevating unit in a first state. It is a back view of the elevating unit in a 2nd state. It is a back view of the elevating unit in a 3rd state. (a) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in the first state, (b) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in the second state, and (c) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in the second state. ) is a front view of the transmission member, slide member, and link member in a third state. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit in the combined state. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG. 53. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of each rotation member of a slide unit, the elevating base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (a) and (b) are front views of each rotation member of a slide unit, the elevating base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. (a) and (b) are front views of each rotation member of a slide unit, the elevating base of a protrusion unit, and a rotation member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a slide unit, an upper combined unit, and a lower combined unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a slide unit, an upper combined unit, and a lower combined unit. (a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, upper combined unit, and lower combined unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65(a), and (b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 65(b). , is a schematic diagram of an upper combined unit and a lower combined unit. (a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit, upper combined unit, and lower combined unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66(a), and (b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 66(b). , is a schematic diagram of an upper combined unit and a lower combined unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit. (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are in mesh, and (b) is a schematic diagram in a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are out of mesh. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 72(b). FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit in a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are in mesh, and (b) is a schematic front view of the slide unit when the housing member is displaced and the transmission gear is below the main body base member. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the first side rack gear and the transmission gear are disengaged. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. 75(b). It is a front view of the base member in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear are in mesh, and (b) is a schematic diagram when the left rotation transmission rack gear of the base member and the transmission gear are disengaged FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state where the slide unit is in a state where It is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (a) is a schematic front view of the left sliding member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left sliding member in a state after the switching plate is operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide unit in a state after the switching plate is operated. be. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. 84(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 84(a). It is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the slide unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 93(b). (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93(c). It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slide unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 97(b). (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97(c). (a) is a front view of a lifting unit in a tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the lifting unit, and (c) is a side view of the lifting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. This is an operating unit in a combined state. (a) is a schematic sectional view of the operating unit taken along the CIIa-CIIa line in FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the operating unit taken along the CIIb-CIIb line in FIG. 101. (a) is a front view of the driver in a state where the driver is arranged at the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the driver in the state where the driver is arranged at the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable prize winning device in the first control example. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device in the La-La cross section in the first control example, (b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view, and (c) is the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. (a) to (b) are rear views of a part of the variable prize winning device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the actual display screen in the first control example. . (a) is a diagram showing area divisions of the display screen when the reach navigation performance is displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance display mode of the reach navigation performance. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpot, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the variation pattern table for a loss (normal), and (d) is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the variation pattern table for a loss (probable variation). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the navigation performance selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first navigation performance selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first navigation performance selection table. , is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second navigation effect selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows abnormality processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot-related command processing for display executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart showing several command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart showing production command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 3 is a flowchart showing image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the composite press effect is started in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example when the effect setting timing D3b is reached in the composite press effect in the second control example. It is a figure showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the timing press period Db1 is reached in the composite press performance in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of when the timing press period Db1 is reached in the composite press performance in the second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of the time point reached. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing press period in the compound press effect in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example when the frame button 22 is operated during the timing press period in the compound press effect in the second control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a point in time when a two-hit period Dc is reached. It is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous slot performance executed in the second control example. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of display modes displayed in the continuous slot performance in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode" in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "sugoroku mode" in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect display of the point effect in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a press scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal press scenario in the second control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press scenario in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the compound press scenario in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the character selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning character selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning character selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character selection table for use in a computer. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the point selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning point selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning point selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a point selection table for use. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a second control example. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a second control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the point production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the automatic press effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot performance setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the first time slot performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal slot performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st shortened slot performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 2nd shortened slot effect performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during extension slot production performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press effect related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the press command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing push command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing auto press start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the auto press start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing automatic press command processing. (a) is a flowchart illustrating the auto press end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the auto press end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example. 3 is a flowchart showing release command processing. It is a flowchart which shows slot performance command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the point performance command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a press scenario table in a first modified example of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first composite press scenario. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second composite press scenario. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the slot performance setting process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of a 2nd control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a frame button control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of each effect performed in each control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display example of each effect performed in each control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing each mode used for point production in a third control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode A" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "sugoroku mode" in the third control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display example of "normal mode" in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a display example of "bingo mode" in the third control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a layer on which characters are displayed in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the layer on which points are displayed in the third control example. (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of combining a plurality of layers in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table in the third control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the number of times selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning number selection table in the third control example. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-missing selection table in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the usage score selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the final display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a final third display mode selection table in a third control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a character display selection table in a third control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display data table in a third control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a transfer data table in a third control example. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list in a third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the point performance setting process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the point performance initial setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the point performance mode setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (a) is a flowchart showing point effect related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the third control example. 3 is a flowchart showing point command processing. It is a flowchart which shows indicator command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 3rd example of control. (a) is a diagram schematically showing another example of the layer on which characters are displayed in the third control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing another example of the layer on which points are displayed in the third control example. FIG. 12(c) is a diagram schematically showing another example in which a plurality of layers in the third control example are combined. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of reach navigation performance performed in the 4th control example. (a) to (c) are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second internal level selection table in a fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the production scenario storage area in the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the production scenario selection table in the fourth control example. It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the reach navigation performance setting process 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th control example. (a) It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of the 4th control example typically, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of the 4th control example typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing modification example 3 of the fourth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in modification example 3 of the fourth control example. (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in modification example 3 of the fourth control example. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of display modes displayed in the continuous slot performance in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed in the slot performance in the fifth control example, and (b) is a timing diagram showing the flow of the display mode displayed in the slot performance in the fifth control example. It is a chart. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a display mode storage area in a fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning display mode selection table in the fifth control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table for failure in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the stop mode selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table for winning in the fifth control example. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a stop mode selection table for disengagement in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the first slot performance performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during normal slot production performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 1st shortened slot performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during the 2nd shortened slot performance performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 during extension slot production performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. (a) and (b) are examples of schematic diagrams of the display mode of the rear image in the sixth control example. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the composite press effect performed in the 6th control example. (a) to (c) are diagrams illustrating an example of a background changing operation mode of the composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of a composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. (b) is a schematic diagram showing button operation contents and presentation modes executed in a composite press presentation executed in the sixth control example. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of press effect 2 in the composite press effect executed in the sixth control example. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device in a sixth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 5 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the automatic press effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows another example of the press effect 2 in the compound press effect executed in the 6th control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects in the seventh control example. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing display examples displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing display examples of additional effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example. FIG. 6(c) is a schematic diagram showing the second variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example, and (d) schematically shows the contents of the third variation pattern selection table in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the additional production selection table in a 7th example of control. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the production counter in the seventh control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 7th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. (b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process 2 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 7th control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects in a modification of the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modification of the seventh control example. (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an additional effect in a modification of the seventh control example. (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a background change effect in a modification of the seventh control example. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing modified examples of additional effects. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the effect in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and production process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 8th control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 1 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 2. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), and the front door serves as an axis for opening and closing on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode by the lighting state, or indicate whether it is in the variable mode by the lighting state. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 1, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (during probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 140. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) among the "low probability states" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability is the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 140 is increased. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is in a gaming state where the probability is not changing or the time is being shortened (a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change and time saving, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in an open state (open state), the access to the second prize opening 140 is different from when the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 140a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is released, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are released with one win. It may be possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol to increase it compared to the normal one without changing the number of times the second symbol is played.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more chances to have the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a per win, etc. 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 140 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 140 may be five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize opening 140. This first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving period, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 140 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 140, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 140 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning hole 140, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning hole 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning hole 140, so it is difficult to enter the second winning hole 140. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state. Since the ball is easy to hit, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 140a and winning the second prize opening 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the player to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 so as to represent the symbol. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441, 475, and 476.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control device 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and also controls the payout control device 111 to issue a payout initialization command to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. Moreover, FIGS. 7 to 9 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In addition, in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retreated to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotation member 730, and the elevating member 820 are each moved to the retracted position. In FIG. 8, the displaced state is such that the left slide member 430 is slid toward the right slide member 450 from the state shown in FIG. 7, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the extended position. FIG. 9 shows a state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced from the state shown in FIG. 7 to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and the inner space of the rear case 300 includes a slide unit 400, an upper combination unit 500, a lower combination unit 600, A protruding unit 700 and a lifting unit 800 are rotatably housed.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is rectangular and oblong in front view and is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and an upper end portion is disposed on the base member 410 so as to be slidable. On the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (i.e., the third symbol display device 81), each slide member 430 is independently moved in the left and right direction (the base member 410 in the longitudinal direction).

In this case, the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are formed so that they can come into contact with each other, but in this embodiment, when the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 come into contact, they are prevented from being damaged. A suppressing structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

A guide member 419, which is rectangular and oblong in front view, is disposed below the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 in a posture parallel to the base member 410, and includes a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450. When the slide members 430 and 450 are slid in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are slid and guided between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the lower end side of each slide member 430, 450 from shaking in the front-rear direction.

The upper combined unit 500 includes a base member 510 that is rectangular and laterally elongated in front view and is disposed in front of the base member 410 of the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 that is displaceably disposed on the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower combined unit 600 includes a base member 610 that is approximately L-shaped in front view and is disposed on the left side and below the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the lower base member 610. and a lower displacement member 640 disposed so as to be displaceable.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed to be movable between a retracted position where it is retracted to the back side of the base member 510 and an extended position where it is retracted to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be movable between a retracted position where it is retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and an extended position where it is retracted to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are When extended to the extended position, the side surfaces (upper contact portion 533 and lower contact portion 643) of both these displacement members 530, 640 contact (combine) each other.

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, which have been displaced in the direction of approaching each other, come into contact with each other, there is a risk that an impact will be generated and the postures will become unstable, such as being bounced back from each other. In this embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses the impact upon such contact. Details of this structure will be described later.

The protrusion unit 700 includes a base member 710 that is horizontally rectangular in front view and is disposed below the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a base member 710 that is movable up and down on the base member 710. It includes a base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated and lowered) between a protruding position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a.

The protrusion unit 700 also includes a protrusion member 735 that is disposed to be retractable (sliding displacement) on the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 that is swingably disposed on the rotary member 730, and the protrusion member 735 and A drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swinging member 732 is provided.

In the protruding unit 700, a protruding member 735 and a swinging member 732 are driven by one drive motor 763. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the protruding member 735 and the driving force required for the swinging member 732 overlap, which increases the load and may reduce the durability of the drive motor 763. In this embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load on the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such a structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810 that is rectangular and laterally elongated in front view and is disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper combined unit 500, and an elevating member 820 that is movably disposed on the base member 810. The elevating member 820 is formed to be movable (elevating and lowering) between a retracted position where it is retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an extended position where it is retracted to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12, a structure for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 with respect to the base member 410 will be described.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. Note that FIGS. 10 to 12 illustrate a state in which the left slide member 430 is disposed at the retracted position (the position furthest away from the right slide member 450).

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a sliding rod disposed on the base member 410. A member 420 , a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 that are slidably connected to the slide bar member 420 , and the left slide member 430 and right slide member 450 are slid along the slide bar member 420 . It is mainly equipped with a drive mechanism for

The base member 410 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction. Further, on the base member 410, a plate-shaped protruding plate part 411 is horizontally protruded from the lower part of the sliding bar member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the protruding plate part 411 (facing the sliding bar member 420 A base-side rack gear 412 is carved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411, and a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are carved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod-shaped body with a circular cross section for guiding the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450. By doing so, both of these slide members 430 and 450 are held slidably. Note that both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears that extend along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engaged with the first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. Transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 includes a first member 431 that is rectangular and oblong in front view, a first side pinion gear 432 that is rotatably disposed on the first member 431, and a second side pinion gear 432 that is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. A second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a and having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a base member 434 which is rectangular and long when viewed from the front and hanging downward from the distal end of the second member 433; and a base member 434 which is rotatable to the front side of the base member 434. a rotating member 435 disposed on the rotary member 435; a displacement member 436 disposed on the rear side of the rotary member 435; It mainly includes gears 437a to 437f.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. , it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is carved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear that is meshed with a left drive gear 471, which will be described later, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational movement is converted into a linear movement by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420. Ru.

Note that, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably disposed (axially supported) on the first member 431, and the portion where the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed (the front side of the first member 431) A cover 431b having a rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front is disposed. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is disposed in a covered state on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 meshes with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slid along the sliding rod member 420, that is, when it is slid relative to the base member 410, it receives an action from the base-side rack gear 412 along with the sliding displacement. As a result, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is displaceably disposed (connected) to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the distal end side, so that the second member 433 is relatively relative to the first member 431. While being displaced, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420. Note that the sliding hole has an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, the second member 433 has a second side rack gear 433a carved on its lower surface, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the sliding displacement of the first member 431, the first side pinion gear 432 acts (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is (The second side rack gear 433a converts the linear motion into a linear motion and then transmits the linear motion to the second member 433.) As a result, the second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, A driving force accompanying the linear movement of the first member 431 and a driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the first member 431. I can do it.

Note that a left slide member 430 and a right slide member 450 are slidably disposed on the slide rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in this embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed such that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other, and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. Ru.

The right slide member 450 includes a rack member 451 that is rectangular and elongated in front view, a base member 454 that is rectangular and elongated in front view that hangs downward from the base end side of the rack member 451, and is rotatable to the front side of the base member 454. A rotating member 455 disposed on the rotary member 455, a displacement member 456 disposed on the back side of the rotary member 455, and a displacement member 456 for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotary member 455. It mainly includes transmission gears 457a to 457f.

The rack member 451 has a sliding hole on the base end side that extends along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and has an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. This allows the sliding rod member 420 to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction). That is, the rack member 451 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is carved on the top surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational movement is converted into linear movement by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slid along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 that are rotatably supported in front of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 that are meshed with the respective drive gears 471 and 472, respectively. It mainly includes a left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476, each of which has a drive shaft connected to each of the pinion gears 473, 474.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, by rotationally driving the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 by the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, Thus, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid independently.

Note that a cover member 416 is disposed in front of the base member 410, and drive gears 471, 472 and pinion gears 473, 474 are rotatably held between opposing surfaces of the base member 410 and cover member 416. . Further, each of the drive motors 475 and 476 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, an insertion hole is formed in the cover member 416, and the drive shaft of each drive motor 475, 476 is connected to each pinion gear 473, 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 will be described.

13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 includes a back side base member 434a connected to the second member 433, and a front side disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434a. A base member 434b is provided, and transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (pivotally supported) between opposing surfaces (internal spaces) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. A shaft support hole 434b1 that is circular in front view is bored in the front side base member 434b.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 434 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and are connected in series (meshing). , one gear train is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the front and the transmission gear 437f at the rear.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 435a of the rotating member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action from the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The rotation is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotating member 435 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 437f.

The rotating member 435 includes a rotating shaft 435a and a supporting shaft 435b coaxially protruding from the back surface. The rotating shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, a transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a in a relatively non-rotatable manner. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 437f, the rotating member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a part that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back side of the rotation member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. Note that the E-ring is fitted into a fitting groove formed at the tip of the support shaft 435b, thereby preventing the displacement member 436 from coming off from the support shaft 435b.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, so that the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The relief hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc by dividing an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle, and the width of the groove is the same as that of the rotating member 435. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotation member 435, the rotation shaft 435a can be displaced along the escape hole 436b, and the rotation member 435 and the displacement Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear carved along the circumferential surface centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 meshes with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward or reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 435 about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b). can be done.

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in a front view in which the dimension in the length direction is larger than the dimension in the width direction. A rotating shaft 435a is arranged at. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed by dividing the rotating member 435 into approximately two parts at the center of its length. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b), the displacement member 436 can be hidden behind the rotation member 435, making it difficult for the player to see it. I can do it.

Further, since the drive motor 441 is disposed on the rotation member 435 on the opposite side of the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b in between, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed on the rotation member 435 is The center of gravity can be positioned close to the rotating shaft 435a of the rotating member 435. Therefore, the rotation of this structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In this embodiment, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction about the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435), the rotation member The center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are disposed at 435 is approximately aligned with the rotation axis 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure relative to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction around the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) (the displacement member 436 is visibly extended to the side of the rotation member 435), The position of the center of gravity of the above-described structure can be spaced apart from the rotation axis 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of overhang of the displacement member 436. Thereby, the center of gravity position can be adjusted according to the rotational direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be performed smoothly.

That is, when starting the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 from a stopped state, the driving force increases due to the influence of inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure with the displacement member 436 extended to the side of the rotation member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 (i.e., rotation of the rotation member 435). When the displacement member 436 is located on the side to be displaced, by making the displacement member 436 stick out to the side of the rotation member 435 (rotating it in one direction), the rotation effect due to the weight of the structure mentioned above will cause the displacement member 436 to move. Can assist rotation. Thereby, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 is extended to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity at the start of the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 (i.e., rotation of the rotation member 435). In the case where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotation member 435 (rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the structure described above is brought close to (coinciding with) the rotation axis 435a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. This allows the left sliding member 430 to smoothly start sliding from the stopped state.

Further, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 is extended to the side of the rotation member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotation member 435) stops. If the structure is located on the side where the structure moves, the weight of the structure mentioned above can make it easier to stop the rotation. Thereby, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451, and a front side base member 454b disposed (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. Transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (pivotally supported) between opposing surfaces (inner space) of member 454a and front base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 that is circular in front view is bored in the front side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (sliding displacement) of the base member 454 relative to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and are connected in series (meshing). , one gear train is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the front and the transmission gear 457f at the rear.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation shaft 455a of the rotating member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotation is The rotation is transmitted to the rear transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotating member 455 can be rotated by the rotation of the rear transmission gear 457f.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b coaxially protruding from the back surface. The rotating shaft 455a is a portion that serves as a rotating shaft when the rotating member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in a shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, a transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a in a relatively non-rotatable manner. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 457f, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a part that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back side of the rotation member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. Note that by fitting an E-ring into a fitting groove formed at the tip of the support shaft 455b, a prevention of the displacement member 456 from coming off from the support shaft 455b is formed.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably disposed on the back side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, so that the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The relief hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc by dividing an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the width of the groove is the same as that of the rotating member 455. The dimension is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotation member 455, the rotation shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b, and the rotation member 455 and the displacement Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear carved along the circumferential surface centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is disposed on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 meshes with a curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward or reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 can be rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 455 about the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b). can be done.

In this case, the rotating member 455 has a substantially elongated shape in which the longitudinal dimension is larger than the width dimension in a front view, and the rotating shaft 455a is provided at one end in the longitudinal direction. At the same time, a drive motor 461 is provided at the other end. Furthermore, since the displacement member 456 is disposed on the opposite side of the rotation member 455 from the drive motor 461 across the support shaft 455b, the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are disposed on the rotation member 455 can be The center of gravity can be located at a position eccentric to one end of the rotating member 455 (a position spaced apart from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, at the start of sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450 (that is, rotation of the rotating member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the rotating member 455, the displacement member 456, and the drive motor 461 are disposed is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. By positioning it on the side, the weight of the structure can be applied in a direction that rotates the structure itself. Thereby, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the sliding displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is located on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the own weight of the structure is used as resistance. This can be used to make it easier to stop the rotation of the structure value. Thereby, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) contacts (collides with) the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), the right slide member 450 is retreated (right side in FIG. 10). (displaced), by positioning the center of gravity of the structure mentioned above on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the structure's own weight acts as resistance, and a buffering effect is exerted by the rotation of its structural value. can be done.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, illustrating a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid. Note that FIGS. 17 and 18 illustrate a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the left slide member 430 is placed in the retracted position, the second member 433 is maximally displaced in the extension direction with respect to the first member 431, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side in FIG. 17(a), the position furthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from this state, the first member 431 is moved in the right direction (see FIG. 17(a) right side, a direction approaching the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel attitude, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear Since the first side pinion gear 432 is pivotally supported by the first member 431 and is meshed with both rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slid relative to the base member 410, The first side pinion gear 432 is slid and rotated together with the first member 431 by the action of the base side rack gear 412, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is applied to the second side rack gear 433a, so that the second member 433 is slid in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is increased more than that of the first member 431 .

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than the first member 431 catches up with the first member 431, and the second member 433 has a second sliding displacement speed relative to the first member 431. The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the forward direction, and the first member 431 is further rightward with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 17(a), the direction in which it approaches the right slide member 450. ), as shown in FIG. 18(a), the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 moves to the right end of the movable range ( (a) right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the extended position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18(a), when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction from the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is placed in the extended position, , the first member 431 is slid to the left with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 18(a), the direction away from the right slide member 450) by the actions of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a. .

In this case, as in the case described above, the actions of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 As a result, the second member 433 is slidably displaced relative to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is increased more than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the second member 433 whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431 is in front of the first member 431 and relative to the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extension direction (the full length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is extended more than the full length in the extended position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the opposite direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (in a direction in which the left side in FIG. 17(b) is separated from the right slide member 450). ), as shown in FIG. 17(a), the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 moves to the left end of the movable range ( (a) the left side and the position furthest apart from the right slide member 450), that is, the extended position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided on the base member 410 (both not shown). In this case, the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is placed in the retracted position, and the detection sensor detects the detected portion. If this is detected, it is assumed that the left slide member 430 has been placed in the retracted position, and the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

On the other hand, stopping the drive of the left drive motor 475 at the extended position is achieved by cumulatively adding the number of driving steps of the left drive motor 475 after starting the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, it is assumed that the left slide member 430 is placed in the extended position, and the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped.

Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (range from the retracted position to the extended position) has a portion that overlaps with the movable range of sliding displacement of the right sliding member 450. Therefore, the range of movement of both can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

However, if the movable ranges overlap in this way, it may be caused by variations in displacement due to backlash (gap) due to variations in component dimensions/assembly or tolerances, or due to poor control (e.g. Due to the occurrence of an error in the cumulative addition of the number of drive steps, the left slide member 430 that has been slid to the extended position may come into contact with the right slide member 450, causing damage. On the other hand, if the slide displacement speed of the left slide member 430 is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement will be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is formed so that damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be suppressed while ensuring the performance effect accompanying the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, due to the action of the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431, the second member 433 can be slid relative to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and Since the displacement members 436) are connected, it is possible to increase the speed of sliding displacement of the base member 434 and to ensure the performance effect accompanying the sliding displacement.

On the other hand, as described above, the left sliding member 430 brings the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the right sliding member 450 (rack member 451). , it is possible to weaken the impact upon their contact and prevent damage to both.

In this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is kept on standby (stopped) closer to the retracted position than the extended position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid toward the extended position. When doing so, the left sliding member 430 is brought into contact with the right sliding member 450, and the right sliding member 450 is pushed in the direction of sliding displacement by the left sliding member 430, thereby producing an effect in which both slide in a unified state. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431 whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433 can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), so that when the first member 431 makes contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), Damage to both can be suppressed by weakening the impact.

The right slide member 450 is slidably disposed on the base member 410, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, when the right slide member 450 is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 placed in the extended position (see FIG. 18(a)), the right slide member 450 moves in the direction away from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18(a)). 18(a) right side), and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can slide is when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact This is the direction that allows a sliding displacement of .

Therefore, when the left sliding member 430 comes into contact with the right sliding member 450 (see FIG. 18(a)), the right sliding member 450 can be moved backward (escape to the rear) while accepting the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430. Therefore, a buffering effect can be exerted (see FIG. 18(b)). As a result, damage to the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in this embodiment, since the sliding directions of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450 are parallel to each other, when the left sliding member 430 abuts the right sliding member 450, the right sliding member 450 The escape movement can be performed smoothly. Therefore, a buffering effect can be reliably exerted, and damage to both can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, in this case, by sharing the sliding rod member 420 with the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, the sliding direction of both members is parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. . That is, when a sliding rod member for guiding the left sliding member 430 and a sliding rod member for guiding the right sliding member 450 are arranged side by side at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement. , the space increases accordingly, leading to an increase in size. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, both the slide members 430 and 450 serve as one slide rod member 420, thereby improving space efficiency and making it possible to downsize.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in the direction away from the left slide member 430 placed in the extended position (to the right in FIG. It is possible to place it in a position where it comes into contact. That is, it is possible to create a state in which the left slide member 430 does not come into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when the left sliding member 430 is slid at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stop position of the left sliding member 430 will extend beyond the target position due to the above-mentioned variations and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is brought into active contact with the slide member 430 (functioning as a stopper) and the left slide member 430 is slid at a relatively low speed, it is easy to make its stop position coincide with the target position. Therefore, by arranging the right slide member 450 at a position where it does not come into contact with the left slide member 430, it is possible to reduce the number of times the right slide member 450 makes contact with the left slide member 430, and the fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the lifespan of both slide members 430 and 450.

Here, in order to increase the speed of the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, the left slide member 430 is provided with both members 431 and 433 separately, and also with a base side rack gear 412 and a second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between the first side pinion gear 433a, and the number of parts and the sliding portion increase, resulting in an increase in weight and driving resistance. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 becomes relatively large.

Particularly, during the initial operation of the left sliding member 430 (when starting sliding displacement from a stopped state), the force required for driving becomes maximum due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (initial speed when sliding displacement is started from a stopped state) becomes slow, and there is a possibility that the performance effect accompanying the sliding displacement may be inhibited.

In this case, in this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be able to abut on the left slide member 430, and the direction in which the left slide member 430 is pushed back from the abutted state to the retracted position (FIG. 18(a) ) to the left). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting slide displacement from a stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Thereby, the left sliding member 430 can be quickly slid from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to increase the initial motion (initial speed) and improve the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (leftward in FIG. 18(a)), the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide members 430. (pushing back the first member 431), the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

That is, the right sliding member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431 of the left sliding member 430 whose slide displacement speed is slower than that of the second member 433, and pushes back the first member 431, so that the right sliding member 450 During the period during which the auxiliary force is acting on the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) from As a result, the time required for the displacement of the left slide member 430 to precede the displacement of the right slide member 450 can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational drive force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion and slides the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the gears of the mechanism (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472, and rack gear 451a) that converts the rotational driving force of the right drive motor 476 into linear motion and slides the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). The ratios are set to different gear ratios, and in this embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left sliding member 430) is set to a larger gear ratio than the gear ratio in the latter (right sliding member 450).

Note that in this embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474 are formed in the same shape, and the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a are formed in the same shape, so the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the same as that of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be greater than the number of teeth. In other words, a large gear ratio means a displacement in the direction of sliding displacement of the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means a large amount.

This makes it easy to quickly slide the left sliding member 430 from the stopped state, and after the sliding displacement starts, the speed of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right sliding member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted, so that the force of the right sliding member 450 pushing back the left sliding member 430 is strengthened. , it is possible to reliably assist the initial operation (start of sliding displacement from a stopped state) of the left sliding member 430. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio in the left sliding member 430 to a relatively large gear ratio, the sliding displacement speed of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) can be increased, so that The speed of sliding displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect accompanying the slide displacement.

Note that in order to smoothly perform the initial operation (start of sliding displacement from a stopped state) of the left slide member 430, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is made small, the initial operation will be smooth, but the end of the initial operation will be delayed. In the subsequent steady state, the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, in order to increase the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased by increasing the gear ratio of the left slide member 430. , the initial movement (start of slide displacement from a stopped state) is inhibited (slowed down). In other words, it is possible to achieve both smooth initial movement of the left sliding member 430 and increase of the slide displacement speed (maximum speed) of the left sliding member 430 (second member 433) in a steady state after the initial movement. This was not possible in the past, but by adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, such a combination has become possible for the first time.

Next, detailed configurations of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper combined unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

19(a) is a front view of the upper combined unit 500, and FIG. 19(b) is a rear view of the upper combined unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper combined unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper combined unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is placed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper combined unit 500 includes a base member 510, a rack member 520 slidably disposed in the internal space of the base member 510, and connected to the rack member 520. It includes an upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the rack member 520.

The base member 510 includes a back base 511 that is rectangular and long when viewed from the front, and a front base 512 that is rectangular and long when viewed from the front and is disposed (covered) on the front side of the back base 511. A rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the opposing surfaces (inner space) of the rack members 512 .

The back base 511 has a connection hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member protruding toward the front side. 520, a support shaft 511c inserted into the guide groove 522.

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the back base 511 (ie, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). Note that a connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a part through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced in accordance with the sliding displacement of the rack member 520, the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is inserted through the guide hole 511b. By sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b, the attitude (orientation) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521, which is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It includes a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 carved along a direction parallel to the direction in which the guide groove 522 extends, and is formed as a rectangular and laterally elongated plate-like body.

The support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is supported in the shaft support hole 521, the direction in which the guide groove 522 extends is aligned with that of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of sliding displacement of the rack member 520 is defined in the direction in which the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511 extends.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 that protrude from the front side. The connection shaft 531 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably supported in the support hole 521 of the rack member 520 through the connection hole 511a of the back base 511. It is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is slid along the guide hole 511b.

Note that a collar C1 having a larger diameter than the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a larger diameter than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are respectively fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. . Further, the upper displacement member 530 has an upper contact portion 533 formed on its side surface. The upper abutting part 533 is a part that abuts the lower abutting part 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is a part on the side opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (tip side). It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front of the back base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 with a drive shaft connected to the pinion gear 542. Be prepared. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slid and displaced via the rack gear 523 along the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a.

Next, the operation of the upper combined unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are a front view and a rear view of the upper combined unit 500, illustrating a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 23(a), when the upper displacement member 530 is placed in the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are connected to one end side of the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b ( 23), and the upper displacement member 530 is placed in a horizontal position and hidden behind the back side of the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from this state, as the rack member 520 slides, the connecting shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connecting hole 511a, and the guide pin 532 moves toward the guide hole 511b. As shown in FIGS. 22(b) and 23(b), the upper displacement member 530 is tilted diagonally (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and moved in the horizontal direction. is displaced to That is, the distal end side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved trajectory.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the forward direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further tilted diagonally (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and displaced in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 23(c), a vertical posture is formed with the distal end side (upper contact portion 533) facing downward. That is, it is placed in the extended position (first position).

Next, the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower combined unit 600. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower combined unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower combined unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is placed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower combined unit 600 includes a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a proximal end of the drive arm holding member 620. A drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the distal end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connecting arm 650 which connects the lower displacement member 640 to the base member 610, and a connecting arm 650 attached to the drive arm 630. It includes a biasing spring 660 for applying force and a drive mechanism for applying driving force to the drive arm 630.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-shaped body that is approximately L-shaped when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding base 611 that protrudes from the front at the lower end of the approximately L-shape, and a protruding base 611 that protrudes from the front at the upper end of the approximately L-shape. A connecting shaft 612 is provided. The protruding base 611 is a part for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position where it protrudes from the front of the base member 610 (raised toward the front side), and extends along the edge at the lower end of the base member 610. It is installed protrudingly.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 disposed on the protruding base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 disposed on the front side of the back side holding member 621 (covered). A drive arm 630 and transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (pivotally supported) between the opposing surfaces (inner space) of the back side holding member 621 and front side holding member 622.

Note that the drive arm holding member 620 has the rear side of the rear side holding member 621 disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding base 611 of the base member 610, so that the protruding height of the protruding base 611 is A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (rear side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In this embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 disposed at the retracted position is formed in such a space so that it can be accommodated therein, so that the outer shape of the lower combined unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

The drive arm 630 has a shaft support hole 631 that is rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620, and a plurality of teeth are carved along the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical portion that is concentric with the shaft support hole 631. As an elongated member comprising a gear part 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at the end opposite to the gear part 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connection shaft 641 and a connection arm connection shaft 642 that protrude from the front side. The drive arm connection shaft 641 is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section that is rotatably connected to the connection hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connection arm connection shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connection hole 651 of the connection arm 650. It is a cylindrical body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connection arm 650, and is displaced relative to the base member 610 when the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Note that the lower displacement member 640 has a lower contact portion 643 formed on its side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is located from the imaginary line connecting the drive arm connection shaft 641 and the connection arm connection shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface that is spaced apart toward the projecting direction (right side in FIG. 24). In this embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface substantially perpendicular to a virtual line connecting the drive arm connection shaft 641 and the connection arm connection shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 has connecting holes 651 and 652 formed at one end and the other end, and these connecting holes 651 and 652 have the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion is changed from the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined in an arc shape with the center.

The biasing spring 660 is a metal torsion spring, and has one leg extending from the winding portion engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg engaged with the drive arm 630. is urged in the rotational direction from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the retracted position (see FIG. 27(a)), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the biasing spring 660 becomes maximum, and the elastic recovery force causes the drive arm 630 to move toward the displacement member. 640 is biased in the rotational direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 27(a)) to displace it from the retracted position to the extended position. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial movement of the lower displacement member 640 in the extending direction can be performed smoothly.

The drive mechanism includes transmission gears 671a to 671c disposed inside the drive arm holding member 620, a drive shaft connected to the transmission gear 671a, and disposed on the front side of the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). A drive motor 672 is provided. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630, and are connected (meshed) in series, so that the transmission gear 671a is at the front and the transmission gear 671c is at the rear. 1 gear train is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is driven to rotate, its rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c is applied to the gear portion 632, thereby rotating the drive arm 630.

Next, the operation of the lower combined unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower combined unit 600, illustrating a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise in front view (left rotation direction in FIG. 27(a)). It is located at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as a "retreat rotational position"), and is in a tilted position in which it is tilted downward from the base end side (rotation center, ie, the shaft support hole 631) toward the distal end side (the connection hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical position in which the direction connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the position farthest from the extended position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27(a)), and the vertical position is at the lowest position. (The position furthest from the extended position in the vertical direction, lower side in FIG. 27(a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from this state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the lower displacement member 640 near the drive arm connection shaft 641 as shown in FIG. is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27(b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (to the right side in FIG. 27(a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. At the same time as being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the extended position, as shown in FIG. 27(c).

In addition, in the extended position, the drive arm 630 is located at a rotational position (hereinafter referred to as the "extended rotational position") in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum clockwise in front view (right rotation direction in FIG. 27(c)). In the rotational position, the drive arm 630 is arranged so that its distal end (connection hole 633) is beyond a vertical line passing through its proximal end (rotation center, that is, the pivot hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted position with the connecting hole 651 raised to the highest position. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed at the rightmost position in the horizontal direction (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27(c)), and the vertical position is at the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest in the vertical direction from the retracted position, a position slightly lowered from the upper side of FIG. 27(a).

Here, the displacement speed of the lower combined unit 600 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a schematic front view of the drive arm 630 in the retracted rotation position, horizontal rotation position, vertical rotation position, and extended rotation position. Moreover, FIGS. 29(a) to 29(d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotational position to the extended rotational position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the extended rotation position, but in the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position so that the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal position. (The imaginary line connecting the axes of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction) is referred to as the "horizontal rotation position", and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotational position where the drive arm 630 is in an upright position (an orientation in which the imaginary line connecting the axes of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a "vertical rotational position." Note that the overhang rotational position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotational position.

In this case, FIG. 29(a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29(b) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29(c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), and FIG. 29(d) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the vertical rotation position. 630, FIG. 29(e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position (range of angle θ3).

Note that the drive state (supplied power) of the drive motor 672 is maintained constant, and therefore the rotational speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it is assumed that the transient period from when the drive arm 630 rotates from a stopped state until it reaches a constant rotational speed is sufficiently short, and it can be assumed that there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(a) and 29(b), in the section between the retracted rotational position and the horizontal rotational position (range of angle θ1), the drive arm 630 pivots around the connection hole 633. The connecting hole 633 is tilted to be positioned below the hole 631, and as it is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position, the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) in the tangential direction of the displacement locus) gradually increases upward, and is maximized at the horizontal rotation position. That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and its upward speed is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(b) to 29(d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivots around the connection hole 633. The connecting hole 633 is tilted to be positioned above the hole 631, and as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the connecting hole 633 is further displaced upward, so that the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is directed upward. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to zero at the vertical rotation position. That is, in this section (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and its upward speed is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29(d), and 29(e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the extended rotation position (range of angle θ3), the drive arm 630 pivots around the connection hole 633. The connecting hole 633 is tilted to be positioned above the hole 631, and as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the connecting hole 633 is displaced downward, so that the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in this section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position because the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position, as will be described later. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of impact when the Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 can be prevented from being bounced off each other, and the postures of both displacement members 530 and 640 can be stabilized.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29(a) to 29(d), in the section between the retracted rotational position and the horizontal rotational position (range of angle θ1), the speed V of the connecting hole 633 is While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is such that the velocity component Vh toward the right increases. Increased gradually.

As a result, the lower displacement member 640 is displaced toward the left in the section between the retracted rotational position and the horizontal rotational position (range of angle θ1), while the direction of displacement is horizontal. It is reversed at the rotational position, and in the section between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (range of angle θ2), it is displaced to the right (direction toward the retracted position).

That is, after horizontally displacing the lower displacement member 640 to the left and stopping it at the leftmost position (after setting the horizontal velocity component Vh to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed and the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced to the left. horizontal displacement in a gradually accelerated state. As a result, the movement of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction can be made to appear, and a performance can be performed in which the movement of the lower displacement member 640 is given a sense of dynamism.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased (range of angle θ1), the vertical velocity component Vv is increased, while the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle θ1 range). In the range of θ2), the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, so that the above-mentioned horizontal bending and stretching motion can be emphasized, and as a result, the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 is made stronger, giving the player a stronger sense of movement. Can make an impression.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) with the upper displacement member 530, the area between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2) is ), in a configuration where the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, there is a risk that the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be inhibited. On the other hand, in this section (range of angle θ2), the horizontal velocity component Vh can be increased, so instead of upward displacement, the downwardly displaced member is displaced in the horizontal direction (to the right). 640 performances can be performed, and as a result, the performance effect can be ensured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 640 has the connecting arm 650 at a portion (the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) that is spaced upward from the connected portion of the drive arm 630 (the driving arm connecting shaft 641). Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right as the connecting arm 650 rotates about the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. . Therefore, as described above, when making the lower displacement member 640 bend and extend in the horizontal direction, the bending and extension action is increased by the horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650. The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be made greater. Furthermore, when performing the effect of the lower displacement member 640 by displacing it in the horizontal direction (to the right) instead of upward displacement, the displacement in the horizontal direction (to the right) is increased and the effect of the effect is can be easily secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the abutting (combining) operation of the upper displacement member 530 and lower displacement member 640 in the upper and lower combination units 500 and 600 at their extended positions will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, illustrating the transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the extended position. .

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) to 30(c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position where it is hidden behind the back side of the base member 510 to the distal end side as the drive motor 543 is driven. (Upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved trajectory, and is placed in an extended position in a vertical position with its tip side (upper contact portion 533) facing downward. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up and tensioned by the drive arm 630 as the drive motor 672 is driven from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowest position. placed in the out position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 disposed in the extended position are combined with their upper contact portion 533 and lower contact portion 643 in contact with each other. Thereby, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In this embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of a horse's head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of a horse's body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of a horse's leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed in the retreat position.

Here, in the retracted position, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 come into contact with each other, the impact generated at the time of their contact causes them to be bounced away from each other. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 is slowed down in order to weaken the impact upon contact, the time required to integrate the two displacement members 530 and 640 to form one character will be reduced. The effect of the performance is hindered because the image becomes bulky and elongated.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the extended position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the extended position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being bounced away from each other, and the postures of both these displacement members 530, 640 can be stabilized.

Further, since the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually decreased in the section from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 as a whole It is possible to secure an upward velocity component Vv. Therefore, the time required to integrate the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 to form one character can be shortened, and the length of time required to form one character can be reduced. As a result, the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the tip of the drive arm 630 (the connection hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640, and when the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by rotation of the drive arm 630, the connection portion (the connection hole 633) is connected to the lower displacement member 640. ) is configured to gradually reduce the upward velocity component Vv by drawing an arcuate trajectory. It can be done as follows. That is, there is no need to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 depending on the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, reducing control costs and improving reliability.

Here, in this embodiment, the extended rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the extended position where the lower displacement member 640 abuts the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See Figure 28). Therefore, of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, toward the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the extended position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3), the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction of the lower displacement member 640 is changed in the downward direction (direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other in the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, both displacement members 530 and 640 can be prevented from being bounced away from each other, and their postures can be stabilized.

Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position in a state where the velocity component Vv directed upward (that is, toward the upper displacement member 530) of the lower displacement member 640 has a negative value. With this configuration, even if a positional shift occurs at the abutting (merging) position due to dimensional tolerances, assembly tolerances, or control variations in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530 can be Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to make contact with the upper displacement member 530 easier within a range where the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the protrusion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the protrusion unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and illustrates the transition state when the elevating base 720 is elevated and lowered with respect to the base member 710.

The protruding unit 700 includes a base member 710, an elevating base 720 that is movably disposed on the base member 710, a rotating member 730 that is rotatably disposed on the elevating base 720, and a base member 710. It mainly includes a drive mechanism for raising and lowering the lift base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lift base 720.

First, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 has an insertion hole 711 that is opened approximately in the center in the width direction as a circular hole when viewed from the front, a support shaft 712 that projects from the front, and a support shaft 712 that projects from the back. Two support shafts 713 and 714 are provided. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a support hole 719a of a connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the support shaft 712 on the front, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on support shafts 713 and 714 on the back, respectively. .

The elevating base 720 includes a back base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the back base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed at the lower end sides of the back base 721 and the front base (FIGS. 34 and 34). 35). On the elevating base 720, a back base 721 and a front base 722 are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval equal to the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and a rotating member 730 is disposed between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. is rotatably housed (arranged).

One side in the width direction of the back base 721 is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescoping linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical position with its expansion and contraction direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail disposed on the front side of the base member 710, a distal end rail disposed on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and a distal end rail interposed between the proximal end rail and the distal end rail. The intermediate rail is provided so that the proximal end rail and the distal end rail can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL, the elevating base 720 can be raised and lowered with respect to the base member 710 along the vertical direction.

The rear base 721 of the lift base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction, and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotation member 730. An opening is formed. A sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 slides along the sliding groove 721a, so that the elevating base 720 (back base 721) is raised and lowered. Ru.

The connecting arm 719 includes a shaft support hole 719a that is rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and a shaft support hole 719a that projects from the front at an end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a and connects to the lift base 720 (rear base 721). ), and a driven groove 719c that extends linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support hole 719a and the sliding pin 719b. . A drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted through the collar C into the driven groove 719c. As will be described later, by rotationally driving the drive arm 771, the connecting arm 719 is rotated about the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 includes a drive arm 771 having a rotary shaft 771a rotatably supported in an insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and a rotary shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. Transmission gears 772a to 772d are connected to the rear transmission gear 772d, and a drive shaft is connected to the first transmission gear 772a of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and a drive shaft is disposed in front of the base member 710. A motor 773 is provided.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771, and are connected (meshed) in series, so that the transmission gear 772a is the first gear and the transmission gear 772d is the first gear. Forms one gear train with the rear end.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the lifting base 720 is placed at the lowest position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21(a)), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the top. The signal is transmitted from the gear 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) about the rotation shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33(a)) about the pivot hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (extended position) (FIG. 21(c) )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state where the lifting base 720 is placed at the uppermost position (extended position) (see FIG. 21(c)), the rotational driving force is transferred to the top transmission gear. The signal is transmitted from 772a to the rear transmission gear 772d, and the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the rear transmission gear 772d is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the rotating shaft 771a. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33(c)) about the pivot hole 719a, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowest position (retracted position) (FIG. 21(a) )reference).

Next, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36.

34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and illustrates a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a back base 721, a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed at the lower ends of the back base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. In addition, the rotating shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the pivot hole 721b of the back base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the opposing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b disposed on its back surface. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear carved along the circumferential surface with a center angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and is meshed with the transmission gear 781a. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 781a, the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the lifting base 720 includes transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 facing each other in the lifting base 720, and a transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in a state in which the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the circumferential center of the curved rack gear 731b, the rotating member 730 has the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 (the direction of protrusion or retraction when retracting) with the vertical direction. (hereinafter referred to as the "center rotation position") (see FIG. 36(b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the center rotational position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 rotates about the rotation axis 731a. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36(b)). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the sliding direction of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (to the right in FIG. 36(c)) (see FIG. 36(c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36(c)), when the drive motor 782 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotation member 730 is It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36(c)) with 731a as the rotation center. As a result, after passing through the center rotation position, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the sliding direction of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other direction (to the left in FIG. 36(a)) (see FIG. 36(a)). .

Next, a structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, illustrating a transition state when the protruding member 735 is moved in and out of the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is rocked.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a back base 731, a swinging member 732 that is swingably disposed in front of the back base 731, and the swinging member 732 and the back base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between, a front base 734 disposed on the front of the rear base 731, a protruding member 735 disposed slidably on the rear of the front base 734, and a front base 734 and a drive mechanism for displacing (sliding displacement and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 with respect to the rear base 731.

The rear base 731 is formed in the shape of a substantially circular container when viewed from the front with an open front, and a part of the outer circumferential wall (the outer circumferential wall located above) is missing, and the bottom extends from the missing part of the outer circumferential wall. A portion of the wall is projected upward. As described above, on the back surface of the back base 731, there is a rotating shaft 731a that is supported in the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720, and a curved portion that meshes with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35). A rack gear 731b is provided.

In addition, the back base 731 has a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotating shaft 732a of the swinging member 732, and a tip of the operated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is slidably inserted therethrough. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e into which the slide pin 733b of the intervening member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening with a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 731c. The vertical positions are set to different positions. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swinging member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swinging member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that its tip side moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and the axial center of the rotation shaft 731a is located on the extension line in the extending direction, and the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, which will be described later, is connected to the slide hole 731e. formed in parallel. Note that each pair of the shaft support hole 731c and the guide hole 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The swinging member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an actuated shaft 732b formed as a cylindrical shaft body, and is in a posture in which the proximal ends on which the rotating shaft 732a and the actuated shaft 732b are arranged face each other. A pair is provided. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole 731c of the back base 731, and the operated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into an action hole 733a of the intervening member 733 and a guide hole 731d of the back base 731. be done.

A collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, and the flange of the collar C prevents the rotating shaft 732a from coming off, and the body of the collar C connects the rotating shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed in between. Similarly, a collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange of the collar C prevents the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body of the collar C connects the actuated shaft 732d with the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between 731d and the working hole 733a.

The interposed member 733 is a plate-shaped portion interposed between the back base 731 and the swinging member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the vertical movement (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the intervening member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732, and the pair is oriented so that it has a V-shape when viewed from the front. Arranged line-symmetrically.

As will be described later, when the intervening member 733 is raised (slides upward), the inner circumferential surface of the working hole 733a pushes up the acted shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 lifts its distal end side. When the intervening member 733 is lowered (slided downward) while being swung (rotated) to The tip side is swung (rotated) in the direction of swinging down.

The slide pins 733b are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the slide holes 731e of the back base 731, and a plurality of slide pins (two in this embodiment) protrude from the back surface of the intervening member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the line of symmetry of the pair of working holes 733a described above while being spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the intervening member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-shaped portion having a bottom surface extending along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement of the intervening member 733) and protrudes from the front of the intervening member 733, A cam portion 761b of a drive body 761 in a drive mechanism, which will be described later, is in contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b slides on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the driving body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c) The intervening member 733 is moved up and down (slides upward or downward) in accordance with the change (increase/decrease) in . That is, when the cam diameter is increased as the drive body 761 rotates, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposed member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b. 733 is lowered by its own weight.

Note that a biasing spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the intervening member 733 in an elastically stretched state, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 791 is , acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding downward) the intervening member 733. That is, the lowering (downward sliding displacement) of the interposed member 733 is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (self-weight of the interposed member 733). Thereby, as will be described later, the swinging member 732 can be quickly swung (rotated) in the tilting direction (the direction in which the tip is lowered).

The front base 734 is a circular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the rear base 731 (on the end surface of the outer peripheral wall). A slide hole 734a is formed in the front base 734, into which a slide pin 735a of the protruding member 735 is slidably inserted. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back base 731.

The protrusion member 735 is an elongated plate-shaped body that is slidably disposed on the back side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a slide hole 735b. The slide pins 735a are cylindrical parts that are slidably inserted into the slide holes 734a of the front base 734. , are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the protruding member 735 at predetermined intervals. Therefore, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. Note that a retaining plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one longitudinal end side (base end side) of the protruding member 735, into which a sliding pin 761c of a driving body 761 in a driving mechanism described later is slidably inserted. Ru. Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c slides along the sliding hole 735b, the inner circumferential surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed up or pushed down by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (slides upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

Note that a biasing spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the protrusion member 735 in an elastically torsionally deformed state, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 is , acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering (sliding downward) the protruding member 735.

A drive mechanism for displacing (sliding displacement and swinging) the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 includes a drive body 761 rotatably disposed in front of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the drive body 761. Transmission gears 762a to 762e to which a rear transmission gear 762d is connected to 761a, and a drive shaft are connected to the first transmission gear 762a of these transmission gears 762a to 762e, and are arranged on the back surface of the rear base 731. A drive motor 763 is provided.

The cam portion 761b of the driver 761 is a portion formed as a disc cam with a curved surface formed on the outer peripheral surface corresponding to the rotational position of the driver 761, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is The interposed member 733 is driven (slidingly displaced) by sliding on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the interposed member 733. Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761, and as described above, by acting on the inner circumferential surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c protrudes. The member 735 is driven (slidingly displaced).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the driving body 761, and are connected (meshed) in series, so that the transmission gear 762a is the first gear and the transmission gear 762e is the first gear. Forms one gear train with the rear end.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. The driving body 761, in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e, is rotated in one direction.

When the drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the intervening member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swinging member 732 moves its tip side downward under its own weight. (See FIGS. 39(b) and 39(c)).

Furthermore, when the driver 761 described above is rotated in one direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is raised. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is raised (slided upward) (see FIGS. 39(b) and 39(c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposed member 733 is raised, so that the actuated shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the action hole 733a of the interposed member 733. The movable member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces its distal end side upward.

Further, when the above-mentioned driving body 761 is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (slidingly displaced downward).

Next, details of the structure for displacing the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.

FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the driver 761 when it is placed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the driver 761 when it is placed at the second rotation position. be. Note that FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b) show the sliding movement of the sliding wall 733c of the intervening member 733 and the protruding member 735 when the driving body 761 is placed at the first rotational position or the second rotational position. The hole 735b is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the driver 761 is placed in the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the driver 761 is placed at the second rotational position The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from position P1 to position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has its bottom surface (lower surface in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b)) in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the intervening member 733, FIG. 40 (a) and FIG. 40(b) left-right direction). Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intervening member 733) changes from the uppermost position to the uppermost position. When the drive body 761 is continuously lowered to the bottom and rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top.

The sliding hole 735b has a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end of the sliding hole 735b (right side in FIG. 40(a)) to a predetermined range, and a curved portion 735b1 extending from the terminal end of the curved portion 735b1 to the other end of the sliding hole 735b. 40(a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is curved into an arc concentric with the center of rotation of the driver 761 when the driver 761 is placed at the first rotation position. Furthermore, at the first rotational position, the sliding pin 761c is located at one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the sliding movement from the drive body 761 is No driving force is transmitted to the moving hole 735b (ie, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, and therefore the protruding member 735 is maintained at the lowest position.

Note that the rotational position at which the driver 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotational angle from the first rotational position (that is, the rotational position at which the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is referred to as the "predetermined rotational position." ”.

The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction of sliding displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b)). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that while the sliding pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2, the driving body 761 is in the second rotational position due to the action of the sliding pin 761c. When the driving body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the lowest position to the highest position, and when the driving body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the highest position to the lowest position.

Here, in this embodiment, when the driving body 761 is placed at the second rotational position (see FIG. 40(b)), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, but is placed at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2. position (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved part 735b1, enters the straight part 735b2, and reaches the terminal end (sliding part) of the straight part 735b2. After sliding toward the other end of the moving hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40(a)), the direction is changed at the terminal end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight section 735b2). Thereby, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are front schematic views of the rotating member 730, and illustrate the transition state when the protruding member 735 is slid and the swinging member 732 is swinging. Note that in FIGS. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically illustrated. Further, FIG. 41(a) shows a state in which the driving body 761 is placed at the first rotational position, and FIG. 41(b) shows a state in which the driving body 761 is placed in a predetermined rotational position. 42(b) shows a state in which the driving body 761 is placed at a rotational position between the predetermined rotational position and the second rotational position, and a state in which the driving body 761 is placed in the second rotational position are shown in FIG. be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41(a) (that is, the state in which the driver 761 is placed at the first rotation position), the tip of the swinging member 732 is located at the uppermost position, and the protruding member 735 is located at the lowermost position. be done. When the driver 761 is rotated from this state to a predetermined rotational position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is gradually decreased from the maximum radius R1, as shown in FIG. 41(b). (see (a)), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and in conjunction with this, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which its tip is lowered.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the protruding member 735 allows the sliding pin 761c to pass through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotational position to the predetermined rotational position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the driving body 761 is maintained in a stopped state at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41(a)).

When the driver 761 that has reached the predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 41(b)) is further rotated toward the second rotational position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b further increases as shown in FIG. 42(a). By being reduced (see FIG. 40(a)), the interposed member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid upward as the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight part 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushes up the inner peripheral surface of the straight part 735b2 as the driver 761 rotates. Ru.

When the driver 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41(b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced to the minimum radius R2, as shown in FIG. 42(b). As a result (see FIG. 40(b)), the interposed member 733 is lowered to the lowest position by its own weight, and the swinging member 732 is further rotated by its own weight and its tip is positioned at the lowest position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position by pushing the straight portion 735b2 up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the above case, when the driver 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42(b) (that is, the state in which the driver 761 is placed at the second rotation position), ), as the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the minimum radius R2 (see FIG. 40(b)), the intervening member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. As a result, the swinging member 732 is rotated in a direction that raises its tip. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is slid downward as the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight part 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b pushes down the inner peripheral surface of the straight part 735b2 as the driver 761 rotates. Ru.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 42(a) to a predetermined rotational position, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1, so the The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) continues, and in conjunction with this, the operation of rotating the swinging member 732 in the direction of raising its tip also continues. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the lowest position by pushing the straight portion 735b2 down to the lowest position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the driver 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41(b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased to the maximum radius R1, as shown in FIG. 41(a). As a result (see FIG. 40(a)), the intervening member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and accordingly, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position. On the other hand, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved part 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the protruding member 735 is at the lowermost position (i.e., FIG. ) is maintained at rest at the same position as ).

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, two members (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by one drive motor 763.

Here, in conventional products, when displacing two members by one drive motor, the driving force for driving each of the two members is duplicated, which increases the load on the drive motor and reduces its durability. There was a problem in that it invited On the other hand, in a configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one at a time), the load on the drive motor can be reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be created, and the performance effect of the displacement is inhibited.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (cam portion 761b and interposed member 733) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swinging member 732 lowers the tip of the swinging member 732. The load on the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) is reduced in the section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is raised (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position). The load on the drive motor 763 can be made smaller than the load on the drive motor 763 during the period of rotation to the rotation position.

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the protruding member 735 is connected to a section in which the protruding member 735 is slid downward (the second rotation of the driver 761 drive motor 763 in the section in which the protrusion member 735 is slid upward (the section in which the driver 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). The load on the motor 763 can be made smaller.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load. This allows the second transmission means to have a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load on the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced and its durability can be improved.

Furthermore, there is no need to alternately displace the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 (one by one), and a state in which the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 are both displaced can be created, which reduces the load on the drive motor 763. At the same time, it is possible to improve the performance effect due to the displacement of both members 732 and 735.

Further, the first transmission means displaces the swinging member 732 by interlocking the cam part 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmitting means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. According to the cam diameter of the cam part 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the oscillation per unit displacement amount of the cam part 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the driving body 761) The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load on the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (power supply) of the drive motor 763 is maintained constant, the speed of displacement of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive motor 763 and enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, it is a section in which the load on the drive motor 763 is reduced (in the first transmission means, a section in which the tip of the swinging member 732 is lowered (a section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position), In the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is caused by gravity due to the displacement of the swinging member 732 or the protrusion member 735. It is formed by giving a downward displacement component, that is, by utilizing the displacement due to the weight of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from becoming complicated. This makes it possible to reduce component costs. Further, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, it is possible to easily keep the displacement speed of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 constant, and the drive motor 763 can be adjusted accordingly. The burden can be reduced.

In this case, in this embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are arranged separately. Therefore, the rotating member 730 can be made smaller by that amount. Furthermore, compared to the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, deviation in displacement of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the accuracy of synchronization of both the members 732, 735 is improved. can be increased.

Here, when rotating the driving body 761 from the first rotation position, that is, when starting the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 that is in a stopped state, the driving motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. As the load increases, the initial velocity becomes slower, which may impede the performance effect. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in this curved portion 735b1, the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c) is connected to the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b). ) can be made non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be increased accordingly, so that the protruding member 735 in a stopped state can be The upward sliding displacement can be started smoothly.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c is passing through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driver 761 is being rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protrusion member 735 is maintained in a stopped state. However, the swinging member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction that lowers the tip end (see FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b)). Therefore, when swinging the swinging member 732 while maintaining the protruding member 735 in a stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swing can be suppressed. As a result, the rotation of the driving body 761 can be made stronger, so that the upward sliding displacement of the protrusion member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, in this way, the swinging member 732 can be swung even while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, so that both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are kept in the stopped state. This can be avoided and the performance effect of displacement can be improved.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sliding hole 735b is provided with the curved portion 735b1, and when the protruding member 735 starts sliding upward, the curved portion 735b1 is used to control the rotation of the driver 761. By applying momentum to the protruding member 735, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

In this case, in this embodiment, after the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the driving body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, when the driver 761 is placed at the second rotational position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1, but remains at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1). (see FIG. 40(b) and FIG. 42(b)). Thereby, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor 763.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank friction member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the drive means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), and the pin of the crank member In the structure in which the pin part reciprocates in the guide groove, after the pin passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position, the shape of the non-transmission section becomes an arc convex toward the center of rotation of the crank member. becomes. Therefore, when the pin section passes through the non-transmission section after changing direction, not only does the sliding resistance increase, but also the amount of upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the driver 761 suddenly increases. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved portion 735b1, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor 763.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43(a) is a front view of the lifting unit 800, FIG. 43(b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 43(c) is a side view of the lifting unit 800. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 includes a base member 810, which has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is disposed in front of the base member 510 in the upper combined unit 500, and is arranged to be movable up and down on the base member 810. an elevating member 820, a drive motor 891 that applies driving force to the elevating member 820, a transmission gear 840 that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 891, and one end of which is pivotally supported on the base member 810. A link member 850 is arranged to be rotatable around the shaft support by the rotation of the transmission gear 840; a slide member 860 is connected to the link member 850 and is arranged to be slidable by displacement of the link member 850; It mainly includes a transmission member 870 that transmits the sliding displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed through the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43(b)) in the front-back direction, and pivot pins 814 to 817 that protrude in a cylindrical shape on the back side. It is formed mainly by

Each sliding hole 811, 812, 813 is a hole into which each sliding pin 861, 862, 863 of a sliding member 860, which will be described later, is inserted to regulate the sliding direction of the sliding member 860. 43(b) It is formed in the shape of a long hole that opens long in the vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably disposed along the longitudinal direction of each slide hole 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811, 812, 813 are formed side by side, with the sliding hole 811 in the center and the sliding holes 812 and 813 on both sides of the sliding hole 811. . In other words, the sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840, which will be described later, to rotatably support the gears 842 to 844. It is formed into a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole formed through it.

The pivot pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted into a through hole 851 formed through one end of a link member 850 (described later) to rotatably pivotally support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed into a cylindrical shape.

As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that provides driving force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is disposed on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed from a plate-shaped body on the back side of the base member 810 . The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the rear cover 892, and is fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train configured by connecting gears 841 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 are rotatable to the pivot pins 814 to 816 protruding from the back side of the base member 810. It is pivoted on. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, its driving force is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, by driving the drive motor 891, the gear 844 at the end can be rotated.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the rear side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting its driving force to a link member 850, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude at a distance where its tip overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a circular through-hole 851 at one end, a transmission-side sliding groove 854 at the other end that extends in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850, and a transmission-side sliding groove 854 that extends through the through-hole 851 and the transmission side. The coupling side sliding groove 853 is formed between the side sliding grooves 854 .

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole through which the pivot pin 817 of the base member 810 is inserted to rotatably pivot the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810. The inner diameter of the pin 817 is larger than the outer diameter. Therefore, the link member 850 is irremovably connected to the base member 810 by inserting the pivot pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the back side and fastening with a screw or the like. be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 in the link member 850, an annular portion 852 is formed which protrudes in an annular shape toward the front side (backward side of the paper in FIG. 43(b)). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member that forms a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodates the transmission gear 840 in the gap. The protruding dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 841 to 844.

Further, a torsion spring SP1 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by winding a wire made of a metal material in a cylindrical spiral, and can apply a biasing force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the spirally wound inner edge portion of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the spirally wound state of the torsion spring SP1 collapses, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied in the axial direction of the helical portion of the torsion spring SP1 (in the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can prevent the spiral state from collapsing and stabilize the biasing direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for disposing the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves the role of stabilizing the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP1. I can do it.

The torsion spring SP1 has one end engaged with a hook-shaped locking portion 855 protruding from the front side of the link member 850, and the other end engaged with a hook-shaped locking portion 818 protruding from the back side of the base member 810. engaged. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and can apply a biasing force to the link member 850 in the direction around the rotation axis.

The connecting side sliding groove 853 is a long hole into which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the short direction is smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, it can be displaced by sliding on the inside of the connection side sliding groove 853. Thereby, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced around the through hole 851 in accordance with the displacement of the projection 844a. Note that the detailed manner of displacement of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side sliding groove 854 is a hole into which the sliding pin 861 of the sliding member 860 is inserted to displace the sliding member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850. is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 inserted through the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 can be inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the pivot pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected with the base member 810 interposed therebetween. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the link member 850 disposed on the back side of the base member 810, the slide member 860 disposed on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid.

The slide member 860 is formed into a plate-like body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its length in the direction of gravity is set smaller than the length of the base member 810 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the slide member 860 can be prevented from protruding outward from the outer edge of the base member 810. Thereby, the overall external shape of the elevating unit 800 when viewed from the front can be reduced.

The slide member 860 includes a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the back side, a plurality of slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 formed through the front and back directions, and a circular shape projecting to the front side. It is formed mainly of two columnar projections 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 and can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are projections that restrict the displacement direction of the sliding member 860, and are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 of the base member 810. Collars C3 are fastened to the tips of the movable pins 863 from the back side of the base member 810 with screws or the like.

Therefore, the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 of the sliding member 860 are inserted into the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 formed in the base member 810 in the shape of a straight long hole, so that the sliding member 860 It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810 and is slidably connected in the direction of the long holes of the sliding holes 812 and 813. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, so that the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the direction of the long holes of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which projections 871a to 871c of a second slide member 871, which will be described later, are inserted, and are formed in the shape of an elongated hole that is long in the direction of gravity, and the width dimension in the transverse direction is It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusions 871a to 871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member disposed on the front side of the slide member 860, and extends in the direction of gravity and meshes with a pair of racks 872 disposed on the object and a rack gear of each rack 872. It is formed mainly of each pinion gear 873 and a second slide member 871 disposed between each pinion gear 873.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, a pair of racks 872 are arranged symmetrically around the center of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is carved on the opposing side surface of each rack 872, and meshes with a pinion gear 873, which will be described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is similarly displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that it is rotated as the slide member 860 is displaced.

The second slide member 871 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upright portion 871e bent toward the front side at the lower end thereof, and rack gears 871d carved on both side surfaces in the left and right direction. It is formed mainly of a plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c that protrude in a cylindrical shape on the back side.

The upright portion 871e is a wall portion to which an elevating member 820, which will be described later, is fastened to the end surface of the upright portion, and a connecting hole 871e1 for fastening to the elevating member 820 by inserting a screw into the end thereof is penetrated. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened together.

Further, the upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging a decorative member 830, which will be described later, in the gap, and is a gap forming portion for arranging a decorative member 830, which will be described later, in the gap. The vertical dimension is set to be larger than the thickness of the Thereby, the decorative member 830 can be disposed between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a meshing surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is carved on both left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the respective slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and the protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the respective slide holes 864 to 866 from the rear side of the slide member 860 to the tips of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. Thereby, the second slide member 871 is made rotatable relative to the slide member 860, and is held slidably along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, so that the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid and displaced as the pinion gear 873 rotates. Therefore, the second slide member 871 slides in the direction of gravity with respect to the slide member 860, so it can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a faster displacement speed than the slide member 860, and the second slide member 871 slides in the direction of gravity. The distance of displacement can be greater than that of member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be prevented from becoming small.

As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that moves up and down as the second slide member 871 moves, and is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that protrudes toward the back side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the upright portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed to protrude at a position facing the connection hole 871e1 of the upright portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed in the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened through the fastening hole 821a. Thereby, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are provided on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that restricts the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, thereby suppressing the transmission member 870 from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape that resembles the title or logo of the gaming machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. This makes it possible to emit light from the title, logo, etc. to the player side, thereby providing interest to the player.

Next, the movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . FIG. 49 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lifting unit 800 in the third state. . FIG. 52(a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, slide member 860, and link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52(b) is a front view of the transmission member 870, slide member 860, and link member in the second state. 850, and FIG. 52(c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, slide member 860, and link member 850 in the third state.

Note that the first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is disposed on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located in the uppermost position. This is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the lowest position and is disposed below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. be.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435, 455 placed at the ends farthest from the rotation axis of the rotating members 435, 455 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and is given the symbol of a virtual line KS3. .

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52(a), when the elevating unit 800 is in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed) is located higher in the direction of gravity than one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed). In this case, in the transmission member 870, a pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end of the rack 872, and a pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is positioned upward. Therefore, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also positioned upward.

In addition, in the first state, an imaginary line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a and the axis of the through hole 851 of the link member 850 This is a position where an imaginary line KS2 connecting the connection side sliding groove 853 and the intermediate position in the lateral direction of the connecting side sliding groove 853 intersects at right angles (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, displacement of the link member 850 due to the load of the elevating member 820 can be suppressed. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying power to the lifting unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the states shown in FIGS. 46, 49, and 52(a) and rotational driving force is applied, each gear 841 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotates as described above. Driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 at the end is displaced as the gear is rotated. The protrusion 844a is inserted into the connection side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and connected. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 as the projection 844a is displaced.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860 to which the sliding pin 861 is inserted and connected to the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850 is slid. Thereby, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 that is pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to its displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slid. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 50, and 52(b), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. It is considered to be in a state of Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced lower than in the first state with respect to the base member 810.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51, and 52(c). In the lifting unit 800 in the third state, the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state, and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced below the second state with respect to the base member 810.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is disposed below and adjacent to the decorative member 830. Therefore, the title and logo of the gaming machine formed on the decorative member 830 can be visually recognized by the player. Furthermore, by placing the elevating member 820 below and adjacent to the decorative member 830, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state of the initial position to the third state, a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 and the decorative member 830 are combined can be displayed in front of the game area. can.

Further, in the third state, each of the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the sliding member 860 is located at the lower end of each of the sliding holes 811 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by each of the three sliding pins 861 to 863, so that the load of the elevating member 820 can be suppressed from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 in the transmission gear 840. As a result, damage to the gear 844 can be suppressed.

Next, the combined state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, a state in which each movable unit is displaced to the center of the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operating unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 200 taken along the line LIV-LIV in FIG. 53.

Note that the combined state shown in FIG. 53 means that the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800 moves up and down. 820 is in a downwardly displaced state with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing the members (elevating base 720, rotating members 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (protrusion unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern ( It can be visually recognized by the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the gaming machine 10.

Moreover, each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating animal wings, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in a bow shape, and the elevating unit 800 The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape that resembles the title of a gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830. 455, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character).

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also forms a single display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830. It can be combined into one display screen. As a result, a plurality of display formats can be formed by changing the displacement states of each movable unit (elevating unit 800, protruding unit 700, and sliding unit 400) disposed in the operating unit 200, which is interesting to players. can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, a portion of each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 is attached to the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 54). placed in overlapping positions. That is, the elevating member 820 and each rotating member 435, 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Note that the elevating member 820 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 54) of each rotating member 435, 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operating unit 200 is formed with a protrusion unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800, which are formed to be displaceable in a retracted position and a combined (extended) position, and the elevating member 820 is The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, one pattern can be formed by respectively displacing the protrusion unit 700, slide unit 400, and lifting unit 800 of the three movable units, so a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the production effect can be increased accordingly. can.

In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a different position in the longitudinal direction from the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 and the rotating members 435, 455 of the sliding unit 400 at the protruding position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455. That is, when the members are in contact with each other in the extended position, or there is a possibility that they are in contact with each other, it is necessary to take into account damage caused by the impact at the time of contact. And since it does not come into contact with the rotating members 435, 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which, for example, the later moving member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the rotating member 730 and rotating members 435, 455 of the first mover at the overhanging position, which creates a dramatic effect when forming a pattern (character). can be increased.

Furthermore, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the sliding members 430 and 450 in the sliding unit 400. Therefore, when each sliding member 430, 450 is displaced, if the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each rotating member 435, 455 will be moved to the protruding member 735. Contact can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the protruding member 735 and each rotating member 435, 455 can be suppressed.

Here, when the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) move and combine in the space at the center of the game machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), There are gaming machines that combine two pieces by colliding with each other. However, when they are combined by colliding their sides, scratches are likely to be formed on the collision surfaces due to the collision. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is likely to be impaired.

In addition, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is possible to slow down the speed of the collision, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the merging movement of the accessories is reduced. It went down. There is a problem that the player's interest is lost.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protrusion unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front and rear direction, so that the movable units are To prevent sides of game machines from colliding with each other when the game machines are displaced into the central space and combined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and to suppress the deterioration of the design of the movable unit.

Furthermore, when the movable units are displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined, the side surfaces do not collide with each other, so that the speed of displacement can be kept constant during the combined displacement. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the action of combining the accessories, thereby suppressing the player's interest from being lost.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the left sliding member 430 of the lifting unit 800 and the sliding unit 400 is a two-stage rack (the lifting unit 800 has a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second sliding member 871). 873, the slide unit 400 is configured with a first side pinion gear 432 interposed between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13). It is possible to improve the speed of displacement operation compared to a type rack (configured only with a rack and pinion). Therefore, by improving the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protrusion unit 700) As a result, the time during which the player can visually recognize the combining action can be shortened, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost.

Here, if the movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the front-rear dimension increases and the size increases. In order to suppress such an anteroposterior dimension, if the anteroposterior dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are respectively made smaller (thinner), it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes a second slide member 871 that extends to the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the front-back direction, the entire elevating member 820 (elevating member 820, rotating The longitudinal dimension of the member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 (total) is suppressed to reduce the size of the gaming machine 10 in the longitudinal direction, while the longitudinal dimension of the elevating member 820 is increased to increase its rigidity. can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is disposed at a position protruding toward the front side by a second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. are placed in overlapping positions. Thereby, the space on the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same position in the front-back direction as the second slide member 871, which has a smaller width in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 53), the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 It is possible to reduce the width that increases in the front-rear direction while suppressing interference between the two (see FIG. 54). In addition, since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the second slide member 871 and the rotation member 871 from intersecting the displacement trajectory of the rotation members 435 and 455. Collision during displacement can be suppressed (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, the displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. 55 to 58 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 55 to 58 sequentially illustrate the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the combined state with FIG. 55 as the initial position.

Note that the operation of each movable unit disposed in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In this embodiment, the description will be made as a first operation, a second operation, and a third operation in order from the initial position shown in FIG.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protrusion unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, and the base members 434, 435 of the slide unit 400 are slid toward the center of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated approximately 45 degrees. The rotational displacement is performed, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the protruding unit 700 slidingly displacing the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 are displaced upward. Note that the detailed explanation of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, so the detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434, 454) are set to be the same.

Note that the second operation is performed while the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is being displaced with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacing operation of the rotating members 435, 455 and the elevating member 720.

As described above, as each sliding member 430, 450 is slid, each rotating member 435, 455 is also rotationally displaced. (The center position in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is rotationally displaced at symmetrical angles.

Here, the first member and the second member are formed to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the combined (extended) position, and the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the combined position. There is a game machine that associates (integrates) a first member and a second member by bringing them close to each other or in contact with each other, thereby making the player see them as one character.

In this case, in order to enhance the presentation effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For this purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in large size.

However, in a structure in which the first member and the second member are each displaced to the combined (extended) position by linear displacement, if the first member and the second member are enlarged, they may mutually displace while being displaced to the combined position. There is a risk of interference. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to perform each displacement at a different time, which increases the amount of time it takes to form a character. , the production effect is hindered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is linearly displaced to move up and down with respect to the base member 710, so that the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400, 455 is placed in the combined position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 disposed on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the combined position. can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, thereby shortening the time until the character is formed and enhancing the production effect. be able to.

Further, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 is a rotation trajectory that does not intersect with the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the terminal position of the rotation trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 is the displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the trajectory. That is, with respect to the linear displacement trajectory of the lifting base 720, the rotational trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotational trajectories that have at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the lifting base 720, and the rotational trajectories are combined (overhanging). ) position, the displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease.

Thereby, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435, 455 can be made to be a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement trajectory of the rotating members 435, 455 is set to a displacement trajectory that avoids the displacement trajectory of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700, which performs a linear upward/downward displacement. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435, 455 and the elevating base 720 are shifted, their trajectories do not intersect, so interference between the members can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time required to form a pattern (character) can be shortened. The performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, by making the displacement locus of the rotating members 435, 455 a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, the outer shape of the slide unit 700 that linearly displaces in the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720. Even if it is made large, interference with the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily suppressed. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be made larger.

As described above, the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the base members 434, 454 that are slidably displaceable. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement, and are displaced to the combined (extended) position. Therefore, the rotating members 435, 455 can easily form curved trajectories. As a result, interference between the rotating members 435 and 455 with the rotating member 730 during displacement to the combined position can be easily suppressed.

That is, since the rotating members 435, 455 can rotate in relation to the protrusion unit 700 while moving to the combined (extended) position by the linear displacement of the base members 434, 454, the rotation to the combined position is possible. It can be used not as a movement but as a displacement to avoid interference with the protrusion unit 700, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when only rotationally displacing the rotating members 435, 455, the position of the rotating shaft is fixed, so when the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435, 455 is set at the end of the rotating member 435, 455 In this case, when the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated, only the ends opposite to the rotating shafts are rotationally displaced, so it is difficult to set the displacement distance of the elevating base 720 to be large. Furthermore, when the rotational axes of the rotating members 435, 455 are set at the center of the rotating members 435, 455, the tip of the rotating member collides with the rear case 300 when displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. , it is difficult to arrange the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotational shafts of the rotational members 435, 455 are formed at the center position of the rotational members 435, 455, and the rotational shafts are formed on the base members 434, 454 that can be slidably displaced. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated in a combination of linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435, 455, collision with the rear case 300 when the rotating members 435, 455 disposed at the retracted position is rotationally displaced is suppressed, and The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement, the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position is different from the posture at the combined position. Can be defined independently. That is, when the rotating members 435, 455 are displaced between the retracted position and the combined position by only rotation, the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the extended position; Since the rotating members 435 and 455 have a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position since the rotary members 435 and 455 can be linearly displaced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the rotational members 435, 455 have their longitudinal directions parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retraction space in the retracted position at the retracted position (the position where the base members 434, 454 are disposed outside). On the other hand, in the combined position (the position where the base members 434, 454 are displaced to the center), the rotation is made in substantially the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435, 455 at the retracted position can be increased, and at the combined position, the central part of the game board 13 can be extended.

Furthermore, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangle is disposed in the center of the gaming machine 10 (operation unit 200), as the third symbol display device 81 becomes larger, , the space on both the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in a configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed into a horizontally elongated shape and arranged in a horizontally elongated posture at the combined (extended) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully demonstrated. That is, since the game area is formed vertically and the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally long, one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrow. , it is difficult to secure space for the components. Therefore, in order to prevent the rotating members 435, 455 from protruding into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it was necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture in the combined (extended) position, while in the retracted position, they are arranged in a vertically long posture. By effectively utilizing the space for disposing members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435, 455 can be made larger accordingly, and as a result, they can be formed together with the protruding unit 700 at the combined position. Patterns (characters) can be made larger.

That is, the retracting space in which the rotating members 435 and 455 retract is made smaller to secure space for the central part of the gaming machine 10 (third symbol display device 81), and at the combined position, the retracting space for the retracting members 435 and 455 is reduced, and at the combined position, the retracting space for the rotating members 435 and 455 is The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435, 455 and the protrusion unit 700 can be made larger.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435, 455 are rotatably connected to the base members 434, 454, and the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434, 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protrusion unit 700 can be improved. As a result, interference between the rotating members 435, 455 and the protruding unit 700 during the displacement to the protruding position can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating members 435, 455 can be made larger, and together with the protruding unit 700 in the combined (extended) position. You can make the character you form larger. For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for disposing the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member 433 is placed in the area. , 455 can be set in retracted positions, and the rotating members 435, 455 can be made large.

Furthermore, the protruding unit 700 includes a swinging member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swinging member 732 is displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that it can be brought close to and in contact with the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can be stopped by contacting the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435, 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swinging member 732. Note that a detailed explanation of how the swinging member 732 contacts the rotating members 435, 455 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 as the protruding member 735 is displaced.

Therefore, by displacing the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700, the tip of the protrusion member 735 is displaced to the back side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected, the player can visually see the state in which the respective movable units are integrated (combined state), and the displacement of the accessory can provide interest.

Furthermore, since the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the protruding member 735, the distance between the rotating member 435, 455 of each slide member 430, 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swinging member 732 is The gap (space) can be made larger than during the second operation.

This makes it possible to secure a space in which the rotating members 435, 455 (sliding members 430, 450) can be displaced when in the combined state. As a result, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, the rotating members 435, 455 (sliding members 430, 450) can be further rotated, and variations in the displacement mode in the combined state of the operating unit 200 can be increased. .

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced to the extended position, the swinging member 732 is separated from the rotating member 730, and while performing the role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455, By displacing the swinging member 732 in the direction approaching the rotating member 730, the space formed due to the displacement can be used as a displacement space for the rotating members 435, 455, and the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can create a production effect. can be increased.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining each movement unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be shown. For example, when the members of each operation unit (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) are combined, a shape resembling a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by making the rotating members 435, 455 into a shape imitating a bow, the rotating members 435, 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435, 455, and the bow is It is possible to create a state in which the bow is pulled by an arrow, or a state in which the bow is released when the arrow is released from the bow. Note that the rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow part, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is part of the rear end side of the arrow (opposite side to the arrowhead), and the elevating member 820 is the center portion of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is shifted in the excessive direction. FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b) are front views of each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, and the elevating base 720 and rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b) illustrate a transition state when the stop position of the left sliding member 430 is shifted in the excessive direction and the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide.

In addition, in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 will be explained, and when the right rotating member 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the left rotating member 435 will collide with the swinging member 732. 435 are arranged symmetrically about the central position of the operating unit 200 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 6), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, each of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state may be damaged due to poor control, rattling of each member, or error in the mounting position of the sensor, as shown in FIG. 59(a). There was a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 would collide with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700 because the rotating members 435 and 455 would not be stopped at the combined stop position. Therefore, there was a risk that the swinging member 732 and each rotating member 435, 455 would collide, resulting in damage to the parts.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged with respect to the elevating base 720, so as shown in FIG. 59(b). By rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 can be alleviated. Therefore, damage to the swinging member 732 and each rotating member 435, 455 can be suppressed.

That is, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the elevating base 720, not only can variations in the displacement mode of the protruding unit 700 be increased, but also the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 can collide with each other. This can prevent damage caused by

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the protrusion unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The swinging member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 arranged in pair rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450 .

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to alleviate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force that causes the rotating member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, further rotation of the rotating member 730 can be restricted.

That is, the swinging member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed in two sets on the left and right, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in one set, the contact is caused. As the swinging member 732 in the other set is displaced by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) When the swinging member 732 is displaced beyond the reference position and comes into contact with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 is directed toward the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other group due to the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, when the swinging member 732 comes into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set, the contact between the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) and the swinging member 732 in one set The impact can be received not only by the swinging member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other group. Thereby, kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating members 435 (rotating members 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and damage to each member can be suppressed.

In addition, in this case, the swinging member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) that is above the rotational axis in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 7(b)). When the rotating member 435) comes into contact with the rotating member 435, a driving force can be applied in the opposite direction to the rotational moment that acts around the rotating shaft of the rotating member 455 (the rotating member 435). ) can be used to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 730. Therefore, since there is no need to supply electric power to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 730, driving energy can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a case will be described in which the stop positions of the slide members 430, 450 of the slide unit 400 are shifted in the excessive direction. FIGS. 60A and 60B are front views of each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700, and the rotating member 730. Note that FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b) illustrate a transition state when the stopping positions of the sliding members 430, 450 are shifted and the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop position of each slide member 430, 450 shifts in the excessive direction, the swing member 732 and each rotation member 435, 455 collide, and the swing member 732 or each rotation member 435, 455 collides with each other. There was a risk of damage.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the swinging member 732 is displaced downward by performing the third operation described above at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435, 455). Therefore, when each rotating member 435, 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to alleviate the impact of the collision. As a result, damage to the swinging member 732 or each rotating member 435, 455 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this case, the impact generated when the swinging member 732 collides with each rotating member 435, 455 can be used as a driving force for protruding the protruding member 735, so that the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be The load can be reduced. That is, by transmitting the impact when the swinging member 732 collides with each rotating member 435, 455 to the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, the driving body 761 (see FIG. 40) can be applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the protruding member 735 can be reduced.

Note that the third operation may be performed a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop position of each slide member 430, 450 shifts in the excessive direction and the swing member 732 and each rotating member 435, 455 collide, the drive to displace the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 Due to the rotational resistance of the motor 763, it is possible to easily stop the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 while displacing the swinging member 732.

Furthermore, since the load of the rotating members 435, 455 can be applied in the rotational direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435, 455 in the third operation will be described. FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) are front views of each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700, and the rotating member 730 in the third operation. Note that FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which each rotating member 435, 455 is displaced in the third operation.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the gap between each rotating member 435, 455 and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation is such that the gap between the rotating member 730 and the rotating member 730 during the third operation is The swinging member 732 is made larger by displacing downward (downward in FIG. 61(a)) with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435, 455 in the third operation can be further displaced than in the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61(b), by further sliding the base members 434, 454 of the left and right slide members 430, 450 to the center of the gaming machine 10, the rotating members 435, 455 can be rotated, It can be displaced to the center of the gaming machine 10. Thereby, a sense of unity can be created in the combined (extended) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435, 455 that are visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second combined state of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 62 to 64 illustrate transition states in which each movable unit of the operating unit 200 is extended to the position of the second combined state. 62 shows the operating unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operating unit 200 in the second combined position, and FIG. 63 shows the operating unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second combined position. are respectively illustrated.

Furthermore, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (sliding unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operating unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61 ) and the elevating member 820) in the combined (extended) position will be described below as a first combined state. In addition, in the first combined state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the first production mode. It is possible to make the player recognize it.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operating unit 200 is placed in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17(a)), and the upper combination unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22(a)). ), and the lower combined unit 600 is placed in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27(a)). To form the second combined state by the operation unit 200, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slid to the center of the game board 13 from the state shown in FIG. The lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is displaced downward, thereby forming the state shown in FIG. 63. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 18(a)), the upper combined unit 500 is in the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 22(a)), and the lower combined unit 600 is in the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 22(a)). By being respectively displaced to the positions shown in FIG. 27(c), the second combined state shown in FIG. 64 is achieved.

In the second combined state, each movable unit of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined unit 500, and lower combined unit 600) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as a second production mode. The player can be made aware of this. Note that the pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode is, for example, a pattern (character) imitating Pegasus (a imaginary creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the parts forming the body of Pegasus are the lower combined unit 600, the parts forming the head of Pegasus are the upper combining unit 500, and the parts forming the wings of Pegasus are the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second combined state, the base member 434, which is slidably disposed, is displaced to the extended position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the slide end position. That is, the base member 434 in the first combined state and the base member 434 in the second combined state are arranged at different distances by which they are slid from the retracted position. Further, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position of the rotating member 435 can be made different between the first combined state and the second combined state.

Furthermore, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 moves from the retracted position in the first combined state and the second combined state. The rotation angles (postures) of the rotary member 435 are arranged differently as the sliding distances are different. Note that in this embodiment, the rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged in a position that differs by approximately 180 degrees around the rotation axis between the first combined state and the second combined state.

As described above, the operation unit 200 is configured to tension the respective members (rotating members 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), and elevating member 820) of each operating unit (sliding unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800). By displacement to the out position, each member can be combined to form one pattern (character).

That is, as the first performance mode, the movement unit 200 simply combines each member to form one pattern (character) in the central space of the movement unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81). Instead, as a second presentation mode, each member can be combined in the central space of the movement unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first presentation mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, each of the first performance mode and the second performance mode can be visually recognized by the player depending on the performance, time, etc. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of performances, so it is possible to show various performances to the players and give them interest.

Here, a first movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a combined (extended) position; A gaming machine is known that includes a second movable unit group consisting of a plurality of movable units.

According to this gaming machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are placed in the extended position, the movable units of the first movable unit group are associated (integrated) and form one pattern ( character) as the first performance mode, and when each movable unit of the second movable unit group is placed in the extended position, the movable units of the second movable unit group are associated with each other. (Integrated) A performance is performed in which the player is made to recognize another pattern (character) as a second performance mode. That is, in the first performance mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is placed in the extended position, so that the first A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit groups, and in the second game state, each of the first movable units is retracted to the retreat position, while the second movable unit By arranging each movable unit of the group to the extended position, an effect is performed in which a second character is formed in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group.

In this case, in order to enhance the production effect, it is effective to be able to form larger patterns (characters). For this purpose, it is necessary to make each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group large-sized.

However, as with the conventional technology described above, when multiple characters (production modes) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form the multiple characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is evacuated. Since the area (space) in which the movable units can be kept is limited, there is a problem in that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (performance mode).

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 800) and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper combined unit Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 is also used, the number of movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) production modes is correspondingly increased. The total number can be reduced and each movable unit can be increased in size. As a result, each pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 rotates a part of the pattern (character) that is visually recognized by the player as the first performance mode and a part of the pattern (character) that is visually recognized by the player as the second performance mode. Since it is also used as a part of the production mode, the number of movable units for forming the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, a space is created at the inner edge of the back case 300 (a space other than the central space in the retracted state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), so each movable unit (slide The unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, the lower combined unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 800) can be increased in size.

Furthermore, since each member of each movable unit (rotating members 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), and elevating member 820) can be made larger, the first The pattern (character) formed by the presentation mode and the second presentation mode can be enlarged.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 rotates a part of the pattern (character) that is visually recognized by the player as the first performance mode and a part of the pattern (character) that is visually recognized by the player as the second performance mode. ), if it is placed in the same position in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the movement that is common to the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize that the unit member (rotating member 435) is being used, which impedes interest.

Furthermore, if it is necessary to form the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode using members (rotating member 435) placed at the same position, the degree of freedom decreases accordingly. It becomes difficult to create a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is placed at a combined (extending) position when forming the first performance mode and at a combined (extending) position when forming the second performance mode. Since the rotating member 435 is in a different position from the first production mode and the second production mode, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used for both the first production mode and the second production mode, which impedes interest. can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged is different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the pattern (character) formed between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode is different. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being hindered.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 can be placed in different positions (extended positions) in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the degree of freedom can be increased, and the degree of freedom can be increased. This makes it easier to create differences (shape and location).

Here, if the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first combined state and the second combined state, the rotating member 435 is used for both the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. This makes it easier for players to visually recognize this, which hinders their interest. Moreover, if it is necessary to form the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode using the rotating member 435 in the same posture, the degree of freedom decreases accordingly, and the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode need to be formed respectively. It becomes difficult to create differences (shape and placement position) from the second presentation mode.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the rotation member 435 has a different attitude when forming the first presentation mode and a posture when forming the second presentation mode, such rotation It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used for both the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being hindered. Further, it is possible to easily create differences (shapes and placement positions) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 is arranged in different positions and in different orientations (rotation angles) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. The fact that the first performance mode and the second performance mode are used together can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being hindered.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is used both in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode is arranged in a state where either the position or the posture is different between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. If only the rotating member 435 is used in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, there is a possibility that the player will recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. Since both the arrangement position and the posture are different between the mode and the second production mode, the player is informed that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first combined state and the second combined state. It can be difficult to be seen.

In addition, the rotating member 435 is rotatably disposed on the base member 434 that is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the projecting position and posture (rotation angle) when forming the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode can be increased.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the sliding displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, by associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the player can recognize the entirety as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be made larger, and the pattern (character) formed in the second presentation mode can be made larger. can be converted into For example, even if there is an area such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area where it is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for the arrangement of members, the rotating member may be placed in such an area. The rotating member 435 can be made large while setting the position of the retracted state of the rotating member 435.

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in a region where the rotary member 435 of the base member 434 overlaps with the other region of the base member 434 (conversion mechanism The front and back dimensions of the area (where no Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operating unit 200 forming the second combined state will be described in detail. 65(a) to 66(b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600. FIG. 67(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, upper combining unit 500, and lower combining unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIa in FIG. 65(a), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb. FIG. 68(a) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, upper combining unit 500, and lower combining unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 66(a), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 when viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb.

Note that FIGS. 65(a) to 66(b) sequentially illustrate the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second combined state. 65(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, FIG. 66(a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state, and FIG. 66(b) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. The slide unit 400 is shown in the retracted state.

Moreover, the displacement from FIG. 65(a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) is performed by slidingly displacing the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second combined state, the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are brought to a stopped state, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

66(a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 500, and the lower combined unit 600 at an intermediate position of displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the second combined state shown in FIG. 66(b). It is a front view. Furthermore, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66(a), the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are displaced while the left sliding member 430 of the slide unit 400 continues to slide from the first state. It is done by That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacing the slide unit 400, the upper combination unit 500, and the lower combination unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second presentation mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second combined state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper combined unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower combined unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated with chain lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 67(a), in the retracted state (disposed at the retracted position), the upper combined unit 500 is in a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is housed inside the base member 510. The lower combined unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is disposed between the rotation member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

As described above, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed from the front side base member 434b disposed on the front side and the back side base member 434a disposed on the back side (see FIG. 13). A stepped portion 434b2 recessed toward the back side is formed below the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b (lower side in FIG. 67(b)).

The stepped portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600, and the lower side of the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434 is entirely on the back side. By recessing to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, since the lower side of the base member 434 than the stepped portion 434b2 is recessed toward the back side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the lower part of the lower combined unit 600 can be inserted into the gap. A displacement member 640 can be provided.

Further, since the thickness of the lower side of the base member 434 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 facing each other can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slid to a first state (the state shown in FIG. 65(b)) to be described later, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction above the stepped portion 434b2 of the base member 434, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13), which serve as a transmission means for transmitting drive to the rotating member 435, can be disposed. It is said that

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected and suspended so as to be slidable relative to the base member 410, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is connected to the back case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 and the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), force is applied to the upper side of the base member 434 when the base member 434 is slid in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 65(a)). Since the thickness of the upper part of the base member 434 in the front-rear direction can be increased easily, deformation of the base member 434 can be suppressed.

Further, in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 65(a)), the back side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower combined unit 600 is in contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the pivot hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower combined unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower combined unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the upper end part tends to fall down in the front-rear direction. By bringing these into contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from falling in the front-back direction, and to stabilize the position of the lower combined unit 600 in the front-back direction at the retracted position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 slides to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65(b) and 67(b), when the left sliding member 430 is displaced to the first state position, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced as the base member 434 is displaced. As a result, when the base member 434 is displaced by a predetermined amount, the rotary member 435 rotates, and the rotary member 435 and the lower combined unit 600 can be placed in a position where they do not overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower The combined unit 600 can be located at a position where they do not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65(b)) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower combined unit 600 in front view, there is a portion that does not overlap with the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. A lower displacement member 640 is disposed.

As described above, the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, so the lower displacement member 640 can be placed inside the area K2 where the upper end tends to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, collision between the lower displacement member 640, the base member 434, and the rotating member 435 can be suppressed.

In the first state, the base member 434 is connected to the upper displacement member on the side away from the connecting shaft 531 (on the upper contact portion 533 side) for transmitting (rotational driving force) to displace the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500. 530 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when displaced to the second state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 can be prevented from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a that connects the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper combination unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotation shaft 435b of the rotation member 435, and the upper displacement member 530 By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start displacing, it is possible to suppress the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the extended position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 630. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 630 is displaced, it can be suppressed from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, as the upper displacement member 530 slides in the left-right direction of the operating unit 200 (the center portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66(b)), the upper displacement member 530 rotates downward and is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced while the base member 434 is slid toward the center side than the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced toward the back side of the base member 434 rather than the front side. When the upper displacement member 530 collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is positioned on the back side of the upper displacement member 530. Collision with the side surface of the member 434 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 68(a), in the second state between the first state and the second combined state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further moved in the left-right direction than in the first state. It is slid to the right (right side in FIG. 66(a)). Therefore, the rotating member 435, which is rotationally displaced in accordance with (in conjunction with) the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. Thereby, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower combined unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65(b)) with respect to the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated and positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, by slidingly displacing the base member 434, the width of the area K2 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. a) The width in the vertical direction can be increased.

Thereby, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 is tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state overlapping the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when shifting from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be placed on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so that the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( The upper contact portion 533 side) can be prevented from being displaced in the front-back direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, while being displaced from the first state to the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 is disposed at a position overlapping the base member 434 in front view, and therefore is displaced to a position where the second combined state is formed. The upper displacement member 530 can be prevented from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 until the upper displacement member 530 is moved.

Furthermore, since the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435, the rotating member 435 can be positioned closer to the front side, making it easier for the player to see the upper By associating (integrating) the displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435, the whole can be easily recognized as a predetermined pattern (character) by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 66(b) and 68(b), in the second combined state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower combined unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is placed in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower combined unit 600 (on the left side in FIG. 68(b)).

As a result, the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be disposed in close proximity to each other so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different protruding positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stopped states. The structure becomes more complicated, and the stopped state (installation position and posture) tends to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper combined unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower combined unit 600 when forming the second presentation mode, the rotation member 435 If the arrangement position and orientation of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap will be formed between the upper and lower combination units 500 and 600, while if the arrangement position and orientation of the rotating member 435 exceed the target position, the upper combination unit The unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are pushed out to cause a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 in the combined state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is connected to each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper combination unit 500, lower combination unit 600, protrusion unit 700) in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. , elevating unit 800) (upper displacing member 530, lower displacing member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) and are disposed at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit in front view. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable members of each movable unit, even if there are variations in the stopped state (extended position or posture) in the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member will be maintained. You can easily maintain your sexuality. That is, by partially overlapping in a front view, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between each movable unit and each movable member, and also to prevent the position in the front-rear direction from being formed. By being different, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress each movable member of each movable unit from being pushed out and causing a positional shift. As a result, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member can be easily maintained in the combined state.

In addition, in the second production mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are arranged in contact with each other, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of them. By associating (integrating) the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second combined state.

That is, in the second effect mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be placed at the same position in the front-rear direction, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (extended) state can be Since the patterns (characters) formed in the second performance mode can be easily recognized by the player by integrating them, the pattern (character) formed in the second performance mode can be easily recognized by the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in its stopped state (placement position and posture), and in the stopping position when the rotating member 435 forms the second performance mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position and posture of the rotation member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, and the association (integration) occurs. ) is inhibited.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position and orientation of the rotating member 435 exceed the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out, causing a positional shift, which hinders association (integration). That is, in the second presentation mode, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact, if the rotation member 435 is brought into contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotation member When the arrangement position or posture of the holder 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 that are in contact with each other are displaced, so not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, but also Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other in the combined (extended) position, it is preferable to arrange the rotating member 435 in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. This is particularly effective.

Further, in this case, a portion of the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side of at least a portion of the portion in contact with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. The contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member can be made less visible to the player by the rotating member 435. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second performance mode and losing interest.

Next, the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, but the left sliding member 2430 and the right sliding member in the second embodiment 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state as the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are slid. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. configured.

The main body base member 2480 is formed from a rectangular and laterally elongated plate-like body when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 411 is provided on the lower edge of the main body base member 2480 to stand on the front side of the game board. Furthermore, protrusions 2481 are formed protrudingly on the lower surface side of both ends of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction.

A base-side rack gear 412 is carved on the upper surface of the protruding plate portion 411 for imparting rotation to a first-side pinion gear 432 disposed on the first member 431 as the first member 431 slides.

As described above, the protrusions 2481 are formed at both ends of the main body base member 2480 in the longitudinal direction. The protrusion 2481 has a circular bearing hole 2481a into which a shaft 2486 of a rotation transmission member 2485, which will be described later, is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed in the protrusion 2481 formed on one longitudinal end side (right side of the gaming machine) of the main body base member 2480 in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 outward from the longitudinal center of the main body base member 2480, and the mutual axes formed at both ends are concentric.

The rotation transmission member 2485 has a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed into a prismatic shape whose dimension is slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485, a rotating portion 2487 is formed which is approximately circular in side view and has a predetermined thickness. is formed protrudingly.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is carved on the other end in the longitudinal direction (on the left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is carved on one longitudinal side (on the right side of the game board). will be established.

The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are formed such that their axes are concentric with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2481, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

Accordingly, when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2481 and placed on the main body base member 2480, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 2486.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of a rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmission member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 with a circular rack 2487a meshing with a pinion gear 2488 arranged on one longitudinal side (right side in front view) of the main body base member 2480.

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotation drive motor 2489 to the rotation transmission member 2485, and its shaft center is fastened to the rotation drive motor 2489. The rotary drive motor 2489 has its rotating shaft inserted into the through hole 2481b of the protrusion 2481, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protrusion 2481.

Therefore, by applying rotational driving force to the rotational drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed on the rotating portion 2487 of the rotational transmission member 2485. Thereby, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate around the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with a transmission gear 2437a disposed on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and as the transmission gear 2437a rotates, driving force is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. Thereby, rotational drive can be applied to the rotating member 435 in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430.

The right rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with a transmission gear 2457a disposed on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and as the transmission gear 2457a rotates, drive is transmitted to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. Thereby, a driving force for rotation can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right sliding member 2450 slides.

Next, referring to FIG. 71, transmission gear 2437a and transmission gear 2457a will be explained. Note that the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, so a detailed explanation of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

FIG. 71(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71(b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed with a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulge portion 2437a2 whose tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the back side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has a thickness that is approximately the same as the thickness dimension (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges out in a shape that gradually becomes smaller toward the center of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness goes toward the back side. The distance that the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 toward the back side is set to be approximately the same as the distance in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1, or smaller than the distance in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from decreasing, and it is possible to suppress the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. Note that, in the following, the left sliding member 2430 will be explained as a representative example, and the description of the right sliding member 2450 will be omitted.

FIG. 72(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are in mesh, and FIG. 72(b) is a schematic diagram showing the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the meshing of the slide unit 2400 is released. 73(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 taken along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa in FIG. 72(a), and FIG. 73(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

Note that in FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is illustrated with a broken line for easy understanding. Furthermore, transmission gear 2437a and transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 73(a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located below (the lower part of FIGS. 72 and 73), the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and A state is formed in which the gear 2437a meshes with the gear 2437a.

Therefore, as the left sliding member 2430 slides relative to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, thereby rotating the rotating member 435.

On the other hand, as described above, when rotational driving force is applied to the rotational drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotational transmission member 2485 upward on the rear side, the meshing between the left rotational transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Ru.

That is, as shown in FIG. 72(b) and FIG. 73(b), when the rotation transmitting member 2485 rotates around the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmitting rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmitting member 2485 moves to the rotation transmitting member 2485. Displaces upward with the rotation of. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 slides relative to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a are disengaged. As a result, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it does not rotate.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430; A second driving state in which the displacement is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435 and the left sliding member 2430 is slid while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and a second driving state in which the left sliding member 2430 is stopped in sliding displacement and rotated A third driving state can be formed in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by its inertia force.

Thereby, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left sliding member 2430 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, so that the presentation effect can be increased accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor that provides the left sliding member 2430 with a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435. However, when the drive motor is disposed on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 becomes large. There was a point.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the second driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 2430 is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 can be formed by the rotational drive motor 2489 disposed on the base member 2410. can. That is, since there is no need to provide a driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member 435 on the left sliding member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left sliding member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 equipped with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, thereby transmitting left rotation. If the meshing between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when switching from the second drive state in which the meshing is released to the first drive state in which the meshing is engaged, the gears will not mesh and the sides will not mesh. There was a problem in that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not mesh with each other due to the collision.

In contrast, according to the second embodiment, the transmission gear 2437a is formed with the bulging portion 2437a2, so that the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second drive state in which the mesh is released to the first drive state in which the mesh is engaged, it is easy to insert the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the teeth of the transmission gear 2437a. can.

In addition, the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed so that the tooth thickness gradually decreases as it goes toward the back side of the transmission gear 2437a, so it guides the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the slope that gradually becomes smaller. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, the meshing can be smoothly performed when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is engaged.

Note that the axis of the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment is preferably formed on the plane of the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are prevented from displacing toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, a slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit 3400 in the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, but the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member in the third embodiment 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state as the rotating member 450 is slid. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and a housing member 3490 disposed in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed into a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is provided upright on the edge.

On the lower side of the protruding plate part 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is carved on the other end in the longitudinal direction (on the left side of the game board) and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is carved on one longitudinal side (on the right side of the game board). will be established. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed vertically through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side.

The housing member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left sliding member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right sliding member 450 are arranged, and is formed into a rectangular plate-shaped body when viewed from the front. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge toward the front side of the gaming machine is formed, and a first member 431, a second member 433, and a rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Furthermore, the outer shape of the housing member 3490 when viewed from the front is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Thereby, the housing member 3490 can be placed inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base-side rack gear 412 is carved on the inner surface of the lower protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the upper protruding wall 3491 of the housing member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from inside the housing member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft of a telescoping cylinder 3495 and the housing member 3490, which will be described later. The diameter is smaller than the diameter of the

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides the housing member 3490 up and down when driven. By applying electric power, the shaft protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft part This is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the housing member 3490 with its shaft inserted into the insertion hole 3481c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is vertically displaced, and the housing member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be vertically displaced. That is, the housing member 3490 can be vertically displaced with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the housing member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Further, in the following description, the left sliding member 430 will be explained as a representative example, and the description of the right sliding member 450 will be omitted.

75(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are meshed, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the slide unit 3400 in a state in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 are disengaged by being displaced. 76(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 76(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 taken along the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. Note that in FIG. 75, a part of the housing member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are illustrated with broken lines for easy understanding. Further, transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 76(a), when the housing member 3490 is located upward, the distance L1 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are arranged in a sufficiently secured state and form a meshed state.

Therefore, as the left slide member 430 slides relative to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, when the housing member 3490 is located downward, the distance L2 between the bottom surface of the housing member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is smaller than the distance L1, and the main body A state is formed in which the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are out of mesh (distance dimension L1>L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides relative to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a does not rotate because the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged. As a result, the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, so that even if the left sliding member 430 is displaced, it can be configured to not rotate.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430, and a sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430. is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; A third driving state can be formed in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertia force. Thereby, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, so that the presentation effect can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a disposed on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. It is possible to switch between the first drive state and the second drive state.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be meshed smoothly.

That is, in a state where the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, when the transmission gear 437a is brought close to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 with the phase shifted, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other, and the transmission gear 437a rotates and meshes with the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. There is no need to match the phases, and the teeth can be aligned smoothly.

Next, a slide unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, but the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member in the fourth embodiment 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state as the rotating member 450 is slid. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed from a rectangular and laterally elongated plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a protruding plate portion 411 erected on the lower edge on the front side of the game board. . A left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies rotational driving force to the rotating member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies rotational driving force to the rotating member 455 are formed on the bottom side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is located on the left side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Moreover, notches 4413a are formed at both ends and the center of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 by cutting out the tooth surface thereof. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a include small tooth portions 4413b having a smaller external shape than teeth not adjacent to the notch portion 4413a.

On the other hand, the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is located on the right side of the base member 4410 in the longitudinal direction. Furthermore, notches 4414a are formed at both ends of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 by cutting out the tooth surfaces thereof. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch portion 4414a include small tooth portions 4414b having a smaller outer diameter than teeth that are not adjacent thereto.

Next, the operation of slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Further, in the following description, the left sliding member 430 will be explained as a representative example, and the description of the right sliding member 450 will be omitted.

78(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a of the base member 4410 are in mesh, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic front view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are disengaged. Note that in FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is illustrated with a broken line for easy understanding. Further, transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates to the left. A state of meshing with the transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is A state is formed in which meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is released.

That is, until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a where the tooth is missing in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the rotation member 435 can be rotated with the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430. . On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 where teeth are missing, the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is reduced by its inertia. It can be continued by

Therefore, the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the first driving state in which the rotating member 435 rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430. is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating; A third driving state can be formed in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertia force. Thereby, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, so that the presentation effect can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, the switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is achieved by removing some of the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, thereby canceling the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, there is no need to dispose a drive motor or the like on the left slide member 430 for releasing the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a, and the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for slidingly displacing the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed with a small tooth portion 4413b, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. Therefore, the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a that have passed through the notch 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly meshed. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that does not include the small tooth portion 4413b, if the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and There is a possibility that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 may mesh with each other and may not be able to mesh with each other.

In this case, by forming the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a to have a smaller outer shape than other teeth, the rotation phase of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a is shifted. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, the teeth can be prevented from meshing with each other, and the transmission gear 437a can be rotated to adjust its phase. As a result, the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can mesh smoothly.

Next, the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. Note that the following description will be made using the left sliding member 5430 as a representative example, and a description of the left sliding member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, but the left sliding member 5430 and the right sliding member in the fifth embodiment 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement thereof. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left sliding member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, a one-way clutch 5439 is disposed on a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 includes an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed circularly through the axis of a transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. It mainly includes a plurality of rollers 5439d arranged in the cam surface, a retainer 5439e that holds each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a that is connected to the retainer 5439e and switches the phase of the roller 5439d with respect to the cam surface. .

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating the switching plate 5439a is formed in the shape of an elongated hole, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding toward the front side of a displacement member 5436, which will be described later, is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. .

Next, the operation of one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81(a) is a schematic front view of the left sliding member 5430 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81(b) is a schematic diagram of the left sliding member 5430 in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a slide member 5430 viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawing is simplified and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 are illustrated with broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), when the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b It is caught in the wedge formed between the two. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a driven state. As a result, the rotation of transmission gear 437a is transmitted to rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81(b), when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotation member 5435, the position of the protrusion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 changes with the rotation member 5435. Displaced with respect to. Thereby, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is placed at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in a neutral idle state. As a result, the rotation of transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, the one-way clutch 5439 can create a state in which it allows rotation transmission and a state in which it blocks rotation transmission.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left sliding member 5430, and a sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430. is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the left sliding member 5430 is slidably displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating, and a one-way clutch is used when stopping the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 5430. 5439 is changed from a state in which transmission of rotation is allowed to a state in which it is blocked, thereby forming a third drive state in which rotation of rotating member 5435 continues due to its inertia while left sliding member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

Therefore, the first driving state, the second driving state, and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left sliding member 5430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotating member 5435, the displacement of the displacement member 5436 can be combined, so the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can serve both the role of producing effects by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since there is no need to separately provide a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 5430, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. Note that, in the following, the left sliding member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right sliding member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, but the left sliding member 6430 and the right sliding member in the sixth embodiment 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 and the right sliding member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted into the through hole 6434a1 of the back side base member 434a. Ru.

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter is formed larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 of a transmission gear 5437f, an inner ring 5439c connected to a rotating shaft 5435a of a rotating member 5437, and a sliding groove 5439a1 of a switching plate 5439a connected to an operator 6438 described later. Ru.

The operator 6438 is formed into a vertically long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front. The operator 6438 has a connecting pin 6438a protruding forward at its lower end, and a through hole 6438b extending in the front-rear direction slightly above the center in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole through which an insertion pin 6434a2 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from the back side of the back side base member 434a is inserted, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operator 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. It is arranged on the back surface of the back side base member 434a in a rotatable state about the axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter is smaller than the width of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the operator 6438 rotates around the through hole 6438b with the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes, and the one-way clutch Switching plate 5439a of clutch 5439 can be displaced.

Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back side base member 434a, and the other end is locked to the operator 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always biased in the clockwise rotation direction about the through hole 6438b when viewed from the front. As a result, when no external force is acting on the operator 6438, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be kept in a driven state (a state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435).

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84(a) is a schematic front view of the slide unit 6400 in a state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84(b) is a schematic diagram of the slide unit in a state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. 6400 is a schematic diagram viewed from the front. 85(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 taken along the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. Note that in FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are illustrated with broken lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 84(b), the base member 6410 is provided with a protrusion 6411a that protrudes from the bottom side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the sliding end of the left slide member 6430. .

As shown in FIGS. 84(a) and 85(a), when no external force is acting on the operator 6438, the operator 6438 is in a state where its longitudinal direction coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. It will be placed in

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is caught in a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a driven state. As a result, the rotation of transmission gear 437a is transmitted to rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84(b) and 85(b), the left sliding member 6430 slides and immediately before the end of the sliding displacement, the other end of the operator 6438 disposed on the left sliding member 6430 The right side (upper side) in front view abuts against the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

After the side surface of the operator 6438 and the base member 6410 come into contact, when the left slide member 6430 further moves to the terminal end, the operator 6438 is displaced in the left rotation direction in front view about the through hole 6438b.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is placed at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in a neutral idle state. As a result, a state can be created in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operator 6438 in accordance with the amount of displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to create a state in which transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is permitted and a state in which transmission of the rotation is blocked. can.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left sliding member 6430, and a sliding displacement of the left sliding member 6430. When the one-way clutch 5439 is stopped, the one-way clutch 5439 changes from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that blocks it, so that the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued due to its inertia while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third driving state can be formed.

Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left sliding member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by sliding the left slide member 6430, there is no need to dispose a motor or the like on the left slide member 6430 for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, referring to FIG. 86, a slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment. Note that, in the following, the left sliding member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right sliding member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 and the right sliding member 450, but the left sliding member 7430 and the right sliding member in the seventh embodiment 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 and the right sliding member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a groove 7417 is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410, in which a second slide member 7460, which will be described later, is arranged.

The second slide member 7460 is held by being sandwiched between a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged opposite to the front and rear sides of the rack gear 7461, and the two plate members 7462. The roller 7465 is arranged so as to pass through the shaft part 7463, and the drive gear 7464 is arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshes with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461. Ru.

The rack gear 7461 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has gear tooth surfaces 7461a formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction when viewed from the front.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding a roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed into a plate-like body having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed in the side surface to be long in the vertical direction, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw to the stopper hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7463 is a cylindrical member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is larger than the thickness (front-back direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7463 is held between the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7463 can be slid in the vertical direction because the sliding groove 7462a is long and recessed in the vertical direction. .

The roller 7465 has a cylindrical outer shape, and has an axial hole penetrating in the front-rear direction at its axis. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7463 inserted into a shaft hole, and is disposed between two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to apply a driving force to slide the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466, which will be described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted into the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 disposed at the front is decorated (displaying a pattern, etc.) on a plane disposed on the front side. Thereby, the second slide member 7460 can make its decorative surface visible to the player by slidingly displacing from a position where it overlaps with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to a position where it does not overlap.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic diagrams of the slide unit 7400 viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 is the same as the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position before displacement of the operator 6438, the through hole 6438b, and the insertion pin. 6434a2 in that no biasing spring is disposed between them, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(a), before the left sliding member 7430 slides, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b in the left-right direction. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged with it tilted to the right.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is caught in a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is brought into a driven state. As a result, the rotation of transmission gear 437a is transmitted to rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left sliding member 7430 is slid to a position where the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87(b)), the left sliding member 7430 As the rotation member 5435 is displaced, the rotation member 5435 can be rotated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 touches the side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. come into contact with Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the slide displacement urges the roller 7465 downward and the operator 6438 is tilted to the right. 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the operator 6438 is rotated to a position where the longitudinal direction substantially coincides with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 The roller 7465 comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465, which is located at approximately the same height as the axis of the roller 7465.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the slide displacement urges the roller 7465 in the right direction and allows the operator 6438 to rotate about the through hole 6438b.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged to the left of the through hole 6438b. be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated, and the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is placed at a neutral position on the cam surface, leaving the engagement space between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is placed in a neutral idle state. As a result, a state can be created in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Furthermore, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is rotated to a state where it is tilted to the left, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. come into contact with Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the left, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right side of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89(b).

Furthermore, when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 is cutting off rotation transmission, as described above. Due to the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the rotating member 5435 is slid and displaced, the rotation can be continued.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the operator 6438 in accordance with the amount of displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to create a state in which transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is permitted and a state in which transmission of the rotation is blocked. can.

That is, a first driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates in accordance with the displacement of the left sliding member 7430; A third driving state can be formed in which the rotating member 5435 continues to rotate due to its inertia force in the stopped state.

Therefore, the first driving state and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left sliding member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third drive state (for example, by waiting until the time when the inertial force stops acting), the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435. A second driving state can be formed in which the left sliding member 7430 is slid while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Therefore, the first driving state, the second driving state, and the third driving state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the left sliding member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. . As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by sliding the left slide member 7430, there is no need to dispose a motor or the like on the left slide member 7430 for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotary member 5435 is The position at which the permissible state is changed from the permissible state to the regulated state or from the permissible state to the regulated state can be changed. This allows the left sliding member 7430 to change the position where the rotational state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left sliding member 7430 is slid, or the position where the rotating member 5435 is rotated when the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is stopped. It can be changed depending on the game state, etc., and as a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in addition to the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430, the second sliding member 7460 can also be slid, so that the production effect can be increased accordingly. Since it serves both the role of performing the performance and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439, there is no need to separately provide means for changing the position at which the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the second slide member 7460 is disposed so as to be displaceable along the sliding direction of the left slide member 7430, so by displacing the second slide member 7460, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched. be able to.

That is, from a state where the second slide member 7460 is placed on either side of the left slide member 7430 in the left and right direction, with the left slide member 7430 stopped, move the second slide member 7460 to the other side in the left and right direction. By displacing it, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without slidingly displacing the left sliding member 7430, and the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is converted into a rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and as the left sliding member 7430 is displaced, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is changed. A first driving state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates, and a second driving state in which the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the left sliding member 7430 is slid while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating. Two driving states can be formed.

Next, a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of a slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a sliding rod disposed on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 slidably connected to the slide bar member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 8430 along the slide bar member 420. .

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is disposed on the front side along the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base-side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear installed along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 includes a first member 8431 that is rectangular and elongated in front view, a base member 8431b that is rectangular and elongated in front view that hangs down from the first member 8431, and a first member that is rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. A second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a meshed with the first side pinion gear 432, which is rectangular in front view and vertically long, and a base member which is rectangular and long in front view and is suspended from the second member 8433. 8434, a third member 8445 which is rectangular in front view and has a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably disposed on the second member 8433, and a third side rack gear 8445a to which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed. , and a base member 8446 which is rectangular and laterally elongated when viewed from the front and is suspended from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 includes a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. The sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 meshes with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

The second member 8433 is disposed to be displaceable in the first member 8431, and is displaceable relative to the first member 8431 by inserting the sliding rod member 420 into the sliding hole at the upper end. , is slidable along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second side rack gear 433a is carved on the lower surface of the second member 8433. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d meshes with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by receiving an action from the base side rack gear 8412 along with the sliding displacement.

The third member 8445 is disposed to be displaceable on the second member 8433, and is displaceable relative to the second member 8433 by inserting the sliding rod member 420 into the sliding hole at the upper end. , is slidable along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, a third side rack gear 8445a is carved on the lower surface of the third member 8445. Further, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is rotated by the second side pinion gear 8433d. 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, with respect to the second member 8433, A driving force accompanying the linear movement of the first member 8431 and a driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the first member 8431. I can do it.

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, with respect to the third member 8445, A driving force accompanying the linear movement of the second member 8433 and a driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d can be applied. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the second member 8433. I can do it.

Next, the operation of slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93(a) to 93(c) are schematic diagrams of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, and illustrate the transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid. 94(a) is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVa-XCIVa in FIG. 93(a), and FIG. 94(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. FIG. 94(c) is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit 8400 taken along the line XCIVc-XCIVc in FIG. 93(c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, guide member 419, and drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93(a) and 94(a), when the left slide member 8430 is disposed at the retracted position, the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431, and the second member 8433 is disposed inside the first member 8431. A third member 8445 is disposed inside.

In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is located in front of the base member 8434. be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (overlapping in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5(a)). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are respectively slid, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid without interfering with each other. . Further, the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the production area K formed in the center of the game board (in FIG. 93(a), the base member 8410 8446) can be secured.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is placed in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated, and the left The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid.

In this case, as described above, the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel attitude, and the second side rack gear 433a and the base side rack gear Since the first side pinion gear 432 that is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is interposed in a state in which it is meshed with both rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 are interposed. 433a, the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with the second member 8433, so that the driving force accompanying the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 are applied to the second member 8433. A driving force accompanying the movement can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the first member 8431. I can do it.

As a result, the time required to slide the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 into the production area K (shielding state) or retreating from the production area K (open state) can be shortened, and the shielding It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a parallel posture, and both the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412 have teeth. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d, which is pivotally supported by the second member 8433 in the assembled state, is interposed, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed, the driving force accompanying the linear movement of the second member 8433 and the driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the second member 8433. I can do it.

As a result, the second member 8433 can be slid relative to the first member 8431, as shown in FIG. 93(b). Further, the third member 8445 can be slid relative to the second member 8433.

As a result, the time required to slide the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 into the production area K (shielding state) or retreating from the production area K (open state) can be shortened, and the shielding It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 8430 is placed in the extended position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of the overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433 with some overlap remaining.

In this case, in this embodiment, the left side surface of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431 when viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 when viewed from the front are substantially parallel to each other in the front-rear direction. placed in the same position. Furthermore, the left side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 and the right side surface of the base member 8446 suspended from the third member 8445 when viewed from the front are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. Ru.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged throughout the production area K.

Next, a slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of a slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the base member 434 is suspended from the second member 433, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is suspended from the first member 431, and the second member 8433 A base member 9434 hanging down from the base member 9434 is disposed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 8410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and a sliding rod disposed on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 slidably connected to the slide rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacing the left slide member 9430 along a slide guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 includes a first member 8431 that is rectangular and elongated when viewed from the front, a base member 9431b that is rectangular and elongated from the front that hangs down from the first member 8431, and a first member that is rotatably disposed on the first member 8431. A second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a meshed with the first side pinion gear 432, which is rectangular in front view and vertically long, and a base member which is rectangular and long in front view and is suspended from the second member 9433. 9434, a slide rail 9443 disposed on the base member 9434, a base member 9446 that is rectangular and long in front view and connected to the slide rail 9443, and a thread-like wire 9444 that can be freely deformed. It consists of

The first member 8431 includes a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431 and having an inner circumferential surface with a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. The sliding rod member 420 can be slid along the axial direction. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably disposed on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b has a concave groove recessed from the rear side on the left side surface of the upper end side when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9431b1 extending in the vertical direction is provided inside the concave groove. (See FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is disposed to be displaceable in the first member 8431, and is displaceable relative to the first member 8431 by inserting the sliding rod member 420 into the sliding hole at the upper end. , is slidable along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433, , a driving force accompanying the linear movement of the first member 8431 and a driving force accompanying the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the first member 8431. I can do it.

The base member 9434 has a notch 9434c cut out in the front-rear direction on the right side surface of the upper end thereof when viewed from the front, and a disc-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably disposed inside the notch 9434c. Furthermore, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is provided on the front surface of the upper end of the base member 9434, with its expansion and contraction direction being in the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444, which will be described later, and its vertical position is arranged at approximately the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for slidably holding the third member, and is formed from two plates, and the plates are formed to be slidably displaceable from each other. Further, the slide rail 9443 has a coil spring (not shown) disposed inside thereof, and is biased in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The base member 9437 is arranged to be slidable with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back side of the base member 9437 to the slide rail 9443.

The base member 9437 has a groove formed from the back side on the right side of the upper end thereof when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the groove. be done. Further, the connection shaft 9446a is arranged at approximately the same position in the vertical direction as the connection shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displacing the base member 9437 in accordance with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed from piano wire, fishing line, or the like. The wire 9444 has one end connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connection path connecting one end and the other end located between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. (See FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97(a) to 97(c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, and illustrate the transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid. 98(a) is a schematic sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 97(a), and FIG. 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line FIG. 98(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 taken along the line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 97(c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, guide member 419, and drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 98(a), when the left slide member 9430 is placed in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are located at different positions in the front-rear direction. will be placed in Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced without interfering with each other. The space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, and size reduction can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the production area K formed at the center of the game board can be secured.

In addition, when the left slide member 9430 is placed in the retracted position, the biasing force of the slide rail disposed between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move in the left direction with respect to the base member 9434. Although a sliding force acts, by connecting the wire 9444 between the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and by making the connecting path between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, the base member 9434 can move the base member 9446 can be prevented from sliding in the left direction with respect to the base member 9434.

That is, by setting the length of the wire 9444 to the sum of the length of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the thickness direction of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can maintain a state in which they overlap in the front-back direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is placed in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated, and the left pinion gear The left drive gear 471 connected to the left drive gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first side rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slid.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is pivotally supported by the first member 8431 and is meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. is interposed, it is possible to provide the second member 9433 with the driving force associated with the linear movement of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational movement of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slid with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the first member 8431. I can do it.

As a result, the time required to slide the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 into the production area K (shielding state) or retreating from the production area K (open state) can be shortened, and the shielding It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension in the front-rear direction between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 is shifted from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9(a) to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9(b).

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3>L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slid with respect to the base member 9434 by the biasing force of the slide rail 9443 to the extent that the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slid with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slid with respect to the base member 9434 in a state where the speed is increased compared to the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required to slide the base members 9434 and 9446 of the slide unit 9400 into the production area K (shielding state) or retreating from the production area K (open state) can be shortened, and the shielding state and The open state can be switched quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93(c) and 94(c), when the left slide member 9430 is placed in the extended position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b in front view and the right side surface of base member 9434 in front view The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, the left side surface of the base member 9434 when viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base member 9446 when viewed from the front are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged throughout the production area K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, since the base member 9446 can be slid and displaced using the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, the third member 8445 is disposed above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. There's no need to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not disposed, the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 can be reduced, and the space for arranging the base member 8410 is suppressed, resulting in miniaturization. can be achieved.

Next, an elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

First, the overall configuration of a lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99(a) is a front view of the lifting unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the lifting unit 10800, and FIG. 99(c) is a side view of the lifting unit 10800. It is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the combined (extended) position. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and lifting unit 10800) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in the combined state. The same reference numerals are given to the parts, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, an elevating unit 10800 in the tenth embodiment is formed with an elevating member 10820 disposed on a base member 810 so as to be movable up and down. The elevating member 10820 is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and mainly includes a protrusion 821 that protrudes toward the back side and an engaging portion 10822 that is formed to protrude from the back side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged by each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, and is a rectangular protrusion that engages with the rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700. It is formed to protrude from the back side of 10820. The left-right dimension of the engaging portion 10822 is set to be approximately the same as or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing rotating members 435, 455 in the combined state, and is set to be larger than the distance between the opposing rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed to protrude toward the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, each rotating member 435, 455 and the engaging portion 10822 can be brought into contact with each other (see FIG. 102(a)).

Furthermore, the engaging portion 10822 is formed to protrude from the back side of the elevating member 10820 in a rectangular shape, and includes a through hole 10822a that penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member into which the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 700 is inserted, and is formed to have an opening larger than the tip of the protrusion member 735 when viewed from above. Thereby, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the combined state, the tip of the protruding member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102(b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. 101 is the operating unit 10200 in the combined state, FIG. 102(a) is a schematic sectional view of the operating unit 10200 taken along the CIIa-CIIa line in FIG. 101, and FIG. 102(b) is the operating unit 10200 in the combined state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 along the CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are brought into contact with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822 of the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state. (See FIG. 102(a)).

Note that the engaging portion 10822 is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape whose width decreases as it goes downward in rear view. That is, the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99(b)) of the engaging portion 10822 are formed to be inclined toward the center in the left-right direction as they go downward.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined part 10735a is formed on the back side of the protruding member 735, and the protruding distance becomes larger as it goes downward, so that the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined part 10735a can come into contact with each other. .

Therefore, the engaging portion 10822 allows the lifting unit 10800, the sliding unit 400, and the protruding unit 700 to come into contact (connection), so that each movable unit (lifting unit 10800, sliding unit 700, It is possible to suppress occurrence of misalignment in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity between the movable units in the combined state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

To explain in detail, by repeatedly applying a relatively small rotational force to the drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 in a reciprocating manner, the elevating member 10820 is vertically displaced (vibrates) over a relatively small distance.

In this case, each rotating member 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 is brought into contact with the left and right (left and right in FIG. The side in contact with the joining portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 101) of the operating unit 10200.

Note that, in the combined (extended) position, the rotational members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment by their centers of gravity in a direction that displaces the side in contact with the engagement portion 10822 toward the inside in the left-right direction of the operation unit 10200. . Therefore, the rotating members 435, 455 that have been rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820 can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again due to the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700, since the inclined part 10735a is brought into contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging part 10822, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced. The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the engaging portion 10822. Therefore, due to the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a, the distance by which the protrusion member 735 is pushed forward (leftward in FIG. 102(b)) is periodically displaced. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the protruding member 735 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced. Therefore, since there is no need to apply driving force to the other drive motors 763, 475, 476, driving energy can be suppressed.

That is, in the combined (extended) position, the lifting member 10820 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the lifting member 10820 is formed to be able to be periodically displaced. Using the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating members 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect. . Further, in this case, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing them into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displacing the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 is provided, respectively. There's no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Furthermore, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state where they are separated from each other (not in contact with each other), they can be subjected to periodic displacement from the elevating member 10820 without being influenced by each other. can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, respectively.

Further, the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455 can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners without being associated with each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (number of parts and shapes of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, the rotating members 435 and 455 vibrate in different manners. Therefore, the portion formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 of one character can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435, 455 are arranged to be rotatable relative to the base members 434, 454, periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 causes the rotating members 435, 455 to rotate in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis. The rotating member 730 can be configured to periodically repeat an operation of being rotationally displaced, and the rotating member 730 can be configured to periodically repeat an operation of being pushed forward and backward by the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protrusion member 735.

Moreover, since each rotating member 435, 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to a driving source that displaces (vibrates), the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the protruding member 735 is connected to each rotating member 435, 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the protruding member 735 is transmitted via each rotating member 435, 455, so that the driving force is transmitted to the protruding member 735. However, in the tenth embodiment, each rotating member 435, 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to a displacing (vibrating) drive source, so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Furthermore, the elevating member 10820 is disposed at a position in the front and back direction in the combined (extended) position that is more forward than the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435, 455, so that it is disposed on the side closer to the player. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated using the elevating member 10820 on the near side, which is easily visible to the player, as the vibration source, it is possible to perform an effect that easily conveys the impact of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the driver 11761 in the eleventh embodiment when the driver 11761 is disposed at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the driver 11761 in the eleventh embodiment when the driver 11761 is in the second rotation FIG. 7 is a front view of the drive body 761 in a state where it is placed in position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the drive body 761 is configured so that the interposed member 733 is lowered as the drive body 761 rotates to displace the protrusion member 735 to the extended position (a state in which it protrudes from the rotating member 730). 761b is formed, but in the eleventh embodiment, the intervening member 733 is The cam portion 11761b of the driver 11761 is formed so as to rise. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b), the cam portion 11761b of the driver 11761 of the eleventh embodiment is attached to the sliding wall 733c when the driver 11761 is placed at the first rotation position. The cam that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the cam diameter (radius R3) on the cam surface that comes into contact (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter and the driver 11761 is placed at the second rotational position. The cam diameter (radius R4) at the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from position P1 to position P2.

Therefore, when the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intervening member 733) changes from the lowest position to the highest position. When the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the bottom to the top.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter of the cam portion 11761b is increased to the maximum diameter position P2, and the intervening member 733 is pushed upwardly. As a result, the tip of the swinging member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, the manner in which each movable unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced when it is displaced to the combined state will be described. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 104 to 107 sequentially illustrate the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the combined (extended) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

Note that the operation of each movable unit disposed in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the operations will be described as a first operation, a second operation, and a third operation in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 104.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the protrusion unit 700 is slid upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the protruding unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, and the base members 434, 435 of the slide unit 400 are slid toward the center of the gaming machine 10, and the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated approximately 45 degrees. The rotational displacement is performed, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slid downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operating unit 200 in the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed at the center of the operating unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, in the retracted state, the arrangement space for each movable unit can be reduced, and the amount of extension during the extension operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced in the first operation by sliding the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Note that the detailed explanation of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that in the first embodiment, so the detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430, 450 (base members 434, 454) are set to be the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435, 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710. It is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the member 810. Note that in the third state, the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip of the swinging member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is at a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the swinging member 732 is maintained close to the rotating member 11730 until the rotating member 11730 is placed in the combined position (extended position), so that the rotating member 732 does not rotate during the displacement to the combined position. It is possible to prevent the members 435, 455 from interfering with the swinging member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (elevating member 820, rotating members 435, 455, and rotating member 11730) is formed, thereby increasing the production effect.

Furthermore, since the tip of the swinging member 732 is at a lowered position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 can be increased. 455 can be formed large. Therefore, a pattern (character ) can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 (rotating the driver 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operation unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 as the protrusion member 735 is displaced.

Therefore, as the protrusion member 735 of the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in a direction that separates it from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is in the combined (extended) position, by separating the tip of the swinging member 732 from the rotating member 11730, the elevating member 820, the rotating members 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the embodiments described above, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the left slide member 430 (first member 431) contacts (collides with) the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to come into contact with the base member 410.

In this case, the base member 410 is provided with an abutted part, and the abutted part is arranged at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and each part If the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 or variations in the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is The member is brought into contact with the member (that is, the member to be contacted is made to function as a stopper for regulating the displacement of the left slide member 430). By bringing the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the member to be contacted, the impact upon contact is weakened and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), which is the abutment target (the member to which the first member 431 abuts) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), Although a case has been described in which the displacement is a sliding displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431), this is not necessarily the case. The object to which the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) comes into contact must have at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact target may be rotational movement or movement along a curve.

In this way, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in the direction parallel to the direction of sliding displacement of the left sliding member 430 (first member 431), the left sliding member 430 (first member 431) When contacted, the object to be contacted can be moved back (released) by the above-mentioned parallel displacement component, and a buffering effect can be exerted accordingly. In addition, by displacing the contact target in the opposite direction to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the above-mentioned parallel displacement component, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( (starting sliding displacement from a stopped state).

Note that the object to be contacted does not need to be driven by the driving means. Instead of being driven by the driving means, or in addition to being driven by the driving means, it is formed to be biased by a biasing means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, etc.). Also good. In this case, by elastically deforming the biasing means when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) comes into contact with it, the above-mentioned buffering effect can be exerted, and the elastic recovery force of the biasing means can be exerted. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial movement of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600 are arranged substantially simultaneously to the extended position, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is placed in the extended position first, and then the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the extended position (that is, the lower contact part 643 contacts the upper contact part 533 in the stopped state). It may also be something that comes into contact with someone. Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by a change (reduction) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target, and the rebound can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the upper displacement member is the abutting object of the lower displacement member 640 (the object to which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combined) at the extended position). Although the case where 530 is formed to be displaceable has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the abutment target may be stopped (non-displaceable). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by a change (reduction) in the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target, and the rebound can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, in the lower combined unit 600, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the extended position is set to the extended rotational position, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited.

For example, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the extended position may be a vertical rotational position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to abut against the upper displacement member 530 in the extended position. It's okay.

Alternatively, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the extended position may be set to a rotational position between the horizontal rotational position and the vertical rotational position (for example, the rotational position of the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotational position). It may also be a rotated position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to a rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is the extended position of the lower displacement member 640, and in the extended position, the lower displacement member 640 is rotated to the upper displacement member. 530 may be formed.

In any of these configurations, by changing (reducing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target, it is possible to weaken the impact at the time of contact (collision) and suppress rebound.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower combined unit 600, but this is not necessarily the case, and other structures may also be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a cylindrical guide pin is provided protruding from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove in which the guide pin can slide is provided. An example is a structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the extended position by extending the guide pin into the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

In the case of such a structure, at least the component of the displacement (velocity) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the abutment object (the object to which the lower displacement member 640 abuts (combines) at the extended position) is The shape of the guide groove is set so that the guide groove decreases at least in the vicinity of the protruding position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, by changing (reducing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened and rebound is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, a case will be described in which, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, only the lower combined unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed such that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper combined unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) may be formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the abutment target can be reduced. It's okay to be. In this case, the lower combined unit 600 may be turned upside down and provided as the upper combined unit 500.

In the first embodiment described above, in the upper combined unit 500 and the lower combined unit 600, the drive states (supplied power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 are constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant). ), but the invention is not limited to this, and the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543, 672 can be increased or decreased (i.e., the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). It is also possible to increase or decrease the speed. For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least the component of the velocity of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the other member decreases in the vicinity of the extended position, A configuration is illustrated in which the displacement speed of rack member 520 and the rotation speed of drive arm 630 are reduced. Note that the power supply may be reduced for only one of the drive motors 543 and 672, or for both.

In the first embodiment, in the protruding unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intervening member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the driving body 761 come into contact is, when viewed from the front, the rotation of the driving body 761. Although a case has been described in which the position is on a vertical line passing through the center (see FIG. 40), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be set at a position spaced apart from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the intervening member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the intervening member 733 are When the weight of the member 733 is applied to the driver 761 and the protruding member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the driver 761 is rotated in the direction of rotation that raises the swinging member 732 and the intervening member 733. Preferably, the weight of the swinging member 732 and the intervening member 733 is applied to the driving body 761. This is because the load on the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by using the weight of the swinging member 732, the intervening member 733, and the protruding member 735.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the driver 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the protrusion unit 700, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 when the driver 761 is disposed at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. Preferably, the central angle of this predetermined range is set in accordance with the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driver 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swinging member 732 is started can be made to coincide with the timing at which the displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the protruding unit 700, while one of the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735 has an upward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other one is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a displacement (velocity) component downward in the vertical (gravity) direction. ) The case has been described in which the load on the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming the cam part 761b of the drive body 761 so as to have a displacement (velocity) component upward in the direction. The load on the drive motor 763 may be made uniform by combining the cam shape (cam diameter) in the slide hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761).

That is, in a region where the load required to exert an action from the cam part 761b on the sliding wall 733c is relatively large, the load necessary to exert an action from the sliding pin 761c on the sliding hole 735b is relatively large. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so that it is relatively small; The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the movable wall 733c is relatively small.

In the first embodiment described above, in the protrusion unit 700, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 acts as a biasing force in the direction of lowering the protrusion member 735 (slides downward), but this is not necessarily the case. However, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 792 may act as a biasing force in the direction of raising the protruding member 735 (sliding upward). In this case, due to the synergistic effect with the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b described above, the initial speed when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulge portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulge in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases. In this case as well, similarly to the second embodiment, the meshing can be smoothly performed when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is engaged.

Further, bulges may be formed on both sides of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, which are arranged in the vertical direction. In this case, since a bulge is formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive state that is in mesh from the second drive state in which meshing is released, Switching between states can be performed more smoothly.

Furthermore, in this case, by forming bulges whose tooth thickness gradually decreases on both sides of the gears that mesh with each other, the thickness of the bulges (the dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments described above, in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400, when the left slide members 430, 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine) Although the case in which the left slide members 430, 430 are displaced from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described, the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. When the gaming machine is displaced to the central position of the gaming machine, the second driving state may be changed to the first driving state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a, 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are formed into small tooth portions, thereby increasing the rigidity. Although the case where the height is increased is described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the width of the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a may be formed to be large to increase their rigidity.

In this case, similarly to the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. The durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which, in the slide unit 6400, the protrusion 6411a for displacing the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be arranged such that it comes into contact with the operating element 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, but may be formed on any member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400, when the left slide members 6430, 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine) to the extended position (position in the center of the gaming machine) Although the case where the first drive state is displaced from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described in , the case is not limited to this, and the left slide members 6430, 7430 are in the retracted position (position on the left side of the gaming machine). The second drive state may be changed to the first drive state when the player is moved from the second drive state to the extended position (center position of the gaming machine).

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the roller 7465 for displacing the operator 6438 is disposed on the second slide member 7640 in the slide unit 7400. However, the invention is not limited to this. A roller 7645 that provides a displacement is disposed on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the direction of displacement of the left slide member 6430 in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 disposed on the base member 7410. It's okay.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the second member 8433 is larger than the first member 8431. Although the relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be approximately the same, this is not necessarily the case. It is formed smaller or larger than the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, and the distance by which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431, and the distance by which the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433 are determined. The distances may be different from each other.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide units 8400, 9400, when the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432, and the third member 8445, 9445 are slid to the production area K, the production area Although the case where K is made invisible has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a part or all of the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432, and the third member 8445, 9445 , it may be made of a light-transmissive material so that part or all of the presentation area K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the left side surfaces of the base members 8431b and 9431b when viewed from the front and the right side surfaces of the base members 8434 and 9434 when viewed from the front are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. , and the left side surface of the base members 8434, 9434 when viewed from the front and the right side surface of the base members 8446, 9446 when viewed from the front are located at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. The left side surfaces of the members 8431b, 9431b in front view and the right side surfaces of base members 8434, 9434 in front view may be arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the left side surfaces of base members 8434, 9434 in front view and the base The right side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 in front view may be arranged to overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment described above, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position, the manner in which the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 are brought into contact is controlled and sized. Although a case has been described in which the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when the two come closer than the reference position due to variations, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where they regularly collide.

In this case, since the displacement of the rotating members 435, 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member, the displacement operation of the rotating members 435, 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435, 455 are displaced in accordance with the displacement of the base members 434, 454, the drive transmission path from the drive motors 475, 476 is lengthened. Therefore, although it takes time to transmit the stop motion of the drive motors 475, 476, by bringing the rotating members 435, 455 into contact with the swinging member 732 and stopping the displacement motion, they can be quickly stopped at the combined (extended) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protrusion unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 is used to Although a case has been described in which the rotating members 435, 455 are further displaced, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436, 456 disposed on the rotating members 435, 455 are rotated in the opposite direction to the first embodiment. You can also hang it out.

In this case, the second member 436, 456 is arranged in the space formed between the rotating member 435, 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating member 435, 455 and the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 to the combined position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the elevating unit 800, the sliding unit 400, and the protruding unit 11700 are displaced to the combined (extending) position, the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated. Although a case has been described in which the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720) are placed in contact with each other, the present invention is not limited to this. . In this case, since the rotating members 435, 455 and the rotating member 11730 are disposed in contact with each other, the rotating members 435, 455, the rotating member 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the protruding unit 700 are displaced to the combined (extended) position and the rotating members 435, 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact, the rotating member 730 rotates. Although a case has been described in which the rotating members 435, 455 absorb the impact when they collide with the swinging member 732, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced relative to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotating member 730 is connected to a transmission path that transmits the driving force for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is moved relative to the base member 710 where it is difficult to rotate relative to the elevating base 720. By rotating the rotary members 435, 455, it is possible to easily rotate the rotating members 435, 455 when they come into contact with the swinging member 732, so that it is possible to easily absorb the impact when the rotating members 435, 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

In the first embodiment, when the second presentation mode is formed, the rotating member 435 moves at least a portion of the contact portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. Although the rotating member 435 is disposed on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is disposed on the entire portion where the abutting portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the abutment portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 abut. It may be arranged in such a manner that it covers the front side of the. Alternatively, it may be arranged on the front side of the area beyond this.

In this case, since the rotating member 435 makes the contact portion between the upper displacing member 530 and the lower displacing member 640 invisible to the player, the upper displacing member 530, the lower displacing member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be arranged in one pattern. This can be easily recognized by players. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second performance mode and losing interest.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 156. In the pachinko machine 10 shown in this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a substantially central area of the game board 13, and a first prize opening 64 is provided below the variable display device unit 80. Furthermore, a through gate 66 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13 (hereinafter referred to as the right side area) where the ball shot so as to jump over the variable display unit 80 flows down along the outer rail 77. The second winning hole 140 and the second winning hole 140 are variable between an open state in which a ball can enter the second winning hole 140 and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the open state. an electric accessory 140a, a specific winning opening 65a, an open state that allows a ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and a closed state that makes it more difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a than the open state. A variable prize winning device 65 is provided which can be varied.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example in which the game board 13 is configured as described above, a special symbol lottery is executed based on a ball entering the first winning hole 64, and a special symbol lottery is executed based on the lottery result. A variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the variably displayed third symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, "7.7.7"), a jackpot game (a bonus game) advantageous to the player is executed.

When a jackpot game is executed, an operation is performed in which the specific prize opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), so that the player can play a game (hereinafter referred to as a game) aiming at the right side area of the game board 13. , referred to as a right-handed game), and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65. When one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls, so the player can win many prize balls during the jackpot game.

As mentioned above, in the normal game state where a jackpot game is not executed, a game is performed in which a ball enters the first prize opening 64, and in the jackpot game state where a jackpot game is executed, it is variable by a right-handed game. The player will aim for the winning device 65. Therefore, by varying the area in which the ball is fired depending on the game state, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she is playing a game.

Further, the variable winning device 65, whose opening operation is performed during the jackpot game, is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 through which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a can pass. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110, but there are two paths in the variable prize winning device 65 through which the ball that enters can pass, and the ball that flows down one of the paths It is configured to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. Then, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state (hereinafter referred to as the probability change state) is a game state in which the lottery result of the special symbol is likely to become a jackpot as a game state advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game. ) will be given.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is provided with a right side area unit (not shown) into which balls that are fired in a right-handed game and have passed through the through gate 66 provided on the right side area of the game board 13 flow into the pachinko machine 10. There is. This right area unit is provided with a croon, which serves as a distribution means for distributing incoming balls into a plurality of routes, and is formed with three discharge holes through which the balls can pass. Of the three discharge holes formed in this croon, the ball that has passed through one discharge hole flows down the first path and is guided to the second prize opening 140. The balls that do not enter the second winning hole 140 are guided to a specific general winning hole (not shown) provided further downstream of the first path. On the other hand, the balls that have passed through the other two discharge holes among the three discharge holes formed in the croon flow down the second path and are guided to the variable prize winning device 65. The balls that have not entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 are ejected from the second path as they are, pass through the first out port 71, and are ejected from the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

With this configuration, for example, during a jackpot game, a ball that can enter the second winning hole 140 or a specific general winning hole and a ball that can enter the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 can be generated at the same time. This has the effect of making it possible to complicate the flow of balls during a jackpot game, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that prize balls are paid out when balls enter the second winning opening 140 or a specific general winning opening, it is possible to receive prize balls paid out when balls enter multiple winning openings during a jackpot game. This has the effect of increasing the number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a jackpot, and motivating the player to play the game.

Furthermore, an effect may be executed based on the number of balls that entered the specified general prize opening during the jackpot game, for example, when the number of balls that entered the specified general prize opening during the jackpot game exceeded a predetermined number. It is a good idea to perform the performance based on this. In this case, a jackpot in which the jackpot game is executed for a long time (a jackpot with a large number of rounds, or a jackpot where it is difficult to enter the special winning hole 65a) can increase the number of balls that enter the specific general winning hole. Even if a situation occurs in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during a jackpot game, the player can be given a benefit.

In addition, during a jackpot game, during a period when it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, that is, during a period when the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state (opening period, interval period, or ending period), when the ball enters the specific general winning hole. It may be configured such that the effect is executed based on the ball entering the ball. This allows the player to perform a game in which balls are continuously fired during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing.

As mentioned above, in addition to the performance based on the ball entering the specified general prize opening during the jackpot game, the performance (notification) is performed when the ball does not enter the specified general prize opening during the jackpot game. For example, by playing a right-handed game during a jackpot game, a ball that can enter the specific winning slot 65a and a ball that can enter the specific general winning slot at a predetermined ratio (for example, 3 to 1) may be set. In the case where a sorting member for sorting balls is provided, if it is determined that the ball did not enter the specified general prize opening during a jackpot game or during one round of a jackpot game, may be notified. As a result, it is possible to detect at an early stage a case where a jackpot game is not executed due to a normal right-handed game, or an abnormality in various devices (distributing members, etc.) provided on the game board 13.

In addition, the ball that has flown into the right side area unit (not shown) can pass through the middle of the path until it reaches the croon, as a means of changing the falling position to make the position at which the ball falls into the croon indefinite. A moving member having a path is provided. This moving member is configured to reciprocate within a predetermined range (approximately 5 cm) in the left-right direction of the game board 13 (left-right direction from the perspective of FIG. 2) by a motor (not shown), and the timing when the ball flows into the moving member is determined. The position at which it is ejected (the position at which it falls into the croon) can be varied. In this way, by providing the moving member, which is the falling position changing means, above the croon, which is the distribution means, it is possible to complicate the movement of the ball on the croon. The moving speed of the above-mentioned moving member is preferably set to such a speed that when the successively shot balls fall onto the croon, the falling positions are separated by 10 mm or more. By setting in this way, it becomes possible to suppress damage to the device due to balls that successively fall onto the croon colliding with each other and bouncing back. Furthermore, even if the distance between the croon and the moving member is shortened (for example, about 15 mm), it is possible to prevent balls that fall first from interfering with balls that fall later, resulting in ball jams. It becomes possible.

Although the Pachinko machine 10 of this control example uses a Kroon-shaped mechanism as the distribution means, any configuration that can distribute the balls into multiple paths may be sufficient. It is also possible to use a flow path switching member that switches the flow direction of the ball, or a switching member that electrically switches the flow path of the ball. Furthermore, in this control example, a moving member is used as a falling position changing means so that the position where the ball falls on the croon is not fixed, but any configuration that can change the falling position of the ball may be used, for example, The configuration may be such that the croon itself is moved.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends, if the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned probability change state will be entered; If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 at 65, the game enters a normal game state in which the player aims at the first prize opening 64.

Here, in the variable probability state in this control example, as described above, there is a high probability that the special symbol lottery result will be a jackpot, and a lottery result in which the normal symbol, which is executed by passing through the through gate 66, will be a jackpot. The probability is also set to be high. Further, the time it takes for the special symbol and normal symbol lottery results to be finalized (hereinafter referred to as variable time) is also set to be shorter than in the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability change state in this control example is set to continue until the special symbol lottery result becomes a lottery result other than the jackpot 100 times in a row after the end of the jackpot game, After consecutive wins other than the jackpot, the game is set to shift from the variable probability state to the normal gaming state. In this way, by setting a limit on the period during which a variable probability state that is advantageous to the player continues, the player can be motivated to play the game in hopes of winning the jackpot, and the interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that it can be done. The period for which the variable probability state continues may be set to something other than this, for example, it may continue until the next jackpot is won, or it may be set at the same timing as the special symbol lottery. A transition lottery may be performed to transition the variable probability state to the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the period during which the variable probability state continues may be set in terms of time.

Furthermore, in the probability variable state of this control example, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a that is driven to open when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 66 is in the normal game state. The opening pattern is set to be more advantageous to the player. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 125, but the opening pattern of the electric accessory 140a set during the probability change state is such that the ball enters the second prize opening 140 more than the opening pattern set during the normal gaming state. It is set so that the period of open state during which ball entry is possible becomes longer.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to execute a right-handed game in a variable probability state, and to efficiently execute the game by aiming at the through gate 66 and the second prize opening. has been done. Therefore, it is only necessary to continue playing the right-handed game during the period from the start of the jackpot game until the end of the variable probability state, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand gaming properties.

<About the variable winning device in this control example>
Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 described above will be explained with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of this variable prize winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 108, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 65b. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an LED board 65d arranged, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening/closing door 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening/closing unit 65f that has been opened and closed, the channel cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a channel, and the game device that protrudes into the channel formed by the back cover body 65e and the channel cover body 65g. A switching member 65h that switches the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and a back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the side and actuating the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65. FIG. 109(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 109(b) is a sectional view of the variable winning device 65 along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 109(b), the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined to the lower left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 109(b). The bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. The game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 are guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 110(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the opening of the specific prize opening 65a can be opened in an open state in which a game ball can enter, or in an open state in which a game ball cannot enter, by means of an opening/closing door 65f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can come in and out from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from the specific winning opening 65a by being retreated inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second winning opening 140 side. It is composed of Therefore, even during a time-saving game (including during a variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening 140 while keeping it in a right-handed state, and immediately change the gaming method to left-handed hitting after playing a jackpot game. It can reduce the effort required to make changes. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 109(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 109(b). As shown in FIG. 109(a), the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

Referring to FIG. 110, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 110(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 65e2. As shown in FIG. 110(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game ball, and the channel cover body 65g It is rotatably pivoted from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 110(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. Ru. The game balls that have passed through the special discharge channel 65e2 are detected by a variable rate switch 65e3 that is configured with a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of game balls provided in the special discharge channel 65e2, and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as out balls. be done.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a high probability gaming state (probability variation switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game). (gaming state). That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for granting a variable probability gaming state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after a jackpot into a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) or a variable probability gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed depending on the falling route of the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game, so it is possible to improve the player's interest even during the jackpot game. . The time required for passing from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guiding piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set depending on the jackpot type. In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round. Furthermore, when the jackpot B is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the variable winning device 65 at the start of the 13th round.

Therefore, in jackpot A, the winning game ball in the variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in jackpot B, it is configured to be impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. There is. Therefore, it is possible to control the variable probability award ratio depending on the type of jackpot, and it is possible to configure the system so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

With reference to FIG. 110(b), a case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1 will be described. FIG. 110(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h is blocking the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge channel 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 is provided which is constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball. Thereby, whether all the game balls that entered the variable winning device 65 have been ejected can be determined based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of winning in the 13th round without the game ball that won 13 rounds before being ejected, and winning in the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is a jackpot B.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player is given a prize ball (in this embodiment, 15 points per ball won) as a bonus. You can pay out prize balls). In addition, by using the detected game ball, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, thereby making it possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to give a variable probability gaming state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole for granting variable probability gaming states separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 111(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 111(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol made of a wooden box, among which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, for the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8), attached designs imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. Small even numbers are added in green to the lower right side of the attached symbol, and are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is configured so that the jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. Furthermore, if it is a "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, a predetermined combination of main symbols indicating a small hit (for example, on the active line L1, the main symbol combinations are "3" and "4" in order from the left symbol row Z1). "1") is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with the lower two-thirds being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is variably displayed, and the other part being the main display area Dm. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows of upper, middle, and lower rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that entered the first winning hole 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 111(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to lead to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A preview performance will be held.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning hole 64 while a variable display is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of balls entered will be suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one pending pitch number symbol is displayed for each pending pitch number symbol, and the number of pending pitches is displayed according to the displayed number of the pending pitch symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved pitches is one, and when four reserved pitch number symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved pitches is 1. Indicates that there are four pitches. Further, if the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, this indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there are no reserved balls.

In addition, in this control example, the ball entering the first prize opening 64 is configured to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a mode that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Further, in this control example, the display form of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to differ depending on the effect display being executed. Therefore, when the same reference numerals are given in the description of each production described below, it indicates that the display or area has the same function, and if the location (display form) where the display or area is placed is different. The same reference numerals will also be used for explanation.

Continuing, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the display mode of the performance executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the reach navigation effect executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol. ) and FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect display mode of the reach navigation effect. This Reach Navi performance allows the player to visually grasp the progress of the performance (starring appearance) performed according to a predetermined variation pattern (Super Reach or Special Reach), and notifies or suggests it in stages. It is a production (side production). In this way, by displaying the contents of the main character (explanation of the main character's performance, variable time, and expectation level for a jackpot) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 using the sub-effects, the player is informed. Easy-to-understand games can be provided.

Next, the reach navigation performance will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 112(a). As shown in FIG. 112(a), when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is selected on the third symbol display device 81, a third symbol is provided on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. The screen is reduced to a small area Dm5 and displayed in a variable manner, and the main character based on the variable pattern is executed in the main display area Dm. Then, reach navigation performance, which is a sub-performance, is executed in the small area Dm4 provided on the lower left side of the main display area Dm.

This small area Dm4 includes, as an image constituting the reach navigation effect, a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the period in which the starring role is executed, a character Dm4b that serves as a moving display section that visually indicates the progress of the starring role, and a character Dm4b that serves as a moving display section that visually indicates the progress of the starring role. A notification section Dm4c that notifies at least a part of the performance result, and guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e that guide at least a part of the performance result of the main character are displayed.

The time gauge Dm4a is a gauge for indicating the period during which the main character appears, and is displayed so that the character Dm4b, which is a moving display section, advances from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. A notification section Dm4c is displayed at the right end of this time gauge Dm4a, and when a character Dm4b moving in response to the main appearance executed in the main display area Dm reaches the notification section Dm4c, the notification section Dm4c displays the notification contents. is stopped and displayed. In this control example, the time gauge Dm4a is used as a period display section for indicating the period in which the main character is performed, but other displays may be used. The process of creating a product or dish may be displayed.

The character Dm4b is a moving display unit that moves in accordance with the progress of the main character, and is displayed to move at a constant speed on the time gauge Dm4a from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 112. In this way, by moving the character Dm4b at a constant speed on the time gauge Dm4a, the player can predict the time until the character Dm4b reaches the goal (right end) of the time gauge Dm4a. In the diagram shown in FIG. 112(a), only an image imitating a rabbit is displayed as the character Dm4b, but in reality, a plurality of character images are stored that move at different speeds on the time gauge Dm4a. The length of the time gauge Dm4a and the character to be selected are controlled to be set based on the length of the selected main character appearance (length of variable time).

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data for displaying sub effects in the pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of variation patterns (main characters) with different variation times. In addition, the expectation level that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main character, which is executed by changing the display mode (for example, color) of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display part, and the effects attached to the character, is a jackpot. Alternatively, the display mode of the selected character may indicate the destination of the main character. As a result, it is possible to have both the function of notifying the progress of the starring role and the function of suggesting the result of the starring role, and it is possible to perform a production display with a high production effect.

The notification unit Dm4c is for notifying the result of the performance of the main character, and a rotating display that rotates in the left-right direction on the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112(b)) is performed. The notification part Dm4c is configured to be able to display indicators indicating the performance results of the main character on both sides, and when the rotating display of the notification part Dm4c stops, the performance results of the main character can be indicated by the index that is stopped and displayed in the small area Dm4. will be notified.

In this pachinko machine 10, as an indicator for notifying the performance result of the leading role, "V" is an indicator indicating a jackpot, "x" is an indicator indicating a loss, and "Development" is an indicator that indicates that the production will continue to be performed, and "?" is an indicator that indicates that the results of the production of the lead role will not be announced. An indicator is selected, and one indicator (for example, "V") is displayed on one side of the notification section Dm4c, and another indicator (for example, "?") is displayed on the other side, and is rotated and displayed.

With this configuration, for example, if the notifier Dm4c is rotated and displayed with a "V" indicator and an "x" indicator displayed on both sides of the notifier Dm4c, the character Dm4b will When reaching part Dm4c, it will be announced in advance that there will be no further development, that is, the production time of the current starring appearance (the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the starring appearance) will be known in advance. Therefore, the main characters can be displayed in a way that is easy for players to understand. Also, if the notifier Dm4c is rotated with the "V" indicator and the "development" indicator displayed on both sides of the notifier Dm4c, a jackpot will be won when the character Dm4b reaches the notifier Dm4c. Since the player is notified in advance that either the character Dm4b will reach the notification part Dm4c or the lead role will further develop from there, the player can look forward to it at a predetermined timing (timing when the character Dm4b reaches the notification part Dm4c). However, you can watch the lead role with confidence.

Note that although this control example uses a configuration in which the player can grasp the multiple indicators by rotating and displaying them, other configurations may be used to allow the player to grasp the multiple indicators. For example, a configuration in which multiple indicators are displayed in a switching manner on the notification section Dm4c, or a configuration in which multiple indicators are simultaneously displayed on the notification section Dm4c and the index desired to be selected in the current performance is deleted as time passes is used. It's okay.

The guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle of the period indicated by the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b arrives, a guide display indicating the content of the current lead performance is executed. When the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e, the word "chance" is displayed or rotated, for example, as an effect that suggests that the result of this starring role will be a jackpot. The indicator attached to the current notification unit Dm4c is switched. In this way, by providing the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the progress of the main character appearance, it becomes possible to inform the player of information based on the result of the main character appearance in stages, so that the player The user can always watch the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the guidance display section can notify a guidance display suggesting the result of the starring appearance and a guidance display suggesting the period of the starring appearance at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e. Because of this configuration, it is possible to diversify the information that is notified to the player on the guide display section. Although the present pachinko machine 10 is provided with two guide display sections, it may be provided with one guide display section or with three or more guide display sections.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112(b) and FIGS. 113(a) to 113(c), display modes at each timing of the above-mentioned reach navigation performance will be described. FIG. 112(b) is a diagram showing an example of the small area Dm4 after the reach navigation performance has started, and FIG. FIG. 113(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the Reach Navi performance continues, and FIG. 113(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating that the Reach Navi performance continues. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(b), when the reach navigation effect is executed, a moving display is executed in which the character Dm4b moves from the left side to the right side (from the starting point to the ending point) on the time gauge Dm4a. Further, the notification unit Dm4c executes a rotating display that allows the player to visually recognize the indicators displayed on both sides of the notification unit Dm4c. By executing the reach navigation performance in this manner, information regarding the performance period of the starring appearance and the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the starring appearance is provided to the player during the stage of the starring appearance executed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to notify in advance (before the special symbol lottery results are displayed).

Furthermore, in FIG. 112(b), the character Dm4b appears below the guide display area Dm4d! ! ' is displayed. This is a display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of this special symbol will be a jackpot, and is displayed in the small area Dm4 at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4c as described above. In this way, by providing the guide display section Dm4d on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to tell the player at what timing the display indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the current special symbol will be a jackpot will be executed. It becomes possible to notify in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

Further, in this pachinko machine 10, as described above, the display content of the indicator displayed on the notification section Dm4c at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4d, Dm4e is also configured to be changeable. As a result, for example, at the timing when the reach navigation effect was executed, two indicators "V" and "x" were displayed on the notification section Dm4c, but at the timing when the character Dm4b reached the guide display section Dm4d, It becomes possible to switch the indicator displayed on the notification section Dm4c to display two indicators, "V" and "development". By changing the display contents of the notification section Dm4c at a predetermined timing (timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4d) in this way, it is possible to diversify the presentation contents of the reach navigation presentation, which is a sub-performance, and improve the game. It has the effect of suppressing early boredom.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113(a), a case will be described in which the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c in the reach navigation performance. As shown in FIG. 113(a), when the character Dm4b reaches the notification section Dm4c, the rotating display of the notification section Dm4c is stopped, and the indicator "?" displayed on one side of the notification section Dm4c is moved to the small area Dm4. Stop display. When this "?" indicator is displayed, next, as shown in FIG. 113(b), an effect is executed in which the character Dm4b is blown away and returned to the point where the guide display part Dm4d is provided on the time gauge Dm4a. Ru.

The indicator "?" displayed in the notification section Dm4c is an indicator that prevents the player from knowing whether the main character will end at this timing or continue, and if the current main character does not develop, After the effect display in (b), the effect ends without the character Dm4b getting up. On the other hand, if the current lead role develops and continues further, the reach navigation effect in which the character Dm4b stands up and moves on the time gauge Dm4a again is executed as shown in FIG. 113(c). In this case, the display mode of the character Dm4b (the display mode of the peripheral effects of the character Dm4b) is changed so that the player can understand that the reach navigation performance corresponding to the developed lead role is being executed.

Note that the position to which the character Dm4b shown in FIG. 113(b) is returned is determined based on the period of the main character's appearance after development. Specifically, if the time it takes for the character Dm4b to move on the time gauge Dm4a and reach the notification part Dm4c is 20 seconds, and it is the time of the main character appearance after development (the remaining period of the main character appearance is 10 seconds), the time The gauge Dm4a is returned to the center position. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to display the reach navigation performance corresponding to the main character appearance after development using the time gauge Dm4a and the movement speed of the character Dm4b corresponding to the main character appearance before development. It becomes possible to reduce the amount of data required to execute a certain reach navigation effect.

Furthermore, it is possible for the player to predict the period in which the character will appear as the main character after development, based on the position to which the character Dm4b has been returned. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a long variable time is easily selected when the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, so the closer the character Dm4b is returned to the starting point side of the time gauge Dm4a, the more the jackpot is won. This has the effect of making the player think that he or she has won, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, if the indicator displayed on the notification section Dm4c is "?", the player is not informed whether or not the current lead role will be developed, so the player may feel that the character Dm4b has been returned. After confirming the position (after predicting the performance period in case of development), the player will pay close attention to the performance as to whether or not the character Dm4b will stand up. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect of the reach navigation presentation can be enhanced.

As explained above, in the reach navigation performance used in this embodiment, it is possible to notify the player in advance of information regarding the starring appearance, which is a performance that shows the lottery result of the special symbol. This has the effect of allowing the viewer to watch the lead role while predicting where the lead character will proceed. Furthermore, by displaying information regarding the lead role in stages, it is possible to make the player continuously watch the performance, which has the effect of further improving the performance effect.

Note that the reach navigation performance described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 is just an example, and the reach navigation performance used in this control example includes various other performance displays. For example, in the above-mentioned reach navigation performance, a character imitating a rabbit is used as the moving display unit, but other characters such as a character imitating a turtle or a character imitating a person can be displayed. In this way, when selecting a character to be used in the current reach navigation performance from among a plurality of characters, it is determined based on the lottery results of special symbols and the content of the main character performance to be executed. Thereby, it is possible to make the display contents of the main character and the sub-effects relevant, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the character be displayed in the reach navigation performance that is the sub-performance before the character is displayed in the lead role. This has the effect that the contents of the lead role can be grasped in advance by viewing the ReachNavi production, and the production effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, the movement speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation performance executed in response to the lead appearance before development may be different from the movement speed of the character Dm4b in the reach navigation performance executed in response to the lead appearance after development. . As a result, the period of the main character appearance after development is notified based on the position where the character is returned and the movement speed of the character Dm4b, so the production period of the main character appearance after development can be easily grasped. It has the effect of suppressing the

Furthermore, the degree of expectation for the development of the main character may be indicated by the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. Specifically, an area with high and low expectations for development is provided on the time gauge Dm4a, and when the character Dm4b is returned to an area with high expectations for development, there is a high probability that the lead character will develop. good. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the position to which the character Dm4b is returned, and has the effect of further enhancing the performance effect.

Next, each counter will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 114. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 299). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 129).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated in the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first winning random number table is used for times when the special symbol has a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a jackpot than when the probability is low (the period when the special symbol is in a low probability state). The number of random numbers included in each type of game is set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbols with high probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbols with low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any one of "0 to 9". It is determined whether there is one, and if it is one of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "9", and if it is "9", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a miss of the special symbol, then The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, it corresponds to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode will be the one when the special symbol hits the jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the probability of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is low, there is one random value that becomes a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random value "0" is used for the low probability. is stored in the first random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that the special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers that result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 10 out of a total of 400 random numbers, so the probability that a special symbol will be a jackpot is "1/40".

In addition, if the random value that results in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for low probability times and the random value that results in a jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability times, there is a duplicate value. To avoid this, you may set a random value for each jackpot. If there is a value that is always used as a random number value for a jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be inputted from the outside and that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of special symbols or a low probability state of special symbols), by changing the random number value that becomes a jackpot, it is possible to win a jackpot with a special symbol. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in this first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is any one of "0 to 29", the jackpot type becomes "jackpot A". Further, when the random number value is any one of "30 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B". In this control example, there are two types of jackpots, but the jackpot is not limited thereto, and may be one type or may be configured to have two or more types. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, it is possible to make winning in the high-probability gaming state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the player play the game for a longer period of time.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of a miss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the reach symbol. ” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and “completely off” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is stored in area 203a. At the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, it is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Note that the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for special symbols with high probability and one for special symbols with low probability, and the range of random values set for each stop type of miss depending on the table. is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so in order to prevent more reach effects than necessary from being selected, the table for high probability states has a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed". is selected, and "completely off" is more likely to be selected. In addition, in a low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64, the random value range corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is narrow from 0 to 79 for low probability situations. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely off" to be selected.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 129) to be described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "missing (long time)", "missing (short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", and various "missing super reach" are defined as variation patterns for missing. , various types of ``normal reach'' and various types of ``super reach'' are defined as fluctuation patterns of jackpot A. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). Although not shown in the figure, a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and a more detailed fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is set in the audio lamp control device 113. The pattern contents are selected from the variable pattern selection table 222a.

The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66. , is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The random number value for winning the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set by the normal symbol winning random number table (not shown). If it matches the random number value set in the hit random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol has won. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for times when the probability of a normal symbol is low (period when the normal symbol is in its normal state) and when the probability is high that the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than when the probability is low (period when the regular symbol is in the normal state). It is divided into two types: one for short-time periods and one for short-time periods, and the number of random numbers that become jackpots included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high. In addition, in this control example, the normal symbols are also set to high probability at the timing when the special symbols shift to the high probability state, and the normal symbols are also set to low probability at the timing when the special symbols shift to the low probability state. It is stipulated that In other words, there is no game state in which special symbols have a low probability and normal symbols have a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for low probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a normal symbol will be a hit is "1/10".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the value of the second random winning counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Runs for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol "○" is displayed as being illuminated, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x once". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 will be activated once for 0.2 seconds. '', but you can set the opening time and number of times as you like. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers for winning the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per normal symbol for high probability times. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability that a normal symbol will be a hit is "1/1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 66 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device. Executes for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The symbol "○" is displayed as being illuminated, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened "twice for one second". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability is low for normal symbols. Since the release period of the electric accessory 140a becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140. A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit based on the value (random number) of the second random number counter C4. In addition, in this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, if the normal symbol wins, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 will be activated only for "1 second x 2 times". It is opened, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 129).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device (not shown).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 in this control example will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117.

FIG. 115(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 115(a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. There is.

Here, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 116(a). FIG. 116(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) is a table in which the random number values that result in a jackpot for a special symbol are defined. When the random number specified in the first winning random number table 202a and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning random number table 202a includes a jackpot determination value (jackpot determination value at low probability) for determining whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low, and a jackpot determination value when the probability of the special symbol is high. A jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment value at high probability) is provided for determining whether or not it is a jackpot, and the number of jackpot judgment values (random numbers) for each jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of determination values (random numbers) for a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

Next, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG. 116(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 116(b)) is set so that jackpot A and jackpot B can be selected in accordance with the types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). has been done. Specifically, in special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as "0 to 49" as the determination value for jackpot A, "50 to 99" as the determination value for jackpot B, and in special symbol 2, the determination value for jackpot B is set as "50 to 99". The value (0 to 99) of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the determination value of A.

Here, as described above, "Jackpot A" is configured such that the winning game ball in the variable winning device 65 can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 (i.e., it is determined whether or not it will be in a variable probability state. However, in "Jackpot B", it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 (that is, it is not determined whether or not the probability variable state will occur).

Furthermore, it is stipulated that the distribution of jackpot types is different between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, with 50% of the jackpots selected for special symbol 1 being "jackpot A" and 50% for special symbol 2. Of these, "Jackpot A" is configured to be selected 100% of the time. Here, the special symbol 2 is a symbol in which a lottery is executed when a ball enters the second winning hole 140, as described above, and in a normal gaming state, a lottery is hardly executed, and the second The lottery is executed in a state where the probability of a ball entering the winning hole 140 is variable. In this control example, if the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without hitting the jackpot once after entering the variable probability state, the system is configured to shift to the normal gaming state. By continuing to win the jackpot again until the special symbol lottery is held 100 times, it becomes possible to repeatedly play the game with variable probability. Therefore, even after the player enters the variable probability state, the player plays the game with enthusiasm in order to win the next jackpot as soon as possible, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 116(c). FIG. 116(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 116(c)) is a data table in which winning determination values of normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 116(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low (during the normal state of normal symbols), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In this case, it is determined that the symbol is a hit. As mentioned above, if it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the "○" symbol will light up as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device (not shown) ends. At the same time as being displayed, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x once".

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 117. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

This variation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117(a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 117(b)), a loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 117(c)), At least a deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 117(d)) is defined.

With reference to FIG. 117(b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the variation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50" is "51 to 179" for the variation patterns of super reach (60 seconds), and for the variation patterns of special reach (90 seconds). ), "180 to 198" are respectively set as determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When selecting a variation pattern when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS1 value is set as a jackpot. from the variable pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 117(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as mentioned above, the stop type is determined from the stop type selection table (not shown) as whether it is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", miss reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete error, a short error with a relatively short variation time (7 seconds) and a long error with a long variation time (10 seconds) are set. The determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to ``0-98'' for a short error (7 seconds), and ``99-198'' for a long error (10 seconds).

In addition, for missed reaches, "0 to 149" for various types of missed normal reaches (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for various types of missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "150 to 197" for missed special reaches (60 seconds) "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the normal gaming state, and changes the variation obtained from the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

FIG. 117(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3. This losing (probability variable) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that becomes a loss when the gaming state is a probability variable gaming state. This deviation (probable) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

As mentioned above, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete failure is determined. , if it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out reach is determined.

In this way, when the game is in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is a miss is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that when the probability changes, the fluctuation time of a loss becomes long, and the period until a jackpot is reached becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is delayed during the variable probability game state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 115, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 115(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 115(b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203b. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variable setting flag 203h, probability variable passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203p, variable probability It has at least a valid flag 203q, a variable probability valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a variable probability counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first prize opening 64. The respective values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning a prize are respectively stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (first holding area). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores the values of a first win random number counter C1, a first win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. This is a storage area for the second winning hole 140 (second special symbol), and the first winning hole 64 (first special symbol) is the storage area for the second winning hole 140 (second special symbol). The only difference is that it is changed to a second special symbol), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 66, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, winnings stored in other holding areas Shift processing is performed to shift the data to a reservation area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first prize opening 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the number of reserved balls counter 203d increases by 1 until the maximum value of 4. are added (see S404 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 122).

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs a variable display (third This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second winning hole 140 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it increases by 1 until the maximum value of 4. are added (see S410 in FIG. 124). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 122).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times of reservation of variable display in the first special symbol N1) or the value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of reservation of variable display in the first special symbol N2) is , the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the held pitch count command (see S206, S211 in FIG. 122, S405, S411 in FIG. 124). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e is changed. be.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the main control device by a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of balls held in the variable display held in 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if the number of held pitches deviates from the actual fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received command for the number of held pitches.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol (reserved symbol) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f measures the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 66. This is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 66 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (see S505 in FIG. 125).

When the ball passes through the through gate 66, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S605 in FIG. 126). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the through gate 66, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S603 in FIG. 126: No).

The variable probability setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the variable probability gaming state is determined by whether or not a game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Here, when a game ball passes through this probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1412 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, although not shown in the drawing, the probability variation counter 203t is set to OFF based on the probability change counter 203t being set to ON. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

In addition, if the variable rate setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the variable rate switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that the variable rate switch 65e3 has passed, the variable rate setting flag 203h is set to ON. 203h may be formally set to ON and then restored. In this case, it can be determined whether the variable probability switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether a variable probability passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the gaming parlor side by determining fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to on while the power is turned off and then turning the power back on. can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 (see FIG. 110) in one round during the jackpot game (in this control example, 13 rounds in jackpot A). . In addition, it can be determined whether all the game balls that won in the specific winning hole 65a have been ejected by the sum of this variable passing counter 203i and the ejected number counter 203s, which will be described later. This variable probability passage counter 203i is updated by incrementing by 1 when the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed (see S1411 in FIG. 1348). Further, after executing a process to check whether the number of winning game balls and the number of ejected balls match the variable winning device 65, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 135). Note that this probability variable passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won into the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball is detected to have passed through the detection switch 65c1 (see FIG. 134) provided in the variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (see S1403 in FIG. 134). ). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the number of winnings counter 203j) and the number of winnings (the total value of the number of winnings counter 203s and the variable passing counter 203i) are the same. After determining whether the value is correct, it is reset to the initial value "0". Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting the time during which the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, in jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in jackpot B, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Set. In the operation counter 203k, for jackpot A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 13th round, and for jackpot B, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. Note that this operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in an initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control winnings to the probability variable switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing to output a notification effect (in this control example, a voice saying "Look at the liquid crystal") to attract the player's attention. In this control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (30 seconds have elapsed since 10 balls hit the variable winning device 65). This notification counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated by the process of S1302 of the notification process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 133). Based on the fact that the notification counter 203m becomes 0, a notification command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 is set. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this command, it executes the process for outputting the audio described above.

With this configuration, before the start of the 13th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output, so the player can watch the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal display. Keep an eye on 81. Here, although the details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to look at the third symbol display device 81. The word "Attention" is displayed as an alert. In the 13th round, the channel solenoid 65k operates, so if the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined based on the operating period of the channel solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to maintain the expectation that the variable probability game state will be given to the player until the end of the jackpot game, the player can control the movement of the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. An announcement is being made that makes it difficult to see. However, when the 12th round ends, there is a risk that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. A notification effect will be executed. Thereby, the player's attention can be drawn to the displayed content after the interval performance is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In this control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by notifying the user to show the third symbol display device 81. However, the present control example is not limited to this. By notifying the player to place his or her hand over the device 65, the player may be notified of the movement of the switching member 65h so that it is hidden by the player's hand. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and a configuration may be adopted in which the player's attention is diverted by notifying the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Furthermore, during the 12th round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed and a notification urging the player to read it with a mobile phone may be configured to distract the player's attention. In this control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the distraction effect. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem in which it is determined whether it is a jackpot A or a jackpot B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed in one round and the abnormality processing described below can be executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, a remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is updated by incrementing the remaining ball timer 203p by one. The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed. is the counter.

The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the winning game ball to be ejected from the variable winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether the time has elapsed. In this control example, the time required for the variable winning device 65 to eject a winning game ball is 2 seconds, and in this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance to the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203p. is set as . Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203p has reached its upper limit (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether the number of winnings entered into the variable winning device 65 and the number of winnings ejected match. S1507 in FIG. 135). If they do not match, an error command is set and this fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to inform the user at an early stage that game balls are stuck in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, by illegally leaving the game ball in the variable prize winning device 65 and applying an impact at the start timing of the 13th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than it actually does, resulting in a jackpot B. It is also possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. Since this remaining ball timer 203p is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the next round starts, the next round game will be executed and a new game will be played by the time the remaining ball timer 203p reaches the upper limit value. There is no chance of winning a prize.

In addition, if the winning number and the number of ejected pieces do not match, a dedicated flag is set to on, and if the flag is on, even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is not activated. A configuration may be configured in which this setting is not set to on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the unfair granting of variable probability gaming states.

The variable probability valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not to make the passage valid when the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When this probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON, the game ball that last won into the specific winning opening 65a passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. This indicates that no amount of time has passed. That is, it shows that it is a period in which it is possible for a game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation validity flag 203q described above is set to ON. This variable validity timer 203r can determine the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variable effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed after that, it will be determined as fraudulent and will not be determined as passing.

As a result, it is possible to illegally change the switching member 65h and cause the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, or push the game ball up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable variable switch 65e3 to cause the game ball to pass through the variable variable switch 65e3, Damage caused by fraud, such as radio waves causing magnetic sensors to falsely detect passage, can be suppressed.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 110) in one round. This ejected number counter 203s is reset to the initial value 0 after the number of winning game balls and the ejected number are determined by the variable winning device 65 (S1511 in FIG. 135).

The probability variation counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. This probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is on at the end of the jackpot game (S1203 in FIG. 132), and is referred to when selecting the jackpot random number table to be referred to when drawing a special symbol. (S213 in FIG. 123), and 1 is subtracted when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (S221 in FIG. 122).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208 consisting of a switch group, a sensor group, etc. (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives output from the various switches 208. and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 127) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, decorative lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, and other devices 228 are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, a navigation performance selection table 222b, and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game. .

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (missing, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The audio lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing general information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored of the game early.

The navigation performance selection table 222b is a table for selecting performance information used in the reach navigation performance described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. Here, details of the navigation effect selection table 222b will be explained with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the navigation effect selection table 222b. The navigation performance selection table 222b is a table used to set a reach navigation performance that is executed when a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) is set.

As shown in FIG. 119(a), the navigation performance selection table 222b includes a first navigation performance selection table 222b1 and a second navigation performance selection table 222b2. Here, I will briefly explain reach navigation performance. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the reach navigation performance is a performance that suggests and informs the content of the main character appearance (the performance executed in the center of the main display area Dm) of the variable pattern, and the reach navigation performance is a performance that suggests and informs the content of the main character appearance (the performance executed in the center of the main display area Dm) in the small area Dm4 (Fig. 112 This is a sub-performance performed in (see). This Reach Navi production includes a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the production period for the lead role, a moving display section (character Dm4b) that indicates the progress of the production for the lead role, a notification section Dm4c that suggests and informs the content of the lead role, and a guide display. This is an effect display consisting of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

The above-mentioned reach navigation performance is set so that the character Dm4b can move on the time gauge Dm4a multiple times, of which the performance related to the first movement is the first navigation performance, and the performance related to the second movement is the second navigation performance. It is set as a performance. The first navigation performance and the second navigation performance are configured such that different times can be selected by the navigation performance selection table 222b, and by combining the first navigation performance and the second navigation performance selected by the navigation performance selection table 222b. It is configured so that a variety of performance patterns can be set.

The first navigation performance selection table 222b1 is a table that is referred to when selecting the first navigation performance. As shown in FIG. 119(b), the performance pattern of the first navigation performance is selected based on the remaining variation time when the first navigation performance is executed and the value of the performance counter 223f. Specifically, in this control example, the timing at which the reach navigation effect is executed is fixed at 30 seconds after the start of variation, so if super reach (variation time 60 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, , If the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds, and the special reach (variation time 90 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the remaining variation time when selecting the first navigation effect is 30 seconds. The fluctuation time is 60 seconds.

Then, if the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 30 seconds and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", a 20 second performance pattern is selected as the first navigation performance, and "100 to 99" is selected as the first navigation performance. 199'', a 30 second performance pattern is selected as the first navigation performance. Further, if the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 69", a 20 second performance pattern is selected as the first navigation performance, and "70 to 69" is selected as the first navigation performance. 199'', a 30 second performance pattern is selected as the first navigation performance.

In this way, by configuring the first navigation performance to be able to select different time performance patterns, it is possible to vary the residual variation time when selecting the second navigation performance, which will be described later. can be configured more complexly. Furthermore, if a special reach is set as a variation pattern of the special symbol, where the special symbol lottery has a high expectation of winning a jackpot (if the remaining variation time is 60 seconds), if a super reach is set, (When the remaining variation time is 30 seconds), the first navigation effect selection table is defined so that the proportion of the 30 second variation pattern being set as the first navigation effect is higher than that of the first navigation effect (when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds). By looking at the progress of the production navigation, will this change develop into a special reach? You can play the game while predicting this.

In addition, in the first navigation performance, a 20-second performance pattern and a 30-second performance pattern are set by using the same time gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112) and changing the moving speed of the character Dm4b, which is the moving display part. making it possible. Specifically, in the 30-second performance pattern, a character imitating a turtle is set as the character Dm4b, and in the 20-second performance pattern, a character imitating a rabbit is set. In this way, by using the same time gauge Dm4a and changing the movement speed of the character moving on the time gauge Dm4a, it is possible to set multiple performance patterns, thereby reducing the data capacity of reach navigation performance. be able to.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, the display mode of the character Dm4b, which is the movement display part, is changed according to the movement speed on the time gauge Dm4a, so you can simply look at the character displayed in the reach navigation effect. Although the configuration is such that the expectation level of a jackpot can be predicted, the same character may be set to have different movement speeds. With this configuration, only players who have experienced the Reach Navi performance multiple times can be made aware that the moving speed of the character in the current Reach Navi performance is different from the character movement speed in the previous Reach Navi performance. This has the effect of increasing the presentation effect for players who have been playing the game for a long time.

Further, in this control example, the moving speed of the character Dm4b is set not to be changed during the first navigation performance. This is to make it easier for the player to predict the length of the first navigation performance. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the character Dm4b may be changed midway through the first navigation performance. By setting in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the length of the first navigation performance.

The second navigation performance selection table 222b2 is a table that is referred to when selecting a second navigation performance using the residual variation time after the performance pattern of the first navigation performance is selected, and is in the remaining time storage area 223h. The performance pattern of the second navigation performance is selected based on the remaining variation time stored in the 223f and the value of the last digit of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119(c), when the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, that is, super reach (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and furthermore, 20 seconds is selected in the first navigation effect. When the effect pattern of seconds is selected, the remaining variation time is 10 seconds, so "2nd 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation effect regardless of the value of the effect counter. This second time means that the character Dm4b reaches the notification part Dm4c provided at the end point of the time gauge Dm4a in the first performance (see FIG. 113(a)), and then the character Dm4b moves on the time gauge Dm4a again. This indicates that the performance has started (see FIG. 113(b)). In addition, in this control example, the configuration is such that it is possible to set up to the third moving effect at most.

Next, when the remaining variation time is 30 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the 30 seconds production pattern is selected in the first navigation production, If the value of the last digit of the presentation counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, third time 20 seconds" is selected as the second navigation performance, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation performance is selected. "2nd time 20 seconds, third time 10 seconds" is selected as the 2nd navigation performance, and if it is "7 to 9", "2nd time 30 seconds" is selected as the 2nd navigation performance.

Then, when the remaining variation time is 40 seconds, that is, when the special reach (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and furthermore, the 20 second performance pattern is selected in the first navigation performance, If the value of the last digit of the production counter 223f is "0 to 3", "2nd time 10 seconds, third time 30 seconds" is selected as the second navigation performance, and if it is "4 to 6", the second navigation performance is selected. "Second time 20 seconds, third time 20 seconds" is selected as the navigation performance, and if it is "7 to 9", "second time 30 seconds, third time 10 seconds" is selected as the second navigation performance.

As explained above, when setting the performance pattern of the reach navigation performance, by making it possible to select the performance period separately for the first navigation performance and the second navigation performance, it is possible to easily create a complex performance pattern. I can do it. Further, in this control example, only the lower one digit value of the value of the performance counter 223f is referred to when selecting the performance pattern of the second navigation performance. This makes it possible to independently select multiple performance patterns within one process using one performance counter, reducing the processing load when setting performance patterns. There is an effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). As shown in FIG. 118(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop ball counter 223b. At least a type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a round number counter 223g, a remaining time storage area 223h, a variable pattern temporary storage area 223i, and an other memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable performance (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of balls on hold (the number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of pending balls is When the number of balls is subtracted, a held ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 138). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved pitch number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, so Detailed explanation will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 138), and is turned off when the variation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 140). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 138), and turned off when the stop type is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2008 in FIG. 140). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The performance counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 199, which is used for preview performances and various lottery games. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. This round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 139), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S1808 in FIG. 139). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when determining a predetermined round game during a jackpot game.

The remaining time storage area 223h is a storage area for storing the remaining variation time that is referred to when selecting the performance pattern of the reach navigation performance. In the remaining time storage area 223h, when the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, a variable time is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S2102 in FIG. 141), and then the first navigation effect is set. It is updated to the remaining variation time after setting (S2104 in FIG. 141), and is cleared when the setting of the reach navigation effect is completed (S2109 in FIG. 141).

By using this remaining time storage area 223h, it becomes possible to select performances corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols in a plurality of periods. Specifically, when 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, information indicating that the remaining variation time is 60 seconds is first set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Next, as a first performance, any one performance pattern is selected from a plurality of performance patterns each having a performance period of 20 seconds to 50 seconds. When the 40 second performance pattern is selected as the first performance pattern, the information set in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated and 20 seconds is set as the remaining variable time. Thereafter, it becomes possible to select the second performance using the remaining period based on the remaining variable time. This has the effect of reducing the processing required to select a performance pattern corresponding to a variable pattern.

The variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is a storage area for temporarily storing selected effect patterns in reach navigation effects in which variable patterns are selected step by step. In the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i, when the reach navigation setting process (S2005 in FIG. 141) is executed, the selected main character is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (S2101 in FIG. 141), and A performance pattern for the first navigation performance is set (S2103 in FIG. 141), and then a performance pattern for the selected second navigation performance is set (S2106 in FIG. 141).

The other memory area 223z also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 138) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, etc., and controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. (variable effects) and preview effects.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via a bus line 240. There is. The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying an address to outputting data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initialization process (see S1702 in FIG. 34) that is executed after the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (not shown), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws an image for one frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 111(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 sends the data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image; There is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted. Therefore, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which has a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the game is started by the player and the power-on variation image area 235b is moved to the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the ball is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

Returning to FIG. 79, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. All of the back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, back A corresponding to the "city stage", back B corresponding to the "sky stage", and back C corresponding to the "island stage") are displayed on the third symbol display device. The image is horizontally longer than the display area displayed at 81, and the image controller 237 causes the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the back image from left to right in the horizontal direction. is drawn. Thereby, the back images are scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth manner.

The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 5), numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the variable effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance is not started immediately.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character pattern area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but changes it to the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading resident image data in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in the error message image area 235f in advance, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, a prohibited area storage area 233m, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to command-related displays, round performances, and demo performances are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss will finally be displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

By notifying the short period of time for the normal symbol in the ending performance, the player can easily recognize the short period of time for the normal symbol. The longer the time period for this normal symbol, the more chances the ball will pass through the normal symbol starting port 66, the more opportunities for the normal symbol lottery to be held, and the more opportunities for the normal symbol to win. . Therefore, there are more opportunities for the electric accessory to be released due to the jackpot of the normal symbol, making it easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140, and making it easier for the special symbol to be drawn. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, and the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, the stronger the player's desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, the second winning hole 140 is a winning hole where when a ball enters, five balls are paid out as prize balls, so when the normal symbol is a jackpot, the electric accessory is released and the ball is sent to the second winning hole. The easier it is to hit 140, the more prize balls you will receive. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to reduce or the number of balls it has does not decrease even if it plays a game, so the player is in a state where the number of balls it has is difficult to decrease or the number of balls it has is You can get a sense of a period of time when you can get a jackpot with a special symbol even if you don't have one. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending performance, by informing that the lottery result of one of the pending special symbol drawings will be a special symbol jackpot, the player can win the special symbol in the pending special symbol drawing. Since the player can recognize that it will be a jackpot with a special symbol, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player will definitely get a jackpot with a special symbol. Therefore, the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased, so that the player can continue to have a desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to a display related to game information related commands, a display related to jackpot related commands, a round performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image is displayed on the back side of the sprite. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. The type of back surface is determined by displaying one of the back surfaces A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (any of the "city stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or displaying the back surface A to C that corresponds to the stage selected by the player. Information specifying whether a back image different from C is to be displayed is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

If the back surface type specifies that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. , and also specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from back images A to C is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

In this control example, a case will be explained in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81), depending on the back type. Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information using the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuating performance that is being performed this time, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21 is the last address of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next Specify the image content to be drawn and create a drawing list, which will be described later. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each production, and as mentioned above, among the image data of sprites used in the production specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all of the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. is listed. Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning .

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later is created, and the transfer data From the transfer data table stored in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified in the corresponding address of the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table. , sends the added drawing list to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (a power-on main image and a power-on variable image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2911 in FIG. 111(b) S2912) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 123(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 124) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list, which will be described later, is generated that describes instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and displays the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list, which will be described later, is generated that describes drawing instructions. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list, which will be described later, that describes image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process (FIG. 111(b ), pointer update processing (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is obtained, and the transfer data information is created. Add to list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2,...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2,..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite (design) is described for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The rendered image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 determines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending pitch number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol), and detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in this order.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 111 (b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k specifies a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 111(b)) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The prohibited area storage area 233m is a storage area for setting display areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm33) in which display of character symbols and point symbols is prohibited during a period in which character symbols and point symbols are displayed in point production. . In the point effect, the period in which the character pattern and point pattern are displayed is set three times in total, so the first to third prohibited areas are set according to each period (first period to third period). A storage area of 223 m is provided. This allows different prohibited areas to be set for each period, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119), and is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern (determined display). If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (see S3405 in FIG. 115(a), etc.). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts shown in FIGS. 121 to 135. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this control example). 399, 99, and 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol fluctuation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 is executed. Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. After executing the through gate passage process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is used to display the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S201). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S201: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If it is not a special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is performed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and the value has been changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special symbol 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 129), which will be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. These are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command through the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing is executed to start variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270), and the value is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the variable time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set (S215). . Setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. be exposed. More specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In addition, in this control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, if it is a jackpot B, a red LED is lit, and if it is a loss, a red LED and a green LED are lit. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is displayed. It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning hole is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then a jackpot start setting (jackpot such as 16 rounds) is set (S217). (S218), and the process moves to S219.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is a loss (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). If it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable probability counter 203t is greater than or equal to 1 (S220: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203t is subtracted by 1 (S221). After completing the process of S218 or S221 described above, a stop command is set (S219), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure). This is a process for determining the performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of the variable performance performed on the symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are , the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203t of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S302).

If the value of the variable probability counter 203t is larger than 0, that is, if the current state is variable probability (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special value for high probability Based on the symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained from the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)) (S303). Specifically, the values of the first random number counter C1 are compared one by one with the 10 random numbers set in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 116(a)). As mentioned above, 10 random numbers from 0 to 9 are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these random numbers that result in a jackpot. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but they are not limited to this, and may be different random values. With this configuration, a random number value that is determined to be a miss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress bias in jackpots.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined to be a jackpot. The number of random values may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher probability of jackpot, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203t is not larger than 0 (0), that is, if the current probability variation state is not (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols. (low probability gaming state), so based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 116(a)), The lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a random number value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability times. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and if the value of the first random number counter C1 and this random number value match, the special symbol will be a jackpot. It is determined that After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a jackpot indicating a jackpot is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A or jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 117(a)) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S307).

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the special symbol is a miss (S305: No), a display mode at the time of a miss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is set according to the determined miss. Next, a variation pattern at the time of a miss is determined based on the current number of reserved pitches (S309). After that, this process ends.

Although not shown, a variation pattern command is generated to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of each determined variation pattern. When this process is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be explained. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and suspending their values when there is a random number counter.

When the starting winning process (FIG. 124, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first prize opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reservations N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, there is no winning in the first winning hole 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 129) to be described later, executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as the processing from S401 to S406 is performed for the winning prize in the second winning hole 140. The only difference is that a reservation process is executed for the second special symbol in response to a win in the second winning hole 140, and the other processes are the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S407: No), a pre-reading process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and is used to display the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device and the electric winning combination associated with the second winning hole 140. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 140a.

In this normal symbol variation process (125, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is winning, the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize opening 140 is controlled to open and close. Includes monaka. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S601: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is changed. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of pending variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols (S608).

If the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state for normal symbols (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S609). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game); This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game of symbols. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S609: Yes), the process moves to S611.

In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning symbol random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number per symbol counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per symbol random number table 202c for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 116(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process moves to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low Based on the second winning random number table 202c for probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see FIG. 116(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S612: Yes) , sets the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state with normal symbols (S614: Yes), it is currently in the special symbol jackpot. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S615: Yes), the process moves to S617. In this control example, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible during a jackpot of a special symbol, even if a normal symbol wins, the same procedure as when a normal symbol misses is performed. , the number of opening times and opening time of the electric accessory 140a are set.

In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory 140a accompanying this is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S614: No), the process moves to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot with a special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is set to 0. .2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (S617), and the process moves to S619.

In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with normal symbols (S619: Yes), a variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S619: No), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is ended. In this way, except during jackpots of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of the variable display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and furthermore, Since the release period of the second winning hole 140 becomes very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. However, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 125, S106) is It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is set to start (S625), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 129) is executed next, the opening/closing of the electric accessory 140a is set. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66, and it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 when

In the through gate passage process (FIG. 126, S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 66 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 66 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 66 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved pitch number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a startup process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when power is turned on to main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S912 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S912 in such a case. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 129, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start payout control of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909), and the process moves to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a production permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various productions. Next, interrupts are permitted (S911), and the process moves to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing (see FIG. 129), first, while executing the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 121), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing to be sent to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, it is sent to the payout control device 111 to correspond to the number of balls acquired. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the command for the number of reserved balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 124) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, round number command, ending command, notification command, and error command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning apparatus 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. This opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 129), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 121).

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123), a variation display according to the variation pattern is changed to the first symbol display. It starts in devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 123) ends, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is finished, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 123). , 37B is displayed as stopped (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 or S521 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a halt state (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 125). do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process moves to S901, and each process from S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S909: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S901 to S907 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 127 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S913). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process of S98 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game status performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S801). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 130, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 129), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various effects according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 130, S904), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 122) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is to be started. In the process of S1001, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S1003: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S1003: Yes), the process of S1004 is executed. In the process of S1004, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). In the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1005).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 131 (S1005). FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1005). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 131, S1005), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1101). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1101 (S1102). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1101. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the process of S1102, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

Then, the value of the winning prize counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1104), a round number command is set (S1105), and this processing is ended. Note that this control example is configured to set a command indicating that a new round has started as the round number command. The current number of rounds can be grasped by adding the round number command each time the audio lamp control device 113 receives the round number command. This has the effect of reducing the amount of command data output from the main controller 110. Note that the content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information of a newly started round may be set. By doing this, even if a problem occurs with the data related to the number of rounds on the audio lamp control device 113 side (the stored data is erased due to a power outage, etc.), the latest data will be updated every time a new round is started. Since the round information can be received, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), then it is determined whether it is the operating timing of the variable probability solenoid 65k (S1006). If it is determined that it is the timing to operate the variable variable solenoid 65k (S1006: Yes), the variable variable solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1007), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1006, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (S1006: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1008). The starting timing of the ending effect is when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (in this control example, 3 seconds), which is the ball removal time, has elapsed. It is determined as When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: Yes), the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1009), and the ending process is executed (S1010). After that, this process ends. Although not shown, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF in the process of S1009 just in case. In addition, in this control example, the start timing of the ending effect is set after the final round of gaming ends (the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed) and after the waiting time has elapsed (3 seconds in this control example), but the final round of gaming ends. You may perform the ending effect immediately after doing so. In this case, abnormality processing for the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 may be executed during the ending period.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1010) will be explained with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 132, S1010). In the ending process (FIG. 32, S1010), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1201). Then, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S1202). In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1202: Yes), the probability variation counter 203t is set to 100 (S1203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1202: No), the process of S1203 is skipped and the present process ends.

In this way, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, 100 is set in the probability variation counter 203t. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set the probability variation by determining whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting the transition to the variable probability gaming state until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change gaming state will be given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball will pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game will be determined. You can play the game with interest.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1008, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1008: No), a notification process is executed (S1011). Here, details of the notification process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1011).

In the notification process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1301). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1301: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305). The end timing of the 12th round is determined based on whether it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the 12th round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1305 that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1305: No), this process ends. Here, by setting the 2-second counter in S1305, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the time to throw the ball after 12 rounds, and a voice saying "Look at the LCD" is heard. Output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, but since the player's attention is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable prize winning device 65 is recognized. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the variable probability game state will be awarded until the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect that draws attention to the LCD is performed over the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the display is not limited to this. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1301: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1302). Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1303: Yes), a notification command is set. (S1304). After that, this process ends. In response to this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes settings for outputting the audio message "Look at the liquid crystal."

In the process of S1303, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is not 0 (S1303: No), the process of S1304 is skipped and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 132, S1011) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, this winning process (S1012) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 134. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1012).

In the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1401). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the opening/closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is outside the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning a prize opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is issued. Set. After that, the process of S1404 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the light has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S1402: No), the process of S1404 is executed.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). If it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), closing of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1406). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set on (S1407). After that, the process of S1408 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown out after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1405). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process of S1406 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process of S1408 is executed.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408). If it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), the value of the motion counter 203k is updated by -1 (S1409). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1410: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i to update it (S1411). The probability change setting flag 203h is set on (S1412). After that, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1410: No), the process of S1413 is executed. In the process of S1413, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1414). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set on (S1415). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the variable probability valid flag 203q to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge channel 65e2 passes through the variable variable switch 65e3, the variable variable probability is set to ON. You can control how games are set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1408, if it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1416: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation validity timer 203r to update it (S1417). It is determined whether the value of the variable valid timer is an upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1418). If it is determined that the variable variable validity timer 203r is at the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the variable variable validity flag 203q is set to OFF (S1419). The variable probability valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1420), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, if it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process of S1410 is executed.

As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203r is not at the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball brushing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent a game ball from being improperly passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and being given a probability change gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 130, the explanation will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 134, S1012) is executed, abnormality processing is executed (S1013). After that, this process ends. Here, details of this abnormality processing (S1013) will be explained with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1013). In the abnormality processing (S1013), processing is executed to monitor whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is being improperly passed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 135, S1013), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1501). If it is outside the round validity period (S1501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1503). After that, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S1502: No), the process of S1504 is executed.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1504: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1504: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is updated by incrementing the remaining ball timer 203p by 1 (S1505), since it is during the pitch time period. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether an upper limit value (in this control example, 3 seconds) has elapsed (S1506). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of ejected pieces (total value of variable passing counter 203i and ejected number counter 203s) and the number of winning pieces (value of winning number counter 203j) match. (S1507).

If it is determined that they match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1509 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508). After that, the process of S1509 is executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in which a game ball is left in the variable winning device 65 and the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is a jackpot B.

In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1510). Thereafter, the prize winning number counter 203j, the ejected number counter 203s, and the variable passing counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S1716 (see Figure 137). ) is started during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 137, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1715 in FIG. 137), it executes the power-off process in S1716. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1714 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1714 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process moves to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process moves to S1608.

Note that if this start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process moves to S1604. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process moves to S1608.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S1716, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, the power-off process is in progress, so the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the decorative lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You may also do so.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 137). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1716 is executed, so the reason why the process in S1608 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1609), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), the interrupt Permission is set (S1611) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1608 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1604 to S1606 and then S1608. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is processing to clear the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1610, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), interrupt permission is set. (S1611), and moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S1609 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1604 when the process reaches S1608 from S1604 through the process in S1606. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the working area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has passed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S1701 was executed (S1701), and it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S1701 was executed. If not (S1701: No), the process moves to S1712 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1811. In the process of S1701, it is determined whether 1 ms has elapsed or not, whereas S1702 to S1811 are mainly related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1712 and the command determination process in S1711 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1712 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1703 to S1712 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1702 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the decorative lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708, which will be described later (S1703), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1705 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1705, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting production process, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is used as a command to control the display. device 114. In the pending number display update process, a process is performed in which a pending lamp (not shown) is lit according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. It also monitors input as to whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is executed (S1708), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33, lighting patterns of the sub-LED 290, etc. are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1710). In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110.

After completing the process of S1710, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.

Next, the process moves to S1712. In the process of S1712, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. Note that details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711). This command determination process (S1711) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . In addition, in this process, when the number of reserved balls command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also decides to start a continuous preview performance.

In the command determination process (FIG. 138, S1711), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and then sent to the main controller 110. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S1801). When a variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referenced when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 140) to be described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1804). If a stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 140) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1807). When the number of reserved pitches command is received (S1807: Yes), it is determined whether the received number of reserved pitches command is the special chart 1 reserved pitch number command or the special chart 2 reserved pitch number command. , extracts the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of pending times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol), and extracts the value included in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1808). In addition, in the process of S1808, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223c is set. After completing the process in S1808, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is used when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is held. Since the signal is sent from the main controller 110 when a starting prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 by the process of S1808. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 may change from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol. Even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, when a starting prize is detected or when a special symbol is drawn, can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Note that when the process of S1808 is executed, a display number of reserved balls command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved balls number counter 223b and the updated special symbol 2 reserved balls number counter 223c is issued. Set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the pending ball count command has not been received (S1807: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received (S1809). In the process of S1809, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S1809: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S1810), and the process moves to S1811. The details of the jackpot related process (S1810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process directly proceeds to S1811.

In the process of S1811, it is determined whether or not another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1811), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is transferred to the display control device 114. This is to set the command so that it will be sent to.

If it is determined through the process of S1811 that a notification command output from the main controller 110 has been received, the notification sound corresponding to the received command (in this control example, "look at the liquid crystal") is selected. , set the display command for notification.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the jackpot related process (S1810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing (S1810). This jackpot-related process (S1810) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 138) that a jackpot-related command has been received.

In the jackpot related process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S1901). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S1901: Yes), an opening command for display is set (S1902), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1702) of the main processing (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221. The information is sent to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S1903). In the process of S1903, if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S1903: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S1904). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S1905), and the present process ends.

In the process of S1903, if it is determined that the number of rounds command has not been received (S1903: No), it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S1906). In the process of S1906, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S1906: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S1907), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S1908), and this process is continued. finish.

In the process of S1906, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1906: No), it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received (S1909). In the process of S1909, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2016: Yes), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, and in order to execute an effect that suggests that the probability change gaming state is given, A display V effect command is set (S1910), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 137) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2001: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2007. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 138), the fluctuation pattern is The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired variation pattern type corresponds to super reach or special reach (S2004). In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach (S2004: Yes), then reach navigation effect setting processing is executed (S2005). This reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 141, but when the acquired variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, This is a process for setting a reach navigation performance (sub-performance) that guides the main variable production (starring appearance) to be performed in the movie.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, if the obtained variation pattern type is not a variation pattern type corresponding to super reach or special reach, that is, if the obtained variation pattern type is a variation pattern type corresponding to outlier or normal reach (S2004 : No), a display variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2006). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the above-mentioned reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) will be explained. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing this reach navigation effect setting process (S2005). In this reach navigation performance setting process (S2005), the player is informed of the starring appearance to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 and the performance contents (expectation level, performance period) of the starring appearance based on the acquired variation pattern type. A sub-effect is also set.

When the reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, display variation pattern information corresponding to the main character to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected, The variable pattern is set in the temporary storage area 223i (S2101). Here, the starring appearance is a performance for notifying the lottery result of a special symbol using a performance period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112). (see).

After completing the process of S2101, the remaining time storage area 223h is then set based on the obtained fluctuation pattern (S2102). This reach navigation effect setting process (S2005) is a process of setting sub effects in stages based on the variation time corresponding to the obtained variation pattern type. Therefore, through this process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is set in the remaining time storage area 223h. Specifically, if the variation pattern type acquired this time is the variation pattern type (variation time 90 seconds) corresponding to special reach, 90 seconds is set in the remaining time storage area 223h by this process.

Although not shown, in this control example, the reach navigation effect (sub-effect) is displayed 30 seconds after the start of the variation, so a variation pattern type with a variation time of 90 seconds is acquired and the remaining time is stored. After 90 seconds is set in the area 223h, a process is performed to subtract 30 seconds, which is the period during which the sub-effect cannot be executed. Therefore, the set time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds.

Next, the first navigation performance is selected from the first navigation performance selection table 222b1, and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated (S2103). This first navigation performance is selected using the first navigation performance selection table 222b1 shown in FIG. 119(b), and is based on the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired performance counter 223f. A first navigation performance period is set based on the value, and variation pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the set first navigation performance period. Then, the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, when selecting the first navigation effect, if the remaining variable time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is 60 seconds and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "80", the first navigation effect is selected. "30 seconds" is selected as the navigation performance period. Then, the performance pattern information corresponding to the first navigation performance period "30 seconds" is selected and set in the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i.

After completing the process in S2103, the remaining variable time in the remaining time storage area 223h is updated based on the first navigation performance period selected in the first navigation performance (S2104). As a result, the remaining variation time to set the reach navigation performance, which is the sub-performance, is calculated. Specifically, if the first navigation presentation period "30 seconds" is selected with "60 seconds" set as the remaining variable time in the remaining time storage area 223h, this process will cause the remaining time storage area 223h to The remaining variation time is updated to "30 seconds".

Then, it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is larger than 0 (S2105), and if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 0 (S2105: No), the reach navigation performance is The settings are completed and the process moves to S2107. In other words, if the same period as the remaining variable time set in the remaining time storage area 223h is set as the first navigation performance period in which the first navigation performance is executed, the reach navigation performance will be performed only with the first navigation performance. will be set. Specifically, the variation pattern type acquired this time is a variation pattern type (variation time 60 seconds) corresponding to super reach, and "30 seconds" is set as the remaining variation time in the remaining time storage area 223h. This applies to the case where the first navigation presentation period "30 seconds" is selected.

On the other hand, in the process of S2105, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time in the remaining time storage area 223h is greater than 0 (S2105: Yes), the second navigation performance is selected from the second navigation performance selection table, and the fluctuation pattern is Update to temporary storage area. This second navigation performance is selected using the second navigation performance selection table 222b2 shown in FIG. 119(c), and is based on the value set in the remaining time storage area 223h and the acquired performance counter 223f. Based on the value, variable pattern information corresponding to a part of the sub-performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected, and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated. Specifically, if the remaining variable time set in the remaining time storage area 223h when selecting the second navigation effect is 30 seconds, and the value of the last digit of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0". In this case, the performance pattern information of "second time 10 seconds" and "third time 20 seconds" is selected as the performance pattern corresponding to the second navigation performance period "30 seconds", and the variable pattern temporary storage area 223i is updated.

In this way, the second navigation performance is configured to generate a performance pattern using the residual variation time after setting the first navigation performance. Therefore, rather than setting a performance pattern for all the periods in which reach navigation performance can be set, the period in which reach navigation performance can be set is divided into a first navigation performance period and a second navigation performance period, and a performance pattern is set for each. By combining these after setting them, it is possible to diversify the performance patterns of the reach navigation performance, which has the effect of preventing players from getting bored.

In addition, in this control example, the period in which the reach navigation performance can be set is configured to be divided into the first navigation performance period and other periods, but it may be divided into more periods. In this case, in the process of setting the second navigation performance (S2016), a performance pattern that does not use the entire remaining variation period can be selected, and after executing the process of S2016, the remaining variation time set in the remaining time storage area 223h It is preferable to configure the configuration so that it is determined again whether or not is 0 (S2105). Thereby, it becomes possible to set the reach navigation performance corresponding to the remaining variation time after setting the second navigation performance in the same process as the process of setting the second navigation performance, and the process can be simplified.

Returning to FIG. 141, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the remaining variation time is 0 (S2105: No) or if the process of S2106 is finished, then the variation pattern for display is created based on the information in the variation pattern temporary storage area. A command is set (S2107). Here, the information stored in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area includes the display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the main appearance executed on the third symbol display device 81 set in the process of S2101, and the sub effects. A display variation pattern command corresponding to the first performance navigation performance pattern set in the process of S2103 and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the second performance navigation performance pattern set in the process of S2106, which configures the reach navigation performance that is This is a variable pattern command for display.

When the process of S2107 is finished, the information set in the temporary fluctuation pattern storage area is cleared (S2108), the information regarding the remaining fluctuation time set in the remaining time storage area is cleared (S2109), and this process is completed. .

In addition, in this control example, the main appearance and the sub effects to be executed on the third symbol display device 81, which are executed based on the obtained variation pattern, are set as one display variation pattern command and output. Although a configuration is used to reduce the number of commands, the main appearance variation pattern command for display and the sub production variation pattern command for display may be output as separate commands. As a result, for example, the display control device 114 can display the main character on a layer on the back side of the third symbol display device 81, and display sub effects on a layer on the front side of the layer where the main character is displayed. When the player operates the frame button 22, it is possible to easily perform control such as displaying or erasing the sub effects.

Furthermore, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to easily perform control such as outputting an additional command to the sub-effect and switching the effect pattern of the sub-effect while the main character is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, during the period (30 seconds in this control example) from when the main character is performed until when the sub-direction is executed, the information used for the sub-direction is determined based on the operation content of the frame button 22 that is executed. It becomes possible to change the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) that appears, and change the content of the index displayed on the notification section Dm4c, which has the effect of increasing the player's desire to play.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 142, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S2201) will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2201) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2301). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S2302). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S2301.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S2302, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2302, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently being stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2303). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2304), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 142) (S2305), the execution of the boot program is finished and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 143, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S2301. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2301 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2302. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S2303 to S2305 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2301 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S2301, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process including steps S2302 and S2302 multiple times, the steps S2303 to S2305 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S2303 to S2305 without performing the processes of S2301 and S2302. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 142. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S2203, the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S2204, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 154(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S3302 in FIG. 154(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S2508 in FIG. 144(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2509 in FIG. 144(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first prize opening 64 (starting prize), and an instruction to start the variable performance is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production is performed. I can do it. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Since it is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer the data, so the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(a). FIG. 144(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt processing, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2401), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 144(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 144(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2501: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal performance is displayed instead of the power-on image (not shown). In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2502) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2503) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2502), the contents of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150.

In the display setting process (S2503), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2502) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2504). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2503) or the simple display setting process (S2509). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2505). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2506). In this drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S2504), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2505) are used. , generates a drawing list, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2507). The counter updated by the process of S2507 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command judgment process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (Jackpot A, Jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss, chance) The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the second symbol (eye) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set, and the V interrupt processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2501: Yes), this means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2508) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2509) is executed, and the steps in S2504 are executed. Move to processing.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2502), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2601: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2503) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S2602), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2603).

Then, it is first determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2604), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2604: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2605), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2701).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In the process of S2701, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation time is actually longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S2701 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can be judged.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2701, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer is 233f is initialized to 0 (S2705). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S2706), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2705, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, transfers data to the transfer data table buffer 233e through the process of S2702. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data was set in the process of S2704 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 145. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2606), If there is a display variation type command (S2606: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2607), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2607) will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, reach other than front/back off, complete miss, or chance) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S2801), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type table in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S2802).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S2802 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S2803), this stop type command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S2802 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2504), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set in the process of S2802 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S2803, and the identified stop symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Incidentally, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, but before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is transferred from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2801, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S2802.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 will display a stop symbol that corresponds to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 145. In the process of S2606, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2606: No), then it is determined whether there is a jackpot-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2608), and the jackpot is determined. If there is a related command, a display jackpot related command process is executed (S2609), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149, the above-described display jackpot related command processing (S2609), which is one of the command determination processing (S2502, see FIG. 145) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. I will explain the details. First, FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing this display jackpot related command processing.

In this display jackpot related command processing, as shown in FIG. 147, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2901), and if there is a display opening command ( S2901: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2902), and the process moves to S2903.

Here, details of the opening command process (S2902) will be described with reference to FIG. 148(a). FIG. 148(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S3005), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2901: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2903), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S2903: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S2904) will be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3101, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 147, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2903, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S2903: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2905), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S2905: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2906), and the process moves to S2907.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S2906) will be described with reference to FIG. 149(a). FIG. 149(a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3201). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3202).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3201, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3203). S3204). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3205), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 147. In the process of S2905, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S2905: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2907), and the command is displayed. If there is a special V effect command (S2907: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S2908), and the display jackpot related command process is ended.

Here, details of the V effect command processing (S2908) will be explained with reference to FIG. 149(b). FIG. 149(b) is a flowchart showing V effect command processing. This V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S3302).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S3301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command processing is ended, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 147. In the process of S2907, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S2907: No), the display jackpot related command process is immediately terminated.

Returning to FIG. 145, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2608, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command (S2608: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2610), and the back image change command is If there is one (S2610: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2611), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S2611) will be described with reference to FIG. 150(a). FIG. 150(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag is set to on (S3401), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S3903) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3402), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3401 is turned on, the changed back image type is identified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3402. . When the identified back image type is back B or back C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of back images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C should be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image determination flag set in S3402 determines whether The type of back image to be displayed at a time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3402, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted and a rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Here, we return to the explanation of FIG. 145. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2610: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2612), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no error command. If (S2612: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2613), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the error command processing (S2613) will be described with reference to FIG. 150(b). FIG. 150(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3501). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3502). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In error frame command processing, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S3501, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S3502, and the error type is Processing is executed so that the corresponding warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3502, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

In the process of S2601, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2601: Yes). ), the processes of S2602 to S2613 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2601 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S2508) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (not shown) are selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display variation pattern command. Only the stop type commands are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command, such as variable pattern command processing (see FIG. 146(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 146(b)), is executed. Regarding the command, the process is performed to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S2701, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2702, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2503), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be explained with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 145, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3601: No), It is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, so the process skips steps S3602 to S3604 and moves to the process S3605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3601: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3602), S3603 to S3604 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3603: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3604).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3701).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, information necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S3701, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 151. After the warning image setting process (S3604) or in the process of S3603, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3603: No), then the process moves to S3605.

In S3605, pointer update processing is executed (S3605). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3801, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3802). As a result, if it is End information (S3802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3803), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S3803: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3805), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S3803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S3806), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3802, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3802: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 151, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). In task processing, the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S3606 as well as the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, rotation angle, etc.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3607), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3608). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3608: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3608: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S3609).

As a result, if the final display flag 233z is off (S3609: Yes), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. (S3610), and then writes Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3611). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3612), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3613). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag 233z, which indicates that a confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state, to ON (S3614), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3615), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Incidentally, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S2504), until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3615, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if the confirmed display flag 233z is not on but off (S3609: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3616: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data. The data is set in the table buffer 233d (S3617), and then null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S3618). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3620), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that a demonstration is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S3621), this process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S3616, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S3616: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect will be performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect has ended, so continue with the display setting process. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2509) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 144(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the variation effect using the power-on variation image has ended, for a predetermined period of time, the power-on variation image (Fig. A process is performed in which a display data table that specifies that the image (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2505), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 154(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3901: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S3902), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 154(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3901, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3901: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3903), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S3902), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 154(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S4001), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S4001: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4002). In the process of S4002, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S4002 that the transfer process has not finished (S4002: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4002: Yes), the process moves to S4003. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S4001, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003.

In the process of S4003, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4003), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S4003: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4004), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S4003, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S4003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4005), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 144(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 145 to 150) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 151 to 153) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 155) (see S3901: No in FIG. 154(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the normal image transfer setting process (S3903), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2505) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3605) of the previously executed display setting process (S2503) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S4101). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4102), and if it is transfer data information (S4102: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4103), the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

Further, in the process of S4102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4102: No), the process of S4103 and S4104 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4105. In the process of S4105, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S4105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4105: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S4106).

In the process of S4106, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S4106 that the transfer process has not finished (S4106: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4106: Yes), the process moves to S4107. Furthermore, as a result of the process in S4105, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S4105: No), the process proceeds to S4107.

In the process of S4107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4107: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S4108), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S4113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4107: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S4109). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4109: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4109: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S4110), the back image provided for each back image type is Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4112), and the process moves to S4113.

Note that if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4113, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is for the back side A, the normal image transfer process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S4113, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113). The determination in the process of S4113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S4113, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S4113, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4113: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4114). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S4114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated (S4115), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image will be changed. Among the image data used in the video RAM 235, image data that is not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this control example, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2506), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2505), a drawing list is generated (S4201). That is, in the process of S4201, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2504), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. , the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S2505), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is included as the drawing target buffer information, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1; includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S4202, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4203). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 144(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 186. In the first control example described above, a gaming machine in which reach navigation performance is executed as a performance display executed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, as the effect display executed on the third symbol display device 81, the effect is advanced by the operation of continuously pressing the frame button 22 (hitting repeatedly) and the operation of pressing the frame button 22 at a good timing. A composite press effect that causes the pseudo symbols to be displayed variably on the third symbol display device 81 to be stopped by pressing the frame button 22 is a continuous slot effect for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this control example). A third symbol display device 81 displays a predetermined value (points), and when a predetermined number of points are accumulated, a point performance is executed in which a specific performance (ready-to-reach performance) is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, prevent the player from getting bored with the game early, and improve the player's interest.

This second control example differs from the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference is that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, among the effects performed in this control example, the composite press effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159. FIG. 157(a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the composite press effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 157(b) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the composite press effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of the point in time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the timing press period Db1, and FIG. 158(b) 159 is a diagram showing another example of the point in time when the composite press effect being executed reaches the timing press period Db1, and FIG. FIG. 159(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of when the composite press effect being executed reaches the second consecutive hit period Dc.

This composite press effect is a press effect in which three press effect periods are displayed in combination, and the upper left corner of the main display area Dm is based on the result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during each press effect period. An effect is executed in which the meter on the meter display section D1 displayed on the side accumulates. When a predetermined amount of meters is accumulated in the meter display section D1, advantageous benefits are given to the player.

When the composite press effect is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 157(a), a press effect corresponding to the first continuous press period is executed. The third symbol display device 81 displays the above-mentioned meter display section D1, a button display D2 that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and a performance gauge D3 for guiding the composite press performance, A comment column is displayed in the lower area of the main display area Dm to provide text guidance on the contents of the performance.

The meter display section D1 is a display section that ultimately displays the performance result of the composite press performance, and is controlled so that the meter accumulates based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each press performance (see FIG. 157(b)). . Then, on the meter display section D1, a comment "Collect the meter" is displayed as a comment to encourage the player to participate in the game. In the meter display section D1, a "V" is displayed on the right end of the meter in the initial stage, and when the meter reaches this "V", the player has won a special symbol jackpot as a benefit that is advantageous to the player. will be notified. Further, the meter area of the meter display section D1 is set to be extended based on the game result of the composite press effect and the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 159(a)). When the meter area is extended as shown in FIG. You will be notified that you will be awarded a jackpot (winner).

It should be noted that the benefits granted by the composite press effect are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, for example, images that are not normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or images collected by the player. It may also be something that gives value information (points). Further, the display mode in which "V" and "VV" are displayed is not limited to this, but it is sufficient that the conditions under which the bonus is given to the player are displayed so as to be visible. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set advantageous degrees for the benefits granted when reaching "V" and the benefits granted when reaching "VV", and it is possible to set the benefits so that different benefits are granted. Bye.

The button display D2 is a display section for notifying the player of the operation details for the frame button 22, and during the first continuous press period shown in FIG. and the comment "Continuous Hits!!" will be displayed. By performing such a display, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. The button display D2 is set so that the display mode changes depending on the operation status of the frame button 22 by the player. For example, if the player is not operating the frame button 22, the button display is set to blink. The display is highlighted by zooming in or out, and if the player is operating the frame button 22, the display changes to a non-highlighted display by shrinking or erasing it. Thereby, it is possible to suppress excessive display of game guidance to the player. Furthermore, it is preferable to change the button display D2 to a display that does not emphasize it even when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during which the player does not operate the frame button 22. As a result, it is possible to prevent the highlighted display from being displayed continuously for a player who does not want to operate the frame button, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

The performance gauge D3 is a display section that shows the overall flow of the composite press performance, and displays the composite press performance in chronological order from the left side to the right side of the performance gauge D3 (from the left side to the right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 157(a)). it's shown. This performance gauge D3 is divided and displayed as a first consecutive hit period Da, a timing press period Db1, and a second consecutive hit period Dc in the order in which the press performance is executed, and the current position of the moving body D3a moving on the performance gauge D3 is The game is configured so that the player can understand the situation. In this way, in a compound press effect in which press effects with different operating methods for the frame button 22 are executed consecutively, by displaying a display that allows the player to understand the entire complex press effect and the status of each press effect, the game It is possible to perform a performance that is easy for people to understand.

Furthermore, since the moving body D3a is configured to move at a constant speed on the performance gauge D3, it is possible to grasp the entire period of the composite press performance based on the movement status of the mobile body D3a. .

Furthermore, of this performance gauge D3, a performance notification timing D3b is set within the first consecutive hit period Da. This effect notification timing D3b is for notifying in advance the content of the press effect to be executed during the timing press period Db1 which is executed after the first consecutive hit period Da has elapsed. When the moving object D3a reaches the performance notification timing D3b during the composite press performance, guidance for the press performance to be executed in the next press performance period is displayed in the comment field to be described later. This prevents a problem in which the mode of the press effect (the operation content of the frame button operation 22) is suddenly changed during the composite press effect and an unintended operation is performed. Incidentally, when this performance notification timing D3b is reached, the operation status of the player with respect to the frame button 22 may be determined, and the performance mode for the next press performance period may be set.

In the comment column provided in the lower area of the main display area Dm, comments explaining the game content of the composite press effect and comments informing the result of the effect are displayed. In FIG. 157(a), a comment is displayed saying, "Press and hold the button to perform automatic repeated hits." Auto-repeating means that the frame button 22 is simulatively pressed repeatedly when the player performs a predetermined operation (long press operation for 2 seconds or more) during the pressing effect of repeatedly pressing the frame button 22. This refers to control processing. By executing this automatic repeated hit, even a player who has difficulty pressing the frame button 22 multiple times can enjoy the repeated hit effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157(b), a case where the composite press effect reaches the effect notification timing D3b will be described. When the composite press performance reaches the performance notification timing D3b, the game guide for the timing press period Db1 which is the next press performance period is started while continuing the press performance during the first continuous hit period Da. Specifically, a timing gauge Db2 in which the region of the timing push period Db1 is extended is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a target to be aimed at in the timing push effect is displayed within the timing gauge. Then, in the comment field, "Aim at the center of the x mark and press the button..." is displayed as part of the game guide for the timing press period Db1 which is the next press performance period.

The timing gauge Db2 is an expanded display of the same period as the timing push period Db1. Therefore, the moving object D3a is displayed to move on the timing gauge Db2 in the same time as the moving object D3a moves on the timing push period Db1. Here, since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed longer than the timing press period Db1, it is possible to set the speed at which the moving object D3a moves faster than the speed at which the moving object D3a moves on the effect gauge. Become. Further, by selecting and displaying any one of the plurality of timing gauges Db2 having different lengths, it is possible to vary the speed at which the moving body D3a moves. With this configuration, when displaying to inform the player of the period of the composite press performance using the performance gauge D3 and the moving object D3a that moves at a constant speed on the performance gauge D3, the player This has the effect that the presentation of the timing display can be diversified without giving a sense of discomfort to the user.

Furthermore, by displaying the timing gauge Db2 when the performance notification timing D3b is reached, it is possible to predict the speed of the moving body D3a in the timing push performance to be executed this time, and the effect is that the timing can be easily planned. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 157(b), the target Db3, which is the object of operating the frame button in the timing press effect, is displayed at the center of the timing gauge Db2, but if you move the displayed position to the edge of the timing gauge Db2 and press the timing It may also be possible to set the difficulty level of the performance. Further, the configuration may be such that the target Db3 moves on the timing gauge Db2, or a plurality of targets Db3 may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158(a) and (b), a case will be described in which the composite press effect reaches the timing press effect period. FIG. 158(a) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic repeated hits are not executed when the timing push effect period is reached. As shown in FIG. 158(a), the image showing the moving body D3a starts to move rightward from the left end of the timing gauge Db2. Note that, as described above, the timing gauge Db2 is a display that extends the area of the timing push period Db1, so the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing push period Db1 and the time required for the moving body D3a to pass through the timing gauge Db2 are displayed. The time required to do so is the same. In the example shown in FIG. 158(a), since the timing gauge Db2 is displayed for about eight times the length of the timing push period Db1, the speed of the moving object passing through the timing gauge Db2 passes through the timing push period Db1. This is approximately eight times the speed of the moving body D3a.

In addition, the target Db3, which indicates the timing for pressing the frame button 22, is blinking and highlighted in the timing press effect. Further, in the comment field, a comment indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed as a timing press effect and a diagram schematically showing that the frame button 22 is pressed are displayed.

On the other hand, FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where automatic repeated hits are executed when the timing push effect period is reached. The difference from the above-mentioned FIG. 158(a) is that the third symbol display device 81 displays a display indicating that automatic consecutive hits are currently in progress, and a comment indicating the game content is displayed in the comment field. The difference is that it has been changed to "hanase". In other words, during automatic continuous hitting, the player has reached the timing press performance while pressing the button, so the player cannot press the button in that state.

Therefore, if it is determined that automatic repeated hits are being executed (frame button 22 is pressed) when the timing press effect period is reached, the content of the game guide displayed in the comment field can be changed from "Press" to "Press". At the same time, the timing of the operation of the frame button 22 detected by the timing press effect is released from the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed (the timing at which the operation signal of the frame button 22 turns on). is turned off). As a result, in a composite press effect, even if the timing press effect is executed with the automatic continuous press operation performed in the previous press effect (first continuous press effect Da), the effect will be executed without causing any trouble to the player. can do.

In the timing press effect period Db1 explained in FIG. 158(a) or FIG. 158(b), the frame button 22 is operated at the timing when the moving body D3c reaches the center of the target Db3 (in the case of FIG. 158(a) When the pressing operation (or releasing operation in the case of FIG. 158(b)) is performed, the moving body D3c on the timing gauge Db2 is displayed stopped at the center of the target Db3, as shown in FIG. 159(a), and the timing is displayed in the comment column. A comment of "Perfect!!" is displayed to inform you that you have operated the frame button 22 well. Further, as a privilege for successfully performing the timing push effect, the meter display section D1 is displayed in an extended manner, and this fact is notified in the comment column.

Note that, also at this timing, the moving object D3c on the effect gauge D3 is moving at a constant speed. Thereby, while the result of the timing press effect is stopped and displayed on the timing gauge Db2, the progress of the composite press effect can be displayed on the effect gauge D3. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of both the result of the timing press effect and the progress of the composite press effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 159(b) when the timing push effect period Db1 has elapsed and the second consecutive hit period Dc has been reached. When the second consecutive hit period Dc is reached, a display for repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is executed as in the first consecutive hit period. The difference from the display of the first continuous play period described above is that the game result of the timing press effect is displayed in the area of the timing press period Db1 of the effect gauge D3, and the meter display part D1 shows the game result of the timing press effect. The point is that the benefits based on the above are granted. Since the other display contents are the same, their explanation will be omitted.

Then, when the second consecutive hit period has elapsed, a composite press performance result notification period D3d is reached, and the result of the current composite press performance is notified. This ends the composite press effect. As explained above, in the composite press effect of this embodiment, there is a continuous press effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed repeatedly as an operation of the frame button 22, and a timing press in which the frame button 22 is operated in a well-timed manner. The timing of the operation and the press effect are set to be executed continuously, and the result of the entire composite press effect is determined based on the result of each press effect. Therefore, since it is necessary to perform a plurality of types of frame button operations in order to obtain a satisfactory performance result, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Furthermore, since it has an auto-sequence-hitting function to assist repeated-hitting operations, it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the frame buttons. Here, if the player who is executing the automatic continuous hit function during the continuous hit performance enters the timing press performance while pressing the frame button 22, the automatic continuous press will cause the frame button to be pressed immediately after the timing press performance starts. A problem has arisen in which a situation occurs in which the user presses 22. Therefore, we set a period in which the automatic repeated hit function is valid and a period in which it is invalid, and the automatic repeated hit function is set to be invalid during the timing press performance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the frame button 22 is pressed down due to automatic repeated hits during the timing press performance, and there is an effect that a performance that is not intended by the player can occur.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned solution alone cannot prevent a player who enters the timing press effect while the auto-repeat function is being executed, that is, presses the frame button 22, from accidentally pressing the button erroneously due to the auto-repetition. However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to have the player participate in the timing-driven production. Specifically, if the same timing press effect as normal is executed by simply disabling the auto-repeat function, a game with content such as "Press the button at the right time" will be performed for the player who has already pressed the frame button 22. Since guidance is displayed, the player is confused by the displayed content, and there is a problem in that the player is unable to enjoy the timing performance.

Therefore, in this control example, the operation status of the frame button 22 is determined at the timing when the timing press effect is executed, and if the automatic repeated press function is set to on, the content of the timing press effect is adjusted at the right time. Changed the effect to release the button. As a result, players who have already pressed the frame button 22 can easily understand that all they have to do is release the frame button 22 at the right time, and they can participate in the performance in which the frame button 22 is operated in a timely manner. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, the press effect is switched with the operation valid period of the frame button 22 continuing in the composite press effect, but there is an operation invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 becomes invalid while the press effect is switched. may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the content of the next press effect within the operation invalidation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information display regarding the currently executed press effect from being displayed at the same time as the information display regarding the press effect to be executed next, making it possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. There is an effect.

Next, among the effects executed in this control example, continuous slot effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous slot performance executed in this control example. This continuous slot performance is a slot performance in which a pseudo symbol that is rotated and displayed is stopped and displayed when the player operates the frame button 22, and is performed multiple times within a predetermined period (30 seconds). The result of the performance is displayed by combining the combinations of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the slot performances that are executed a plurality of times. Specifically, this is a performance in which a bonus (jackpot game) is given to the player by all predetermined symbol combinations (``AAA'', ``BBB'', and ``CCC'') being displayed in a stopped state during a continuous slot performance. .

As shown in FIG. 160, when a continuous slot performance is executed, slot performance 1 (first time slot performance) is executed first. This slot performance 1 (initial slot performance) is a performance with a performance period of 15 seconds, and the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for the 11 seconds in between (2 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed). This is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT). The frame button 22 is operated (Operation 1- 2) When the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot production 1 has elapsed (between 13 and 15 seconds after the continuous slot production is executed), the pseudo symbol will be stopped and displayed (the first valid line will stop). display), and then shifts to slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), and the second slot performance is executed.

On the other hand, the frame button 22 is operated (operated) during the first 6 seconds of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 1 (first slot performance) (between 2 seconds and 8 seconds after consecutive slot performances are executed). 1-1), the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed for 8 to 9 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed (stop display of one effective line), and then slot effect 2 (first shortened slot effect) ) is executed. If the player does not operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation validity period (BT) of slot performance 1 (initial slot performance), the pseudo symbol will not be stopped and displayed and will proceed directly to the special slot performance. do.

This special slot performance is a performance in which a frame button operation validity period (BT) is not set, and a performance is executed in which the rotating pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed regardless of the player's operation. The display mode of any one of the first to third rows of active lines is randomly determined (each display mode is set to 1/3), and the continuous slot performance ends.

The reason why the frame button operation validity period (BT) is not set for the above-mentioned special slot production is that the frame button operation validity period (BT) is not set for slot production 1 (first slot production) even though the frame button operation validity period (BT) is set for 11 seconds. Since there is a possibility that a player who has not operated the button 22 is a player who does not like to operate the frame button 22, this is to prevent the display of an effect that forces the player to operate the frame button 22 again during continuous slot effects. It is. By setting such a performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In addition, in this control example, a special slot effect is executed in which the rotating display of pseudo symbols is automatically stopped as a effect that does not set the frame button operation validity period, but the operation of the frame button 22 is not required. For example, the slot performance may be ended and a different performance may be executed.

Next, slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance) will be explained. Slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance) is a performance with a performance period of 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 12 and 18 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) is when the frame button 22 is operated. This is set as the frame button operation validity period (BT) to be valid. This slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance) is only performed when the frame button 22 is operated within a predetermined period (within 8 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) in slot performance 1 (first slot performance). This is a slot effect that will be executed.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot performance is executed) 18 to 20 seconds), the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (one valid line is stopped and displayed), and then the slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance) is started.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation validity period (BT) of slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance), the extended slot performance is executed without stopping the pseudo symbols. This extended slot performance is a performance with a performance period of 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) is a frame button operation in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. It is set as the validity period (BT).

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) during this extended slot performance, after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed). In the meantime, the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (two valid lines are stopped and displayed), and the continuous slot performance ends.

Next, slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance) will be explained. Slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance) is a performance with a performance period of 10 seconds, during which 6 seconds (between 22 and 28 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) is when the frame button 22 is operated. This is set as the frame button operation validity period (BT) to be valid. This slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance) is a slot performance that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation validity period (BT) in slot performance 2 (first shortened slot performance). be.

If the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot effect 3 (second shortened slot effect), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (after the continuous slot effect is executed) During a period of 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (one valid line is stopped and displayed), and the continuous slot effect ends.

In addition, even if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (continuous slot performance will be executed) The pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed for 28 to 30 seconds (one valid line is stopped), and the continuous slot performance ends. In addition, in slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance), the combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed will be a predetermined combination ( The percentages of "AAA," "BBB," and "CCC" are set to be different, and the above-mentioned predetermined combination is more likely to be stopped and displayed when the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to operate the frame button 22 with volition.

Finally, slot performance 4 (normal slot performance) will be explained. Slot performance 4 (normal slot performance) is a performance with a performance period of 15 seconds, during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid for 11 seconds (17 to 28 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed). This is set as the frame button operation valid period (BT). This slot performance 4 (normal slot performance) is the last 5 seconds (8 to 13 seconds after the continuous slot performance is executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) in slot performance 1 (first slot performance). This is a slot effect that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the period).

If the frame button 22 is operated during the latter 9 seconds (between 19 and 28 seconds after the consecutive slot effects are executed) of the frame button operation valid period (BT) of this slot production 4 (normal slot production), , After the frame button operation validity period (BT) has elapsed (28 to 30 seconds after the continuous slot production is executed), the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (stop display of 1 or 2 lines of effective lines), and the continuous slot production ends.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first 2 seconds of the frame button operation valid period (BT) (between 17 and 19 seconds after the continuous slot effect is executed), the continuous slot effect is executed. Immediately after 19 seconds have elapsed, the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (one valid line is stopped and displayed), and the process shifts to the above-mentioned slot performance 3 (second shortened slot performance).

Also, if the frame button 22 is not operated within the frame button operation valid period (BT) of slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), after the frame button operation valid period (BT) has elapsed (the continuous slot performance is executed). 28 to 30 seconds), the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed (one valid line is stopped and displayed), and the continuous slot performance ends. In addition, in slot performance 4 (normal slot performance), if the frame button 22 is operated within the frame button operation validity period (BT), it will be determined whether the pseudo symbols are stopped and displayed in one or two lines of active lines. It is set to be determined by lottery, and one will be selected at a 1:1 ratio.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the display mode of the above-mentioned continuous slot performance will be explained. FIGS. 161(a) to 161(e) are diagrams showing examples of display modes displayed in continuous slot effects. First, with reference to FIG. 161(a), an initial slot performance that is executed first among consecutive slot performances will be described. As shown in FIG. 161(a), in the first slot production, three pseudo-symbol rows having a plurality of pseudo-symbols are displayed in rotation, and a frame button 22 is schematically shown below to guide the user to press the frame button 22. A guide map and a time gauge indicating the valid operation period of the frame button are displayed. Further, below the time gauge, a history display section is displayed that displays predetermined combinations of pseudo symbols (``AAA'', ``BBB'', and ``CCC'') that have been stopped and displayed in the current continuous slot performance.

When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 161(b). FIG. 161(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the player operates the frame button 22 and three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 161(b), the three pseudo-symbol rows that were being rotated are stopped ("AAA") and the guide map and time gauge are erased. If the symbol that is stopped and displayed this time is a combination of the above-described predetermined pseudo symbols, "Get" is displayed at the corresponding position on the history display section.

Next, if the timing at which the player operates the frame button in the first slot performance is within the range of operation 1-2 shown in FIG. 160, the process shifts to FIG. 161(c) and the normal slot performance is started. This normal slot performance is similar to the first time slot performance described above, in which three pseudo symbol rows are displayed rotating, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo symbol rows that were being rotated are stopped and displayed. It is. The difference from the first time slot performance is that a stop display mode in which the pseudo symbol rows are stopped is selected as a stop display mode in which there are two active lines as shown in FIG. 161(c). Specifically, the left and right symbol rows of the three pseudo symbol rows stop two seconds after the start of the normal slot performance, and the player stops the inner symbol row by operating the frame button 22.

Then, when the combination of pseudo symbols stopped and displayed in the normal slot performance is a predetermined combination of pseudo symbols, "Get" is displayed on the history display section. Here, if all of "A", "B", and "C" displayed on the history display section are obtained, a privilege (jackpot game) will be awarded after the continuous slot performance ends.

In this way, when a continuous slot performance is executed by operating the normal frame button, two slot performances (the first slot performance and the normal slot performance) are performed, and the slot performance produces three combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols. Gameplay to gain is provided.

On the other hand, if the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the first slot performance is within the range of operation 1-1 shown in FIG. 160, the process shifts to FIG. 161(d), and the first shortened slot performance is started. Ru. In this first shortened slot performance, three pseudo-symbol rows are rotated and displayed in the same way as in the first slot performance described above in the normal slot performance, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the three pseudo-symbols that were rotated are displayed. This is an effect in which rows are stopped and displayed, and when the player operates the frame button 22, three pseudo symbol rows are stopped and displayed in one effective line ("BBB"). Thereafter, the second shortened slot effect shown in FIG. 161(e) is executed.

Since this second shortened slot performance is similar to the first shortened slot performance described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As explained above, in the continuous slot performance in this control example, in the slot performance that is executed continuously within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the next slot performance is determined depending on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. It is configured such that the performance mode of the slot performance to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured such that the number of times slot performances are executed during continuous slot performances is changed. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 with enthusiasm, and has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the performance result of the continuous slot performance is displayed as a combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the multiple slot performances executed during the continuous slot performance, and The performance results of continuous slot performances are made to be more advantageous to the player as the number of slot performances increases. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 with greater motivation, and has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the player is unable to operate the frame button 22 early in the first slot performance (initial slot performance) in a continuous slot performance, the slot performance can be performed three times, so the final It becomes possible to have players play the game with great enthusiasm. Furthermore, even if the number of slot performances executed during continuous slot performances is small, it is possible to stop and display multiple combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols in one slot performance, so it is possible for players to It can keep you looking forward to the end.

In addition, for players who refuse to operate the frame button 22, a special slot performance that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the first slot performance ends, so that the player will not feel dissatisfied. do not have.

Next, among the effects performed in this control example, point effects will be explained with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when "normal mode" is selected, and FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing a display example of the third symbol display device 81 when "dice mode" is selected. It is a figure showing an example of a display of the 3rd pattern display device 81 in case.

Although a detailed description of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be omitted, in this control example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a frame button operation for changing the game mode is performed, the audio lamp control device 113 switches the game mode to When the player wins the transition lottery), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to transition between two different game modes ("normal mode" and "dice mode").

"Normal mode" is a game mode in which the variation of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and when the third symbol becomes reachable, a predetermined character ("rabbit", "turtle", "hero") ) is a game mode in which a performance in which any or all of the following characters appear is executed. In the lower right area of the main display area Dm, three indicators (P1 to P3) are displayed that cumulatively display the points acquired by the point performance executed in this control example, and any one of the indicators (P1 to P3) is displayed. P1, P2, P3), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (7 points) or more, a bonus (reach effect) is given to the player.

On the other hand, in the "dice mode", the variable display of the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the small area Dm5, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player in the main display area according to the progress of the game using dice (not shown). This is a game mode in which a performance is performed. Then, similarly to the above-mentioned "normal mode", two indicators (P4 to P5) are displayed, which are displayed by accumulating the points acquired by the point performance executed in this control example, and any one of them (P4 to P5) is displayed. P4 or P5), when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number (6 points), a bonus (reach effect) is given to the player.

First, with reference to FIG. 162(a), the point performance executed in the "normal mode" will be explained. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing a display example in "normal mode". As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the "normal mode", three indicators are displayed, and "rabbit", "turtle", and "hero" are associated with each indicator. This is because the points given to the player in the point production (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are set to the type associated with each character, and the type of points given to the player is set. Points are given to each indicator (P1 to P3) according to the point.

In addition, the characters "Rabbit", "Turtle", and "Hero" associated with each indicator (P1 to P3) are used for the third symbol variation effect and the reserved symbol display (not shown) that are executed in the "normal mode". ), and based on the fact that the character is displayed in the third symbol variation effect, the point type corresponding to the character is set to be easily displayed. Therefore, it is possible to associate the display mode of the third symbol variation performance with the situation in which points are accumulated in the point performance. Note that it is not necessary to associate all the points given in the point presentation with the third symbol presentation display, and the point type may be determined at random. As a result, the points associated with characters other than the character displayed in the third symbol effect display reach a predetermined amount (7 points), making it possible to provide surprise to the player.

Furthermore, in this control example, one of the multiple characters ("Rabbit", "Turtle", "Hero") that appears in the third symbol variation performance is displayed as a point performance, and the displayed character is It is set so that high points are awarded when the character matches the character displayed as the subject of the third symbol variation display.

Further, the period for displaying a character as a point performance is set three times during one point performance, and points are set to be awarded at each timing. This makes it possible to better associate the progress of the third symbol variation performance (the presence or absence of a main character or the type of that character) with the point performance, making it easier for players to understand the complex performance. There is an effect.

In addition, in this control example, the same character as the character displayed in the third symbol variation production is displayed in the point production, but in addition to that, the character associated with the character displayed in the third symbol variation production A display object (for example, a "sword" related to "hero") may be used. By doing so, the player can play the game while comparing the display object displayed in the point presentation and the content of the third symbol variation presentation and predicting whether there is a relationship.

Note that the point effect may be associated with something other than the third symbol variation effect, for example, when the reserved symbol display is changed to a character, it may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or the point effect may be associated with the character displayed after the change, or the point effect may be associated with the character displayed after the change. It may also be associated with the character's voice. By associating some performance provided to the player with the point performance in this way, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player.

In addition, in this control example, points are accumulated on the indicator at various timings during the special symbol fluctuation display (during the third symbol fluctuation), and the number of points is the maximum value (7th stage in Fig. 162). ), a performance with a higher jackpot expectation level than at least the variable performance of the third symbol being executed at that time is executed.

Therefore, the player can enjoy seeing whether any of the indicators reaches the maximum value through the point performance, and can play the game while anticipating the timing when the indicator reaches the maximum value.

Note that the manner in which points are displayed in the point presentation will be described later with reference to FIG. 163.

As explained above, in this control example, the "normal mode" and the "dice mode" are set as the plurality of presentation modes by the audio lamp control device 114, which is the presentation mode setting means. This setting is set by selecting a command indicating the production mode based on a variation pattern selected by a variation display setting process to be described later executed by the audio lamp control device 114. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of presentation modes can be set by operating the frame button 22.

Then, indicators (P1 to P5) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as stage information of multiple stages, and the stage information is variably displayed by displaying points, which are variable information, on the third symbol display device 81. Ru.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162(b), a description will be given of the point performance executed in the "dice mode". FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing a display example in "dice mode". As shown in FIG. 162(b), in the "dice mode", two indicators imitating dice are displayed, and the cumulative value of points is displayed depending on the roll of the dice. The two dice associated with each indicator are configured in the same display mode as the dice used in the "dice effect" executed in the "dice mode".

As explained above, in the point performance of this control example, the indicator is displayed in a display mode related to the game mode being executed, so it is possible to suppress the display that gives the player a sense of discomfort in each performance. be able to.

Further, in each game mode, the type and upper limit of points accumulated by point performances are set to be different, so that it is possible to enjoy different point performances for each game mode. Regarding the points awarded in the point production, the point standard value to be awarded is determined in advance, the point standard value is converted to correspond to the indicator display of the currently executed game mode, and the converted points are It is preferable to configure it so that it is given to the player. This makes it possible to simplify the control for awarding points.

Further, when the game mode is switched while the point performance is being executed, it is preferable to convert the points already stored in the indicator into points corresponding to the destination game mode and display them. In this case, the point reference value corresponding to the points already given during the point production is stored in a storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 114, which is the step information storage means, and It is preferable to convert the stored point reference value at the timing of transition so as to correspond to the indicator display of the destination game mode and control the display. Thereby, an indicator display corresponding to the gaming mode can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the points displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the point presentation will be explained. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram showing the main display area Dm, and FIG. 163(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect display performed in the main display area Dm. In this control example, the display location of the points (points displayed in the main display area Dm) given to the player by the point effect is based on the display mode of the third symbol variation effect being executed in the main display area Dm. It has been decided. This suppresses the overlap between the points displayed in the main display area Dm and the third symbol variation effect, which would make the player feel uncomfortable.

First, as shown in FIG. 163(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into a plurality of small areas (small areas Dm11-13, Dm21-23, Dm31-33) based on the coordinate axes. has been done. The location where points are displayed is determined in units of these divided small areas. In addition, in this control example, since the display mode for displaying points in each small area is stored in advance, when the small area where the point display is executed this time is determined based on the presentation mode of the third symbol variation effect, , a point display image stored in advance corresponding to the small area is displayed in the main display area Dm. Therefore, when performing point display, it is only necessary to perform the process of determining the display location, which has the effect of simplifying the process.

Note that a method other than the point display control used in this control may be used. For example, a control method may be used in which the point display image to be executed in the current point display is first determined, and then the small area in which the point display is performed is determined. good.

In addition, in this control example, the main display area Dm is divided into 9 parts, but it may be divided into more than 9 parts, and the point display is not executed in one small area, but in multiple small areas. Point display may also be performed using .

Next, a specific example of point display will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). When displaying points while the effect shown in FIG. 163(b) is being executed as the third symbol variation effect, first, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect and the small area not used. As a result of the determination, small areas (small areas Dm11 to Dm13) that are not used for the third symbol variation effect, that is, allowable areas that allow point display are set.

Then, an image related to "Hero" is displayed as a character indicating an indicator to which points will be given this time in the selected small region Dm12 among the small regions (small regions Dm11 to Dm13) set as the permissible region. Then, 2-point display is executed in the selected small area Dm11 among the remaining allowable areas (small areas Dm11 and Dm13). In this case, since the hero Dc1 is displayed as the main image of the third symbol variation effect, two points will be accumulated for the indicator corresponding to the hero among the indicators shown in FIG. 162(a).

In this control example, by displaying an image that is the same as or related to the character that is the subject of the third symbol variation effect, the points that the player can earn will be higher than when other images are displayed. It is set. Therefore, before the points are displayed, the player compares the character image displayed in the point effect with the character image that is the subject of the third symbol variation effect, and determines whether or not the points that can be obtained with the current point effect are higher. can be predicted. Therefore, the player can watch the performance while looking forward to the continuation of the performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, a character image is displayed in the point performance, and points are given to the indicator corresponding to the character image, but other configurations may also be used, for example, when points are displayed. In this case, points may be accumulated in an indicator corresponding to a character that is the subject of the third symbol variation performance.

Further, for example, the pending image displayed on the pending display section may be changed to a character image displayed as a point effect. In this case, by making it difficult for the player to understand whether the change in the pending image is due to the point effect or whether the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the changed pending image indicates the expectation that the jackpot will be achieved, the player It is possible to have the player watch the performance that will be performed later.

As explained above, the point display location is set according to the display mode of the third symbol variation production, and furthermore, the points are distributed based on the characters displayed in the third symbol variation production, so the game It is possible to perform point presentations that are easy for people to understand.

In addition, if there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, even if it is possible to select the area where points are displayed based on the number of points awarded or the performance result of the third symbol variation performance (special symbol lottery result). good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the current displayed point is 1 point (low point) or the current special symbol lottery result is a loss, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 where points can be displayed, Points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy "Monster" as the main body of the third symbol variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special symbol is a win. In this case, of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points, it is preferable to display points in the small area Dm11 that is near the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect. This makes it possible for the player to predict in advance whether the current special symbol lottery will be a jackpot by understanding where points are displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area where points are not displayed, but for example, within one small area, the main area of the third symbol variation effect is The proportion occupied by an image may be calculated, and if the proportion is less than a predetermined amount (less than 10%), the small area may be determined to be an area that can be displayed as a point. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a player who is watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. First, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167.

FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ROM 222 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a press scenario table 222c, a character selection table 222d, and a point selection table 222e are added. Other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the press scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the press scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 165(a), a normal press scenario 222c1, a long press scenario 222c2, and a compound press scenario 222c3 are set in the press scenario table 222c.

FIG. 165(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal press scenario 222c1. In the normal press scenario 222c1, a period during which normal button presses are valid (normal press period) is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (i.e., the elapsed time since the start of the variable display). This is a scenario. The information of this normal press scenario 222c1 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the normal press effect is selected as a variation pattern, and is the normal press period based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m. is determined.

Furthermore, a timing type is set for each period during which the button press is valid. By executing (displaying) the effect according to this timing type, it is possible to execute (display) the effect according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed.

Specifically, in the normal press scenario 222c1, a normal press period is set as the press period type for the value "5001 to 9000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. "OK" is set as the timing type. Although the details will be described later, the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is 0 when the fluctuation display starts, and is incremented by 1 every 1 ms thereafter, so the period from 5001 ms to 9000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the normal press period. will be done.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored for the value "15001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the end processing of the press effect is executed.

Note that if the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", there is no setting of the press period type, and the button press is an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the long press scenario 222c2. In the long-press scenario 222c2, a period during which the long-press button is valid (long-press period) is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the start of the variable display). This is the scenario in which The information of this long press scenario 222c2 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the long press effect is selected as a variation pattern, and the long press press period is determined based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m. It is determined that

Specifically, in the long press scenario 222c2, a long press period is set as the press period type and "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. There is. That is, the period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of the fluctuation is determined as the long press period. The long press period is a period for determining whether the frame button 22 has been pressed for a predetermined period (in this control example, for 2 seconds or more) (has been pressed for a long time). In the long press effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which characters "Long press successful!" is displayed) is performed based on the fact that a long press operation has been performed during the long press period.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored for the value "15001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 15001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the end processing of the press effect is executed.

Note that if the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "0 to 5000" or "9001 to 15000", there is no setting of the press period type, and the button press is an invalid period.

Next, FIG. 165(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the composite press scenario 222c3. The composite press scenario 222c3 is a scenario in which a period during which multiple types of button presses are valid is determined according to the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k (that is, the elapsed time since the start of the variable display). The information of this composite press scenario 222c3 is set in the press scenario storage area 223m when the composite press effect is selected as a variation pattern, and is various press periods based on the information of the set press scenario storage area 223m. is determined. In this embodiment, only one type of composite press scenario is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types may be provided.

Specifically, in the composite press scenario 222c3, an auto press period is set as the press period type and "OK" is set as the timing type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. That is, the period from 5001 ms to 12000 ms from the start of the fluctuation will be determined as the auto-press period. The auto press period is a period in which auto press is executed based on the frame button 22 being pressed for a predetermined period (in this control example, 2 seconds or more). In the auto press effect, based on the fact that a long press operation was performed during the auto press period, the frame button 22 is displayed as being pressed every second while the long press operation continues (for example, the frame button 22 is displayed as being pressed every second. An effect in which the gauge increases by hitting 22 repeatedly is executed.

For the value "12001 to 13200" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, a release period is set as the press period type when the press is being pressed automatically, and a normal press effect is set when the press is being pressed non-auto. "NG" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13201 to 13800" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, a release period is set when the press period type is auto press, and a normal press effect is set when the press is non-auto press. "OK" is set as the timing type.

For the value "13801 to 15000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, a release period is set when the press period type is auto press, and a normal press effect is set when the press is non-auto press. "NG" is set as the timing type.

That is, when the auto button is pressed, a release effect is displayed, which is an effect when the frame button 22 is released, and by releasing the frame button 22 during a period of 13201 ms to 13800 ms from the start of the fluctuation, a release effect based on the timing type of "OK" is displayed. For example, the words "Good timing!") are displayed. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is released between 12,001 ms and 13,200 ms or between 13,801 ms and 15,000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the words "Bad timing!") is displayed.

When the non-auto press is in progress, a normal press effect is displayed, which is an effect of pressing the frame button 22. By pressing the frame button 22 during a period of 13,201 ms to 13,800 ms from the start of the fluctuation, the button is pressed based on the timing type of "OK". An effect (for example, the words "Good timing!") is displayed. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is pressed between 12,001 ms and 13,200 ms or between 13,801 ms and 15,000 ms, an effect based on the timing type of "NG" (for example, the words "Bad timing!") is displayed.

Auto press effect is set for the value "15001 to 18000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k, and "OK" is set as the timing type.

Information of "END" indicating the end of the press scenario is stored for the value "20001" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. That is, when 20001 ms has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, this "END" information is acquired, and the process of ending the composite press effect is executed.

Next, details of the character selection table 222d provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the character selection table 222d includes a winning character selection table 222d1 and a losing character selection table 222d2.

First, the contents of the winning character selection table 222d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 166(b). FIG. 166(b) is a table for determining the characters to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point performance when the determination result of the jackpot is a jackpot. is the specified table.

Although not shown, the performance counter 223f has three types of independent counters, and when selecting a character in each period, different counters are used to select the character. This makes it possible to increase the variety of characters displayed in the first to third periods, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Specifically, in the winning character selection table 222d1, "Hero" is defined as a character that corresponds to the value "0 to 49" of the production counter 223f, and "Hero" corresponds to the value "50 to 100" of the production counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as a character, and "turtle" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "101 to 149" of the performance counter 223f. The characters corresponding to the value "150 to 199" of the production counter 223f are defined as "characters that are the same as the type of point production", and are the same as the characters that perform the main production in the point production (hero, rabbit, turtle). The same character will be selected.

That is, in the point performance that is executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the same character as the character that performs the main performance in the point performance is likely to be displayed in the first to third periods. Since the player plays the game in the expectation that the same character as the character that performs the main performance in the point performance will be displayed during the first to third periods, the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the contents of the losing character selection table will be explained with reference to FIG. 166(c). FIG. 166(c) is a table for determining the characters to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point performance when the jackpot determination result is a failure, and the characters are displayed in accordance with the value of the performance counter 223f. is the defined table.

Specifically, in the losing character selection table 222d2, "Hero" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "0 to 65" of the production counter 223f, and "Hero" corresponds to the value "66 to 132" of the production counter 223f. "Rabbit" is defined as a character, and "turtle" is defined as a character corresponding to the value "133-199" of the performance counter 223f.

Next, details of the point selection table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the point selection table 222e.

As shown in FIG. 167(a), the point selection table 222e includes a winning point selection table 222e1 and a losing point selection table 222e2.

First, the contents of the winning point selection table 222e1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167(b). FIG. 167(b) is a table for determining the points to be displayed in the first period to the third period of the point performance when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and points are displayed in accordance with the value of the performance counter 223f. is the specified table. Note that when selecting points in each period, selections are made using different counters, similarly to the case of character selection. This makes it possible to increase the variation of points displayed in the first period to the third period, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Specifically, in the winning point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as the point corresponding to the value "0 to 2" of the last digit of the production counter 223f, and the value of the last digit of the production counter 223f is defined as "1". "2" is defined as the point corresponding to "3-6", and "3" is defined as the point corresponding to the last digit "7-9" of the performance counter 223f.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(c), in the losing point selection table 222e1, "1" is defined as the point corresponding to the last digit value "0 to 4" of the performance counter 223f, and the performance "2" is defined as the point corresponding to the last one digit value "5 to 7" of the counter 223f, and "3" is defined as the point corresponding to the last one digit value "8 to 9" of the production counter 223f. stipulated.

Therefore, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured to allow higher points to be selected more easily than the losing point selection table 222e2. That is, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, higher points are more likely to be displayed in the first to third periods of the point presentation. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that high points will be displayed during the first to third periods of the point performance, so the player's interest can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 164, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example to a pressed production flag 223j, a pressed production scenario counter 223k, a pressed scenario storage area 223m, a slot production in progress flag 223n, and a slot production counter 223p. , the difference is that a slot performance state 223q is added, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The press-down effect flag 223j is a flag for determining whether the press-down effect is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the press-down effect is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it indicates that the press-down effect is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the effect is not being executed (displayed). This press effect flag 223j is set to ON when the obtained variation pattern is determined to be a press effect (S2031: Yes in FIG. 170) in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170). (See S2031). Then, it is referenced in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) to determine whether or not the press effect is in progress (see S4401 in FIG. 172), and is set to off when the press effect ends (S4416 in FIG. 172). reference).

The press effect scenario counter 223k is a counter for counting the elapsed time since the start of the variable display in which the press effect has been set. This press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time it is determined that a press effect is in progress in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) (see S4402 in FIG. 172), and is initialized to 0 when the press effect ends. (See S4415 in FIG. 172). Since the press effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. Based on the value of this press effect scenario counter 223k (the elapsed time since the start of the variable display) and the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m, which will be described later, whether the button press is valid or not. It is determined whether or not.

The pressed scenario storage area 223m is an area for storing the pressed scenarios stored in the pressed scenario table 222c described above. In this press scenario storage area 223m, when a variation pattern in which a press effect is set is acquired in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), a press scenario corresponding to the set press effect is set. (See S2033 in FIG. 170). Based on the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m and the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k described above, it is determined whether or not the button press is valid.

The slot production in progress flag 223n is a flag for determining whether the slot production is being executed (displayed). When it is on, it indicates that the slot production is being executed (displayed), and when it is off, it indicates that the slot production is being executed (displayed). Indicates that the effect is not being executed (displayed). This slot effect flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that the obtained variation pattern is a slot effect (S2034: Yes in FIG. 172). (See S2305). In the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referenced to determine whether or not a slot effect is in progress (see S4601 in FIG. 174), and is set to off when the slot effect is ended ( (See S4617 in FIG. 174).

The slot effect counter 223p is a counter for counting the elapsed time since the start of the variable display in which the slot effect has been set. This slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4603 in FIG. 174) when it is determined that the slot performance is in progress (S4601 in FIG. 174: Yes) in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174). Since the slot effect setting process is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. The value of the slot performance counter 223p is set during the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), the process during the first slot performance (see FIG. 175), the process during the normal slot performance (see FIG. 176), and the process during the first reduced slot performance (see FIG. 177). ), the second shortened slot presentation process (see FIG. 178), and the extended slot presentation process (see FIG. 179).

The slot performance status 223q is an area in which information indicating the status of the slot performance is stored, and includes during the first slot performance, during the normal slot performance, during the first reduced slot performance, during the second reduced slot performance, and during the extended slot performance. The corresponding value is stored. This slot effect state 223q indicates that the initial slot effect is set when it is determined in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) that a slot effect is set in the obtained variation pattern (S2034: Yes in FIG. 170). (See S2036 in FIG. 170). In the initial slot performance process (see FIG. 175), if the normal slot performance is selected, the normal slot performance is set (see S4705 in FIG. 175), and if the first shortened slot performance is selected, the first shortened slot performance is set. A performance is set (see S4707 in FIG. 175), and when a special slot performance is selected, a special slot performance is set (see S4712 in FIG. 175). In the normal slot performance processing (see Figure 176), if a slot stop command for displaying a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned is set, a waiting state for completion is set (see S4805 in Figure 176), and the second shortened slot performance When setting the display slot effect command corresponding to , the second reduced slot effect is set (see S4807 in FIG. 176). In the process during the first shortened slot performance (see FIG. 177), when the second shortened slot performance is selected, the second shortened slot performance is set (see S4904 in FIG. 177), and when the extended slot performance is selected, An extended slot effect is set (see S4908 in FIG. 177). In the second shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 178), when setting a slot stop performance command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned, a state of waiting for completion is set (see S5005 of FIG. 178). In the extended slot performance process (see FIG. 179), when setting a slot stop performance command for displaying a stop mode in which two symbols are aligned, a waiting state for completion is set (see S5105 in FIG. 179). Then, in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), it is referenced to determine which slot performance is being executed (displayed), and is cleared when the slot performance ends (see S4619 in FIG. 174).

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 168. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the first control example in that the contents of the work RAM 233 and character ROM 234 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, the work RAM 233 in this control example has a prohibited area storage area 233m added to the first control example. The prohibited area storage area 233m is a small area of the display area (Dm11 to Dm31, see FIG. 163), which is made up of a total of nine areas in which the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into three vertically and three horizontally. information indicating the stored information is stored, and control is performed so that the character design and point design are not displayed in the display area corresponding to the stored information. Specifically, if Dm11, Dm12, and Dm13 are stored as information indicating display areas in the prohibited area storage area 233m, for example, Dm11, Dm11, and Dm13 do not correspond to the display areas stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Select a character pattern (not displayed on Dm12 or Dm13) and a point pattern to execute the point effect. Further, after a character symbol is selected, the prohibited area storage area 233m is updated based on the display area where the selected character symbol is displayed, and then a point symbol is selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the character pattern and the point pattern from being displayed overlappingly in the same display area. In addition, when selecting a point symbol, if all the display areas are stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, overlapping display can be avoided by combining (or reducing) the image data of the character symbol and the point symbol. This may be prevented, or one of the character pattern and the point pattern may not be displayed.

The character ROM 234 in this control example has a character data table 234a3 and a point data table 234a4 added to the first control example.

The character data table 234a3 is a table in which image data for displaying character symbols in the above-described point presentation is stored. This character data table 234a3 stores display information of character symbols displayed in the first period to the third period in point production, and in point production command processing (see FIG. 186), character information of the received command is stored. Display information of the corresponding character symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The character symbol display information includes information regarding the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and includes the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so that it is not selected. This prevents the character design from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, so that, for example, the point design and character design displayed in a point performance are not displayed overlappingly. You can prevent this from happening.

The point data table 234a4 is a table in which image data for displaying point symbols in the above-described point production is stored. This point data table 234a4 stores display information of point symbols displayed in the first period to the third period in point production, and in point production command processing (see FIG. 186), point information of the received command is stored. Display information of the corresponding point symbol is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

The point symbol display information includes information regarding the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and includes the small areas (Dm11 to Dm33) stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m. Display information that matches is processed so that it is not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent point symbols from being displayed in the display area stored in the prohibited area storage area 233m, so that, for example, point symbols and character symbols displayed in a point production are not displayed overlappingly. You can prevent this from happening.

<About the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 179. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, the main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) is changed to execute the press effect setting process (S1731) and the slot effect setting process (S1732), and the variation The difference is that the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 169) is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 140), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 169, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In main processing 2, the processing of S1701 to S1710 is executed similarly to the main processing in the first control example described above (see FIG. 101).

When the process of S1710 is finished, a press effect setting process is executed (S1731), a slot effect setting process is executed (S1732), and the process moves to S1711. Then, command determination processing is executed (S1711), variable display setting processing 2 is executed (S1712), and the process moves to S1713. After S1713, the processes of S1713 to S1717 are executed in the same way as in the first control example described above.

Here, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. This variable display setting process 2 (S1712) adds a process for executing a press effect, a slot effect, and a point effect instead of the reach navigation effect to the variable display setting process of the first control example (see FIG. 140). They are different in that respect, and are the same in other respects. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1712), first, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed similarly to the first control example, and then a display variable pattern command is set (S2006).

After completing the process of S2006, it is determined whether the set variation pattern command is for executing a press effect (S2031). In the process of S2031, if it is determined that the press effect is to be executed (S2031), the press effect in progress flag 223j is set to ON (S2032), and the press effect scenario corresponding to the obtained variation pattern is stored in the press scenario storage area 223m. (S2033), and the process moves to S2007.

In the process of S2033, for example, if the obtained variation pattern is for executing a normal press effect, a normal press scenario is obtained from the press scenario table 222c and set in the press scenario storage area 223m. Thereby, the button validity period can be adjusted to the display of the effect based on the press scenario storage area 223m and the press effect scenario counter 223k.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, if it is determined that the push effect is not to be executed (S2031: No), then it is determined whether or not the slot effect is to be executed (S2034).

In the process of S2034, if it is determined that the set variation pattern command is for executing a slot effect (S2034: Yes), the slot effect in progress flag 223n is set to ON (S2035), and the slot effect state 223q is set. is set as the first slot performance (S2036), and the process moves to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2034, if it is determined that the slot effect is not to be executed (S2034: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect is to be executed (S2037).

In the process of S2037, if it is determined that the set variation pattern command is for executing a point effect (S2037: Yes), a point effect setting process is executed (S2038), and the process moves to the process of S2007. . On the other hand, in the process of S2037, if it is determined that the point performance is not to be executed (S2037: No), the process of S2038 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2007.

In the transition to S2007, similarly to the first control example, the processes from S2007 to S2011 are executed, and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 174, details of the point performance setting process (S1837) executed in the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) will be described. The point effect setting process (S1837) is a process for determining the display mode of the point effect and transmitting a display point effect command for executing the point effect in the determined display mode to the display control device 114. be.

In the point performance setting process (S1837), first, it is determined whether or not the win/fail determination result is a jackpot (S4301). Then, first to third character information is determined based on the type of point performance, the value of the performance counter 223f, and the winning character selection table 222d1 (S4302). As described above, the first to third character information is information for displaying character designs during the three periods in which the character designs set for the point production and the point designs are displayed. The first character information is information on the character design to be displayed in the first period (the shortest elapsed time since the start of variable display) among the three periods, and the second character information is information in the first period. The third character information is information on character designs to be displayed in the second period which is the next period, and the third character information is information on the character designs to be displayed in the third period which is the next period after the second period.

As described above, the winning character selection table 222d1 is configured so that the same character design as a predetermined character in the point presentation is easily selected. As a result, if the character mainly displayed in the point performance and the character design displayed in the first to third periods are the same character, the player can expect a jackpot after that. I can do it.

When the process of S4302 is finished, the first to third point information is determined based on the last digit value of the performance counter 223f and the winning point selection table 222e1 (S4303), and the process moves to S4306. Like the first to third character information described above, the first to third point information is information for displaying point symbols in the first to third periods set in the point presentation.

As described above, the winning point selection table 222e1 is configured so that point symbols with higher points are more easily selected than the losing point selection table 222e2. Thereby, many point symbols with high points are displayed in the point production, so that the player can expect to win the jackpot afterwards.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the validity determination result is a failure (S4301: No), the first to third characters are selected based on the value of the production counter 223f and the failure character selection table 222d2. Information is determined (S4304). Then, the first to third point information is determined based on the value of the last digit of the production counter 223f and the point selection table 222e2 for losing (S4305), and the process moves to S4306.

When the process of S4303 or S4305 is completed, a point effect command for display is generated and set based on the type of point effect, the determined character information, and pointer information. The display point effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S1702) of main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the display point performance command, the display control device 114 performs a point performance based on the point performance type of the received command, the first to third character information, and the first to third point information. is set, and a point effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, details of the press effect setting process (S1731) executed in main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. This press effect setting process (S1731) detects the press of the frame button 22 (normal press, long press, etc.) according to the press effect that is being executed (displayed), and controls the display of the command corresponding to the press. This is a process for transmitting to the device 114.

In the press effect setting process (S1731), first, it is determined whether or not the press effect flag 223j is on (that is, whether or not the press effect is being performed) (S4401). In the process of S4401, if it is determined that the flag 223j during press effect is off (S4401: No), there is no need to perform settings related to the press effect, and thus the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the flag 223j during press effect is on (S4401: Yes), the process moves to the process of S4402 to execute the process related to the press effect.

In the process of S4402, the press effect scenario counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S4402), and the process moves to S4403. The press effect setting process (S1731) is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), so while the press effect is being executed, the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k changes every 1 ms. It is added by 1.

In the process of S4403, based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k updated in the process of S4402 and the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m, the current period is the press of the normal frame button 22. It is determined whether it is a detection period (normal press period) (S4403).

In the process of S4403, if it is determined that the current period is the normal press period (S4403), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404). In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4404: Yes), a display press command indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed during the normal press period is set based on the timing type. (S4405), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4404: No), the process of S4405 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4405, the timing type is acquired from the press scenario set in the press scenario storage area 223m based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k, and a display press command is set according to the timing type. Thereby, when performing different performances depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22, it is possible to determine at what timing the frame button 22 is pressed, and it is possible to execute the performance according to the pressing timing.

In the process of S4403, if it is determined that the current period is not a normal press period (S4403: No), then it is determined whether it is a period for detecting a long press of the frame button 22 (long press period). (S4406). In the process of S4406, if it is determined that the current period is the long press period (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4407). Specifically, when the period in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed is 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time (S4407), a long press command for display indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time during the long press period is set ( S4408), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed for a long time (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the current period is not a long press period (S4406: No), then it is determined whether the current period is an auto press period (S4409). In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is the auto press period (S4409: Yes), auto press effect setting process is executed (S4410), and this process ends. Details of the automatic press effect setting process (S4410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 173.

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the current period is not an auto-press period (S4409: No), then it is determined whether the current period is a release period (S4411). In the process of S4410. If it is determined that the current period is the release period (S4411: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been released (changed from a pressed state to a non-pressed state) (S4412). .

In the process of S4412, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been released (S4412: Yes), a release command for display indicating that the frame button 22 has been released during the release period is set, and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not released (S4412: No), the process of S4413 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4411, if it is determined that the current period is not a release period (S4411: No), then whether or not it is the end timing of the press effect period (obtained based on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k) It is determined whether the press period type of the press scenario is "END" information (S4414).

In the process of S4414, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the press effect period (S4414: Yes), the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is initialized to 0 (S4415), and the press effect in progress flag 223j is set to OFF. (S4416), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4414, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the press effect period (S4414: No), the processes of S4415 and S4416 are skipped, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 173, details of the automatic press effect setting process (S4410) that is executed when it is determined in the press effect setting process (see FIG. 172) that it is the auto press period will be explained. . This automatic press effect setting process (S4410) is based on the fact that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held down during the automatic press period, and the frame button 22 is pressed at regular intervals (every 1 second) during the period in which the frame button 22 is held down. This is a process for transmitting a command indicating that 22 has been pressed to the display control device 114. That is, in the automatic press effect, by pressing and holding the frame button 22 for a long time, the frame button 22 is automatically (automatically) pressed.

In the automatic press effect setting process (S4410), first, it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for 2 seconds or more, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has started. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has started (S4501: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m is changed to the press scenario for auto press ( S4502). Then, an auto press start command indicating that a long press of the frame button 22 has started (auto press has started) during the auto press period is set (S4503), and the process ends. In the process of S4502, the press scenario is changed to the press scenario for auto-press, so that the presentation mode displayed thereafter is changed to a presentation mode based on the assumption that the frame button 22 is pressed. (For example, you can change the effect that tells you to press a button to the effect that tells you to release the button.)

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has not started (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4504). In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed for a long time (S4504: Yes), the previous auto press is performed during the period in which the auto press started by the long press of the frame button 22 is executed. It is determined whether a certain period of time (1 second in this embodiment) has elapsed since execution of (S4505).

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period of time (1 second) has passed since the last auto-press was executed (S4504: Yes), an auto-press command for display is set (S4506), and the main Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S4504, if it is determined that a certain period of time (1 second) has not elapsed since the previous auto press was executed (S4504: No), the process of S4506 is skipped and this process is performed. finish.

In the process of S4504, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not being pressed for a long time (S4504: No), then it is determined whether or not the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507). Specifically, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for 5 ms or more after the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended. This prevents erroneously determining that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed temporarily (for example, for 1 ms) due to the influence of noise etc. can.

In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has ended (S4507: Yes), the press scenario stored in the press scenario storage area 223m is changed to a press scenario for non-auto press. (S4508). Then, a display auto-press end command indicating that the long-press of the frame button 22 has ended (auto-press has started) during the auto-press period is set (S4509), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the long press of the frame button 22 has not ended (S4507: No), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been normally pressed (S4510).

In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is normally pressed (S4510: Yes), this is a case where the frame button 22 is manually pressed (repeatedly pressed) during the automatic repeated press period, so the timing is determined based on the timing type. A display press command is set (S4511), and this processing ends.

In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not normally pressed (S4510: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, details of the slot performance setting process (S1732) executed in main process 2 (see FIG. 169) will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179. This slot performance setting process (S1732) is a process for performing processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the slot performance.

In the slot performance setting process (S1732), first, it is determined whether or not the slot performance flag 223n is on (whether or not the slot performance is being performed) (S4601). In the process of S4601, if it is determined that the slot performance flag 223n is off (S4601: No), this means that the slot performance is not being executed (displayed), so the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the slot performance flag 223n is on (S4601: Yes), the process proceeds to S4602 in order to execute (display) the slot performance. In the process of S4602, the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. Since the slot effect setting process (S1732) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 2 (see FIG. 169), the value of the slot effect counter 223p is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during the execution (display) of the slot effect. Ru.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the slot performance state 223q is a value indicating the first slot performance (S4603). In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the slot performance state 223q is a value indicating the first slot performance (S4603), this means that the first slot performance (initial slot performance) is being executed in the slot performance. In order to execute the process in the first slot performance, a process during the first slot performance is executed (S4604), and the process moves to S4613.

Here, details of the initial slot performance processing (S4604) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 175. The process during the first slot performance (S4604) is a process executed in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), and is a process for performing processing corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 in the first slot performance of the slot performance. be.

In the process during the first slot performance (S4604), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is within the valid button pressing period (S4701). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 2000 and 13000 (that is, from 2 seconds to 13 seconds after the start of the slot effect), it is determined that the button press is valid. do.

If it is determined in the process of S4701 that the button press is valid (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702). If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S4702: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703). . In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the value of the slot production counter 223p is between 2000 and 8000 (S4703: Yes), the button press is activated early (from 2 seconds to 13 seconds) during the valid button press period (from 2 seconds to 13 seconds). Since this is a case in which the frame button 22 is pressed during a period of 8 seconds) and the remaining performance time of the slot press performance is large, the process moves to step S4706 to execute the first shortened slot performance.

In the process of S4706, the first shortened slot performance is selected (S4706), the slot performance state 223q is set to the first shortened slot performance (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4708.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is not a value between 2000 and 8000 (that is, it is a value of 80001 or more) (S4703: Yes), the process proceeds to S4704 to execute a normal slot effect. Transition.

In the process of S4704, the normal slot effect is selected (S4704), the slot effect state 223q is set to the normal slot effect (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4708.

In the process of S4708, a display mode slot stop production command for a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4708), a display slot production command corresponding to the selected production is set (S4709), and this process is ended. .

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the button press is not valid (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4710).

In the process of S4710, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is larger than 13000 (S4701: Yes), this is a case where the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press validity period. In this case, the special slot effect is selected (S4711), the slot effect state 223q is set to the end waiting state (S4712), and the process moves to S4709.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4710 that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is 13000 or less (S4710: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4603, if it is determined that the first slot performance is not set in the slot performance state 223q (S4603: No), then it is determined whether or not a normal slot performance is set in the slot performance state 223q. (S4605). In the process of S4605, if it is determined that the normal slot effect is set (S4605: Yes), the process moves to normal slot effect processing (S4606).

This normal slot performance processing is a process for performing processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 during the normal slot performance. In the normal slot performance processing (S4606), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is within the valid button pressing period (S4801). Specifically, if the value of the slot effect counter 223p is between 17,000 and 28,000 (that is, from 17 seconds to 28 seconds after the start of the slot effect), the button press is valid. Discern.

In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the button press is not within the valid period (S4801: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the button press is valid (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802).

In the process of S4802, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4802: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4802, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the slot effect counter 223p is greater than 19000 (S4803).

In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is 19000 or less (S4803: No), the frame button 22 is pressed early during the execution (display) of the normal slot performance, and then the performance is This is a case where it is possible to execute the second shortened slot performance whose time is 10 seconds. In this case, a slot stop performance command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4808), the slot performance state 223q is set to the second shortened slot performance (S4809), and a display slot stop performance command corresponding to the second shortened slot performance is set (S4809). A slot production command is set (S4810), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4803, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), the process moves to the process of S4804 to end the slot performance.

In the process of S4804, it is determined whether or not the value of the production counter 223f is an even number (S4804), and if it is determined that it is an even number (S4804: Yes), a stop mode display slot where two symbols are aligned is displayed. A stop production command is set, and the process moves to S4807.

On the other hand, in the process of S4804, if it is determined that the value of the production counter 223f is an odd number (S4804: No), a slot stop production command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set, and the process proceeds to S4807. Transition.

In the process of S4807, the slot effect state 223q is set to a waiting state for completion (S4807), and this process ends.

In this way, in the normal slot performance, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, one symbol will be stopped and displayed, and after that, in the second shortened slot performance, one symbol will be stopped and displayed. Together with the stop display in the slot performance, three symbols will be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the depression of the frame button 22 is delayed, it is determined whether two symbols or one symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the value of the production counter. Therefore, by pressing the frame button 22 early, the possibility that the two symbols will be stopped and displayed increases, so that the player can actively participate in the game.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4605 that the normal slot performance is not set in the slot performance state 223q (S4605: No), then it is determined whether the first shortened slot performance is set in the slot performance state 223q. (S4607).

In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first reduced slot effect is being set (S4607: Yes), the first reduced slot effect is executed (S4608), and the process moves to S4613.

Here, details of the first reduced slot performance processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 177. The first shortened slot performance process (S4608) is a process executed in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), and performs processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 in the first shortened slot performance of the slot performance. This is a process for

In the process during the first shortened slot performance (S4608), first, it is determined whether or not the button press validity period in the first shortened slot performance is reached (S4901). Specifically, when the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 12,000 and 18,000, it is determined that the button press validity period in the first shortened slot performance has expired.

In the process of S4901, if it is determined that the valid period for pressing the button in the first shortened slot performance has elapsed (S4901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902).

In the process of S4902, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S4902: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4902, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S4902: Yes), the second shortened slot performance is selected (S4902), and the slot performance state 223q is set to the second shortened slot performance. (S4904). Then, a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S4905), and the process moves to S4909.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the button press period is not valid (S4901: No), it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906).

In the process of S4906, if it is determined that the value of the slot effect counter 223p is 18,000 or less (S4906: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4906, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is larger than 18000 (S4906: Yes), the frame button 22 is not pressed during the button press validity period in the first shortened slot performance. be. In this case, the extended slot performance is selected (S4907), the slot performance state 223q is set to the extended slot performance (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909.

When the process of S4905 or S4908 is finished, a display slot performance command corresponding to the selected performance is set (S4909), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4607, if it is determined that the first shortened slot performance is not set in the slot performance state 223q (S4607: No), then it is determined whether the second shortened slot performance is set in the slot performance state 223q. (S4609).

In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second reduced slot effect is being set (S4609: Yes), the second reduced slot effect process is executed (S4610), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, details of the second reduced slot performance processing (S4610) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178. The second shortened slot performance process (S4610) is a process executed in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), and corresponds to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the execution (display) of the second shortened slot performance. This is a process for performing processing.

In the process during the second shortened slot performance (S4610), first, it is determined whether or not the valid period for pressing the button in the second shortened slot performance is reached (S5001). Specifically, if the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 22,000 and 28,000, it is determined that the button press is valid.

In the process of S5001, if it is determined that the button press is not within the valid period (S5001: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the button press valid period has expired (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002).

In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5002: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5002: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5003), and the slot effect state 223q is changed. The process is set to a waiting state for completion (S5004), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that the second shortened slot performance is not set in the slot performance state 223q (S4609: No), then it is determined whether the extended slot performance is set in the slot performance state 223q. It is determined (S4611).

In the process of S4611, if it is determined that the extended slot performance is being set (S4611: Yes), the extended slot performance process is executed (S4612), and the process proceeds to S4613.

Here, details of the extended slot performance processing (S4612) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 179. The extended slot performance processing (S4612) is a process executed in the slot performance setting process (see FIG. 174), and is used to perform processing corresponding to pressing of the frame button 22 while the extended slot performance is being executed (displayed). This is the process.

In the extended slot performance processing (S4612), first, it is determined whether or not the button press validity period in the extended slot performance has expired (S5101). Specifically, if the value of the slot performance counter 223p is between 22,000 and 28,000, it is determined that the button press is valid.

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the button press is not within the valid period (S5101: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the button press is valid (S5101: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102).

In the process of S5102, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S5102: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5102: Yes), a slot stop effect command for displaying a stop mode in which one symbol is aligned is set (S5103), and the slot effect state 223q is changed. The process is set to a waiting state for completion (S5104), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 174, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4611, if it is determined that the extended slot performance is not set in the slot performance state 223q (S4611: No), the process moves to S4613.

In the process of S4613, in order to determine whether it is the end timing of the slot performance, it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is greater than 28000 (S4613). In the process of S4613, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is 28000 or less (S4613: No), it is not the end timing of the slot performance, so the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4613, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is larger than 28000 (S4613: Yes), it is the end timing of the slot performance, so next, the slot performance state 223q is in the waiting state for completion. It is determined whether there is one (S4614).

In the process of S4614, if the slot performance state 223q is in the waiting state for completion (S4614: Yes), the slot performance has already been stopped and displayed by the operation of the frame button 22, or the operation of the frame button 22 is not necessary. This is a case where a special slot effect is being executed. In this case, a display slot effect end command is set and the process moves to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4614, if the slot performance state 223q is not in the end waiting state (S4614: Yes), this is a case where the performance mode in the slot performance is not displayed in a stopped state. In this case, in order to end the slot performance after stopping and displaying the performance mode in the slot performance, a display slot performance forced termination command is set (S4616), and the process moves to S4617.

In the process of S4617, the slot performance flag 223n is set to OFF (S4617), the slot performance counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S4618), the slot performance state 223q is cleared (S4619), and this process ends.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 186. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that in command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 180), press effect related command processing, slot effect command processing, and point effect command processing are added, and other The points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. In the command determination process 2, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed similarly to the command determination process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 145).

If it is determined in the process of S2612 that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether a command related to the press effect has been received (S2631).

In the process of S2631, if it is determined that a command related to the press effect has been received (S2631: Yes), the process of the press effect related command is executed (S2632), and the process returns to the process of S2601. Details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184.

On the other hand, in the process of S2631, if it is determined that a command related to the press effect has not been received (S2631: No), then it is determined whether or not a slot effect command has been received (S2633).

In the process of S2633, if it is determined that the slot effect command has been received (S2633: Yes), the slot effect command process is executed (S2634), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the slot production command processing (S2634) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, in the process of S2633, if it is determined that the slot effect command has not been received (S2633: No), then it is determined whether or not the point effect command has been received (S2635).

In the process of S2635, if it is determined that the point effect command has been received (S2635: Yes), the point effect command process is executed (S2635), and the process returns to S2601. Details of the point performance command processing (S2635) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

On the other hand, in the process of S2635, if it is determined that the point effect command has not been received (S2635: No), other command processes are executed as in the first control example (S2614), and the process of S2601 is performed. Return to

Next, details of the press effect related command processing (S2632) will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. The press effect related command processing (S2632) is a process for performing processing corresponding to various commands for displaying (executing) a press effect.

In the press effect related command processing (S2632), first, it is determined whether a press command for display has been received (S5201). In the process of S5201, if it is determined that the display press command has been received (S5201: Yes), the press command process is executed (S5202), and the process moves to S5203.

Here, details of the press command processing (S5202) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flowchart showing press command processing. This press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the press command processing, first, a press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display press command is determined, the determined press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set (S5301). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5302).

Then, based on the press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5301, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S5303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5304). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5305), the press command process is ended, and the process returns to the press performance related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5201, if it is determined that a display press command has not been received (S5201: No), then it is determined whether a display long press command has been received (S5203).

In the process of S5203, if it is determined that the display long press command has been received (S5203: Yes), the long press command process is executed (S5204), and the process moves to S5205.

Here, details of the long press command processing (S5204) will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flowchart showing long press command processing. This long press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display long press command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the long press command processing, first, a long press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display long press command is determined, the determined long press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5402).

Then, based on the long-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5401, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S5403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5404). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5405), the long press command process is ended, and the process returns to the press performance related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5203, if it is determined that the display long press command has not been received (S5203: No), then it is determined whether the display auto press start command has been received (S5205).

In the process of S5205, if it is determined that the auto press start command for display has been received (S5205: Yes), the auto press start command process is executed (S5206), and the process moves to the process of S5207.

Here, details of the auto press start command processing (S5206) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(a). FIG. 183(a) is a flowchart showing auto press start command processing. This auto-push start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto-push start command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the auto press start command processing, first, an auto press start display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press start command is determined, and the determined auto press start display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5502).

Then, based on the auto press start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5501, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S5503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5505), the automatic press start command process is ended, and the process returns to the press performance related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5205, if it is determined that the display auto press start command has not been received (S5205: No), then it is determined whether the display auto press command has been received (S5207).

In the process of S5207, if it is determined that the display auto-press command has been received (S5207: Yes), the auto-press command process is executed (S5208), and the process moves to S5209.

Here, details of the auto press command processing (S5208) will be described with reference to FIG. 183(b). FIG. 183(b) is a flowchart showing auto-press command processing. This auto press command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the auto press command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the auto press command processing, first, an auto press display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press command is determined, the determined auto press display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5602).

Then, based on the auto-press display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5601, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S5603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5604). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5605), the auto press command process is ended, and the process returns to the press performance related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5207, if it is determined that the display auto press command has not been received (S5207: No), then it is determined whether the display auto press end command has been received (S5209).

In the process of S5209, if it is determined that the display auto press end command has been received (S5209: Yes), the auto press end command process is executed (S5210), and the process moves to S5211.

Here, details of the auto press end command processing (S5210) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a flowchart showing auto-press end command processing. This auto press end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display auto press end command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the auto press end command processing, first, an auto press end display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display auto press end command is determined, and the determined auto press end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5702).

Then, based on the auto press end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5701, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S5705), the auto press end command process is ended, and the process returns to the press performance related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5209, if it is determined that the display auto press end command has not been received (S5209: No), then it is determined whether the display release command has been received (S5211).

In the process of S5211, if it is determined that the display release command has been received (S5211: Yes), the release command process is executed (S5212), and this process ends.

Here, details of the release command processing (S5212) will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing release command processing. This release command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display release command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In release command processing, first, a release display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the display release command is determined, the determined release display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Set (S5801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5802).

Then, based on the release display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S5801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S5803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5805), the release command process is ended, and the process returns to the press performance related command process.

Returning to FIG. 181, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5211, if it is determined that the display release command has not been received (S5211: No), this process ends.

Next, details of the slot effect command processing (S2634) will be explained with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing slot production command processing. This slot performance command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display slot performance command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the slot performance command processing, first, a slot performance display data table corresponding to the timing type indicated by the slot performance command for display is determined, and the determined slot performance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S5902).

Then, based on the slot effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S5905), the slot production command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

Next, details of the point effect command processing (S2636) will be explained with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing point production command processing. This point production command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display point production command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the point performance command processing, first, a point performance display data table corresponding to the type of point performance indicated by the display point performance command is determined, and the determined slot performance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001).

Next, information on prohibited areas corresponding to the point performance data table determined in the process of S5901 is set in the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m (S6002).

Character data of character designs to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m set in the process of S6002 and the first to third character information indicated by the received command. The table is determined, the display data table buffer 233d is updated, and the first to third prohibited area storage areas 233m are updated with the prohibited area information corresponding to the determined character data table (S6003).

Point data of point symbols to be displayed in the first to third periods based on the information of the prohibited area storage area 233m updated in the process of S6003 and the first to third point information indicated by the received command. The table is determined and the display data table buffer 233d is updated (S6004).

Then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6005).

Then, based on the point effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6006), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6007). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6008), the point performance command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process 2.

As mentioned above, the composite press performance explained in the second control example is a performance in which the player continuously performs different operation modes (repeated hits, timing presses) on the frame button 22, so It is possible to increase the desire to participate in the project. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player is executing the auto-press function during the composite press performance, the press performance mode of the composite press performance to be executed is switched, so that a performance that does not make the player feel strange is provided. I can do it.

In addition, in this control example, as a compound press effect, the setting is such that normally, after the press effect (repeated hit effect) of repeatedly pressing the frame button 22, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 at a good timing (timing press effect) is executed. If the automatic press function is executed at the timing when the performance changes from the continuous press performance to the timing press performance, the above-mentioned timing press performance is configured to switch to a release performance in which the button is released at the right time. Other configurations may also be used.

For example, if the auto-press function is executed at the timing when the effect switches from the continuous press effect to the timing press effect, the timing of the press operation during the timing press effect may be automatically determined, or the continuous press effect may be automatically determined. The performance may be continuously executed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to provide a performance that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player who is executing the auto-press function.

Further, in the second control example, the normal press effect, the timing press effect, and the release effect can be displayed as the composite press effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, a long press period during which a long press effect is executed may be provided as part of the composite press effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the timing at which each press presentation mode of the compound press presentation is changed is the timing at which the press presentation is switched, but the presentation mode of the next press presentation is changed at the timing when the previous press presentation is being executed. may be determined. This makes it possible to inform the player in advance that the operation mode of the frame button 22 is different during the composite press effect.

Furthermore, although the configuration is such that the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously accepted during the production period of the composite press effect executed in the second control example, an invalid period is provided during which the operation of the frame button 22 is not accepted. It's okay. With this configuration, it is possible to provide guidance regarding the composite press effect using the invalid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid during the period in which the composite press effect is being executed, making it easy for the player to understand. We can provide performances.

The composite press performance described above in the second control example is configured to display the result of the composite press performance based on all the operation results for each press performance executed during the composite press performance. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game for each press effect. Note that the method of displaying the performance results of the composite press performance is not limited to this, and the performance results may be displayed independently for each press performance that is executed during the composite press performance.

As explained above, in the continuous slot performance in this control example, in the slot performance that is executed continuously within a specific period (within 30 seconds), the next slot performance is determined depending on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. It is configured such that the performance mode of the slot performance to be executed is selected. Specifically, it is configured such that the number of times slot performances are executed during continuous slot performances is changed. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 with enthusiasm, and has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the performance result of the continuous slot performance is displayed as a combination of pseudo symbols that are stopped and displayed in each of the multiple slot performances executed during the continuous slot performance, and The performance results of continuous slot performances are made to be more advantageous to the player as the number of slot performances increases. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 with greater motivation, and has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, even if the player is unable to operate the frame button 22 early in the first slot performance (initial slot performance) in a continuous slot performance, the slot performance can be executed three times. It becomes possible to have players play the game with great enthusiasm. Furthermore, even if the number of slot performances executed during continuous slot performances is small, it is possible to stop and display multiple combinations of predetermined pseudo symbols in one slot performance, so it is possible for players to It can keep you looking forward to the end.

Furthermore, for players who refuse to operate the frame button 22, a special slot performance that does not require the frame button operation is executed after the first slot performance ends, so that the player will not feel dissatisfied. do not have.

In addition, in this second control example, slot effects are used as a plurality of operation effects executed during a continuous effect executed for a specific period, but based on the operation result for one operation effect executed during the continuous effect. However, as long as it is possible to change the presentation mode and number of times of other operation presentations executed during the continuous presentation, presentations other than those using slots may be used.

As explained above, according to the point performance of the second control example, the point display location is set according to the performance display mode of the third symbol variation performance, and furthermore, the points are displayed in the third symbol variation performance. Since points are distributed based on the characters played, it is possible to perform point effects that are easy for players to understand.

In addition, if there are multiple small areas where points can be displayed, even if it is possible to select the area where points are displayed based on the number of points awarded or the performance result of the third symbol variation performance (special symbol lottery result). good. For example, in the case of FIG. 163(b), if the current displayed point is 1 point (low point) or the current special symbol lottery result is a loss, among the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 where points can be displayed, Points are displayed in the small area Dm13 near the enemy "Monster" as the main body of the third symbol variation effect, and the points displayed this time are 2 points (high points) or the lottery result of this special symbol is a win. In this case, of the small areas Dm11 to Dm13 that can display points, it is preferable to display points in the small area Dm11 that is near the "hero" who is the main character of the third symbol variation effect. This allows the player to predict in advance whether or not the current special symbol lottery will be a jackpot by understanding where points are displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the display mode of the character displayed as a point effect (the character displayed on Dm12 in FIG. 163(b)) be a display mode that guides the point display location (small area) that will be executed later. Specifically, it is preferable to use a display mode that guides the point display location (small area) based on the character's line of sight.

In addition, in this control example, the small area used in the third symbol variation effect is set as an area where points are not displayed, but for example, within one small area, the main area of the third symbol variation effect is The proportion occupied by an image may be calculated, and if the proportion is less than a predetermined amount (less than 10%), the small area may be determined to be an area that can be displayed as a point. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a player who is watching the third symbol variation effect misses the point display.

Note that the following configuration may be used as a configuration for setting the display location of the point performance based on the location where the third symbol variation performance is displayed. In other words, when the display control device 114 receives a command to display points, it controls points to be displayed in all small areas, except for the small area where the point display is actually made visible to the player. Control may be performed to mask the point display displayed in the area so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player. By configuring in this way, for example, during the third symbol variation performance, the display position of the main image displayed in the third symbol variation production moves to various small areas, and the prohibited area and the allowable area are swapped. This can facilitate the handling of cases.

In addition, as a similar process, the point display image layer for displaying points displays points in all small areas, and the effect display image layer displays the third symbol variation effect in front of the point display image layer. It is preferable to provide the effect display image layer and perform a process of transmitting one of the small areas not used in the third symbol variation effect to the effect display image layer.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the small area where the third symbol variation effect is being executed is set as the prohibited area where point display is prohibited, but the small area where other displays are being executed is set as the prohibited area. For example, it may be set as a small area where game information such as the number of reservations is displayed, or a small area that is provided in the pachinko machine 10 and that is activated when a predetermined condition (predetermined variation pattern selection) is satisfied. 3. In a gaming machine that has a decorative accessory that covers a part (specific small area) of the front surface of the symbol display device 81, an abnormality is detected in the above-mentioned specific small area when a predetermined condition is met, or when an abnormality is detected. In a gaming machine having a predetermined small area in which information is displayed, the predetermined small area may be set as a prohibited area when an abnormality is detected.

Furthermore, although this second control example describes a control example using the display area of one display device (third symbol display device 81), similar control may be performed using multiple display devices. For example, when a movable (rotatable) sub-display device is placed at a predetermined position, it may be set as a prohibited area, and when it is placed at any other position, it may be set as an allowed area.

<First modification of second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. The first modification of the second control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 203 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174) is changed. The difference is that the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed in the slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189), and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first modification of the second control example, three types of auto-pressing periods (A, B, C) are provided, and the pressing intervals are different in each auto-pressing period. As a result, for example, it is possible to create a performance that requires pressing the frame button 22 multiple times during the button press period (repeated press effect), or press the frame button 22 only once at a good timing during the button press period (timing press effect). An appropriate press can be performed depending on the type of press effect.

Further, in the first modified example, a performance mode is displayed in which a rotation performance in which the slot is rotated and stopped is performed three times as a slot performance, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the depression of the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is pressed early in the rotation performance, the rotation speed of the next rotation performance becomes slow, and as the depression of the frame button 22 becomes slower, the rotation speed of the next rotation performance becomes faster. In other words, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation performance will be slow, making it easier to line up the desired symbols, whereas if the frame button 22 is pressed late, the next The rotation speed in the rotation performance becomes faster, making it difficult to align the desired symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege of making it easier to align the desired symbols by pressing the frame button 22 early, and it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

<About the electrical configuration in the first modification of the second control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 187, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the press scenario table 222c have been changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the press scenario table 222c. As shown in FIG. 187(a), the press scenario table 222c in the first modified example includes a first compound press scenario 222c4 and The difference is that a second composite press scenario 222c5 is provided, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first composite press scenario 222c4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first composite press scenario 222c4. The first composite press scenario 222c4 is different from the composite press scenario 222c3 of the second control example described above in that the press interval during the auto press period is different, and the other points are the same. Explanation of the same points will be omitted.

In the first composite press scenario 222c4, as shown in FIG. 187(b), auto press period A (press interval 1 second) is set as the press period type for the value "5001 to 12000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. , an auto press period B (press interval 0.5 seconds) is set for the value "15001 to 18000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k.

In this way, by varying the press intervals for the auto press periods that are set to different periods depending on the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k, the player who is executing the auto press function can execute the auto press function. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the performance based on what is being done.

In addition, in this modification, the press interval is set in advance for each auto press period, but other configurations may be used. For example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is set in advance. When reaches the auto press period, one auto press pattern is selected from the auto press pattern selection table that stores multiple auto press patterns with different press intervals, and the press interval is determined based on the selected auto press pattern. may be set. With this configuration, even if a compound press effect based on the same compound press scenario is executed, the auto press function with different press intervals will be executed, so that the player may get tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

Further, a predetermined auto-push pattern may be selected from the above-mentioned auto-push pattern selection table based on the result of the special symbol discrimination. Specifically, when a performance is executed in which the degree of progress increases depending on the number of presses, if the special symbol is determined to have won the jackpot, it is stored in the automatic press pattern selection table. It is preferable that the auto press pattern with the shortest press interval be selected from among the auto press patterns available. This makes it possible to increase the degree of progress of the performance when the special symbol discrimination result indicates that the jackpot has been won. Therefore, it is possible for the player who is executing the auto-pressing function to predict the determination result of the special symbol based on the degree of progress of the performance.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the third symbol display device 81 to notify the press interval while the auto press function is being executed. This allows the player to visually grasp the press interval of the auto press function currently being executed.

Next, the contents of the second composite press scenario 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 187(c). FIG. 187(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second composite press scenario 222c5. The second composite press scenario 222c5 differs from the above-described first composite press scenario 222c4 in that the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k, which is a period corresponding to the timing press period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)), ranges from "12001" to " 15000'' is also different in that an auto-press period is set, but other points are the same. Explanation of the same points will be omitted.

In the second composite press scenario 222c5, as shown in FIG. 187(c), an auto press period C (press interval of 2 seconds) is set for the values "12001" to "15000" of the press effect scenario counter 223k. . In this way, by executing the auto press function with a press interval of 2 seconds during the period in which a period of 3 seconds is set as the timing press period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)), the predetermined press time is substantially It is possible to realize a situation where a button is pressed at the right timing.

Specifically, for example, if a press effect is executed by the auto press function at a timing when the value of the press effect scenario counter 223k is "14000" during auto press period A, the press effect during auto press period C is executed. The next press effect is executed at the timing when the value of the scenario counter 223k is "16000", that is, at the timing 2 seconds after the previous press effect. Therefore, in the case described above, the press effect will be executed at a timing one second after the start of the timing press period Db1 (see FIG. 157(a)).

In this way, by setting different pressing intervals during auto-pressing, button-pressing performances with different gameplay characteristics can be suitably executed while the auto-pressing function is being executed (while the frame button 22 is held down). becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modification will be described. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first modified example is different from the second control example described above in that a press number counter 223r is provided, and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The press count counter 223r is a counter for determining the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed during execution (display) of the slot effect. This press count counter 223r is incremented by 1 when the frame button 22 is pressed and when the end timing of the button press validity period arrives in the slot effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 189). (See S6108). When the value of the number of presses counter 223r is 2 or less, the setting of the next rotation performance is executed, and when the value of the number of presses counter 223r is 3, the end of the slot performance is set. Furthermore, a button press validity period is set based on the value of the press count counter 223r.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device in the first modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, a control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the second control example will be described. The control process in this first modification is different from the second control example described above in that slot effect setting process 2 (FIG. 189) is executed instead of slot effect setting process (see FIG. 174). , otherwise the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing slot effect setting processing 2 (S1732). This slot performance setting process 2 (S1732) displays a performance mode in which a rotation performance in which the slot is rotated and stopped three times as a slot performance, and the rotation of the slot is stopped based on the depression of the frame button 22. Perform processing. In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, processing is performed to slow down the rotation speed in the next rotation performance so that the number of rotations in each rotation performance is the same. That is, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation performance will be slowed down, making it easier to align the desired symbols.

In the slot performance setting process 2 (S1732), first, it is determined whether the slot performance is being executed (displayed) by determining whether or not the slot performance flag 223n is on (S6101).

In the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot performance flag 223n is off (S6101: No), this means that the slot performance is not being executed (displayed), so the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S6101, if it is determined that the slot performance flag 223n is on (S6101: Yes), since the slot performance is being executed (displayed), the slot performance counter 223p is incremented by 1 ( S6102), the process moves to S6103.

In the process of S6103, it is determined whether or not the button press validity period has elapsed (S6103). Specifically, the button press validity period is set by the process of S6115, which will be described later. For example, when the number of presses counter 223r is 0 (that is, the first rotation performance in the slot performance), the value of the slot performance counter 223p is If the value is between 2001 and 8000 (that is, from 2001 ms to 8000 ms after the start of the slot effect), the button press is valid.

In the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button is not in the valid period (S6103: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S6103, if it is determined that the button is valid (S6103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6104). In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6104: Yes), a display slot stop effect command is set to stop the rotating symbol in the rotating effect (S6105). , the process moves to step S6108.

In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6104: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button press validity period (S6106). Specifically, when the number of presses counter 223r is 0, it is determined whether the value of the slot performance counter 223p is 8000 or not.

In the process of S6106, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the button press validity period (S6106: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S6106, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the button press validity period (S6106: Yes), a display slot stop effect command is issued to forcibly stop the rotating symbols in the rotation effect. is set (S6107), and the process moves to S6108.

In the process of S6108, the number of presses counter 223r is incremented by 1 (S6108), and it is determined whether the added value of the number of presses counter 223r is 3 (S6109).

In the process of S6109, if it is determined that the value of the number of presses counter 223r is 3 or less (S6109: No), this means that the rotating effect in the slot effect has not been executed three times, so the next rotating effect is executed. The process moves to step S6113 for setting.

In the process of S6113, the remaining time up to the upper limit time corresponding to the value of the number of presses counter 223r is calculated (S6113). Specifically, when the value of the number of presses counter 223r is 1, the upper limit time is 18000 as the value of the slot production counter 223p, and when the value of the number of presses counter 223r is 2, the upper limit time is the slot production counter 223p. The value of the performance counter 223p is 28000, and the remaining time is obtained by subtracting the current value of the slot performance counter 223p from the value of the slot performance counter 223p, which is the upper limit time.

A display slot effect command is set for a display mode that has a rotation speed of 10 rotations in the remaining time calculated in the process of S6113 (S6114), and a button press validity period corresponding to the value of the press number counter 223r is set. (S6115), this process ends.

Specifically, in the process of S6115, when the value of the number of presses counter 223r is 1, the period during which the value of the slot production counter 223p is between 12001 and 18000 is set as the button press validity period, and the number of presses counter 223r When the value of is 2, the period during which the value of the slot performance counter 223p ranges from 22001 to 18000 is set as the button press valid period.

On the other hand, in the process of S6109, if it is determined that the value of the press number counter 223r is 3 (S6109: Yes), the frame button 22 was pressed in the last rotating performance of the slot performance (or the button press is valid). period has passed). In this case, a display slot performance end command is set (S6110), the value of the number of presses counter 223r is initialized to 0 (S6111), the value of the slot performance counter 223p is initialized to 0 (S6112), This process ends.

As explained above, in the first modified example, in a slot performance in which three rotation performances are performed, if the frame button 22 is pressed early, the rotation speed in the next rotation performance will be slowed down, and the target symbol will be On the other hand, if the pressing of the frame button 22 is delayed, the rotation speed in the next rotating performance becomes faster, making it difficult to align the desired symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player a privilege of making it easier to align the desired symbols by pressing the frame button 22 early, and it is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the game.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and the shortness or length of the button press validity period to be set next may be varied according to the press timing of the frame button 22 during the button press validity period. Specifically, if the frame button 22 is pressed early in the first rotating performance, the button press period may be made longer in the next rotating performance. As a result, the button press period will be set longer in the next rotating effect, so even if the rotation speed of the rotating effect does not change, there will be more opportunities to stop the target symbol (in other words, the chances will increase). Since the player can be given the following, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the game.

<Second modification of second control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. In the second modified example, in contrast to the second control example described above, when the pressed state of the frame button 22 is automatically pressed, a pressed signal is outputted to the audio lamp control device 113 at regular intervals, and the pressed The difference is that a frame button control device 290 is provided which outputs a press signal based on the press of the frame button 22 with respect to the audio lamp control device 113 when the press state of the button 22 is non-auto press. The points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second modification, the frame button control device 290 described above enters an auto-pressing state based on a predetermined operation (pressing the frame button 22 for 2 seconds). During automatic depression, a depression signal output based on the depression of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 at regular intervals even if the frame button 22 is not operated. Therefore, even when the effect of repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 is displayed, the player can enjoy the effect of repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 without operating the frame button 22, thereby reducing the operational burden on the player. I can do it.

<Electrical configuration in second modification of second control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. 189 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration in this second modification.

As shown in FIG. 189, the frame button 22 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second modification via a frame button control device 290. The frame button control device 290 is provided with an MPU 291 (not shown), and the depression of the frame button 22 is detected by the processing of this MPU 291, and the detection result is notified to the audio lamp control device 113.

The MPU 291 is provided with a RAM 293, which stores information for determining the pressed state of the frame button 22. Here, details of the RAM 293 will be explained with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 293 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification.

The RAM 293 is provided with at least an automatic press flag 293a, a press time counter 293b, and a period counter 293c.

The auto-pressed flag 293a is a flag that determines whether or not the frame button 22 is automatically pressed (a state in which a press signal is output at fixed intervals regardless of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed), and is turned on. If it is, it is determined that the button is in an auto-pressing state (auto-pressing), and if it is off, it is determined that it is in a non-auto-pressing state (non-auto-pressing).

This auto-pressed flag 293a is set from off to on (or from on to off) when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 has been pressed for two seconds or more. The auto-pressed flag 293a is referenced when determining whether or not the auto-pressed state is in progress in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192).

The press time counter 293b is a counter for measuring the time period during which the frame button 22 is pressed. This press time counter 293b is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the frame button 22 is being pressed. The timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, so when the frame button 22 is being pressed, the value of the press time counter 293b is incremented by 1 every 1 ms. When the value of the press time counter 293b reaches a predetermined value (2000 in this modification), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, and the setting of the auto-press flag 293a is changed. The press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 has ended.

The period counter 293c is a counter for measuring the elapsed time during auto-pressing. This period counter 293c is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (that is, when the auto-pressing state is in progress). Since the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 192) is a process executed every 1 ms, the period counter 293c is incremented by 1 every 1 ms during auto-press. When the auto-press flag 293a is on, the period counter 293c counts, and when the value of the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000 in this modification), the button press signal is activated to control the audio lamp. The information is sent to device 113. Since the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 when it reaches a predetermined value (1000), a button press signal is generated every time the period counter 293c reaches a predetermined value (1000) (that is, every time 1 second elapses). will be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

Note that by changing the above-mentioned predetermined value, it is possible to vary the interval at which the button press signal is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during auto press. For example, the predetermined value may be set to 500 or 2000, the timing at which it is varied may be the timing at which a predetermined operation (long press again, repeated presses, other button presses, etc.) is executed, or the timing may be set to 2000. The timing may be set at the time when the switching occurs. The timing at which the presentation changes may be notified from the audio lamp control device 113, or may be notified from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

<About the control process by the frame button control device in the second modification of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a control process executed by the MPU 291 in the frame button control device 290 in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing that is executed periodically (every 1 ms in this modification) by the MPU 291. This timer interrupt process is a process for detecting the depression of the frame button 22 and outputting a signal (press signal) indicating the depression of the frame button 22 to the audio lamp control device 113 based on the detection result. Additionally, if a long press of the frame button 22 is detected, the auto press function is executed and a press signal of the frame button 22 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 at predetermined intervals (1 second in this modification). This is the process of

In the timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201). In the process of S6201, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S6201: Yes), the value of the press time counter 293b is incremented by 1 (S6202), and the added value of the press time counter 293b is It is determined whether or not it is 2000 (S6203).

In the process of S6203, if it is determined that the value of the press time counter 293b is 2000 (S6203: Yes), this means that 2 seconds have passed since the frame button 22 was pressed, so the auto press flag 293a is set. is on (S6204).

In the process of S6204, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is off (S6204: Yes), this means that the auto-pressing function is not being executed, so in order to start executing the auto-pressing function, The automatic pressing flag 293a is set to ON (S6205), a press signal indicating that the frame button 22 is pressed is output to the audio lamp control device 113 (S6206), and the process moves to S6212. Through the process of S6206, the press signal is output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 executes an effect based on the reception of the press signal, so that the player is notified that the auto press has been set. It can be easily recognized. Note that the present invention is not limited to outputting a press signal, but may also notify that auto press has been set, and based on the notification, the audio lamp control device 113 may perform an effect indicating that auto press has been set. You can.

On the other hand, in the process of S6204, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6204: No), this means that the auto-pressing function is being executed. Then, the automatic pressing flag 293a is set to OFF (S6207), and the process moves to S6212.

In the process of S6203, if it is determined that the value of the press time counter 293b is not 2000 (S6203: No), the processes of S6204 to S6207 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S6212.

In the process of S6201, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6201: No), it is determined whether the value of the press time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208).

In the process of S6208, if it is determined that the value of the press time counter 293b is greater than 5 (S6208: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 has been pressed, so a press signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is sent. The process moves to step S6209 for output. If the value of the press time counter 293b is larger than 5 in the process of S6208 (if the frame button 22 is pressed for 5 ms), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed. Even if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a while (for example, 1 ms), the press of the frame button 22 can be accurately detected.

In the process of S6209, it is determined whether the value of the press time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209). In the process of S6209, if it is determined that the value of the press time counter 293b is smaller than 2000 (S6209: Yes), this means that the frame button 22 is normally pressed, so the press signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. (S6210), and the process moves to S6211.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6209 that the value of the press time counter 293b is 2000 or more (S6209: No), this means that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time, so the process of S6210 is skipped. , the process moves to S6211.

In the process of S6211, the value of the press time counter 293b is initialized to 0 (S6211), and the process moves to S6212.

In the process of S6212, it is determined whether the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212). In the process of S6212, if it is determined that the auto-pressing flag 293a is on (S6212: Yes), this means that the auto-pressing function is being executed, so the value of the period counter 293c is incremented by 1. (S6213), and it is determined whether the added value of the period counter 293c is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (1000 in this modification) (S6214).

In the process of S6214, if it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: Yes), a press signal indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed is output to the audio lamp control device 113 ( S6215), the period counter 293c is initialized to 0 to count the next predetermined period (S6216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6214, if it is determined that the value of the period counter 293c is smaller than the predetermined value (1000) (S6214: No), the processes of S6215 and S6216 are skipped, and this process ends.

In the process of S6212, if it is determined that the auto-press flag 293a is off (S6212: No), this means that the auto-press function is not being executed, so execute the processes of S6213 to S6216 to Finish the process.

In this way, in the second modification of the second control example, by performing a predetermined operation (long press of the frame button 22), the auto-press function can be turned on and off. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the frame button 22 in order to execute the auto-press function, so the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

In the second modified example, the press signal is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 even when execution of the auto press function is started. This allows the player to easily recognize that auto-press has been set. Note that the present invention is not limited to outputting a press signal, but may also notify that auto press has been set, and based on the notification, the audio lamp control device 113 may perform an effect indicating that auto press has been set. You can.

The second modified example is configured to detect a normal press of the frame button 22 and output a press signal to the audio lamp control device 113 even when the auto press function is being executed. As a result, even when the auto-press function is being executed, the presentation mode can be changed by the player arbitrarily operating the frame button 22, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game. . Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the automatic press function is executed, the normal press of the frame button 22 may not be detected. Further, when the auto-push function is being executed, the execution of the auto-push function may be terminated based on the fact that the frame button 22 is normally pressed. Thereby, execution of the auto-press function can be easily terminated, and a gaming machine that is easy for the player to operate can be provided.

Note that in the second modification, the time period during which the frame button 22 is pressed is measured by MPU processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an electric circuit is provided so that a capacitor is charged while the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the voltage of the capacitor exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 5V), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You can.

<Other production examples executed in each control example>
Next, other effects executed in each of the above control examples will be explained. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same points as those in the configuration used in each control example described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Mission production>
In each of the control examples described above, when a specific variation pattern (for example, super reach (60 seconds)) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d by the process of the audio lamp control device 113, the mission effect is executed. This mission performance is a performance in which a specific command (mission) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a privilege (for example, a jackpot) is given when the content of the performance executed thereafter satisfies the command.

In each of the control examples described above, the command display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of the command content (first command information) and the commander (second command information). The system is configured such that past command displays can be stored as a command history. With this configuration, when a mission performance is executed, the current command display and the past (previous) command display are displayed at the same time. Here, it is configured to suggest to the player whether or not the current mission presentation will be successful based on the relationship between the current command display and the past (previous) command display.

Specifically, if the current and previous command displays (first command information and second command information) are the same, it suggests that the current mission performance is likely to be successful; if they are different, this indicates that the current mission display is the same. Indicates that the mission performance is unlikely to be successful. Furthermore, if a part of the command display matches (for example, the commander who is the second command information matches), it is set to indicate that the possibility of success will be higher if the mission progresses to the latter half. Ru.

In this way, the content of the past mission performance and the current mission performance overlap, which increases the expectation of a jackpot, so the same performance is repeated and the player becomes bored with the game. It is possible to turn an easy situation into a situation where you can expect a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Furthermore, in this mission production, if the instruction content is ``gather people'', for example, if the result of the production is ``0 people'', the command will fail, and if ``1 person'' to ``100 people'' is displayed, the command will fail. The command is successful, and when the command is successful, the command achievement rate is set (for example, if there is "1 person", the command achievement rate is 1%, and if there are "100 people", the command achievement rate is 100%). By providing this command achievement rate, it becomes possible to set the expectation level of a jackpot in more detail. In addition, if the current and previous command displays have the same command content as the first command information but different commanders as the second command information, the performance is executed with the command achievement rate inherited. has been done. This makes it possible to change the content of the performance even if the performance with the same command content is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the above explanation, the performance is executed based on the previous command display history and the current command display. A selection means is provided for the player to select an arbitrary command display from among them. The command display selected by the selection means may be displayed on the display screen (third symbol display device 81), and the production may be executed based on the command display selected by the selection means and the current command display. good. In addition, information corresponding to past instruction displays is displayed as a two-dimensional code on the display screen of the pachinko machine 10, allowing the player to obtain the information, and the acquired information is used at the next time the pachinko machine executes the game. 10, commands executed in the past (for example, the previous day) may be inherited and displayed.

<Opportunity-up production>
In each of the control examples described above, in order to show the degree of expectation that the changing special symbol has won a jackpot, some display modes of the performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, comment display and reach An effect is executed to change the color pattern (title display, background color, etc.) to a different color pattern. As a result, when a similar effect is executed, the player watches the effect while expecting to see which color pattern will be displayed in a part of the effect, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. suppressing things.

However, since some of the above-mentioned display modes are displayed at various times during the first performance (for example, 60 seconds), the player may not notice the change in the partial display mode, or may not be able to see the performance in anticipation. There was a problem in that players felt dissatisfied because the colors and patterns that had high expectations for a jackpot were not displayed.

On the other hand, each of the control examples described above has a color/pattern advance notification means that can notify the player in advance of the color pattern to be displayed in the current performance when the performance is executed. This allows the player to know in advance the colors and patterns that will be provided in the current performance.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the color pattern advance notification means is configured to automatically select a specific color pattern from among the plurality of color patterns displayed. As a result, once a color pattern with a high expectation of jackpot is displayed among the multiple color patterns displayed, a color pattern is selected by the color pattern advance notification means with the expectation that that color pattern will be selected. It becomes possible to closely watch the performance.

Furthermore, the color pattern advance notification means can notify a plurality of color patterns based on the number of changes in the above-mentioned partial display mode. As a result, when multiple color patterns with high expectations for jackpots are announced in advance, players only need to pay close attention to the performance, and this suppresses the sense of distrust towards the game that can occur due to having excessive expectations for each performance. be able to.

In addition, since the plurality of partial display modes mentioned above have different jackpot expectations when changed to the same color pattern, which partial display mode is the color pattern notified in advance by the color pattern advance notification means. You can watch the performance while enjoying seeing how it will be used.

<Pending change performance>
In each of the control examples described above, an area (hereinafter referred to as a reservation display area) in which information indicating the number of rights for which special symbol variations are executed (hereinafter referred to as reservation number information) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ) and an area (hereinafter referred to as execution display area) in which information (hereinafter referred to as execution information) corresponding to the special symbol whose variation is currently being executed is displayed (hereinafter referred to as execution display area). Then, the display mode of the pending symbol, which represents the pending number information displayed in the pending display area by the number of symbols, is changed based on the information obtained by pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the pending symbol, a so-called pending pre-reading effect. is configured to be executable.

Conventionally, this pending look-ahead performance has been configured to change the display mode of the pending symbols when a new variation of the special symbols is started. In this case, if a predetermined number or more of pending number information is displayed, it is possible for the player to enjoy the pending look-ahead effect, but when the pending number is small, the player cannot fully enjoy the effect. The problem was that it was not possible.

On the other hand, in the hold change production of each control example described above, based on the information obtained by pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the hold symbol, the time required for the hold symbol to move to the execution display area is used. The display mode of the reserved symbols is changed. Thereby, even if the number of pending symbols is small, it is possible to at least perform a performance that changes the pending symbols using the time until the currently executed special symbol variation ends.

Specifically, the pending symbol that is subject to pending change (for example, the pending symbol displayed in pending 3) is changed to a character, and the pending symbol that has changed to the character is displayed in a predetermined pending display area (for example, pending 2 is displayed). A pending change performance is started (for example, a battle performance) when it is displayed (transitioned) to the area in which the content is displayed. Then, the longer the time until the pending change effect ends, the more the pending change progresses.

In other words, when the pending symbol that is the target of pending change moves to pending 2, the length of the pending change performance is based on the variation time of the special symbol being executed and the variation time of the pending symbol displayed in pending 1. is determined. Thereby, even if the pending change effect is started in the state of pending 1, if the variation time of the special symbol currently being changed is long, the pending change effect can be sufficiently advanced by the pending change effect.

Further, the end of this pending change performance may be at the timing when the pending symbol that is the target of the pending change performance moves to the execution display area, or may be ended before that.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, when the pending symbol that is the target of the pending change effect moves to the execution display area, the character image is displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area. Then, the character image is used for a pre-read performance of the pending symbols displayed in the pending display area in a state where the pending symbols targeted for the pending change performance are displayed in the execution display area.

Specifically, the character whose pending symbol, which is the target of the pending change presentation, has changed and the character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area execute the above-described battle presentation. By configuring in this way, when a pending symbol changes to a character when the number of pending symbols is small, that character is used for the subsequent pending change effect of the pending symbol, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, in the above-mentioned battle performance, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the combination of characters that will face off. Further, it is preferable to set the frequency of the pending look-ahead effect and the expectation level of the jackpot to be different depending on the type of character displayed in the vicinity of the execution display area.

<Button effect settings>
In each of the control examples described above, as a variation pattern set by the audio lamp control device 114, a plurality of frame button operation performances in which the frame button 22 can be operated are configured to be executable. Furthermore, although a detailed explanation is omitted, each of the control examples described above has many more various frame button operation effects (for example, by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 while the third symbol is changing). , an effect that informs the player of the expectation level of the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol that is changing this time by changing the color emitted from a plurality of light emitting parts provided in the pachinko machine 10, and a sound lamp. (such as an effect in which the decoration mode is changed by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 without depending on the variation pattern set by the control operation 114). In this way, when a plurality of frame button operation effects are configured to be executable, there is a problem in that the frame button effects are frequently executed and the act of the player operating the frame buttons 22 becomes complicated.

On the other hand, there is a means for determining whether a plurality of various frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set, and a means for determining whether a plurality of frame button operation effects using the frame button 22 are set. An interval determining means for determining the interval of frame button operation performances, and when the intervals of a plurality of frame button operation performances become a predetermined interval by the interval determining means, the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled even at the predetermined interval. A frame button operation effect setting means is provided. Thereby, when a plurality of frame button operation performances are executed at predetermined intervals, it becomes possible to set the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid so as to span the plurality of frame button operation performances. Therefore, the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, and it is possible to prevent the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

In addition, as the above-mentioned interval determination means, specifically, a period in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are actually executed is set, and an interval between a plurality of frame button operation effects is determined based on the set period. A storage means is provided for storing combinations of frame button operation effects for which the interval between executions of a plurality of frame button operation effects is less than a predetermined amount is provided, and the combinations of frame button operation effects stored in the storage means are provided. There is a method that determines whether or not is set.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned frame button operation effect setting means specifically sets the operation validity period of the frame button operation effect executed first to be extended, and the case of setting the operation validity period of the frame button operation effect executed later. There are cases where the operation validity period of the effect is set to be brought forward, and cases where a new frame button operation effect is set.

When setting the operation validity period of the frame button operation performance executed first to be extended, the third symbol is displayed in advance with the operation validity period of the frame button operation performance executed first extended. It may be displayed on the device 81, or the frame button operation performance may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a mode in which a normal operation validity period is set, and the remaining period of the set operation validity period is a predetermined period. A display indicating that the operation validity period will be extended may be displayed when the period (2 seconds remaining or 0 seconds remaining) is reached. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine whether a new frame button operation effect has been set until just before the previously executed frame button operation effect ends, so that the player can The buttons 22 can be operated continuously, and it is possible to prevent the player's operations on the frame buttons 22 from becoming complicated.

In addition, at the timing when the normal operation validity period is completed, the performance result of the frame button operation performance executed earlier is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and by operating the frame button 22 during the extended operation validity period, The display mode of the performance result of the previously executed frame button operation performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed.

When setting the operation validity period of a frame button operation performance that will be executed later to be brought forward, the frame button operation performance that will be executed later may be moved forward and executed, or the frame button operation performance that will be executed later. may be left as is, and an operation valid period set in advance may be used as a preparation period until the frame button operation effect to be executed later is started. For example, when a frame button operation effect in which the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed is executed as a frame button operation effect to be executed later, by performing the repeated press operation during the preparation period, a display indicating the degree of the repeated press operation may be displayed; You can use this preparation period to turn on the automatic continuous hit function.

Furthermore, when a new frame button operation effect is set, a frame button operation effect that is unrelated to the frame button operation effect that is executed first or the frame button operation effect that is executed later is executed.

As explained above, when multiple frame button operation effects are set at predetermined intervals, the frame button operation effects are set so that the operation validity period set in the multiple frame button operation effects continues. By doing so, the player can continuously operate the frame button 22, so that it is possible to prevent the player's operation of the frame button 22 from becoming complicated.

In addition, as a method for setting frame button operation effects, it is possible to set multiple frame button operation effects when setting one effect, or to set each frame button operation effect for each effect whose execution time may be close to each other. It is also possible to set a frame button operation effect. For example, by repeatedly pressing the frame button 22 until the variation of the third symbol based on the variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach), you can expect that the current special symbol will be a jackpot. The degree is displayed in the luminous color of a decorative lamp provided in the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, when setting a predetermined dynamic display mode (for example, SP reach), the third symbol is displayed in a predetermined dynamic display mode. The display mode (for example, SP reach) is configured to be selectable from a plurality of patterns (for example, three), and when a pattern in which a frame button operation effect is set among the predetermined dynamic display modes is selected, 2 The intervals at which the two frame button operation effects are performed may be set at predetermined intervals.

Further, in each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as an operation means that can be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. There are various operating means that the player can use, such as operating means that respond to the player's touch (sensing pressure or detecting changes in capacitance), operating means that allow the player to tilt forward and backward, left and right, and rotational operations. Any configuration that can be operated is sufficient. Further, in the above description, the frame button 22 alone constitutes the operation means, but the operation means may be constituted by using a plurality of devices.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned controls, a setting method in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period or more is used as a setting method to automatically set the operating means to a state in which the operating means is operated. However, the setting method is not limited to this, and for example, The operation may be set when the operating means is operated at a predetermined timing, or may be set when the operating means is operated according to a predetermined procedure. Further, a dedicated device may be provided for automatically switching to a state in which the operating means is operated.

<Third control example>
Next, a third control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 218. In the second control example described above, indicators P1 to P5 (see FIG. 162) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, and each of the indicators P1 to P5 is A point performance in which a specific performance (for example, SP reach) is executed when the display format becomes a predetermined format (for example, a display format in which indicator P3 indicates MAX), and a change in the display format of each indicator in the point performance. The point display control for displaying a predetermined value (for example, points) on the third symbol display device 81 has been described.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of point presentation and another example of point display explained in the second control example described above will be explained. This third control example differs from the second control example in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 233 and character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference is that the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. The other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, regarding the point performance executed in this control example, differences from the above-mentioned second control example will be explained. In the second control example described above, there were two types of modes used for point presentation ("normal mode" and "dice mode"), whereas in this control example, there were four types of modes used for point presentation (Fig. 195). (see).

Furthermore, in the second control example described above, points are equally allocated to each indicator P1 to P3 displayed in the "normal mode", whereas in this control example, points are allocated equally to each indicator P1 to P3 displayed in the "normal mode". The difference is that points are distributed differently for each of the indicators P1 to P3 displayed in , depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, in this control example, a detailed explanation is added regarding the process related to mode transition during point performance, which is also executed in the second control example described above.

Next, the point presentation of this control example will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 195 to 197. FIG. 195 is a schematic diagram illustrating each mode used for point presentation in the third control example. Here, the point performance of this control example is a performance that is performed while the special symbol variation is executed 1 to 4 times, and the display mode of the indicator is similar to the point performance that is performed in the second control example described above. This is a performance that informs the player that a benefit (a performance with high expectations for a jackpot or a jackpot) will be given to the player in accordance with the player's performance.

As shown in FIG. 195, the point performance in this control example is comprised of four types of modes: "normal mode A", "normal mode B", "dice mode", and "bingo mode". Different indicators are displayed in each of these modes, and when the mode transition is executed during point production, the indicator is displayed in a display format that takes over the display format of the indicator displayed in the mode before transition. It is configured so that Specifically, before switching to the mode of point performance, a display mode in which it is confirmed that benefit 2 (for example, a performance with high expectation of jackpot) will be given (for example, in "normal mode A", a display mode corresponding to a rabbit) In the case where the indicator P1 is a display mode showing the maximum value (MAX), the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is also a display mode in which it is confirmed that benefit 2 (performance with high jackpot expectation) will be provided (for example, In the "dice mode", a display mode indicating a double roll is displayed.

Specifically, the display mode displayed on the indicator can be changed to multiple levels (Bonus 1 display mode (big hit confirmed display mode), Bonus 2 display mode (a certain effect with high expectation of jackpot). Display mode) and high-standard display mode (display mode indicating a high-standard state that will almost give you some benefit)) are configured so that they can be distinguished and memorized. The display mode corresponding to the stage of the mode is set as the initial display mode after the mode transition.

By configuring in this way, if a mode transition occurs during point presentation, the player can easily understand that the benefits acquired in the previous point presentation are not lost, and the point presentation By shifting to different indicators within the game, it is possible to diversify the performance and prevent players from getting bored early.

Here, details of each mode used for point presentation will be explained with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode A" used for point presentation in the third control example. This "normal mode A" has the same display mode as the "normal mode" of point production explained in the second control example, and only the differences from the "normal mode" described above will be explained here. , other explanations will be omitted.

In the "normal mode A", three indicators P1 to P3 are used similarly to the "normal mode" used in the point performance of the second control example described above. In this control example, unlike the second control example described above, the indicator P3 corresponding to "Hero" is set to have a higher value than the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Turtle". . Specifically, the benefits given to the player when the indicator value reaches the maximum (MAX) are different, and the indicators P1 and P2 corresponding to "Rabbit" and "Tortoise" each have different indicator values. When it reaches the maximum (MAX), it will notify you that it will move to a production with high expectations for a big hit (starring) as a benefit 2, and when the value of indicator P3 corresponding to "Hero" reaches the maximum (MAX), as a benefit 1. , is configured to notify that the changing special symbol has won a jackpot.

Further, as a display mode (high standard display mode) indicating a high standard state in which a privilege is almost given, a display mode is set in which any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is in the sixth stage. As a result, when a mode is transitioned when any one of the indicators P1 to P3 is in a display mode indicating the sixth stage, the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display mode indicating the high standard state. It turns out.

Note that when "normal mode A" is set as the point production, a production in which "rabbit", "tortoise", and "hero" are displayed is executed as the third symbol variation production (starring appearance). As a result, there is a relationship between the production content of the main character and the display mode of the indicator in the point production, and the main production (third symbol variation production) and the secondary production (point production) can be linked without giving players a sense of discomfort. can be displayed (executed).

Next, the "dice mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "dice mode" used for point production in the third control example. This "dice mode" has the same display form as the "dice mode" of the point effect explained in the second control example, and here only the differences from the "dice mode" described above will be explained. Other explanations will be omitted.

In the "dice mode", two indicators P4 and P5 imitating dice are used, similar to the "dice mode" used in the point presentation of the second control example described above. In this control example, the player is set to receive a benefit (Bonus 1, Privilege 2) when the combination of display modes of the indicators P4 and P5 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, double). . Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 show the same number (that is, a double-digit display mode) is displayed, an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot is given as benefit 2, and a double-digit display mode is provided. If the number is "6.6", you will be notified as bonus 1 that you have won the jackpot.

In addition, during the "dice mode", a rotating display is performed in which indicators P4 and P5 imitating dice are rotated, and when the double number display mode is stopped and displayed, the indicators P4 and P5 are different in the subsequent rotating display. The display mode does not change to a display mode that shows numbers (that is, a non-Zero display mode), but instead a rotating display that suggests whether or not the number that is stopped and displayed in the ZONE display mode is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the non-zoom display mode from being stopped and displayed once the double-zoom display mode is stopped and displayed, so that the benefits provided to the player are notified in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

Furthermore, in the "dice mode", a case where the number of the indicator P4 is "5" is set as a high standard display mode. For example, when transitioning to "dice mode" when a high standard display mode (for example, the value of indicator P1 corresponding to a rabbit is "6") is displayed in "normal mode A," The display mode is fixed to "5" and an effect is performed in which only the indicator P5 is displayed in rotation. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point performance, the indicator will be displayed in a display manner indicating the high standard state after the mode has been changed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Furthermore, since the display mode of the indicator P4 is stopped and displayed at "5", when the double-digit display mode is displayed, "5.5" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, after the double-digit display mode is stopped and displayed, it can be predicted that the double-digit display mode "6.6" that informs that the player has won the jackpot will be coming soon, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when "dice mode" is set as a point production, a production using dice is executed as a third symbol variation production (starring appearance). As a result, there is a relationship between the production content of the main appearance and the display mode of the indicator in the point production, and the main appearance (third symbol variation production) and the secondary production (point production) can be linked without giving players a sense of discomfort. can be displayed (executed).

Next, "normal mode B" will be explained with reference to FIG. 197(a). FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram showing "normal mode B" used for point presentation in the third control example. This "normal mode B" uses one indicator P6 that represents the whole as 100%, and the display mode of the indicator P6 becomes a predetermined display mode (for example, a display mode that indicates 50% or 100%). It is set so that the player is given a benefit (Benefit 1, Benefit 2) when the player receives a bonus. Specifically, when a display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 50% is displayed, an effect with high expectation of jackpot is given as benefit 2, and a display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 100% is displayed. Then, as benefit 1, you will be notified that you have won the jackpot.

Further, in the "normal mode B", a display mode in which the indicator P6 shows 40% is set as a high standard display mode. For example, when transitioning to "Normal Mode B" while a high standard display mode (for example, the value of the indicator corresponding to a rabbit is "6") is displayed in "Normal Mode A," The display mode of the indicator P6 is set to a display mode showing 40%. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point performance, the indicator will be displayed in a display manner indicating the high standard state after the mode has been changed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

Next, the "Bingo mode" will be explained with reference to FIG. 197(b). FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram showing the "Bingo mode" used for point performance in the third control example. This "Bingo mode" uses a 9-square indicator P7 with numbers 1 to 9 attached, and the number attached to the indicator P7 corresponding to the number displayed by the point production is erased (designated). A series of performances will be performed. Then, when a display mode in which the erased (designated) numbers are aligned in a straight line is displayed, the player is set to receive benefits (Bonus 1, Bonus 2).

Specifically, when a display mode indicating that two lines of the indicator P7 have been completed is displayed, an effect with high expectation of a jackpot is given as benefit 2, indicating that three or more lines of the indicator P7 have been completed. When the display mode is displayed, it is announced that the player has won the jackpot as a benefit 1.

In addition, in the "Bingo mode", a display mode is set as a high standard display mode that indicates that one line of indicators P7 has been completed. For example, when shifting to "Bingo mode" while a high standard display mode (for example, the value of indicator P1 corresponding to a rabbit is "6") is displayed in "Normal mode A," The display mode of the indicator P7 is set to a high standard display mode indicating that one line is complete. As a result, even if the mode is changed during the point performance, the indicator will be displayed in a display manner indicating the high standard state after the mode has been changed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is maintained.

As explained above, the multiple modes used for point performance in this control example each have different display formats (appearance, number) and display formats (display format for notifying the player that a benefit will be given). (P1 to P7) are used, and by changing the mode during execution of the point performance, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the monotonous point performance.

Furthermore, even if the mode is changed during the point performance, the point performance after the mode transition is executed in a display format corresponding to the display format before the mode transition, so that the point performance is provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. I can do it.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in a predetermined mode (for example, "normal mode A"), a display mode (for example, indicators P1 to P3 indicating a low standard value at which the expectation level of receiving a benefit is low) is displayed as "4. 4.4), but by switching to a different mode (for example, "dice mode") while that display mode is displayed, the player can change the display mode of the indicator after changing the mode. A display mode (for example, a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.4") indicating that a privilege (for example, privilege 2) will be given is set to be displayed.

In this way, by shifting the display format of the indicator indicating that a bonus will be granted to the player to a different mode, the bonus will be awarded from the display format indicating the low standard value where the expectation level for awarding the bonus is low. It is possible to change the display mode to a display mode (or a high-standard display mode in which the expectation level of receiving a benefit is high) without making the user feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, at the end of the point production (for example, a state in which the special symbol changes three times during the point production), the current mode is a state in which there is low expectation that the display mode will be such that a benefit is given (for example, "Normal mode A") Even if the indicator P1 to P3 is a display mode in which each indicator P1 to P3 shows a low numerical value, the display mode in which a benefit is awarded from a display mode indicating a low standard value with a low expectation level for awarding a benefit (or Since there is a possibility that the mode will shift to a high-standard display mode (high standard display mode in which there is a high expectation that benefits will be given), it is possible for the player to enjoy the performance until the end.

Next, returning to FIG. 195, a description will be given of the mode transition of point presentation in this control example. The point performance in this control example is set to start from "normal mode A", and the mode transition is executed when it is determined that the mode will change as a result of the mode transition lottery performed during the point performance. (Hereinafter, referred to as first mode transition). In addition to the above-described determination of mode transition, mode transition is executed based on the propriety determination result and the display mode of the indicator (hereinafter referred to as second mode transition).

Furthermore, restrictions (i.e., prohibition processing) are set for the mode transition destination based on the validity judgment result and the display mode of the indicator, and the execution of the mode transition reduces the effect of point production. Preventing incidents from occurring.

First, in "Normal Mode A", "Dice Mode", "Normal Mode B", and "Bingo Mode" are set as the transition destinations for the first mode transition, as shown in Figure 195, and if you win the mode transition lottery , transition to the mode set as the destination. That is, the "normal mode A" that is set as the first mode when the point presentation is executed is set so that it can be shifted to any of the remaining three modes as the first mode.

Here, when the above-mentioned first mode shift is executed and the display mode before the mode shift is a display mode notifying that privilege 2 will be given, the display mode after the mode shift will also notify that privilege 2 will be given. If the display mode before the mode transition is a display mode indicating a high standard (high standard display mode), the display mode after the mode transition is also displayed in a display mode indicating a high standard (high standard display mode). be done. Thereby, even if a mode transition is executed in the middle of point production, the status of the indicator (display mode) can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, this "normal mode A" is set to "dice mode" when the indicators P1 to P3 are all in the same display mode (for example, "4.4.4") as a transition to the second mode. ” is configured so that it can be migrated to In this case, in the "dice mode" after the mode transition, the indicators P4 and P5 are displayed in the same display format (ie, "Zero") (for example, "3.3"). In this way, by executing both the first mode transition executed by the mode transition lottery and the second mode transition executed based on the display format, mode transition can be executed in various situations in point production. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that if the transition conditions for transitioning to the first mode and the transition conditions for transitioning to the second mode are satisfied at the same time in "normal mode A," the transition to the second mode is executed with priority. This is because the second mode is more likely to be set as a mode shift based on the result of determining the validity of the special symbol, compared to the first mode shift for enhancing the performance effect. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, if the special symbol lottery result (win/fail determination result) is a jackpot in "normal mode A", the transition condition for transition to the second mode is likely to be satisfied. It is composed of In other words, when the second mode transition condition is satisfied, the player can expect a jackpot, so by executing the second mode transition condition with priority over the first mode transition condition, the player can expect a jackpot. It becomes possible to execute a mode transition that gives rise to expectations.

In this way, in a point presentation that allows transitions between multiple modes, the conditions for establishing multiple mode transition conditions are set to have different expectations for winning the jackpot, and furthermore, when multiple mode transition conditions are met at the same time, it is possible to achieve a jackpot. By executing the mode transition based on the fulfillment of the mode transition conditions for the player with a high expectation of winning, it becomes possible to execute the mode transition during the point performance as a performance in which the player expects a jackpot, increasing the performance effect. It has the effect of being able to

Next, when the mode set during the point production is "dice mode", "normal mode A" or "bingo mode" is set as the first mode transition. In other words, it is set not to shift from "dice mode" to "normal mode B." This is a prohibition process that has been set in advance, and the first mode is used for modes in which it is difficult for the player to associate the display manner of the indicator before the mode transition and the display manner of the indicator after the mode transition. Even if the transition conditions for transition are met (if the mode transition lottery is won), the mode is set not to change. Thereby, even if a mode transition is executed during point performance, the player will not feel uncomfortable.

Also, when transitioning from "Dice Mode" to "Normal Mode A", in this point production, the "Normal Mode A" that was displayed when transitioning from "Normal Mode A" to "Dice Mode" The display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 is set so that it does not become lower than the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 (so that the numerical value of each indicator does not decrease). Specifically, the display mode of each indicator at the time of mode transition is stored, and the display mode of the mode transition destination can be set based on the stored display mode of each indicator.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the mode transition is executed a plurality of times during one point performance and the mode is transitioned again to the initially set mode. Note that a limit (for example, once) may be set on the number of mode transitions executed during one point presentation, so that mode transition to a mode that has already been displayed during one point presentation may be prevented.

If "Normal Mode B" is set, only "Normal Mode A" is set as the transition destination when the transition conditions for transition to the first mode are met (if you win the mode transition lottery). When "Bingo mode" is set, only "Normal mode B" is set as a transition destination when the transition conditions for transition to the first mode are satisfied.

As described above, the mode transition executed for the point performance in this control example is easy for the player to understand due to a plurality of mode transition conditions and various prohibition processes, and furthermore, it becomes a performance that makes the player look forward to it.

In addition, in this control example, the second mode transition (mode transition based on the validity judgment result of the special symbol and the display mode of the indicator) is set only to "normal mode A", but it can also be set in other modes. good. Further, more mode transition conditions may be set, or an upper limit (for example, one time) may be set on the number of mode transitions performed in one point presentation. With this configuration, there is an effect that the presentation effect of mode transition during point presentation can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, a point display method for changing the display mode of the indicator in point performance will be described. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of displaying points. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when creating an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is created by overlapping a plurality of layers (see FIGS. 206 to 208). FIG. 198(a) is a schematic diagram showing a layer for displaying the character image of the third symbol variation effect (starring) among the plurality of layers, and FIG. This is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer that displays point images (sub-effects), and FIG. 198(c) is a composite of multiple layers (a layer that displays character images and a layer that displays point images). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 198(a), the layer that displays the character image is divided into multiple small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, and the small area where the character is displayed. (Dm12 and Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) and a small area (Dm11) where no character is displayed are determined, and image processing is performed so that the small area (Dm11) where no character is displayed is transparent.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the layer that displays point images is divided into multiple small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) based on the coordinates, similar to the layer that displays character images. The area is divided into sections, and point display processing is executed to display points for all small areas. Note that in this point display process, by receiving a command indicating the number of points output from the audio lamp control device 113, point images indicating the corresponding number of points are displayed for all small areas.

Then, by creating an image for each layer, only the small area (Dm11) where no character is displayed in the character image is composited with the back side of the layer displaying the character image, as shown in FIG. 198(c). The layer displaying the point image becomes visible, and it becomes possible to display the point at a position that does not interfere with the character image.

By executing the above-described image creation process, there is no need to execute the process of determining the display position of the point when displaying the point, so that the control load can be reduced.

In addition, in the point display method explained using FIG. 198, since there was only one small area (Dm11) in which the character is not displayed, that is, the allowable area where point display is possible, the process of transparently transmitting that small area is performed. However, if there are multiple small areas in which the character is not displayed, it is better to select one small area from among them. For example, the type of character image (main image) displayed as the third symbol variation effect (starring) is determined, and a specific character (for example, a character imitating a hero as the character associated with the indicator of the point effect) is determined. It is preferable to select one of the allowable areas adjacent to the small area where Dc1) is displayed (in the case of FIG. 198(a), small areas Dm21, Dm22, Dm31, and Dm32). Thereby, it becomes possible to execute point display in the vicinity of the subject image displayed in the third symbol variation effect (starring appearance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which a player who is watching the third symbol variation performance (starring appearance) misses the point display.

In addition, although one of the allowable areas, which is a small area where the character image is not displayed, of the layer that displays the character image is made transparent, the point display is made visible to the player, but other control methods may be used. . For example, in the image to be created this time, a small area where a character is displayed but will no longer be displayed may be determined, and transparency processing may be performed at the timing when the character is no longer displayed in that small area. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a time lag from when a command for point display is received until the points are actually displayed, thereby increasing the presentation effect of point display. Furthermore, since points are displayed based on the movement of the character moving in the third symbol variation production, the display that has a relationship between the third symbol variation production, which is the main character, and the point production, which is the sub production ( The production effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, when using such a control method, in the third symbol variation production (starring), a production in which two types of characters face each other is executed, and an ally character (for example, character Dc1 in FIG. 198) attacks. Points are displayed when an enemy character (for example, character Dc2 in Figure 198) attacks, or points are not displayed when an enemy character (for example, character Dc2 in Figure 198) attacks, or they have a lower value (numerical value) than the points displayed when an ally attacks. It is a good idea to display the points (if there are few). Thereby, it is possible to perform a display in which the third symbol variation performance, which is the main character, and the point performance, which is the sub-performance, are more closely related, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

Note that in this control example described above, the number of points having the same value is displayed in each small area, but different points may be displayed. Alternatively, the point display method described in the second control example above may be used.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 208. First, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 205, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described.

FIG. 199(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 199(a), the ROM 222 in this control example has an internal level selection table 222aa, an internal score selection table 222ab, a number of times selection table 222ac, a used score selection table 222ad, and a final score selection table 222ad. The difference is that a display mode selection table 222ae, a character selection table 222af, a mode selection table 222ag, and a display form selection table 222ae are added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the internal level selection table 222aa will be explained with reference to FIG. 200(a). FIG. 200(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal level selection table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 200(a), the internal level selection table 222aa is based on the validity determination result of the current special symbol change, the validity determination result of the winning information currently held and stored, and the value of the production counter 223f. This is a table for selecting internal levels. In addition, the result of the judgment on the validity of this special figure variation is determined based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the result of judgment on the propriety of the winning information currently held and stored is output from the main control device 110. Judgment will be made based on the winning command.

This internal level selection table 222aa is referred to in the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) executed in the point effect setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) described later (S6351 in FIG. 211). Specifically, if the current success/failure judgment result is “win”, the pending judgment result is “win”, and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the internal level is “3”. ” is selected, and if it is “150 to 198”, internal level “2” is selected, the current judgment result is “hit”, and the pending judgment result is “miss”, and the production is If the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected, and if the value is "150 to 198", the internal level "1" is selected. In addition, if the current success/failure judgment result is "miss", the pending judgment result is "win", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal level "2" is selected. If the value is “150 to 198”, the internal level “1” is selected, the current judgment result is “miss”, and the pending judgment result is “miss”, and the production counter 223f is If the value is "0 to 149", internal level "1" is selected, and if the value is "150 to 198", internal level "2" is selected.

As described above, the internal level selected in the internal level selection table 222aa is set to a high numerical value depending on the advantageous gaming state (for example, winning a jackpot). It is composed of In this way, by setting an index (internal level) according to the gaming state and executing performances based on the index, it is possible to easily set the expectation level that the gaming state will be advantageous for each performance executed. be able to.

Next, details of the internal score selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 200(b). FIG. 200(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the internal score selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 200(b), the internal score selection table 222ab is a table that is referred to when selecting an internal score to be used when executing a point production based on the internal level and the value of the production counter 223f. It is.

Specifically, when the value of the internal level is "3" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 198", "7" is selected as the internal score used in the point performance, and the internal level If the value of the production counter 223f is "2" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 99", "5" is selected as the internal score, and if it is "100 to 198", "6" is selected as the internal score. . Also, if the value of the internal level is "1" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 149", the internal score is "4", and if the value is "150 to 198", the internal score is "5". is selected.

As mentioned above, in this control example, the internal score used when the point performance is executed is selected based on the internal level value set corresponding to the gaming state, so it gives the player a sense of expectation. You can perform a point performance that gives you.

Next, the number selection table 222ac will be explained with reference to FIG. 201(a). FIG. 201(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the frequency selection table 222ac. As shown in FIG. 201(a), the number selection table 222ac includes a winning number selection table 222ac1 and a losing number selection table 222ac2. This number selection table 222ac is a table that is referred to when setting the number of times the point effect is executed (that is, the number of times the special symbol changes for which the point effect is continuously executed), and is The configuration is such that different selection tables are referred to depending on the result of the judgment or the result of judgment on the winning information that has been stored on hold.

FIG. 201(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning number selection table 222ac1. This winning number selection table 222ac1 is a table for selecting the number of point effects to be performed when the result of the judgment is a win, and the point effect ends when the special symbol changes such that the result of the judgment is a win. The number of point presentations is selected. Specifically, if the judgment result of this special symbol variation is a hit, "1 time" is the number of point effects, and the special symbol variation after one rotation (i.e., the special symbol variation is executed after the end of this special symbol variation). If the result of the determination of the validity of the special symbol variation after two rotations is a win, "2 times" is selected as the number of point presentations, and if the result of the determination of the validity of the special symbol variation after two rotations is a win, "3 times" is selected as the number of point presentations.

In this way, by setting the number of point performances based on the timing at which the special symbol fluctuation that results in a win is executed, it is possible to prevent a winning game from starting in the middle of a point performance, and the point performance The performance effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 201(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-misses selection table 222ac2. This winning number selection table 222ac2 is executed when the winning decision result is a winning result (that is, when the winning decision result for the current special symbol variation and the winning information corresponding to the winning information that is held pending is not a winning decision). This is a table for selecting the number of point presentations, and the number of point presentations is selected based on the number of winning information held and stored (hereinafter referred to as the number of pending balls).

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is "0", "-" is set as the number of point presentations. This is to prevent the point effect from being executed even if the set variation pattern command is a command for executing the point effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a point performance that can be executed across multiple special symbol fluctuations in a state where the judgment result is incorrect and the number of reserved balls is "0". Therefore, the performance effect of the point performance to be executed can be enhanced. Note that in this control example, the point effect is not executed when the result of the judgment is negative and the number of reserved balls is "0," but other configurations may be used, for example. , the point effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (10%).

When the number of held balls is ``1'', the number of point effects is ``2'', when the number of held balls is ``2'', the number of point effects is ``3'', and when the number of held balls is ``3'', the number of point effects is ``3''. ”, “4” is set as the number of point presentations. In this way, by selecting the number of point performances using the number of reserved balls when the point performance is executed, the point performance when the result of the win/fail judgment is a loss and the point performance when the result of the judgment is a win can be changed. It is possible to prevent players from being judged based on the number of point presentations.

In addition, in this control example, if the result of the judgment of the number of points is a win, the selection is made based on the timing at which a special symbol variation is executed, and if the result of the judgment is a loss, Although the point effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls when the point effect is executed, other structures may be used. For example, in a point performance when the result of the judgment is negative, the number of reserved balls may be set as the maximum number of points performance, and the number of times may be selected by lottery within that range. By configuring in this way, the number of point effects can be set more complicatedly.

Next, the usage score selection table 222ad will be described with reference to FIG. 202(a). FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the usage score selection table 222ad. This usage score selection table 222ad is for selecting the score to be used in each point performance, and as shown in FIG. The score to be used is selected based on the remaining score of the internal score.

Specifically, when the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is "4" and the remaining score is "4", the used score is "1", and when the remaining score is "5", the used score is When the remaining score is "6", "3" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the used score. Also, if the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is "3" and the remaining score is "3", the used score is "1", and if the remaining score is "4", the used score is "2". '', if the remaining score is ``5'', ``3'' is selected as the used score, if the remaining score is ``6'', ``4'' is selected as the used score, and if the remaining score is ``7'', ``4'' is selected as the used score. , "-" is selected as the usage score.

Furthermore, when the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is "2" and the remaining score is "2", the used score is "1", and when the remaining score is "3", the used score is "2". '', if the remaining points are ``4'', the used points are ``3'', if the remaining points are ``5'', the used points are ``4'', and if the remaining points are ``6'', the used points are ``3''. If the score is "5" and the remaining score is "7", "-" is selected as the score to be used. In addition, if the counter value of the performance counter 223ac is "1" and the remaining score is "1", the used score is "1", and if the remaining score is "2", the used score is "2". ", if the remaining score is "3", "3" is selected as the score to be used, if the remaining score is "4", "4" is selected as the score to be used, and if the remaining score is "5", "4" is selected as the score to be used. If the used score is "5" and the remaining score is "6", then "6" is selected as the used score, and when the remaining score is "7", "7" is selected as the used score.

In this way, by selecting the points to be used in the point performance executed during this special symbol variation based on the remaining number of point productions and remaining points, you can determine the number of times the point production continues (the number of changes in the special symbol). ) is suppressed from situations where players are aware of this in advance.

Next, the final display mode selection table 222ae will be explained with reference to FIG. 202(b). FIG. 202(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final display mode selection table 222ae. As shown in FIG. 202(b), the final display mode selection table 222ae includes a final first display mode selection table 222ae1, a final second display mode selection table 222ae2, a final third display mode selection table 222ae3, and a final fourth display mode selection table 222ae2. A mode selection table 222ae4 is set.

This final display mode selection table 222ae is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point presentation, and is a table that is referred to when selecting the display mode of the indicator that is finally displayed in the point presentation. The final display mode corresponding to the mode selected in advance and set at the final stage of the point performance (the last special symbol variation when the point performance is executed) is displayed.

FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final first display mode selection table 222ae1. This final first display mode selection table 222ae1 is a table for selecting the final display mode in "normal mode A", and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.7.7" is selected. , in the case of "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 show "5.6.7" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 show "4.4" is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.7.7" is selected. In other words, if the internal score "7" is selected, which is selected only when this special symbol change has won a jackpot, the final display mode will be a higher value than the other indicators (indicators P1 and P2). It is set so that the final display mode in which the indicator (indicator P3) to which points are assigned has the maximum value is selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "7.6.5" is selected, and " 50 to 99'', the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate ``4.7.4'' is selected, and in the case of ``100 to 149'', the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate ``5.4.7'' is selected. ” is selected, and in the case of “150 to 198”, a display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate “4.4.4” is selected, the internal score is “5”, and the performance is When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "6.3.1" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "6.3.1" is selected. If the display mode indicating "5.5.3" is selected and the indicators are "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "5.6.2" is selected and the indicators are "150 to 198". In this case, a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.3.2" is selected, and "50 ~99'', the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate ``5.5.1'' is selected, and in the case of ``100 to 149'', the display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate ``5.4.3'' is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which the indicators P1 to P3 indicate "4.4.4" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point presentation is executed, the degree of change in the display mode of each indicator in "normal mode A" is made different. By changing the display mode to show a high value of a specific indicator (indicator P3), it is possible to increase the expectation of winning.

In addition, in the point presentation of this control example, the display mode of the indicator at an intermediate stage is the final display mode selected by the final display mode selection table 222ae, the current display mode, the remaining number of point presentations, and the number of points used this time. Since the indicator is selected based on the score, the value of the indicator with a higher value in the final display mode (the closer the display mode is to the maximum value) is more likely to increase in value during the intermediate stages. Therefore, by understanding how the indicator rises in the middle of the point performance, it is possible to predict the final display mode, so that the player can continue to watch the point performance.

FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final second display mode selection table 222ae2. This final second display mode selection table 222ae2 is a table for selecting the final display mode in "dice mode", and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Then, the final display mode of each indicator P4 and P5 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.5" is selected, and " 50 to 99'', the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate ``3.3'' is selected, and in the case of ``100 to 149'', the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate ``4.4'' is selected. If the mode is selected and the display mode is "150 to 198", the display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.6" is selected. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when this special symbol change has won a jackpot, is selected, this is the indicator display mode that will give a high value score as the final display mode. "6.6" is set to be selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "5.3" is selected, and "50 to 49" is selected. In the case of "99", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.3" is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" is selected. selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.2" is selected, the internal score is "5", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 198". 49'', the display format in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "3.2" is selected, and in the case of "50 to 99", the display format in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "6.2" is selected. If the selected value is "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "2.4" is selected, and if the value is "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.1" is selected. ” is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "1.4" is selected, and the value of "50 to 99" is selected. ”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “2.3” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 149”, the display mode in which the indicators P4 and P5 indicate “3.2” is selected. In the case of "150 to 198", a display mode in which indicators P4 and P5 indicate "4.1" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point presentation is executed, the combination of display modes of each indicator in "dice mode" can be changed depending on the internal score. It becomes possible to make a difference in whether or not it is visible.

FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final third display mode selection table 222ae3. This final third display mode selection table 222ae3 is a table for selecting the final display mode in "normal mode B", and is based on the internal score set when the point effect is executed and the value of the effect counter 223f. Based on this, the final display mode of indicator P6 is selected.

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "100%" is selected, and the value of the production counter 223f is "150 to 198". ”, the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows “90%” is selected. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when this special symbol change has won a jackpot, is selected, this is the indicator display mode that will give a high value score as the final display mode. It is set so that "100%" is selected.

Next, when the internal score is "6" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "70%" is selected, and the value of "50 to 149" is selected. In this case, the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "80%" is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "90%" is selected, and the internal score is "5". When the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "50%" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "60%" is selected. %” is selected, and if the indicator P6 is “100 to 149”, a display mode in which the indicator P6 shows “70%” is selected, and if the indicator P6 is “150 to 198”, the indicator P6 is “80%”. %” is selected.

Then, when the internal score is "4" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "40%" is selected, and when the value is "50 to 99", the display mode is selected. In the case of "100 to 149", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "60%" is selected; in the case of "150 to 198", the display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "60%" is selected; , a display mode in which the indicator P6 shows "80%" is selected.

In this way, by selecting the final display mode based on the value of the internal score selected when the point presentation is executed, the display mode of the indicator in "normal mode B" is finally changed according to the internal score. It is possible to make a difference in how high the temperature rises.

Next, the character display selection table 222af will be explained with reference to FIG. 205. This character display selection table 222af is a table that is referred to when the point presentation is executed in "normal mode A", and is made to appear in order to suggest indicators whose display mode changes among indicators P1 to P3. This is a table for selecting a character (mini character for sub-effect (see FIG. 163)).

Specifically, when the internal score is "7" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 149", "Hero" is selected as the character, and when it is "150 to 198", "Turtle" is selected as the character. In other words, if the internal score "7", which is selected only when this special symbol change has won a jackpot, is selected, the display mode of the indicator P3 corresponding to the hero will always change, so the character "Brave" will be changed. ” is set to make it easier to select.

Next, if the internal score is "6" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 99", "Hero" is selected as the character, and if it is "100 to 149", the character is selected. If "Rabbit" is selected and the value is "150-198", "Tortoise" is selected as the character, the internal score is "5", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0-49". In the case of "50 to 99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and in the case of "100 to 198", "Turtle" is selected as the character.

Furthermore, if the internal score is "4" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0-99", "Rabbit" is selected as the character, and if it is "100-198", "Rabbit" is selected as the character. ``Tortoise'' is selected.

In this way, by selecting a character that suggests an indicator whose display mode changes among indicators P1 to P3 based on the value of the internal score selected when the point production is executed, the displayed character It is possible to predict whether or not the point performance is the point performance to be executed when the result of the judgment is a win, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, when changing the display mode of the indicator in the middle of the point presentation in which "normal mode A" is set, the indicator of the selected character in the character display selection table 222af is set to change. There is. This makes it possible to associate the display of the character with the change in the display mode of the indicator, thereby increasing the production effect.

Returning to FIG. 199, the explanation will be continued. The mode selection table 222ag is a table that is referred to when selecting a mode transition destination during point presentation. This mode selection table 222ag is referred to (S6406 in FIG. 212) when it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is on (S6406 in FIG. 212: Yes) in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212).

In this mode selection table 222ag, destination modes are set based on the currently set mode and the value of the production counter 223f. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 195, a mode to which prohibitions are imposed as a mode transition destination is set not to be selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a mode transition between modes in which it is difficult to find a relationship between the display manners of indicators displayed corresponding to each mode.

The display format selection table 222ah is a table for selecting the display format (color, pattern, etc.) of the indicator of the mode transition destination displayed at the time of mode transition. This display format selection table 222ah is referred to when determining the display format (S6451 in FIG. 213) in the display format selection process (S6408 in FIG. 213) executed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212).

In this display format selection table 222ah, it is selected whether or not to change the display format to the "high expectation format" based on the internal score set in the current point performance and the value of the performance counter. This "high expectation form" is a display form for informing the player that the current point performance is a point performance with high expectation of jackpot.

Specifically, this is a display form in which the external shape of the indicators (P1 to P7) displayed in each mode is changed to a "special color (red)" or "special pattern (fish pattern)". . Note that it is preferable that this "high expectation form" has common contents for each indicator (P1 to P7). Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the "high expectation mode" is displayed, regardless of which point presentation and which mode the game shifts to.

In this way, by making it possible to change the display format only for the indicator that is displayed when a mode transition is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the mode transition will be executed during point performance. This has the effect of increasing the production effect.

Returning to FIG. 199, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 199(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 199(b), the RAM 223 in this control example has an internal level storage area 223aa, a continuous performance start flag 223ab, a performance number counter 223ac, a score information storage area 223ad, and a remaining score compared to the RAM 223 in the second control example. The difference is that an information storage area 223ae, a display information storage area 223af, a score performance temporary storage area 223ag, a mode information storage area 223ah, a mode transition flag 223ai, and a character information storage area 223aj are added, and other points are the same. . Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in this control example, a plurality of counters are provided as the effect counter 223f, and each counter updates the value independently, but the explanation thereof will be omitted, and the explanation will be described using the effect counter 223f as a general term. do. Therefore, even if a process that refers to the value of the production counter 223f is executed at multiple locations in one control process routine, different counter values are actually obtained in each process.

The internal level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the internal level set for the point performance. In this internal level storage area 223aa, the internal level determined based on the validity determination result and the internal level selection table 222aa in the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6351 in FIG. 211). The set internal level is then referenced when determining the internal score to be set for the point performance (S6352 in FIG. 211), and in point performance setting processing 2 (see FIG. 210), when the point performance is completed. If it is determined (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information regarding the internal level is initialized (S6312 in FIG. 210).

The continuous performance start flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether a point performance, which is a continuous performance, is being executed. When it is on, it indicates that the point performance is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the point performance is being executed. Indicates that it is not running. This continuous performance start flag 223ab is set to ON in the point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) (S6302 in FIG. 210). Then, in the next point effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 210), it is referred to when determining whether to execute the point effect initial setting process (S6303 in FIG. 211) that is executed when starting a continuous effect. (S6301 in FIG. 210), and when it is determined that the point presentation ends (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), it is set to off (S6313 in FIG. 210).

The performance number counter 223ac is a counter for counting the number of consecutive performances (point performances) that are executed this time. This performance number counter 223ac is set to a value corresponding to the determined number of performances (S6351 in FIG. 211) in the point performance initial setting process (see FIG. 211), and is set in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209). Each time the point performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 210) is executed, 1 is subtracted (S6306 in FIG. 210). The value of this performance counter 223ac is referred to in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) when determining whether or not a continuous performance is in progress (S2051 in FIG. 209), and in the point performance setting process (see FIG. 209). (see Figure 210), it is referenced when determining whether or not the continuous performance ends (S6307 in Figure 210), and in the point performance mode setting process (see Figure 214), the points to be used for this variation are determined. (S6501 in FIG. 214).

The score information storage area 223ad is an area for storing the internal scores selected in the internal score selection table 222ab described above and the used scores selected in the used score selection table 222ad described above. In this score information storage area 223ad, the determined internal score is set in the point presentation initial setting process (see FIG. 211) (S6351 in FIG. 211), and the determined internal score is set in the point presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 214). A usage score is set (S6501 in FIG. 214). The internal score stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad is referred to when determining the final display mode (S6355 in FIG. 211) in the point effect initial setting process (see FIG. 211), and the internal score is It is referenced when making a decision (S6356 in FIG. 211), and when determining the mode transition destination in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) (S6404 in FIG. 212). In addition, the used points stored (set) in the score information storage area 223ad are referred to when updating the remaining score information in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) (S6502 in FIG. 214), It is referred to when determining the display mode when the value of the performance counter 223ac is larger than 1 (S6503 in FIG. 214: No) (S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point performance has ended (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6308 in FIG. 210).

The remaining score information storage area 223ae is an area for storing the remaining score obtained by subtracting the used points already used from the internal score set for the continuous performance (point performance) currently being executed. This remaining score information storage area 223ae is referred to when determining the points to be used (S6501 in FIG. 214) in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214), and when it is determined that the point performance has ended (see FIG. 210). (S6307: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6309 in FIG. 210).

The display information storage area 223af is an area for storing the final display mode and the currently displayed display mode of the point effect, which is a continuous effect. In the display information storage area 223af, the final display mode determined in the point production initial setting process (see FIG. 211) is set (S6355 in FIG. 211), and the display mode determined in the point production mode setting process (see FIG. 214). is set (S6508 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point performance has ended (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6310 in FIG. 210). Note that this display information storage area 223af is configured so that display modes for modes other than the currently set mode can also be set, so that even if a mode transition is executed during point production, the indicator can be smoothly displayed. It is configured so that it can be displayed.

The score presentation temporary storage area 223ag is an area for temporarily storing various presentations set in the point presentation in order to output them to the display control device 114 with a single display command. The score performance temporary storage area 223ag temporarily stores information regarding the display format (indicator color, pattern, etc.) determined in the display format change process (see FIG. 213) (S6451 in FIG. 213). Information about the display mode (display mode displayed after mode transition) is temporarily stored (S6454, S6456, S6457 in FIG. 213), and information about the display mode determined in the point presentation mode setting process (see FIG. 214) is stored temporarily. is temporarily stored (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214), and is referenced when setting the display point effect command (S6505 in FIG. 214), and then the stored information regarding various effects is initialized ( S6506 in FIG. 214).

The mode information storage area 223ah is an area for storing information corresponding to the currently set mode. This mode information storage area 223ah is updated with information corresponding to the mode after the mode transition (S6409 in FIG. 212) when the mode transition is performed in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212), and sets the display background command. In the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214), it is referenced when determining the display mode (S6504, S6507 in FIG. 214). Then, when it is determined that the point performance has ended (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6311 in FIG. 210). In addition, in this control example, since the point performance is set in advance to start from "normal mode A", when the point performance is executed, information corresponding to "normal mode A" is stored in the mode information storage area 223ah. is stored.

The mode transition flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether a mode transition condition (a condition for establishing the first mode transition) is satisfied during a point performance that is a continuous performance, and if it is on, the mode transition condition is satisfied. If it is off, it means that the mode transition conditions are not met. This mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510 in FIG. 214) when it is determined in the point performance mode setting process (see FIG. 214) that there is a mode transition (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes), and the mode transition In the process (see FIG. 212), it is referenced to determine whether the mode transition condition is satisfied (S6406 in FIG. 212), and is turned off when the mode transition related process (S6402 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is completed. Set.

Here, the flow of mode transition in the point production of this control example will be explained. When the point production is executed, first, the display mode of the indicator displayed in the current special symbol variation is set (S6507 in FIG. 214). Thereafter, a lottery is held to determine whether to execute the mode transition (S6509 in FIG. 214), and if it is determined that the mode transition will be executed (you have won the mode transition lottery) (S6509 in FIG. 214: Yes), the mode The transition flag 223ai is set to on. Then, in the mode transition process (see FIG. 212) that is executed in the variation display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) that is executed when the next special symbol variation is started, the mode transition flag 223ai is set to on. If it is determined that it is set to on (S6406: Yes in FIG. 212), processing related to mode transition (S6407 to S6410 in FIG. 212) is executed.

In other words, in the point performance in this control example, since the mode is configured to be shifted when the next special symbol variation is executed, for example, the lottery to determine whether or not to execute the mode shift is determined by the current special symbol variation. By configuring the lottery to be drawn based on the display mode of each indicator displayed by , the player is made aware of the display mode of each indicator at the end of the special symbol variation, and the mode is changed at the next special symbol variation. can be expected to be executed.

The character information storage area 223aj is an area for storing character information regarding the character selected by the character selection table 222af described above. The character information stored in this character information storage area 223aj is a character that is displayed to indicate which indicator of indicators P1 to P3 will change its display mode when "normal mode A" is set. It is. This character information storage area 223aj is set with information regarding the character determined in the point production initial setting process (see FIG. 211), and when setting the display point production command in the point production mode setting process (see FIG. 214). (S6505 in FIG. 214), and if it is determined that the point performance has ended (S6307 in FIG. 210: Yes), the stored information is initialized (S6314 in FIG. 210). Note that in this control example, a character is displayed to indicate whether the display mode of the indicator changes only in "normal mode A", but it is not possible to change the display mode of the indicator for each mode. The character information may be used to suggest whether or not to change the mode. In this case, for example, when a mode other than "normal mode A" is set, the characters stored in the character information storage area 223aj may be displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the mode set in the point production will shift to "normal mode A."

Next, with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208, differences in the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example from each of the control examples described above will be described. In addition, the same reference numerals are attached to the same parts as in each control example described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in this control example generates a drawing list as shown in FIG. 206, detailed information corresponding to a point is written on the back side of the character in one frame of the image. The difference is that they are set as follows. By generating the drawing list in this way, it becomes possible to create the point display image described above with reference to FIG. 198.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 214. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) is executed instead of variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and other points are the same. It is. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 209, the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 in this third control example. In this variable display setting process 3, similar to the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed.

When the process of S2006 is finished, it is determined whether the value of the performance number counter 223ac is greater than 0 (S2051), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S2051: No), the value is set. It is determined whether the variation pattern command executed is one for executing a point performance (S2052). Here, if it is determined that the point effect is to be executed (S2052: Yes), point effect setting processing 2 is executed (S2053), and when the process of S2053 is finished, the process moves to the process of S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2051, if it is determined that the value of the performance counter 223ac is larger than 0 (S2051: Yes), that is, if the point performance is already being executed, the process of S2052 is not performed and Shift to processing. This prevents a new point presentation from being executed while a point presentation is being executed.

In addition, in the process of S2052, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is not one that executes a point effect (S2052: No), and if the process of S2053 is finished, the variation in the second control example described above Similar to display setting processing 2, the processing from S2007 to S2011 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the point effect setting process 2 (S2053) executed in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing point effect setting processing 2 (S2053). This point effect setting process 2 (S2053) is for determining the display mode of point effects and transmitting a point effect command for display to the display control device 114 for executing the point effect in the determined display mode. It is processing.

In the point performance setting process 2 (S2053), it is first determined whether the continuous performance start flag 223ab is on (S6301). If it is determined that it is off (S6301: No), the continuous performance start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6302), and the point performance initial setting process is executed (S6303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the continuous performance start flag 223ab is set to ON (S6301: Yes), this means that a point performance that is a continuous performance has already been executed. The initial setting process (S6303) is skipped and the process moves to S6304.

Here, with reference to FIG. 211, the point effect initial setting process (S6303) will be explained. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the point effect initial setting process (S6303). The point effect initial setting process (S6303) is performed when the variable pattern command set in the variable display setting process 3 (S1712 in FIG. 209) is determined to be one for executing a point effect, and various types of points are executed when the point effect is executed. This is a process for executing initial settings.

When the point performance initial setting process (S6303) is executed, first, the current internal level is determined with reference to the internal level selection table 222aa, and is set in the internal level storage area 223aa (S6351). Thereby, it is determined whether the point performance executed this time is a point performance that leads to a hit with a special symbol.

Next, in S6351, based on the internal level set in the internal level storage area 223aa and the value of the performance counter 223f, the internal score selection table 222ab is referred to to determine the internal score to be used in the point performance to be executed this time. , is set in the score information storage area 223ad (S6352). The internal score set in this process is used, as described above, to set the final display mode in the point presentation and to set the character. It is also used to set the points to be used and to set the remaining points each time the special symbol changes while the point presentation continues.

When the process of S6352 is completed, the number of presentations of the current point presentation is determined based on the number of times selection table 222ac (S6353), and a value corresponding to the determined number of presentations is set in the presentation number counter 223ac (S6354). As described above, different tables are referred to in the number selection table 222ac depending on whether the result of the judgment is a hit or a loss.

Specifically, if the winning information corresponding to the pending memory executed after three rotations is a win, the winning number selection table 222ac1 is referred to and "4" is determined as the number of presentations. Then, 4 is set in the performance number counter 223ac as a value corresponding to the number of performances "4". The value of this performance counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time point performance setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210) is executed until the value of the counter becomes "0".

Next, the display mode of each indicator to be finally displayed in the current point performance is determined based on the internal score set by the process of S6352 and the final display mode selection table 222ae, and the display mode is stored in the display information storage area 223af. Set (S6355).

This final display mode selection table 222ae has four tables corresponding to the four modes ("normal mode A", "dice mode", "normal mode B", and "bingo mode") to which the points are displayed. Therefore, in this process, the final display mode is determined for all modes and set in the display information storage area 223af. Thereby, no matter in which mode the point performance ends, an appropriate final display mode based on the internal score can be displayed.

When the process of S6355 is completed, the character to be used when the point production mode is set to "normal mode A" is determined based on the internal score set in the process of S6352 and the character selection table 222af, and the character information is It is set in the storage area 223aj (S6356), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the point effect initial setting process (S6303), most aspects including the final display aspect of the point effect to be executed this time are set. By setting the mode of point presentation in advance in this way, it is possible to advance the mode of point presentation at intermediate stages in accordance with the final display mode, and it is possible to create a suitable presentation that suppresses the feeling of discomfort to the player. can be executed.

Note that in this control example, the final display mode of all indicators is set as the final display mode, but for example, the final display mode may be set only for the indicator related to the display mode that notifies the player that a benefit will be given. However, the display modes of other indicators may be set randomly. Thereby, the display mode of each indicator in the point performance can be made more diverse, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In this case, it is preferable to perform a prohibition process so that the randomly set display mode does not provide a notification that grants a benefit that is not actually granted. Thereby, it is possible to perform a point performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, in this control example, the internal level is set based on the validity determination result when the point presentation is executed, but the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to constantly set the internal level based on the validity determination result. You may also do so. By configuring in this way, the internal level can be used even when setting the performance mode of performances other than point performances, and the effect is that the performance corresponding to the game state of the special symbol can be easily set. be.

Furthermore, in this control example, the winning information is determined by referring not only to the special symbol to be executed this time, but also to the winning information that has been stored in reserve. The determination result may be determined and an internal level may be set.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the point effect initial setting process (S6303) is finished, the mode transition process (S6304) is then executed. In this mode transition process (S6304), a process of determining whether to transition to a mode during point production, and a process of changing the display mode of the indicator in the case of mode transition are executed.

Here, the mode transition process (S6304) will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process (S6304). In the point production in this control example, if it is determined that the mode will be shifted as a result of a predetermined lottery (the process of S6509 executed in the point production mode setting process (S6305 in FIG. 214) described later) (the mode shift flag 223ai is turned on) There are two mode transition conditions: a mode transition based on the set mode, current display mode, or internal score.

In this way, by performing a combination of mode transitions that are randomly performed by lottery and mode transitions that are performed when mode transition conditions (for example, display mode) are met, the mode that is executed during the point presentation It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the transition.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when the probability of winning is high (internal score is 6 points or more), the display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 is set to zero in "normal mode A". It is configured to shift to "dice mode" when the result is a number ("2.2.2" or "4.4.4"). This is a situation in which it is difficult to provide benefits that are advantageous to the player in "Normal Mode A" (for example, notification that a performance with high expectations for a jackpot will be executed, notification that a jackpot has been won), Even if the display mode of the indicators P1 to P3 has not reached the maximum value, when the display mode reaches a predetermined display mode (double display mode), benefits that are advantageous to the player are likely to be granted. This is to bring about the state. As a result, even if the display of the indicator is not good in the point performance (for example, in "normal mode A", the points are not increasing), benefits that are advantageous to the player can be provided by changing the mode. Since it is possible to increase the level of expectation given, the player can enjoy the performance until the end.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the display mode of each indicator P1 to P3 becomes a double number in the "normal mode A", a "dice mode" is provided in which a benefit is given in which the display mode of the number zero is advantageous to the player. '', it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the change in the display mode of the indicator due to the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the explanation will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is executed, first, the currently set mode information is read from the mode information storage area 223ah (S6401), and it is determined whether the currently set mode is "normal mode A". (S6402). If it is determined that the currently set mode is "normal mode A" (S6402: Yes), then the current display mode set in the display information storage area 223af is "2.2. 2" or "4.4.4" (S6403).

In the process of S6403, if it is determined that the current display mode is "2.2.2" or "4.4.4" (S6403: Yes), it is determined whether the internal score is "6" or more. It is determined (S6404), and if it is determined that it is "6" or more (S6404: Yes), "dice mode" is set (S6405), and the process moves to S6408. On the other hand, in the process of S6404, if it is determined that the value is not greater than or equal to "6" (less than or equal to "5") (S6404: No), the mode transition flag 223i is set to OFF (S6411), and this process ends. do.

In addition, in the process of S6402, if it is determined that the currently set mode is not "Normal mode A" (S6402: No), or in the process of S6403, the current display mode is set to "2.2.2". ” or “4.4.4” (S6403: No), then it is determined whether the mode transition flag 223ai is set on (S6406).

This mode transition flag 223ai is a flag that is set in the point production mode setting process (S6305) described later, and when this mode transition flag 223ai is set to on, the next point production setting process 2 (S2053 in FIG. 210 ) in the mode transition process (S6304 in FIG. 212), and the mode transition is executed.

In the process of S6406, if it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6406: Yes), the mode to which the mode is to be transitioned is selected based on the mode selection table 222ag (S6407). On the other hand, in the process of S6406, if it is determined that the mode transition flag 223ai is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S6409: No), this process is directly ended.

Here, the mode selection table 222ag referenced in the process of S6407 will be explained. In this mode selection table 222ag, a destination mode is selected based on the currently set mode and the production counter 223f. Note that there are prohibitions for restricting mode transition (see Figure 195); for example, if "dice mode" is set, the mode will not shift to "normal mode B". It is set so that the mode does not shift to "dice mode" when "bingo mode" is set.

This prohibition process is intended to prevent the display mode of the indicator from changing due to mode transition during point performance, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand. By configuring it in this way, the advantage of mode transitions in point performances (the ability to keep players looking forward to the end of the performance by changing the indicator display mode according to the mode transition) can be taken advantage of. However, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage (the change in the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition, which results in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand).

Returning to FIG. 212, the explanation will be continued. After completing the process of S6405 or S6407, display mode changing process (S6408) is executed. This display mode changing process (S6408) is a process for changing the display mode of the indicator based on the mode transition.

Next, this display mode changing process (S6408) will be explained with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the display mode changing process (S6408). This display mode change processing (S6408) is a process for setting the display mode of the indicator displayed after the mode transition based on the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition, and the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is the predetermined one. (a display mode that notifies the player that a benefit will be given, or a display mode that is similar to a display mode that notifies the player that a benefit will be awarded), and the determination result The display mode after the mode transition is set based on the following.

When the display mode change process (S6408) is executed, the display mode is first determined based on the display mode selection table 222ah, and is set in the score performance temporary storage area 223ag (S6451). This display format selection table 222ah is a table for setting the display format (color, pattern) of the indicator after mode transition based on the internal score set in the current point performance and the value of the performance counter 223f. As a result, when the mode is changed in the point performance, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the display mode of the indicator after the mode transition, but also to the display form (color, pattern), and the performance effect can be further enhanced. .

In addition, even if the mode transition is executed at the beginning of the point presentation, that is, when the display mode of the indicator is far from the final display mode, the indicator will be displayed based on the internal score set in the point presentation. Since the display format is set, it is possible to perform an effect that increases the expectation of a jackpot.

When the process of S6451 is finished, the currently set display mode is read from the display information storage area 223af (S6452), and it is determined whether the current display mode is compatible with SP reach (S6453). This SP reach support is a display mode that notifies that a performance with high expectation of jackpot (SP reach) will be executed. Specifically, if it is "normal mode A", either indicator P1 or P2 will be displayed. In the display mode where the display mode is the maximum value (MAX), if it is "Dice mode", the display mode is such that indicators P4 and P5 are "Zero (excluding 6.6)", and if it is "Normal mode B" The display mode is such that the indicator P6 is "50% to 90%", and if the mode is "Bingo mode", the display mode is that the indicator P7 is "2 lines established".

In the process of S6453, if it is determined that the current display mode is compatible with SP reach (S6453: Yes), a display mode compatible with SP reach is determined and set in the score performance temporary storage area 223ag (S6454), This process ends. In other words, if the display mode before the mode shift is a display mode compatible with SP reach, the display mode after the mode shift is also set to a display mode compatible with SP reach. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the benefit displayed before the mode transition (notification that SP Reach is executed) disappears after the mode transition (a display format that does not support SP Reach is displayed), and the player It is possible to perform a suitable performance without causing dissatisfaction with the performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6453, if it is determined that the current display mode is not compatible with SP reach (S6453: No), then it is determined whether the current display mode is a display mode that corresponds to the high standard. (S6455). As described above, this high standard is set as a display mode in which the display mode of the indicator is not a display mode that provides benefits to the player, but is similar to that display mode.

Specifically, if it is "normal mode A", one of the indicators P1 to P3 is displayed as "6", and if it is in "dice mode", the number of indicator P4 is "5". If the display mode is "normal mode B", the indicator P6 is "40%".

With this configuration, even if a mode transition occurs during point presentation, the display appearance of the indicator after the mode transition will be significantly different from the display appearance of the indicator displayed in the previous point presentation. It becomes possible to suppress storage.

For example, in "Normal Mode A", if a mode transition is executed while a display format in which indicator P1 shows "6" is displayed as a display format that corresponds to the high standard, and the transition is made to "Bingo Mode", In this case, the display mode of the indicator P7 after the mode transition becomes a display mode indicating "1 line established". Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform the point performance after the mode shift while maintaining the expectation that the bonus will be given before the mode shift to the player.

Returning to FIG. 213, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6455, if it is determined that the current display mode is a display mode indicating a high standard (S6455: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the high standard after the mode transition is determined, and the score effect temporary storage area 223ag is determined. (S6456), and ends this process. On the other hand, if the current display mode is not a display mode that indicates the high standard (S6455: No), a display mode that does not correspond to the high standard is determined and set in the score performance temporary storage area 223ag, and this process is ended.

As explained above, in the point presentation in this control example, when a mode transition is executed, the display format of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display format of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. If the mode transition is executed while a display format notifying the player that a benefit will be awarded is displayed, a display notifying the player that a benefit will be awarded is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed according to the aspect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Furthermore, a display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that a benefit will be given is determined and stored as a high standard value, and the mode transition is executed while the display mode that indicates the high standard value is displayed. If the player receives a bonus, the system is configured so that the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display format that shows a high standard value. Even if the mode transition is executed while the user is looking at the point presentation with anticipation, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display format indicating a high reference value, so that the feeling of anticipation can be maintained.

In addition, in this control example, the display mode is stored so that cases where the display mode is not a display mode that notifies the granting of a benefit can be distinguished in two stages, high standard and other, but it is divided into three or more stages. The configuration may also be such that the display mode is stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to a difference between the display manner of the indicator before the mode transition and the display manner of the indicator after the mode transition.

In addition, in this control example, when a mode transition is executed while a display format that corresponds to the high standard or a display format that has not reached the high standard is displayed, the meaning is the same as the display format before the mode transition. However, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is displayed based on the internal level and internal score set when the point presentation is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. This makes it possible to increase the expectations of the player for the mode transition.

Returning to FIG. 212, the explanation will be continued. When the display mode change process (S6408 in FIG. 213) is completed, the mode information stored in the mode information storage area 223ah is updated to the mode information corresponding to the currently set mode (S6409), and the set mode is updated. A display background command corresponding to is set (S6410), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to OFF (S6411), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the mode transition process (S6304) is finished, point presentation mode setting process (S6305) is executed next. This point performance mode setting process (S6305) is a process for setting the indicator display mode to be changed in the currently executed variable display.

Here, the point presentation mode setting process (S6305) will be explained with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the point performance mode setting process (S6305). When the point production mode setting process (S6305) is executed, first, the remaining score set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae and the value of the production number counter 223ac are used to refer to the score selection table 222ad to be used this time. The usage score to be used is determined based on the fluctuation of (S6501).

Then, based on the determined usage points, the remaining score information set in the remaining score information storage area 223ae is updated (S6502). Specifically, a value obtained by subtracting the points to be used this time from the set remaining score information is updated and set as new remaining score information.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the performance counter 223ac is 1 (S6503), and if it is determined that it is 1 (S6503: Yes), that is, if it is the last point performance, the display information storage area 223af The final display mode is determined based on the final display mode information set in , and the current mode information set in the mode information storage area 223ah, and is set in the score performance temporary storage area 223ag (S6504). Then, a display point production command is set based on the information set in the score production temporary storage area 223ag (S6505), the information set in the score production temporary storage area 223ag is cleared (S6506), and this process is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of S6503, if it is determined that the value of the performance counter 223ac is not 1 (2 or more) (S6503: No), the usage score determined in S6501 and the value set in the display information storage area 223af are determined. The current display mode is determined based on the final display mode and the current display mode, and is set in the score performance temporary storage area 223ag (S6507).

Then, the display mode set this time is set in the display mode storage area 223af (S6508), and then it is determined whether a mode shift is to be executed (S6509), and if it is determined that a mode shift is to be executed (S6509: Yes), the mode transition flag 223ai is set to ON (S6510), the above-described processes of S6505 and S6506 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no mode transition (S6509: No), the process of S6505 and S6506 described above is executed without setting the mode transition flag 223ai to ON, and the present process ends.

Returning to FIG. 210, the explanation will be continued. When the point performance mode setting process (S6305) is completed, next, the value of the performance number counter 223ac is subtracted by 1 (S6306), and it is determined whether the value of the performance number counter 223ac after the subtraction is "0" or less. (S6307). If it is determined that the number is not less than "0" (it is greater than or equal to 1) (S6307: No), this means that the point presentation continues, and the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6307 that the value of the performance counter 223ac is less than or equal to 0 (S6307: Yes), the point performance ends this time, so the score information storage area 223ad is Clear (S6308), clear the remaining score information storage area 223ae (S6309), clear the display information storage area 223af (S6310), clear the mode information storage area 223ah (S6311), and clear the internal level storage area 223aa. (S6312), clears the continuous performance start flag 223ab (S6313), clears the character information storage area (S6314), and ends this process.

<About the control process executed by the display control 114 in the third control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. This control example is different from the second control example described above in that point production related command processing is added in command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 215), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 215, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S2601 to S2613 are executed similarly to the command determination process 2 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 180).

Then, in the process of S2612, if it is determined that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether or not a display point performance related command has been received (S2637).

In the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point performance related command has not been received (S2637: No), various processes explained in each control example described above are executed as other command processes (S2614), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2637, if it is determined that the display point effect related command has been received (S2637: Yes), the point effect related command process is executed (S2638), and then this process ends.

Next, the point performance related command processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 216(a). FIG. 216(a) is a flowchart showing point performance related command processing (S2638). This point effect related command process is a process executed when a plurality of display commands related to point effects are output from the audio lamp control device 113.

When the point production related command processing (S2638) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a point command for display (S6601), and if it is determined that there is a point command for display (S6601: Yes), the point command The process (S6602) is executed and the process moves to S6603. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no display point command (S6601: No), the point command processing (S6602) is skipped and the process proceeds to S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether there is a display indicator command (S6603), and if it is determined that there is a display indicator command (S6603: Yes), indicator command processing (S6604) is executed and the display indicator command is If it is determined that there is no command (S6603: No), the process ends.

Next, the point command processing (S6602) will be explained with reference to FIG. 216(b). FIG. 216(b) is a flowchart showing point command processing (S6602). This point command processing (S6602) is to execute processing corresponding to the point command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is to execute the processing corresponding to the point command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is to execute the processing corresponding to the point command received from the audio lamp control device 113. ) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the point command processing (S6602), first, a performance display data table corresponding to the point type (for example, number of points) indicated by the display point command is determined, and the determined performance display data table is transferred from the data table storage area 233b. Read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6702).

Then, based on the effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to command determination process 3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the indicator command processing (S6604) executed in the point performance related command processing (see FIG. 216(a)) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing indicator command processing (S6604). This indicator command processing (S6604) is to execute processing corresponding to the indicator command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and is a processing for displaying the display mode of each indicator during point performance.

In the indicator command processing (S6604), first, an effect display data table (indicator data table) corresponding to the indicator display mode information (for example, display mode and set mode) indicated by the display indicator command is determined, The determined effect display data table (indicator data table) is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6751). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6752).

Then, based on the effect display data table (indicator data table) set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6751, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6753), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. It is initialized to (S6754). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6755), the point command process is ended, and the process returns to command determination process 3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a modification of the point display method described above using FIG. 198 will be described. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of point display in the third control example. FIG. 218(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a layer that displays point images (sub effects) among multiple layers in this modification, and FIG. 218(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image in which layers are combined, and FIG. 218(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of what is displayed after the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 218(b) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 218(a), the plurality of small areas (Dm11 to Dm13, Dm21 to Dm23, Dm31 to Dm33) that display character images have points at different display positions (display positions within each small area). Displayable data is stored, of which a point display process is executed in which a small area corresponding to the main character to be executed this time is set and the points of the set small area are displayed. Then, an image obtained by combining the layer displaying the point image and the layer displaying the character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 218(b)).

As shown in FIG. 218(b), in the image in which the two characters (Dc1, Dc2) are facing each other, which is displayed when the main character has started, the point (displayed in the small area Dm31) executed in the point display process is Display processing is performed so that the displayed points) overlap with the character Dc1 and the player cannot visually recognize the displayed points.

Thereafter, the main character appearance progresses, and as shown in FIG. 218(c), when the character Dc1 moves, the points displayed in the small area Dc1 become visible to the player. In this case, from the state shown in FIG. 218(b), a plurality of movement patterns are set for the main character, such as a pattern in which the character Dc1 moves (attack pattern) and a pattern in which the character Dc2 moves (defense pattern). It is preferable to configure so that whether or not points are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined depending on the progress content. Thereby, it is possible to perform a display in which the third symbol variation performance, which is the main character, and the point performance, which is the sub-performance, are more closely related, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

Note that in this control example, a small area for point display is specified based on the production pattern of the main character. (pattern) can be set, points may be displayed in a plurality of small areas corresponding to a plurality of motion patterns. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 218(b), a display process is executed so that points are displayed in advance in both the small area Dm31 that overlaps with the character Dc1 and the small area Dm32 that overlaps with the character Dc2, and the main character It may also be possible to display points corresponding to the motion pattern set as . In this case, the point value (number) displayed when the ally character Dc1 moves and the point value (number) displayed when the enemy character Dc2 moves will be different. It is a good idea to configure the display settings.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to associate the movement pattern in the main character with the value of the points to be displayed, and it is possible to further enhance the production effect.

As explained above, in this control example, when each display content of the point performance is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the display point command and the display indicator command are output separately from the display variation pattern command. It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 has been executed, when displaying points on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the display mode of the indicator, each command is individually executed. It can be output to the display control device 114 at different timings.

Therefore, a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is operated and a command related to display data when the frame button 22 is not operated are output every time, and when a command indicating that the frame button 22 is operated is output. Since there is no need for the display control device 114 to perform processing such as rewriting display data, the control load can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, the display point command and display indicator command are configured to be output separately from the display variation pattern command, but all or part of them may be set as a common display command. , may be configured to be output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

As explained above, in the point presentation in the third control example, when a mode transition is executed, the display format of the indicator after the mode transition is determined based on the display format of the indicator displayed before the mode transition. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player. If the mode transition is executed while a display format notifying the player that a benefit will be awarded is displayed, a display notifying the player that a benefit will be awarded is displayed. Since the indicator after the mode transition is displayed according to the aspect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Furthermore, a display mode that is similar to the display mode that notifies the player that a benefit will be given is determined and stored as a high standard value, and the mode transition is executed while the display mode that indicates the high standard value is displayed. If the player receives a bonus, the system is configured so that the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display format that shows a high standard value. Even if the mode transition is executed while the user is looking at the point presentation with anticipation, the indicator after the mode transition is displayed in a display format indicating a high reference value, so that the feeling of anticipation can be maintained.

In addition, in this control example, the display mode is stored so that cases where the display mode is not a display mode that notifies the granting of a benefit can be distinguished in two stages, high standard and other, but it is divided into three or more stages. The configuration may also be such that the display mode is stored. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the player due to a difference between the display manner of the indicator before the mode transition and the display manner of the indicator after the mode transition.

In addition, in this control example, when a mode transition is executed while a display format that corresponds to the high standard or a display format that has not reached the high standard is displayed, the meaning is the same as the display format before the mode transition. However, for example, the display mode of the indicator before the mode transition is displayed based on the internal level and internal score set when the point presentation is executed. A display mode that is more advantageous to the player may be set as the display mode after the mode transition. This makes it possible to increase the expectations of the player for the mode transition.

Note that the configuration used for the point presentation in this control example and the configuration used for the point presentation in the second control example described above may of course be used in combination; for example, the configuration used for the point presentation in the second control example described above may be used in combination. Similarly to the third control example, four modes may be set and the configuration of the mode transition process of this control example may be added, or the second control method described above may be used to determine the points to be displayed in this control example. As in the example, it may be made to correspond to the display content of the third symbol variation effect (starring). Furthermore, in this control example, the configuration for determining the position at which points are displayed may be switched to the configuration used in the second control example described above. This makes it possible to provide players with a wider variety of performances.

Furthermore, in "Normal Mode A", "Benefit 1" given when indicator P1 reaches MAX and "Benefit 2" given when indicator P2 or P3 reaches MAX are calculated based on the expectation level of jackpot. Among the production contents of the third symbol variation production, which is set in stages, "Bonus 1" is a privilege that informs you that the stage will be increased with respect to the production content currently being executed, and "Bonus 1" is, for example, The benefit may be a benefit that notifies you of an increase in the number of stages (two stages), and "Benefit 2" may be a benefit that notifies you that the expectation level of a jackpot is increased by one level, for example.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the level of expectation for a jackpot depending on the content of the performance performed in the third symbol variation performance and the timing at which the indicator reaches MAX, encouraging the player to pay close attention to the performance. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, it is preferable to make the timing at which the indicator reaches MAX and the timing at which the benefit is granted be different. As a result, in a state where the indicator reaches MAX and it is confirmed that a benefit will be awarded, it is possible to have the player play the game while predicting which production content will be executed and the benefit will be awarded. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 226. In the first control example described above, the control is executed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) in order to suggest and notify the content of the main appearance of the variable pattern (the effect being executed in the center of the main display area Dm). The control of the reach navigation effect (see FIG. 112 and FIG. 113), which is the sub-effect that is provided, has been explained. This reach navigation production includes a time gauge Dm4a that indicates the production period of the lead role, a moving display section (character Dm4b) that indicates the progress of the lead role, a notification section Dm4c that suggests and informs the content of the lead role, and a guide display. This is an effect display consisting of parts Dm4d and Dm4e.

On the other hand, in this control example, another example of the reach navigation performance explained in the above-mentioned first control example will be explained. In this fourth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is unified. The difference is that the section has been changed and that multiple patterns of reach navigation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have been explained. The other points are the same as the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the flow of reach navigation performance will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of reach navigation performance. Similar to the first control example described above, this reach navigation performance is executed in accordance with the variation time of the production (starring appearance) executed according to a predetermined variation pattern (super reach or special reach) among the variation time of the special symbol. This is a sub-effect that allows the player to visually understand the game, and is announced or suggested in stages. In this way, by displaying the contents of the main character (explanation of the main character's performance, variable time, and expectation level for a jackpot) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 using the sub-effects, the player is informed. Easy-to-understand games can be provided.

In Figure 219, 60 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol (see Figure 117(b)), and 30 seconds after the start of variation, it develops into super reach, and 20 seconds after that (i.e., 50 seconds after the start of variation) 2 shows the flow of Reach Navi performance when a variation pattern in which the starring role further develops is selected.

As shown in Figure 219, for 15 seconds after the special symbol fluctuations start, a pre-reach effect (the third symbol changes rapidly) is displayed in the lead role, and then a reach effect (the two third symbols on the left and right (The display stops at the same number and only the third symbol changes) is displayed for 15 seconds. After that, the main character appears for 30 seconds in a super reach effect (for example, the variation of the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the small area Dm5 (see FIG. 112) of the main display area Dm, and the characters face off in the main display area Dm). (See Figure 163)) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, 20 seconds after the start of this super reach effect, the expectation of a jackpot is high (for example, an ally character avoids an opponent's character's attack, or a character with a different weapon than normal) The timing at which the opponent's character is attacked (such as attacking the opponent's character using The system is configured to make the player pay close attention to what kind of performance will be executed at different timings.

At the same time as this super reach effect is displayed, the reach navigation effect is displayed as a sub-effect in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 112) on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (point A). The detailed content of this reach navigation performance is the same as the first control example described above, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, a production pattern is set in which the first reach navigation performance is 20 seconds and the second reach navigation performance is 10 seconds. The timing of 20 seconds after the display) and the timing of switching from the first reach navigation performance to the second reach navigation performance are configured to be associated with each other.

In this reach navigation performance, similar to the reach navigation performance of the first control example described above, guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e are provided in the middle, and when the character reaches the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e, for example, As a production that suggests that the result of the lead role will be a jackpot, the word "chance" is displayed, and the indicator attached to the rotating display Dm4c can be switched (point B and point C).

Then, when the branching timing of the super reach performance for the main character appears, that is, the timing (point D) when 20 seconds have elapsed since the super reach effect was displayed, a display is displayed in which the super reach effect continues to develop for the main character. At the same time, the reach navigation performance is switched from the first reach navigation performance to the second reach navigation performance. At this time, since the second reach navigation performance is set to be half the period (10 seconds) of the first reach navigation performance, the second reach navigation performance is the time used in the first navigation performance. It starts from the half point of the gauge Dm4a (see FIG. 112). Then, among the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e provided on the time gauge Dm4a, the character Dm4b (see FIG. 112) passes through the guide display part Dm4e again (point E) in the second reach navigation performance, and various The notification mode is changed again, and the second reach navigation performance ends (point F) in accordance with the result display timing of the super reach performance (timing of stop display of the third symbol).

In this way, among the third symbol variation performances that notify the lottery results of special symbols using the variation display of the third symbol, there are predetermined variation performances (super reach performance and special reach performance) that have a high expectation of jackpot. By executing the reach navigation performance, which is a sub-direction, in time with the timing of the main character appearance, the player can visually grasp the progress status of the main character appearance, and it is possible to inform or suggest it in stages. This makes it possible to provide players with easy-to-understand games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the content displayed in the small area Dm4 when the example of the reach navigation effect shown in FIG. 219 described above is executed will be described. FIG. 220(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at point C shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation performance, and FIG. 220(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed at point D shown in FIG. FIG. 220(c) is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed at point E shown in FIG. 219 in the reach navigation effect. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the parts explained in the first control example described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the display contents of point C during the first reach navigation performance will be described with reference to FIG. 220(a). As shown in FIG. 220(a), in the first reach navigation performance (20 seconds), when the character Dm4b passes the guidance display section Dm4d, a "chance" with high expectations of winning the jackpot is displayed, and the guidance When passing through the display section Dm4e, "chance" is not displayed, but "x" is displayed. In this way, by notifying the expectation level of winning the jackpot on the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation performance, this time, the notification contents of the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e and the starring performance are combined. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220(b), the display contents of point D during the first reach navigation performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the second reach navigation effect (10 seconds) starts from the half position of the time gauge Dm4a. Therefore, the character Dm4b will pass through the guide display section Dm4e again during the second reach navigation performance. In this way, by setting the character Dm4b to pass through the guidance display area in the first reach navigation performance again in the second reach navigation performance, it becomes possible to convert the notification content of the guidance display part without feeling strange. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 220(c), when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display section Dm4e in the second reach navigation performance, the notification content of the guide display section Dm4e is changed to display "Chance". In this way, when switching from the first reach navigation performance to the second reach navigation performance, by setting the performance so that the character Dm4b passes again the guide display section that it passed through in the first reach navigation performance, the first reach navigation performance This is because the player watches the Reach Navi effect while expecting that the second Reach Navi effect will be set so that the player will pass through the guidance display section again where the highly anticipated notification ("chance") was not given. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, since it is possible to efficiently reuse the same data for the first reach navigation performance and the second reach navigation performance as display data used for the performance, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the performance.

In addition, in the above example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e again, but it is also possible to provide an effect that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e again. . In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an action (eg, jump) to avoid the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation performance, it is possible to make the character Dm4b pay close attention to whether the character Dm4b passes through or avoids the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game, and also to prevent the character Dm4b from getting bored with the game early. When the second reach navigation performance is started from a position where the user can pass through the guidance display area where the performance indicates that there is a high expectation of a jackpot (“chance”), suppress the performance that lowers the expectation of a jackpot. can do.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223.

FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a second internal level selection table 222ba, a performance scenario storage area 222bb, and a performance scenario selection table 222bc are added. The other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the second internal level selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second internal level selection table 222ba. This second internal level selection table 222ba is a table for selecting an internal level based on the result of the judgment of the pachinko machine 10, and is different from the internal level selection table 222aa used in the third control example described above. This is different in that the winning information determination process based on the winning information that has been stored on hold is not executed.

Specifically, if the judgment result is "win" and the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 149", "2" is selected as the internal level, and if it is "150 to 198", , "3" is selected as the internal level. Then, if the result of the judgment is "miss" and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 149", "1" is selected as the internal level, and if it is "150 to 198", the internal "2" is selected as the level.

As a result, the internal level will be set to "3" for approximately 25% of cases where the result of the judgment is "hit", approximately 75% when the result of the judgment is "hit", and 3 when the result of the judgment is "miss". It is possible to set approximately 25% of the cases to "2" and approximately 75% of the cases where the judgment result is "miss" to "1". By setting the internal level in this way and executing the performance in accordance with this internal level, it is easier to set multiple levels of expectations for jackpots for the performance, compared to when the performance is executed in response to only the result of the success/failure judgment. becomes possible.

In this control example, the internal level is set to three levels, but the number of internal levels is not limited to this and may be set to four or more levels. In this case, for example, by setting an internal level that is set only for about 1% of the cases where the winning/falsifying result is a "win", and making sure that the performance corresponding to that internal level is executed, valuable information that is rarely displayed can be set. It is possible to provide performances to players. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Next, the production scenario storage area 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the production scenario storage area 222bb. This performance scenario storage area 222bb is an area in which a plurality of performance scenarios for Reach Navi performance are stored. This is the area where scenarios are stored.

As shown in FIG. 223, the production scenario storage area 222bb stores the scenario pattern of the production scenario as an expectation display that is notified (displayed) on the guide display Dm4d (first point) and the guide display Dm4e (second point). Both the guide display part Dm4d and the guide display part Dm4e are used as the return position of the character Dm4b when the highly anticipated "chance" or the lowly expected "x" switches from the first reach navigation performance to the second reach navigation performance. A return position "1", which is a position where the vehicle can pass, and a return position "2", which is a position where only the guide display portion Dm4e can be passed, are set.

Specifically, in scenario 1, during the first reach navigation performance, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed, and the return position returns to "1", and during the second reach navigation performance, the first point "x" is displayed. This is a scenario in which "Chance" and the second point "Chance" are displayed. In scenario 2, during the first reach navigation performance, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed, and until the return position "1" is displayed. This is a scenario in which the first point "Chance" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation performance, and in scenario 3, the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the first reach navigation performance. This is a scenario in which the character "x" is displayed, the user returns to the return position "1", and the first point "x" and the second point "x" are displayed during the second reach navigation performance. In this way, a plurality of scenarios are created in which the display mode of the first reach navigation performance and the return position are the same, but only the display mode of the second reach navigation performance is different, and the scenarios are set in correspondence with the above-mentioned internal level. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a performance that matches the expected level of jackpot.

The display mode shown in FIG. 223(a) is similarly set for scenarios 4 to 12. Furthermore, the "super" displayed at the second point during the second reach navigation performance of scenario 11 indicates a display with a much higher expectation of jackpot than the "chance" display (for example, "super hot"). .

Note that in this control example, scenarios 1 to 12 are used as scenario patterns for reach navigation performance, but more scenarios may be used. Furthermore, the type of character Dm4b and the moving speed of character Dm4b may be set in the scenario pattern as described in the above-described reach navigation effect of the first control example.

Furthermore, in this control example, by using the same time gauge Dm4a for the first reach navigation performance and the second reach navigation performance, the display data used for the performance is shared, but the display data is shared by other methods. For example, when the second reach navigation performance is started, two time gauges Dm4a used in the first reach navigation performance may be displayed side by side. In this case, by scrolling the time gauge Dm4a in accordance with the moving direction of the character Dm4b, it is possible to reduce the display area in which the reach navigation effect is executed.

Further, in this control example, the time gauge Dm4a having one route is used for the moving direction of the character Dm4b, but the time gauge Dm4a having a plurality of routes may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to set the scenario pattern so that the route along which the character Dm4b moves is different between the first reach navigation performance and the second reach navigation performance. Thereby, the content of the reach navigation performance can be made more diverse.

Next, the production scenario selection table 222bc will be explained with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the production scenario selection table 222bc. This performance scenario selection table 222bc is a table that is referred to when selecting a performance scenario in reach navigation performance setting processing 2 (S2005 in FIG. 224), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 223(b), the effect scenario selection table 222bc selects each scenario based on the internal level, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the value of the effect counter 223f. It is set as follows.

Specifically, if the value of the internal level is "1", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 129", scenario "5" is selected and " 130 to 198”, scenario “4” is selected. Furthermore, if the value of the internal level is "1", the fluctuation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "1" is selected, and the value of the production counter 223f is If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "2" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "3" is selected.

Furthermore, if the value of the internal level is "2", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "7" is selected, and the value of the production counter 223f is If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "8" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "10" is selected. Furthermore, if the value of the internal level is "2", the variation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "9" is selected, and the value of the production counter 223f is If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "6" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "1" is selected.

Then, if the value of the internal level is "3", the variation time is "60 seconds", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "7" is selected, and the value of the production counter 223f is If the value is "66 to 198", scenario "12" is selected. Furthermore, if the value of the internal level is "3", the variation time is "90 seconds", and the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 65", scenario "1" is selected, and the value of the production counter 223f is If the value is "66 to 129", scenario "6" is selected, and if the value is "130 to 198", scenario "11" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 221, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 221, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a second internal level storage area 223ba is added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second internal level storage area 223ba is for storing the internal level selected by the second internal level selection table 222ba described above based on the validity determination result (lottery result) of the special symbol when the reach navigation effect is executed. It is an area. This second internal level storage area 223ba is set (stored) with the internal level determined in the reach navigation performance setting process 2 (see FIG. 224) (S2152 in FIG. 224), and is referred to when selecting a performance scenario (see FIG. 224). S2153 of 224) is initialized when the reach navigation effect ends.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 224. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that reach navigation performance setting processing 2 (see FIG. 224) is executed instead of reach navigation performance setting processing (see FIG. 141), and other points are the same. be. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reach navigation performance setting process 2 (S2005) in this control example. This Reach Navi performance setting process 2 (S2005) is a process that is executed when the variation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is to execute a Reach Navi performance, and is a process that is executed when the variation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command acquired from the main control device 110 is one for executing a Reach Navi performance, and is a process that is determined.

When reach navigation effect setting processing 2 (S2005) is executed, first, based on the acquired variation pattern type, display variation pattern information corresponding to the main character to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected. , is set in the fluctuation pattern temporary storage area 223i (S2151). Here, the starring appearance is a performance for notifying the lottery result of a special symbol using a performance period corresponding to the acquired variation pattern type, and is the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 112). (see).

After completing the process of S2151, the internal level is determined based on the second internal level selection table 222ba and set in the second internal level storage area 223ba (S2152), and then the internal level and the production scenario selection table 222bc are determined. Based on this, a performance scenario is selected and set in the temporary fluctuation pattern storage area 223i (S2153).

When the process of S2153 is finished, the process of S2107 and S2108 is executed similarly to the reach navigation effect setting process (see FIG. 141) executed in the first control example described above, and the present process ends.

Next, a modification of the display mode of the reach navigation effect used in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 and 226. 225(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing modification example 1 of the fourth control example, FIG. 225(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing modification example 2 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing Modification 3 of the fourth control example, and FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in Modification 3 of the fourth control example. FIG. 226(c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display content displayed in modification example 3 of the fourth control example. Note that Modifications 1 to 3 are modifications of the display mode used in reach navigation performance, and the control content uses the configuration described in the first control example or the fourth control example described above. Therefore, the same parts are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

FIG. 225(a) shows the content of the second reach navigation performance of the first modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(a), in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation performance is inverted and used as the time gauge Dm4a for the second reach navigation performance. By doing so, display data used for presentation can be reused.

Next, FIG. 225(b) shows the content of the second reach navigation performance of the second modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 225(b), when the second reach navigation performance is started, the time gauge Dm4a used in the first reach navigation performance is extended and displayed, and a performance in which the character Dm4b continues to move is executed. . In this case, the guide display sections Dm4f and Dm4g are newly displayed, and the number of locations that notify the expectation level of a jackpot increases to four. As a result, a maximum of four "chances" are displayed to notify players of high expectations for a jackpot, making it possible to widely inform players of their expectations for a jackpot.

In addition, in this modification, the guidance display parts Dm4f and Dm4g are displayed separately from the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e, but for example, the first reach navigation performance is executed in accordance with the progress of the second reach navigation performance. The display may be scrolled in the moving direction of the character Dm4b (to the right in the viewpoint of FIG. 225(b)) so that the area is erased. Thereby, the effect of this modification can be performed without enlarging the small area Dm4.

In this case, it may be configured such that only the display results of the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e are displayed in the small area Dm4, or the display contents displayed in the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e are displayed in the guide display part Dm4f. and Dm4g, and the display mode may be changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display sections Dm4f and Dm4g in the second reach navigation performance.

Next, FIG. 226(a) shows the content of the reach navigation performance of the third modification of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 226(a), in the reach navigation performance of this modification, a time gauge Dm4a that is branched into two routes is used. A second route reaching the notification unit Dm4c2 is configured. Among these, when the character Dm4b moves on the first route, it passes through the guide notification units Dm4d and Dm4e on the way, and when the character Dm4b moves on the second route, it passes through the guide notification units Dm4d and Dm4f on the way. .

When the reach navigation performance is executed in this modification, the user moves along either the first route or the second route in the first navigation performance and reaches the first notification unit Dm4c1 or the second notification unit Dm4c2. Then, the vehicle is returned to the return position, which is set to a position before the branch point where the first route and the second route diverge, and the second navigation effect is executed.

Then, in the second navigation performance, the character Dm4b moves along either the route that the character Dm4b moved in the first navigation performance or the route that the character Dm4b did not move in the first navigation performance. As a result, when the same route is selected in the first navigation performance and the second navigation performance, the display result on the guide display section Dm4e that the character Dm4b passed through in the first navigation performance is changed in the second navigation performance. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, when a route with different first navigation performance and second navigation performance is selected, the display results can be displayed on the three guide display sections Dm4d, dm4e, and Dm4f as reach navigation performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226(b), as a result of the first route being selected in the first navigation presentation, "chance" was displayed on the guidance display sections Dm4d and Dm4e to inform that the jackpot expectation was high. In this state, when the second route is selected as the second navigation effect, the character Dm4b passes through the guide display section Dm4f provided in the middle of the second route, and the jackpot expectation level increases as shown in FIG. 226(c). A "chance" will be displayed to inform you that the price is high. In addition, if different routes are selected for the first navigation performance and the second navigation performance, the notification unit (notification unit Dm4c1 or notification unit Dm4c2) reached in the first navigation performance will indicate that the current is the second navigation performance. "Development" will be displayed to indicate that it is in progress. This allows the player to easily grasp the current situation.

In addition, if the same route is selected in the first navigation performance and the second navigation performance, for example, if the display result of the guidance display section Dm4e is "x" in the first navigation performance, the second navigation performance Therefore, the display result on the guide display section Dm4e may be changed to "Chance".

In other words, when the display result of the guide display section Dm4e in the first navigation performance is "x" and the second navigation performance is started from the return position shown in FIG. 226(b), the player will receive The performance mode of the second navigation performance is such that the same route as the first navigation performance is selected and the display result of the guidance display section Dm4e where "x" was displayed in the first navigation performance is changed to "chance". Or, if a route different from the first navigation effect is selected and the display result of the guide display section Dm4e remains "x", the display result of "chance" is displayed on the guide display section Dm4f. It becomes possible to set expectations for both.

In this case, it is preferable to set the second navigation performance so that it is more advantageous for the player to travel along a different route from the first navigation performance. Specifically, the probability that "chance" will be displayed as the display result of the guide display section Dm4f is higher than the probability that the display result of the guide display section Dm4e will be changed from "x" to "chance". It is preferable to set such that the expectation level of winning the jackpot is higher when the display result of the guide display section Dm4f is displayed as "chance" than the guide display section Dm4e. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that a route to be selected in the second navigation performance is different from that in the first navigation performance, and it is possible to make the player continuously pay attention to the reach navigation performance. It becomes possible.

In this way, in the reach navigation performance in this modification, the time gauge Dm4a that guides the progress of the game has a plurality of (two) routes, and depending on the result of the first navigation performance (display result on the guide display section) , the player can change the expected route using the second navigation effect.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the route along which the character Dm4b moves in the reach navigation performance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification, the position where the second navigation effect starts (return position) is explained as one position (the position before the route branches), but as in the fourth control example described above, the return position You may provide more than one. In this case, for example, the return position may be provided in front of the guide display section Dm4d, or between the branch point of the route and the guide display section Dm4e or Dm4f. As a result, when the second navigation performance is executed, the route along which the character Dm4b moves (the guide display section to be passed through) in the second navigation performance changes depending on the position to which the character Dm4b is returned. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of effects based on the result of the first navigation effect (display result on the guide display section) and the position where the second navigation effect is started (return position).

Furthermore, although the time gauge Dm4a is branched into two routes in this modification, it may be branched into more (three or more) routes, or a plurality of branch points may be provided. Alternatively, a specific position may be set in the middle of the route that the character Dm4b is moving, and the character Dm4b may move to another route when passing through the specific position. Thereby, the reach navigation performance can be made more diverse.

In addition, in this modification, a plurality of routes are displayed in the small area Dm4 when the reach navigation performance is executed, but for example, during the first navigation performance, the route along which the character Dm4b moves (for example, the first route), and display multiple routes (the first route and the second route) only when a route different from the first navigation performance is selected in the second navigation performance. Good too. With this configuration, the player is not informed in advance (during the first navigation performance) of what kind of route the second navigation performance will take, so the player can predict the performance. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As explained above, in the fourth control example, the contents of the main appearance (the explanation of the main appearance, the variable time, the expectation level of a jackpot) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81, the sub-effect By displaying the information using , it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the production branching timing of the super reach performance executed in the lead role (timing 20 seconds after the super reach performance is displayed) is associated with the timing of switching from the first reach navigation performance to the second reach navigation performance. Therefore, among the 3rd symbol variation effects (star appearance) that use the variable display of the 3rd symbol to notify the lottery results of special symbols, there is a predetermined variation effect (super reach effect) with a high expectation of a jackpot. By executing the reach navigation performance, which is a sub-performance, in accordance with the timing of the main character appearance (direction branching timing), which becomes the main character appearance (or special reach effect), the player can visually grasp the progress status of the main character appearance. This makes it possible to notify or suggest the game in stages, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game to the player.

In addition, by notifying the expectation level of winning the jackpot on multiple guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e during the reach navigation performance, this time we will combine the notification content of the guide display sections Dm4d and Dm4e with the starring performance. Since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, by setting the character Dm4b to pass through the guidance display section that was passed through in the first reach navigation performance again in the second reach navigation performance, it becomes possible to convert the notification contents of the guidance display section without feeling strange. Therefore, by setting the effect so that the character Dm4b passes again through the guidance display area that it passed in the first reach navigation effect, the guidance that was not announced with high expectations ("chance") in the first reach navigation effect can be changed. Since the player watches the reach navigation performance while expecting that the second reach navigation performance will be set so as to pass through the display section again, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the above example, the notification content is changed when the character Dm4b passes through the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e again, but it is also possible to provide an effect that does not change the notification content even if the character Dm4b passes through the guidance display parts Dm4d and Dm4e again. . In this case, it is preferable to set the character Dm4b to perform an action (eg, jump) to avoid the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e at the timing when the character Dm4b reaches the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e. As a result, in the second reach navigation performance, it is possible to make the character Dm4b pay close attention to whether the character Dm4b passes through or avoids the guide display parts Dm4d and Dm4e, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game, and also to prevent the character Dm4b from getting bored with the game early. When the second reach navigation performance is started from a position where the user can pass through the guidance display area where the performance indicates that there is a high expectation of a jackpot (“chance”), suppress the performance that lowers the expectation of a jackpot. can do.

Furthermore, since it becomes possible to efficiently reuse the same data for the first reach navigation performance and the second reach navigation performance as display data used for the performance, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the performance.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 227 to 238. In the second control example described above, in slot performances that are continuously executed within a specific period (within 30 seconds) as continuous slot performances, the next slot to be executed is determined by the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. It was configured so that the performance mode of the performance could be set.

In contrast, in this control example, detailed control has been added regarding the dynamic display (rotation display) mode and static display mode of pseudo symbols in each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance of the second control example described above. They differ in some respects.

In this fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the second control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is unified. The difference is that the section has been changed, and the dynamic display mode and static display mode of various slot effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have been changed. The other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228, the dynamic display mode of pseudo symbols in the slot performance of this control example will be described. In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols in a slot performance can be set. Different dynamic display modes are executed based on the slot effect, extended slot effect) and the remaining time of the valid operation period of the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal example of a dynamic display mode of pseudo symbols in a slot performance. As shown in FIG. 227(a), in the normal dynamic display mode, the left and right pseudo symbols "A" are stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display mode in which the pseudo symbols inside are dynamically displayed is executed. In this state, when the player presses the frame button 22 and the pseudo symbols "A" on the left center right are lined up in a row, the pseudo symbol "A" is acquired. In addition, as explained in the second control example above, in the continuous slot performance, as a result of executing the slot performance multiple times, multiple types (3 types) of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" are obtained. In this case, the player is notified that he or she has won a benefit (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given).

Next, other examples of dynamic display modes of pseudo symbols will be described with reference to FIGS. 227(b) to (e). In this control example, a plurality of dynamic display modes of the pseudo symbols can be set, and the pseudo symbols can be dynamically displayed in various dynamic display modes. It is possible to prompt the user to press the frame button 22. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to actively participate in the operation performance (slot performance) by operating the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the number of reels as a dynamic display mode in slot performance. As shown in FIG. 227(b), this control example is configured to be able to set a dynamic display mode in which the number of reels on which pseudo symbols used in slot effects are displayed is one, as a dynamic display mode of pseudo symbols. There is. Thereby, it becomes possible to enlarge and display the pseudo pattern being dynamically displayed in a limited display space.

Note that in this control example, the normal number of reels (three) is set to one, but the number may be reduced from the normal number, and the number of reels may be set to two. Further, in this control example, the number of reels is set to one and the pseudo symbols being dynamically displayed are enlarged, but a dynamic display mode may be adopted in which only the number of reels is reduced without being enlarged. In this case, a display prompting the player to press the frame button 22 in an empty area (the area where the left and right reels are usually displayed) (for example, when the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row) is displayed. It is preferable to display the degree of expectation that the pseudo symbols "A" are lined up in a row by pressing the frame button 22. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22.

FIG. 227(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the size of a pseudo symbol as a dynamic display mode in slot performance. As shown in FIG. 227(c), this control example is configured to be able to set a dynamic display mode that enlarges the pseudo symbol that is being dynamically displayed among the pseudo symbols used in the slot performance as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol. are doing. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is being dynamically displayed, so that the player can press the frame button 22 voluntarily.

In addition, in this control example, the pseudo symbol "A" is displayed larger than other symbols so that the player can easily understand it, but for example, by displaying other symbols in a smaller size, the pseudo symbol "A" is A dynamic display mode may be used in which the pseudo pattern "A" is easier to visually recognize than other patterns. Thereby, the pseudo pattern "A" can be easily recognized without changing the dynamically displayed area.

FIG. 227(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the symbol arrangement of the dynamically displayed reel (middle reel) as a dynamic display mode in slot production. As shown in FIG. 227(d), in this control example, the pattern arrangement of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo pattern during dynamic display among the reels used in the slot effect as a dynamic display mode of the pseudo pattern is changed. It is configured so that the dynamic display mode can be set. Specifically, among the dynamically displayed symbols, a dynamic display mode can be set in which the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols "A") to be stopped and displayed this time is increased. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is being dynamically displayed, so that the player can press the frame button 22 voluntarily.

In addition, in this control example, by increasing the number of pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols "A") to be stopped and displayed this time, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols "A". In addition, for example, by reducing the number of pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display this time, that is, symbols that are not stopped and displayed on the left and right reels (for example, pseudo symbols "B" and "C"), the relative It may be configured such that the number of pseudo symbols "A" increases. In this case, since the total number of symbols dynamically displayed on the middle reel is reduced, each symbol dynamically displayed (rotatingly displayed) can be easily identified.

FIG. 227(e) is a schematic diagram showing an example of changing the dynamic display speed (rotation speed) of the dynamically displayed reel (middle reel) as a dynamic display mode in the slot performance. As shown in FIG. 227(e), in this control example, the dynamic display speed of the reel (middle reel) that displays the pseudo symbol being dynamically displayed among the reels used in the slot performance as the dynamic display mode of the pseudo symbol. A dynamic display mode in which the rotational speed is reduced can be set. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is being dynamically displayed, so that the player can press the frame button 22 voluntarily.

Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed down near the pseudo-symbols that are currently subject to stop display, and may be made faster elsewhere. This allows the player to easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time, and furthermore, it is possible to shorten the period in which the reels make one revolution.

Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the reels at which the pseudo symbols are dynamically displayed is set to the normal speed until the reels are displayed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 revolutions), and thereafter (e.g., the 3rd revolution) as described above. The dynamic display speed may be slowed down as described above. As a result, for a player who has not operated the frame button 22 for a predetermined period (the period in which the reels rotate twice), the player can easily understand the pseudo symbol that will be stopped and displayed this time. 22.

As explained above, in this control example, pseudo symbols can be displayed in various dynamic display modes in each slot performance executed in a continuous slot performance, so it is possible to motivate players. The frame button 22 can be operated by the user.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned dynamic display modes, only the pseudo symbol that is currently subject to stop display may be displayed with higher brightness than other symbols, or the display mode may be changed to a display mode that emphasizes the edge of the symbol. This may make it easier for the player to understand.

In addition, the frame button 22 may not be operated even though the number of rotations of the reels has reached a predetermined number (the reels are dynamically displayed as if they have rotated a predetermined number of times) or a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the slot effect. If not, each dynamic display mode may be switched and displayed. Thereby, various dynamic display modes can be provided to the player, and the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

Next, the stop display mode of each slot performance in the continuous slot performance of this control example will be explained. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 232, but in this control example, the stop display mode of each slot effect is determined based on the result of the judgment of the special symbol, and if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a win. is set so that three types of pseudo symbols "A", "B", and "C" can be obtained in multiple slot performances that are executed in continuous slot performances, and the result of the judgment of the special symbol is In the case of a miss, it is set so that the number that can be obtained from three types of pseudo symbols in a plurality of slot performances executed in continuous slot performances is any one of 0 to 2.

Therefore, if the judgment result of the special symbol is negative, even if the frame button 22 is operated in each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance, the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed will not be stopped and displayed on the line. Controlled to stop. Specifically, a pattern different from the pseudo pattern to be stopped and displayed is set before and after the pseudo pattern to be stopped and displayed, so that the player can easily grasp the pseudo pattern to be stopped and displayed. When the frame button 22 is operated with the aim, stop control is performed so that the symbol displayed before or after the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed on the line. By doing so, it becomes possible to display the stop display mode of losing without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition to the above-mentioned stop control, in this control example, the start position of the dynamically displayed reels is changed without changing the pattern arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. The configuration is such that it is possible to execute stop control that displays a stop display mode of failure. Next, the above-mentioned stop control will be explained with reference to FIG. 228.

FIG. 228(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the symbol arrangement and stop position of the reel (middle reel) dynamically displayed as a dynamic display mode in the slot performance. In the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a), a pseudo pattern (pseudo pattern "A") that is to be stopped and displayed this time is not set as a pattern arrangement (a pseudo pattern that is not to be shown to be stopped and displayed this time is set) The symbols are arranged in a continuous pattern. Specifically, one symbol array is composed of 11 symbols, one of which is set to the pseudo symbol "A" (see FIG. 228(b)).

By using reels with such a pattern arrangement, stop control can be performed to display the stop display mode of a miss without giving players any discomfort by simply changing the start position and dynamic display speed of the reels in each slot performance. It is considered executable.

This stop control will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 228(b). FIG. 228(b) is a timing chart explaining the symbol stop range in the dynamic display mode shown in FIG. 228(a). As shown in FIG. 228(b), in this dynamic display mode, the pseudo symbol "A" that will be stopped and displayed this time is set in array 4 as the symbol array of the dynamically displayed reels, and the other symbols are set in array 4. A pseudo pattern "-" which is different from the one to be stopped and displayed this time is set.

The dynamic display mode using this reel includes a rotation start position 1 where the dynamic display of the reels starts at array 1 of the symbol array, and a rotation start position 2 where the position where the dynamic display of the reels starts is array 9 of the symbol array. is set. Two types of speeds, ``high'' and ``very low,'' are set as the speed of the reels that are dynamically displayed. Specifically, this reel speed "high" is set at a speed such that the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 0.7 seconds, and the reel speed "ultra low" is specifically set at a speed such that the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 0.7 seconds. is set at a speed such that the time required for one dynamically displayed symbol to move is 1.2 seconds.

In other words, when a slot effect is executed in which the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (button operation valid period) is set to 6 seconds, 9 to 10 symbols will move if the reel speed is "high". When the reel speed is "very low", a performance in which five symbols move will be executed. Therefore, by simply changing the position at which dynamic display of the reels starts and the reel speed, it is possible to change the type of pseudo symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of button operation without changing the symbol arrangement. Therefore, it is possible to set various dynamic display modes without increasing the types of symbol data, and the amount of production data can be reduced.

Next, to explain a specific example with reference to FIG. 228(b), when rotation start position 1 is set, it is assumed that the reel speed is set to "high" or "ultra low". A dynamic display mode is executed in which the pseudo pattern "A" which is also a stop display target can be displayed. In this case, the reel speed is "very low" (one symbol is displayed for a longer period) than the reel speed "high" (one symbol is displayed for 0.7 seconds). If the duration of the display is 1.2 seconds), the player can more easily grasp the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time.

In addition, when rotation start position 2 is set, if the reel speed is set to "high", the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of button operation will be in the range of array 9 to array 5, so the stop display will occur. The target pseudo symbol "A" will be displayed in a dynamic display mode, and if the reel speed is set to "ultra low", the symbols dynamically displayed during the valid period of button operation will be in the range of array 9 to array 2. Therefore, the dynamic display mode becomes such that it is impossible to display the pseudo pattern "A" which is the subject of stop display.

As a result, if the judgment result of the special symbol is incorrect, a dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2 with the reel speed set to "ultra low", thereby executing a dynamic display that does not display the pseudo symbol "A". It becomes possible to do so. Further, when performing such stop control, it is preferable that the symbols set other than the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are the same symbol. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the dynamic display mode executed in this slot performance is a dynamic display mode in which a pseudo symbol that is subject to stop display is displayed other than the pseudo symbol that is subject to stop display. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the dynamic display contents of the symbols.

Furthermore, when the reel speed is "ultra low" and the dynamic display starts from rotation start position 1, the dynamic display mode ( If the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the dynamic display mode is advantageous to the player, and if the dynamic display is started from the rotation start position 2, the pseudo symbol "A" that is to be stopped and displayed cannot be displayed (the dynamic display mode is disadvantageous to the player). dynamic display mode). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the dynamic display mode is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by simply understanding the reel speed when the dynamic display of the reels starts in a slot performance. It can be prevented.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 232, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described.

FIG. 229(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 222ca, a display mode selection table 222cb, and a stop mode selection table 222cc are added. , otherwise the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, details of the display mode storage area 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode storage area 222ca. This display mode storage area 222ca is a table in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the reels of each slot performance executed in a continuous slot performance are stored, and is used in variable display setting processing 4 (see FIG. 233) to be described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes), the display mode to be selected is stored.

As shown in FIG. 230, the display mode storage area 222ca stores a plurality of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) with different rotational speeds (dynamic display speeds) and symbol arrangements as dynamic display modes in slot effects. has been done. As a result, when continuous slot effects are executed in this control example, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns as dynamic display modes to be executed in each slot effect.

This rotation speed indicates the period during which the symbol being dynamically displayed is displayed in the display area where the slot effect is displayed. In this control example, at the rotation speed "high", the number 1 symbol is displayed for 0.7 seconds. is set to be displayed. Further, when the rotation speed is "low", the symbol 1 is set to be displayed for 1 second. Furthermore, when the rotation speed is "ultra low", the symbol 1 is displayed for 1.2 seconds. By setting the reel rotation speed in three stages in this way, it is possible to set the dynamic display of each slot performance to be a dynamic display that makes it easy for the player to distinguish the pseudo symbols, and a dynamic display that is difficult for the player to distinguish. It becomes possible. Therefore, even in a dynamic display mode using the same pattern arrangement, different effects can be executed.

Furthermore, by providing three levels of reel rotation speed, it is possible to vary the number of pseudo symbols displayed in one slot performance. For example, if the period of one slot performance (the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid) is 6 seconds, 9 pseudo symbols can be displayed at the rotation speed "High", and the rotation speed " When the rotation speed is set to ``Low'', six pseudo patterns can be displayed, and when the rotation speed is set to ``Very Low'', five pseudo patterns can be displayed. This makes it possible to change the number of times the pseudo symbol is displayed in the current stop display mode depending on the rotational speed of the reels.

Specifically, display mode 1 includes a pseudo pattern whose rotation speed is "high" and whose pattern arrangement is subject to stop display (indicated by a "circle" in FIG. 230), and a pseudo pattern which is not subject to stop display. (displayed as "x" in Fig. 230) are set to be displayed alternately, and in display mode 2, the rotation speed is "low" and the same pattern arrangement as display mode 1 is set. It is something that will be done.

In display mode 3, the rotation speed is the same as in display mode 1, and the symbol arrangement is a pseudo pattern that is subject to stop display (indicated by a "circle" in FIG. 230), whereas a pseudo symbol that is not subject to stop display ( The setting is such that two symbols (indicated by "x" in FIG. 230) are displayed side by side, and the pseudo-design to be stopped and displayed (indicated by "star" in FIG. 230) is emphasized (enlarged, It is set so that it is displayed by emitting light (emitting light, etc.). In display mode 4, the rotation speed is "low" and the same symbol arrangement as in display mode 3 is set.

Display mode 5 is set such that the rotation speed is "ultra low" and the pseudo symbols targeted for stop display are displayed in array 4 as the symbol arrangement, and pseudo symbols other than those targeted for stop display are displayed in the other arrays. In display mode 6, the rotation speed is "ultra low", and as a symbol arrangement, pseudo symbols to be displayed in a stopped state are displayed in array 11, and pseudo symbols other than those to be displayed in a stopped state are displayed in the other arrays. is set so that it is displayed.

Note that display mode 5 and display mode 6 use the same symbol array data, but are display modes in which the dynamic display starts at different positions. In other words, in display mode 6, dynamic display starts from array 5 shown in display mode 5. Display mode 5 and display mode 6 are dynamic display modes in which the stop display mode explained with reference to FIG. 228 is executed.

In display mode 7, the rotation speed changes midway, and the rotation speed is "low" during the period when the pattern arrays 1 to 6 are displayed, and the rotation speed is "low" during the period when the pattern arrays 7 to 11 are displayed. "High", and as a symbol arrangement, pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display and pseudo symbols that are subject to stop display are alternately displayed in arrays 1 to 6, and pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display are displayed in arrays 7 to 11. is set to be displayed.

In this way, the rotation speed is slowed down in the range where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed (arrays 1 to 6), and the rotation speed is decreased in the range where the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed are not displayed (arrays 7 to 11). By increasing the speed, the dynamic display speed can be varied to attract players' interest, and by increasing the period during which the pseudo symbols that are subject to static display are displayed, it can increase the player's motivation. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In addition, since the rotation speed is increased in the range where the pseudo symbols that are subject to stop display are not displayed (arrays 7 to 11), it is possible to shorten the period for one rotation of the reels, and one slot production period ( The range (arrays 7 to 11) in which the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed can be dynamically displayed multiple times during the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid), and the frame button 22 can be actively displayed to the player. The button 22 can be operated.

Display mode 8 is such that the rotation speed changes as the symbol array rotates, and the rotation speed is "high" during the first rotation and becomes "low" from the second rotation onwards, which is the same as display mode 7. The display mode 9 is set to display a pseudo symbol that is to be stopped and displayed as the symbol array rotates, and during the first rotation, the rotation speed is set to "high". '', which is the same symbol arrangement as display mode 7, and is set to display a pseudo symbol "star" emphasizing the pseudo symbol "A" which is to be stopped and displayed from the second round onwards.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned nine types of display modes (display mode 1 to display mode 9) can be set as dynamic display modes executed in the slot performance, but the types of display modes are as follows. The present invention is not limited to this, and more display modes may be used. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance.

Next, the display mode selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb. This display mode selection table 222cb is a table that is referred to when selecting a dynamic display mode for each slot performance executed in a continuous slot performance, and is used in variable display setting processing 4 (see FIG. 233) to be described later. When it is determined that there is a slot effect (S2034 in FIG. 223: Yes), this is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 231(a), the display mode selection table 222cb includes a display mode selection table 222cb1 for winning and a display mode selection table 222cb2 for losing, which determines whether the special symbol is correct or not. Based on the determination result, a dynamic display mode of each slot performance to be executed in the continuous slot performance is selected.

In this way, the dynamic display mode of each slot performance executed in a continuous slot performance is selected based on the judgment result of the special symbol, so by understanding the performance content of the continuous slot performance, it is possible to hit the special symbol jackpot. The player can predict whether or not he or she has won.

FIG. 231(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win display mode selection table 222cb1. This win display mode selection table 222cb1 determines each slot performance (initial slot performance, normal slot performance, first reduced slot performance, second shortened slot performance, extended slot performance) to be executed in continuous slot performances based on the value of the performance counter 223f. The display mode of the slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is used as the first slot production, "display mode 1" is used as the normal slot production, and "display mode 1" is used as the first shortened slot production. If "Aspect 2" is set as the second shortened slot performance, "Display Mode 2" is set as the extended slot performance, and the value of the performance counter 223f is "50 to 99", the first slot performance is "Display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" is the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" is the second shortened slot effect, and "Display mode 4" is the extended slot effect. If "Mode 4" is set and the value of the production counter 223f is "100 to 149", "Display Mode 1" is set as the first slot production, "Display Mode 8" is set as the normal slot production, and "Display Mode 8" is set as the first shortened slot production. If "display mode 4" is set to "display mode 5" as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 5" is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" is the effect, "Display mode 9" is the normal slot effect, "Display mode 4" is the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 7" is the second shortened slot effect, and "Display mode 7" is the extended slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

FIG. 231(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the display mode selection table 222cb2 for missing. Each slot performance (initial slot performance, normal slot performance, first shortened slot performance, second shortened slot performance, extension The display mode of the slot effect) is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 49", "display mode 1" is used as the first slot production, "display mode 1" is used as the normal slot production, and "display mode 1" is used as the first shortened slot production. If "Aspect 1" is set as the second shortened slot performance, "Display Mode 2" is set as the extended slot performance, and the value of the performance counter 223f is "50 to 99", the first slot performance is "Display mode 1" is the normal slot effect, "Display mode 2" is the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 4" is the second shortened slot effect, and "Display mode 4" is the extended slot effect. If "Mode 4" is set and the value of the production counter 223f is "100 to 149", "Display Mode 1" will be used as the first slot production, "Display Mode 2" will be used as the normal slot production, and "Display Mode 2" will be used as the first shortened slot production. If "display mode 7" is set to "display mode 6" as the second shortened slot effect, "display mode 6" is set as the extended slot effect, and the value of the effect counter 223f is "150 to 198", the first slot "Display mode 1" is the effect, "Display mode 4" is the normal slot effect, "Display mode 8" is the first shortened slot effect, "Display mode 9" is the second shortened slot effect, and "Display mode 9" is the extended slot effect. "Display mode 7" is set.

As explained above, in this control example, the dynamic display mode is set in advance for all slot performances that may be executed in consecutive slot performances. No matter at what timing the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot performance to be executed, the next slot performance can be smoothly executed.

Next, the stop mode selection table 222cc will be explained with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop mode selection table 222cc. This stop mode selection table 222cc is a table for selecting the stop mode of each slot effect executed in continuous slot effects, and when there is a slot effect in variable display setting processing 4 (see FIG. 233) to be described later. If it is determined (S2034 in FIG. 233: Yes), it is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 232(a), this stop mode selection table 222cc includes a stop mode selection table 222cc1 for winning and a stop mode selection table 222cc2 for miss, which are tables corresponding to the result of the judgment of the special symbol. The stopping mode is selected with reference to.

FIG. 232(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning stop mode selection table 222cc1. The winning stop mode selection table 222cc1 is a table for selecting stop patterns in which the number of established symbols differs in each slot performance based on the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", stop pattern 1 is selected. This stop pattern 1 has the number of symbols established as "1" as the first slot performance, the number of symbols established as "2" as the normal slot performance, the number "0" as the number of symbols established as the first shortened slot performance, and the number of symbols established as "0" as the second shortened slot performance. The number of established symbols "2" is set as the extended slot performance.

Further, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "100 to 199", stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols established is "1" as the first slot performance, the number of symbols established is "2" as the normal slot performance, the number of symbols established is "1" as the first shortened slot performance, and the number of symbols established is "1" as the second shortened slot performance. The number of established symbols "1" is set as the extended slot performance.

In this manner, when the result of the judgment is a win, three symbols are established after each slot performance is executed in the continuous slot performance. As a result, the player is notified that he or she has won.

Furthermore, in this control example, since there are multiple stop patterns for each slot performance when the success/failure determination result is a win, the current continuous slot performance may be stopped while the successive slot performance is being executed if the success/failure determination result is a win. It is possible to prevent a player from knowing whether or not it is a continuous slot performance that has been executed.

FIG. 232(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the detachment stop mode selection table 222cc2. The stop mode selection table 222cc2 for losing is a table for selecting stop patterns with different numbers of established symbols in each slot performance based on the value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "0 to 99", stop pattern 1 is selected. In this stop pattern 1, the number of symbols established is "1" as the first slot performance, the number of symbols established as "0" as the normal slot performance, the number of symbols established as "0" as the first shortened slot performance, and the number of symbols established as "0" as the second shortened slot performance. The number of established symbols "0" is set as the extended slot performance.

Further, when the value of the performance counter 223f is "100 to 199", stop pattern 2 is selected. In this stop pattern 2, the number of symbols established is "1" as the first slot performance, the number of symbols established is "0" as the normal slot performance, the number of symbols established is "1" as the first shortened slot performance, and the number of symbols established is "1" as the second shortened slot performance. The number of established symbols "0" is set as the extended slot performance.

As explained above, in this control example, the first slot performance that is executed at the beginning of the continuous slot performance will have the same stop mode regardless of whether the judgment result is a hit or a loss, so the continuous slot performance will start. Immediately after the first slot performance is completed (at the end of the first slot performance), the player becomes aware of whether or not the current consecutive slot performance is a continuous slot performance that was executed when the winning/failure judgment result was a win. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 229, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 229(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 229, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the second control example in that a display mode storage area 223ca and a stop mode storage area 223cb are added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode storage area 223ca is an area for storing (setting) the display mode selected by the display mode selection table 222cb described above. In this display mode storage area 223ca, the display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set (S2071 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is set. Information regarding the display mode that is referenced when setting a command (S4752 in FIG. 234, S4853 in FIG. 235, S4952 in FIG. 236, S5052 in FIG. 237, S5152 in FIG. 238) and is stored when the continuous slot effect ends. is initialized.

The stop mode storage area 223cb is an area for storing (setting) the stop mode selected by the above-mentioned stop mode selection table 222cc. The display mode selected in the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is set in this stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072 in FIG. 233), and the display slot effect corresponding to each slot effect of the continuous slot effect is set. The display mode is referred to when setting a command (S4751 in FIG. 234, S4851, S4852 in FIG. 235, S4951 in FIG. 236, S5051 in FIG. 237, S5151 in FIG. 238) and is stored when the continuous slot effect is completed. Information about is initialized.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 233 to 238. This control example is different from the second control example described above in that variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 233) is executed instead of variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and other points are the same. It is. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 233, the variable display setting process 4 (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the variable display setting process 4 (S1712), the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above.

When the process of S2006 is finished, the processes of S2034 and S2035 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 170), and then the display mode is changed based on the display mode selection table 222cb. Select it and set it in the display mode storage area 223ca (S2071).

After completing the process of S2071, a stop mode is selected based on the stop mode selection table 222cc and set in the stop mode storage area 223cb (S2072). Then, similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, the process of S2036 and the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 234 to 238, various processes during the slot effect process (see FIG. 174) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example I will explain about it.

First, with reference to FIG. 234, the first time slot performance processing 2 will be described. This FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process 2 during the first slot performance. When the process 2 during the first slot performance is executed, the processes of S4701 to S4707 are executed similarly to the process during the first slot performance in the second control example described above (see FIG. 175). When the process of S4707 is finished, next, a display slot stop effect command for the set stop mode is set (S4751), and a display slot effect command corresponding to the effect set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. settings (S4752), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, even if it is determined that the current button press period is not valid (S4701: No), the process in S4710 is performed as in the process during the first slot performance in the second control example described above (see FIG. 175). The process from S4712 to S4712 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the normal slot performance processing 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal slot performance processing 2. When the normal slot performance processing 2 is executed, similar to the normal slot performance processing in the second control example described above (see FIG. 176), the processes of S4801 to S4803 are executed, and in the process of S4803, the slot performance counter is If it is determined that the value of 223p is larger than 19000 (S4803: Yes), a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the set stop mode is set (S4851), and then the slot effect state is waited for to end. state (S4807), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in S4803, if it is determined that the value of the slot performance counter 223p is not larger than 19000 (19000 or less) (S4803: No), a display slot stop performance command corresponding to the set stop mode is set. (S4852), and sets the slot performance state to the second reduced slot performance (S4809).

After completing the process of S4809, next, a display slot performance command corresponding to the display mode of the second reduced slot performance set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S4853), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the first reduced slot performance processing 2 (S4608) will be explained. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first reduced slot performance processing 2 (S4608). When the first shortened slot performance process 2 (S4608) is executed, first, S4901 to S4904 and S4906 to S4908 are performed, similar to the first shortened slot performance process (see FIG. 177) in the second control example described above. Execute the process.

After completing the process in S4904, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S4951), and then the display mode selected from the display mode storage area 223ca is set. A corresponding display slot effect command is set (S4952), and the present process ends.

Next, the second reduced slot performance processing 2 (S4610) will be explained with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second reduced slot performance processing 2 (S4610). When the second shortened slot performance processing 2 (S4610) is executed, first, similar to the second shortened slot performance processing (see FIG. 178) in the second control example described above, the processes of S5001 and S5002 are executed. , After completing the processing in S5002, a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the stop mode set in the stop mode storage area 223cb is set (S5051), and a display slot stop effect command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set. A slot effect command for display is set (S5052), the slot effect state is set to an end wait state (S5004), and this processing is ended.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the contents of extended slot performance processing 2 (S4612). When the extended slot performance processing 2 (S4612) is executed, the processing of S5101 and S5102 is executed similarly to the extended slot performance processing in the second control example described above (see FIG. 179), and then the stop mode is stored. A display slot stop production command corresponding to the stop mode set in the area 223cb is set (S5151), and a display slot production command corresponding to the display mode set in the display mode storage area 223ca is set (S5152). ), the slot performance state is set to the end wait state (S5104), and this processing is ended.

As explained above, in this fifth control example, in addition to the continuous slot performance of the second control example described above, pseudo symbols are displayed in various dynamic display modes in each slot performance executed in the continuous slot performance. Since the frame button 22 is configured to be displayed, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

Furthermore, even during a single slot performance, the dynamic display mode is changed when a predetermined condition (the number of turns of the symbol arrangement displayed on the reels or the elapse of a predetermined time) is met, so the player On the other hand, the operator can operate the operating means (frame button 22) more voluntarily.

Note that, as the plurality of dynamic display modes, it is preferable to change the number of dynamically displayed reels. Thereby, it becomes possible to enlarge and display the pseudo pattern being dynamically displayed in a limited display space. Further, the size of the pseudo pattern may be changed. This allows the player to easily grasp the location where the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is being dynamically displayed, so that the player can press the frame button 22 voluntarily.

In this case, a dynamic display mode may be used in which the pseudo symbol to be stopped and displayed is relatively easier to visually recognize than the other symbols by displaying the other symbols in a reduced size. Thereby, the predetermined pseudo pattern can be easily recognized without changing the dynamically displayed area.

Furthermore, the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed) may be increased. This allows the player to easily understand the predetermined symbols. Further, by reducing the number of predetermined pseudo symbols (pseudo symbols that are not subject to stop display), the number of predetermined pseudo symbols may be relatively increased. In this case, since it is possible to reduce the total number of dynamically displayed symbols, it is possible to make it easier to identify each dynamically displayed symbol.

Further, as a dynamic display mode, the pattern arrangement of the dynamically displayed reels may be changed to set a range in which predetermined pseudo-symbols (pseudo-symbols to be stopped and displayed) are concentrated.

In addition, in this control example, the speed at which the pseudo symbols are dynamically displayed in the slot performance is configured to be changeable. As a result, it is possible to set a dynamic display that is easy to grasp and a dynamic display that is difficult to grasp for a given pseudo pattern (pseudo pattern that is subject to stop display) even if the pattern arrangement is the same, allowing for a variety of effects. can be executed.

Further, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels may be slowed down within a range where a predetermined pseudo-symbol (pseudo-symbol to be stopped and displayed) is displayed, and may be increased otherwise. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the pseudo symbols to be stopped and displayed this time without changing the period for displaying the predetermined symbol arrangement.

Furthermore, the dynamic display speed of the dynamically displayed reels is set to the normal speed until the reels complete a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds), and after that (for example, the 3rd round), the dynamic display speed is set to the normal speed as described above. The speed may be slowed down. As a result, a player who has not operated the operating means (frame button 22) for a predetermined period (a period in which the reels rotate twice) can easily grasp the predetermined pseudo-symbol (pseudo-symbol to be stopped and displayed). The user can be prompted to operate the operating means (frame button 22).

In addition, in this control example, since the dynamic display mode and static display mode of each slot performance are determined based on the judgment result of the special symbol, the performance content of each slot performance executed in consecutive slot performances Based on this, it becomes possible to predict the validity determination result of the special symbol. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to arouse interest in the content of the continuous slot performance.

In this control example, a dynamic Since the display format is configured to be set, the next slot performance can be smoothly executed no matter at what timing the player operates the frame button 22 for each slot performance executed in a continuous slot performance. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this control example, regardless of whether the judgment result is a hit or a loss, the first slot performance that is executed at the beginning of the continuous slot performance will have the same stop mode, so immediately after the continuous slot performance starts (the first (at the time the slot performance ends), it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the current consecutive slot performance is a continuous slot performance that was executed when the win/fail determination result was a win. .

Note that this control example uses a configuration in which the dynamic display mode and static display mode of each slot performance executed in a continuous slot performance are set in advance, but when the slot performance to be performed in a continuous slot performance is determined. (When the slot performance to be executed next is determined based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during each slot performance), the dynamic display mode and the static display mode of the slot performance may be set.

Furthermore, the dynamic display mode and the static display mode in the special slot performance that is executed when the player does not operate the frame button 22 while the first slot performance is being executed are also performed at the same timing as other slot performances. You may also set it.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example in each of the embodiments described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 248. This control example provides a detailed explanation of the composite press effect of the second control example described above. The composite press effect of the second control example described above was configured to be executed based on one special symbol variation.

In contrast, this control example is configured to execute a composite press effect that is executed based on one special symbol variation and a compound press effect that is executed based on a plurality of special symbol variations. They differ in some respects. Further, a detailed explanation has been added regarding the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 for each press performance in the composite press performance executed based on one special symbol variation and the press performance to be executed.

In this sixth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the second control example, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is unified. The difference is that the parts have been changed. The other points are the same as the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 239, the back image displayed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of back image data (“mountain” stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, and FIG. 239(b) ) is a schematic diagram showing an example of back image data ("sea" stage) stored in the character ROM 234 in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example.

In this control example, the player can select the stages shown in FIGS. 239(a) and 239(b) by operating the frame button 22. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 241, a period is set during which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbols start changing. The stage displayed on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be switched when the user operates the frame button 22.

In addition, this control example is configured so that an effect corresponding to the stage being displayed is executed. Therefore, the player can change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by operating the frame button 22 during the period in which the player can change the stage (for example, 5 seconds after the special symbol changes start). As a result, it becomes possible to execute a new performance, and it becomes possible to have the player operate the frame button 22 with enthusiasm.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the composite press effect in this control example will be explained. FIG. 240 is a timing chart showing an example of a composite press effect in this control example. It should be noted that, in the composite press effect of this control example, for parts that overlap with the composite press effect of the second control example described above, the same elements are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 240, in this control example, the background (stage) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. A period has been set. In the example shown in FIG. 240, the continuous hit performance is executed for 10 seconds from the time when the variation time of special symbol variation 1 (60 s) becomes 12 seconds to the time when 2 seconds remain.

If the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (for example, an operation that causes the number of consecutive hits to be 50 or more times) during this repeated hit effect, the background (stage) that will be executed in the next special symbol variation will be displayed. The operating mode to be changed is configured to be changed. Here, the operation mode for changing the background (stage) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 241(b) and (c).

FIG. 241(b) is a schematic diagram showing an operating mode in which the background of the special symbol variation being executed can be changed as a background changing operating mode, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an operation mode that can change the background of the next special symbol variation. First, in FIG. 241(b), a back image corresponding to the currently selected background (the "sea" stage) is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and a small Stages that can be selected as the background selection screen (the "sea" stage and the "mountain" stage) are displayed in the area Ds2, and the currently selected stage is displayed larger than the unselected stages.

Then, below the main display area Dm, "Press the button to change the background" is displayed as a background change notification display to inform the player that the current period is a period in which the background can be changed, and next to it , a display imitating a "button" indicating that the operation of the frame button 22 is currently valid is displayed.

This allows the player to easily understand that it is the period in which the background can be changed, and allows the player to select an arbitrary background.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 240, there is a production (for example, a continuous hit production) in which the player operates the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (for example, 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends). may be executed. In this case, as a result of the player operating the frame button 22 enthusiastically, the player operates the frame button 22 even after the next special symbol variation has started, causing the background to change unintentionally in the next special symbol variation. There have been cases where problems have occurred.

If this problem occurs, for example, when a performance that spans multiple variations (a so-called continuous performance) is being executed, the player will no longer be able to see the performance that he or she was looking forward to. There was a fear that players would be dissatisfied.

Therefore, in this control example, in order to prevent the above-mentioned problem from occurring, a predetermined frame button operation (e.g. When it is determined that a continuous hit operation (repeated hit operation) has been executed, the background change operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode.

Here, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the above-mentioned specific background change operation mode will be explained. As shown in FIG. 241(c), this specific background change operation mode is different from the background change operation mode shown in FIG. 241(b), in that even if the frame button 22 is operated, the special symbol variation currently being executed The background is configured so that it does not change until the end. On the lower side of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, there is a display "Press the button to select the background of the next change" to inform the player that the current operation mode is a specific background change operation mode. The selected content indicating the background to be displayed in the next variation is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds.

In this way, by changing the mode of performance using the frame button 22 that is executed in the next special symbol variation based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol variation, a situation that causes dissatisfaction to the player can be avoided. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of.

In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on the frame button 22 during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends, the frame button 22 to be executed in the next special symbol variation Although a configuration is used in which the operation mode of the effect of operating the button (hereinafter referred to as frame button operation effect) is changed, other configurations may be used.

For example, if the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during one special symbol variation exceeds a predetermined number of times, the mode of frame button operation performance in the next special symbol variation may be changed, or this time The end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in the special symbol variation and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol variation are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the mode of the subsequent frame button operation performance may be changed based on the fact that the operation content of the previously executed frame button operation performance is determined to be the predetermined operation content.

Furthermore, in this control example, when it is determined that the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation performance is a predetermined operation, the mode of the next frame button operation performance is changed. The configuration is such that the next frame button operation effect can be changed only when the above-mentioned problem is actually likely to occur. Based on the fact that the end timing of the frame button operation effect and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol change are set within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds), the next It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the special symbol variation. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be reliably prevented from occurring.

In addition, a means is provided to determine whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where no frame button operation effect is set, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. The present invention may be configured such that when the determining means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed. As a result, for example, if the player is informed that the validity judgment result of the current special symbol change is wrong even though the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player may feel frustrated and press the frame button 2. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol variation from starting while the button is being operated (pressed down) multiple times and an unintended background change being executed.

As described above, in this control example, multiple frame button operation effects are executed across multiple special symbol variations (the continuous hit effect of special symbol variation 1 and the background change effect of special symbol variation 2 in FIG. 240). On the other hand, the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed later can be changed based on the operation content during the frame button operation effect to be executed previously.

In addition, similar to the second control example described above, even for multiple frame button operation effects (compound press effect) executed during one special symbol change, the previous frame button operation effect may be It is configured to be able to change the mode of frame button operation performance to be executed later based on the operation contents.

Returning to FIG. 240, the composite press effect will be explained. When special symbol variation 2 (90s) is executed, a composite press effect in which a plurality of frame button operation effects are executed in succession is executed. This composite press effect is similar to the composite press effect executed in the second control example described above (see FIGS. 157 to 159). Here, the operation contents of the frame button 22 in each frame button operation performance executed in the composite press performance and the performance mode of the frame button operation performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 242.

FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation content of the frame button 22 and the performance mode to be executed in the composite press performance. As shown in FIG. 242, when the composite press effect is executed, press effect 1 is executed first. This press effect 1 is a frame button operation effect that prompts the player to press the frame button 22 repeatedly (the effect period is 12 seconds, and the valid operation period is 5 seconds after the start of the effect), similar to the second control example described above. (7 seconds) (see FIG. 157(b)).

During this press effect 1, the operation content of the frame button 22 for the press effect 1 is determined at a predetermined timing (timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation valid period). Based on the operation details of the frame button 22, the determination includes "weak repeated hits", which is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed repeatedly (operation 3), and the number of consecutive hits is small (50 times or less); The auto-repeat function is executed by "strong repeated hits", which is determined when the number of times is large (51 times or more), and by an operation (operation 4) in which the frame button 22 is pressed for 2 seconds or more in press effect 1. "Long press" is determined as "Long press", "No operation" is determined when the frame button 22 is not operated even once during press effect 1, and unnecessary frame button operation is performed for press effect 1. There are five types of "Other operations" that are determined to be performed.

Then, based on the determination result determined at the operation determination timing of the press performance 1, the mode of the press performance 2, which is the frame button operation performance to be executed next, is set. Specifically, if the press effect 1 is determined to be a "weak continuous hit", the press effect 2 is set to a "timing press effect" (see FIG. 158(a)), and if it is determined to be a "strong continuous press" In this case, a "repeat effect" (see FIG. 243(a)) is set for the press effect 2, and if it is determined to be a "long press", a "timing release effect" (see FIG. 158(b)) is set, If it is determined that there is no operation, "timing press effect" is set for press effect 2 in the same way as when it is determined that it is a "weak continuous hit" mentioned above, and if it is determined that it is an "other operation", press The ``timing push performance (difficult)'' (see FIG. 243(b)), which increases the success difficulty of the above-mentioned ``timing push performance'', is set as the performance 2.

In this way, by setting the mode of the next press effect 2 to be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22 for the press effect 1, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the press effect 1 The player who pressed down the button 22 (the player who is good at repeated pressing operations) can be motivated to participate in the frame button operation performance by continuously performing the performance of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22.

In addition, for players who are executing the auto-repeat function in press effect 1 (players who are continuously pressing the frame button 22), the effect is to release the button instead of the effect to press the button. By executing this, it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to the current button operation state (depressed state), and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the content of the performance.

Further, for a player who performs an unnecessary frame button operation for the press performance 1, a performance that makes it difficult to succeed in the frame button operation performance for the press performance 2 can be executed as a penalty.

Then, when the press effect 2 ends, a continuous press effect (the effect period is 7 seconds and the valid operation period is 5 seconds from the start of the effect) is executed in the same way as the composite press effect of the second control example described above (Fig. 159(b) ), the composite press effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243(a), a description will be given of the continuous hit effect of the press effect 2 that is executed when the press effect 1 of FIG. 242 is determined to be a "strong continuous hit." FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a performance executed in press performance 2 in the composite press performance. Note that the same elements as in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(a), when the continuous hit effect is started with press effect 2, "high probability storage state" is displayed in the comment field, and it is suggested that the display mode of the meter display section D1 will change. ``The meter may break through!?'' is displayed. Further, "repeated hits" indicating that the currently executed frame button operation performance is a repeated hit performance is displayed between the meter display section D1 and the small area Dm5.

In the continuous hit performance executed in this press performance 2, the meter area of the meter display portion D1 is changed based on the game result of the composite press performance and the lottery result of the special symbol, similar to the press performance 2 of the second control example described above. It is set to be extended (see FIG. 159(a)), and specifically, when the number of times the frame button is pressed exceeds 20 times during the period (3 seconds) during which press effect 2 is being executed. The display on the meter display section D1 changes based on the result of determination of the validity of the special symbol that satisfies the operating conditions and executes the composite press effect. For example, if the current special symbol has won a jackpot as a result of the judgment, and the stored winning information also indicates that the special symbol has won a jackpot, a meter will be displayed as shown in FIG. 159(a). The meter in section D1 is extended.

In this way, for a player who has performed a sufficient number of consecutive tap operations in the press presentation 1, the player is allowed to continue performing the repeated tap operations in the press presentation 2, and furthermore, the player who has executed a sufficient number of consecutive tap operations in the press presentation 2 is allowed to continue performing the repeated tap operations based on the continuous tap operations. Since the presentation mode is different between the press presentation 1 and the press presentation 2, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 of his/her preference.

In this control example, the presentation mode is configured to be changed based on the number of times the frame button 22 is repeatedly pressed. It may be configured such that the decision is made by lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the operating conditions for the current press effect, so that the player can actively perform the frame button operations until the end.

The timing push effect (difficult) of press effect 2 that is executed when “other operation” is determined in press effect 1 in FIG. 242 will be described. FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a presentation executed in press presentation 2 in the composite press presentation. Note that the same elements as in the composite press effect of the second control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 243(b), the timing push effect (difficult) is the display of target Db3 displayed in the timing gauge in contrast to the timing push effect of the second control example (see FIG. 158(a)). The difference is that the position is different and that the moving body D3a is not displayed within the timing gauge.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the difficulty of success (the difficulty of pressing the frame button 22 at the center timing of the target Db3) compared to the normal timing press effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for players who do not intentionally participate in the combined press effect to succeed in the timing press effect (difficult to satisfy the operation conditions), and to make it difficult for players who do not intentionally participate in the combined press effect to succeed (difficult to satisfy the operating conditions). It is possible to make it difficult to perform a performance that suggests a lottery result of a symbol.

Note that methods for increasing the success difficulty level are not limited to the configuration described above; for example, while the timing press effect is being executed, the target Db3 may be moved at high speed within the timing gauge to make the press timing difficult to understand. , the display of the target Db3 may be temporarily erased, or the width of the timing gauge may be expanded or contracted to change the moving speed of the moving body D3a.

In addition, as a condition for setting the timing press effect (difficult), in addition to the case where the result of the operation judgment in press effect 1 is determined to be "other operation", the result of the operation judgment and press effect 2 are started. If the operation status at the time is different, for example, in press effect 1, even though "long press" is set as the operation determination result, the frame button 22 is not pressed at the time press effect 2 is executed. Even if it is determined that there is no timing push effect (difficult), it may be set.

Furthermore, in this control example, the timing press effect (difficult) is executed for a player who is determined not to have intentionally participated in the complex press effect; For example, when the operation content for the frame button 22 during the press effect 1 is a specific operation content (for example, the last digit of the number of consecutive hits is 7), the timing press effect (difficult) was successfully executed. In some cases (when operating conditions are met), players may be notified of the lottery results of special symbols, certain effects (images or videos) may be displayed, or information that may be stored by the player may be provided. It may also be configured to provide benefits that are advantageous to the user.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this sixth control example will be described. Here, the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example will be explained.

FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 244, the RAM 223 in this control example has a background information storage area 223da, an operation change flag 223db, a confirmation flag 223dc, and a press number counter 223dd added to the RAM 223 in each of the control examples described above. They are different in some respects and are the same in other respects. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background information storage area 223da is an area for storing background information (eg, "sea" stage, "mountain" stage) that is set by the player operating the frame button 22. This background information storage area 223da is stored when the frame button 22 is operated during the first frame button operation valid period, which is the operation period in which the background can be changed, in the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 2 (see FIG. 247). , background information based on the operation details is stored, and when the confirmation flag 223dc is set to on in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), the display information is set based on the stored background information. A background command is set (S2082 in FIG. 245).

The operation change flag 223bd is a flag that determines whether the frame button 22 has been operated 5 seconds before the end of the special symbol variation, and when it is on, it indicates that the frame button 22 has been operated, and when it is off, indicates that the frame button 22 is not operated. This operation change flag 223bd is set when it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 247) that the frame button has been input within 5 seconds (valid period before end) until the special symbol variation ends ( S6810 in FIG. 247: Yes) is set to ON (S6811 in FIG. 247).

Then, in the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (see FIG. 247), it is determined that the first frame button operation is valid (S6802 in FIG. 247: Yes), and the confirmation flag 223dc is set to OFF. If it is determined (S6803 in FIG. 247: Yes), it is set to off (S6805 in FIG. 247).

The confirmation flag 223dc is a flag for determining whether or not the effect of changing the background of the next change as a background change effect (see FIG. 241(c)) is being executed, and if it is on, the background of the next change will be changed. If it is off, it indicates that the effect that changes the background of the next change is not being executed. This confirmation flag 223dc is set to ON when it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804 in FIG. 247) in frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (see FIG. 247). In the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245), it is referenced when setting the display background command (S2081 in FIG. 245), and is set to off after setting the display background command (S2083).

The press number counter 223dd is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the press performance 1 of the composite press performance. This press number counter 223dd is incremented by 1 (S4551 in FIG. 246) when it is determined in the automatic press effect setting process 2 that the press effect 1 is in progress (normally being pressed). It is referred to when determining whether the number of times the press has been pressed during production 1 has reached a predetermined number (50 times) (S4552 in FIG. 246 S4552: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4554 in FIG. 246). Although not shown, the value of the counter is also initialized to 0 at the timing when the press effect 1 of the composite press effect ends.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 247. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that a variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 245) is executed instead of a variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170), and an automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) is executed. The difference is that the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 246) is executed instead of (see FIG. 246), and the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 247) is explained in detail; other points are the same. . Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable display setting process 5 (S1712) will be explained with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 5 (S1712). When this variable display setting process 5 (S1712) is executed, the processes of S2001 to S2006 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and then various A variable display setting process is executed (S2040).

In the process of S2040, various effects are set to be executed based on the obtained variation pattern. Specifically, the processes of S2031 to S2033 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above.

When the process of S2040 is finished, it is next determined whether the confirmation flag 223dc is set to on (S2081), and if it is determined that it is set to on (that is, during the previous special symbol variation, If the effect of changing the background is executed in the next special symbol change (S2081: Yes), a background command for display is set based on the information indicating the background stored in the background information storage area 223da ( S2082).

Then, the checking flag 223dc is set to OFF (S2083), and then the processes of S2007 to S2011 are executed in the same way as the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) executed in the second control example described above, and the main Finish the process.

With this configuration, based on the information in which the background of the next special symbol variation is set (information set in the background information storage area 223da), the third special symbol variation is started at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started. The background ("sea" stage, "mountain" stage) displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be changed.

Next, automatic press effect setting processing 2 (S4410) will be explained with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the contents of the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410). This automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is performed when the press is normally pressed (S4510: Yes in FIG. 246), in contrast to the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. The processing contents are different.

When the automatic press effect setting process 2 (S4410) is executed, first, the processes of S4501 to S4510 are executed similarly to the automatic press effect setting process (see FIG. 173) executed in the second control example described above. Then, if it is determined in the process of S4510 that it is the normal press period (S4510 in FIG. 246: Yes), a display press command based on the timing type is set (S4511), and the value of the press number counter 223dd is incremented by 1. (S4512).

Next, it is determined whether the counter value added in the process of S4512 exceeds 50 (S4552), and if the value of the number of presses counter 223dd is not larger than 50 (50 or less) (S4552 in FIG. 246: No ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4522, if the value of the number of presses counter 223dd exceeds 50 (S4552 in FIG. 246: Yes), then the press effect scenario is changed to 2 for non-auto presses (4553), and the number of presses is The counter value is initialized to 0 (S4554) and the process ends.

Next, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 2 (see FIG. 247). When this frame button input monitoring/production processing 2 (S1707) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a signal input based on the operation of the frame button 22 (S6801), and it is determined that there is no input. If so (S6801: No), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a signal input based on the frame button 22 being operated (S6801: Yes), then the current time is the first frame button operation valid period during which the background can be selected. (S6802). In the process of S6802, if it is determined that the first frame button operation valid period has expired (S6802: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmation flag 223dc is set to on (S6803), and if it is set to on. If it is determined that there is not (set to OFF) (S6803: No), then it is determined whether the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804).

In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag 223db is set to ON (S6804: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set to OFF (S6805), and the checking flag 233dc is set to ON. (S6806), the process moves to S6807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6803 that the checking flag 233dc is set to ON (S6803: Yes), the processing of S6804 to S6806 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S6807.

In the process of S6807, it is determined whether a confirmation operation has been performed. This confirmation operation refers to the operation of the frame button 22 while the effect for setting the background of the next change is being executed, and in the process of S6807, it is determined that there is a confirmation operation (the frame button 22 has been operated). If it is determined (S6807), information based on the currently set background is set in the background information storage area 223da (S6808), and this process ends.

Here, the process of S6808 will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 241(c). When the frame button 22 is pressed once while the effect for setting the background of the next change is being executed, the display is switched by one to the sub-area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. The background display ("sea" or "mountain") that is enlarged and displayed in this small area Ds2 becomes the background to which the next change is started. In other words, in the process of S6808, if the confirmation operation is executed once for the background information currently set (in the current variation) (the "mountain" stage in FIG. 241(c)), the transition will be made in the next variation. If the background information corresponding to the "sea" stage is set in the background information storage area 223da and the confirmation operation is executed twice, the background information corresponding to the "mountain" stage will be set as the background to which the transition will occur next time. It is set in the information storage area 223da.

Returning to FIG. 247, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6804, if it is determined that the operation change flag is not set to on (set to off) (S6804: No), the display image corresponding to the background next to the currently set background is A background command is set (S6809), and this processing ends.

This process in S6809 is performed during the valid period of the first frame button operation, and when both the operation change flag 223db and the confirmation flag 223dc are set to OFF, that is, the normal background change effect (FIG. 241(b) This process is executed when the process (see ) is executed, and the background is changed based on the operation input of the frame button 22.

In the process of S6802, if it is determined that the current time is not the first frame button operation valid period (S6802: No), then it is determined whether the current time is the pre-end period (S6810). This pre-end period is a period that indicates that the remaining period until the special symbol fluctuation ends is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), and if it is determined that it is not the pre-end period (S6810: No ), this process ends, and if it is determined that it is the pre-end period (S6810: Yes), the operation change flag 223db is set on (S6811), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this sixth control example, a predetermined frame button operation (e.g., repeated press operation) is performed during a predetermined period until the special symbol variation ends (e.g., 5 seconds until the special symbol variation ends). ) is determined to have been executed, the background change operation mode to be executed in the next special symbol variation is changed to a specific background change operation mode, which causes dissatisfaction to the player. can be suppressed from occurring.

Furthermore, by changing the mode of performance using the frame button 22 that is executed in the next special symbol variation based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the special symbol variation, a situation that causes dissatisfaction to the player occurs. This makes it possible to suppress the

In addition, the end timing of the frame button operation effect executed in this special symbol variation and the start timing of the frame button operation effect executed in response to the next special symbol variation are within a predetermined interval (for example, 10 seconds). It may be configured to change the mode of the frame button operation effect to be executed in response to the next special symbol variation based on the setting. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be reliably prevented from occurring.

In addition, a means is provided to determine whether the frame button 22 is operated in a state where no frame button operation effect is set, and within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) until the next frame button operation effect is executed. The present invention may be configured such that when the determining means determines that a predetermined operation is being performed on the frame button 22, the mode of the next frame button operation effect is changed. As a result, for example, if the player is informed that the validity judgment result of the current special symbol change is wrong even though the frame button operation effect has not been executed, the player may feel frustrated and press the frame button 2. It is possible to prevent the next special symbol variation from starting while the button is being operated (pressed down) multiple times and an unintended background change being executed.

In this control example, when it is determined that the press effect 1 of the composite press effect is a "long press", the timing release effect is executed in the press effect 2. For example, when the player The configuration may be such that the user can execute all of the composite press effects while continuing to press the frame button 22. The effect executed in press effect 2 in this case will be explained with reference to FIG. 248.

FIG. 248 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of press performance 2, which is executed when a “long press” is determined at the operation determination timing of press performance 1, as a composite press performance. As shown in FIG. 248, when the player presses and holds the frame button 22 and reaches the operation determination point while executing the automatic repeated hit function in press effect 1, the comment field will be displayed with the message "Auto timing is set by pressing and holding the button for a long time. Next to it, a schematic diagram simulating a timing gauge and an expectation level indicating the rate at which the timing will be set are displayed.

In this case, during press effect 1, while the automatic continuous press function is executed and the meter in the meter display section D1 increases, the operation timing of the timing press effect is displayed in the timing gauge displayed in the comment field. The performance drawn by lottery is executed.

Then, the automatic timing is set during the period until the start of the press effect 2, and in the timing press effect executed in the press effect 2 (see FIG. 158(a)), the frame button 22 is operated at the set auto timing. The same effect as if it had been performed is executed. With this configuration, the player can execute the continuous hit effect and the timing press effect simply by continuously pressing the frame button 22 (continuing to press and hold it for a long time).

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the expectation level at which the auto timing is set may be set randomly or may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the expectation level may or may not be notified to the player. Furthermore, the timing set by auto timing may be notified to the player in advance (before the press effect 2 is executed), or the set timing may not be notified to the player in advance. Good too.

For example, two timings are provided to determine the operation content of press effect 1, and if it is determined as a "long press" at the previous judgment timing, the effect shown in FIG. 248 is executed, and the effect shown in FIG. It may also be configured to notify the player of the auto timing setting results. With this configuration, if the settings of the auto timing are incorrect, by changing the operation details (for example, a continuous hit operation), it is possible to perform a normal timing press effect as the press effect 2.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 to 260. In this seventh control example, in contrast to the second control example described above, when the press effect for pressing the frame button 22 is set to be executed at short intervals (10 seconds in this control example), the interval ( In this control example, the additional effect is executed for 10 seconds). Specifically, when the next press effect (second press effect) is started after the press effect (first press effect) ends and after a short interval (for example, 10 seconds), The configuration is such that an additional performance of pressing the frame button 22 is executed between the first press performance and the second press performance. As a result, the press effect or additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 will be continuously executed from the start of the first press effect until the end of the second press effect.

Here, even though the player has released his/her hand from the frame button 22 due to the completion of the first press effect, a second press effect is executed after a short interval (for example, 5 seconds). , the player has to move his/her hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player, and there is a possibility that the player may not be able to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, in this seventh control example, the press effect or additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed from the start of the first press effect until the end of the second press effect. Therefore, it is only necessary to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the second press effect is completed, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

First, with reference to FIG. 249, the flow of setting additional effects in this seventh control example will be explained. FIG. 249 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects. In the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the operation performance is performed multiple times in the third symbol variation performance (variation performance using the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to one special symbol variation. (Production that allows the player to operate the frame button 22) is configured to be settable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, for special symbol variation 1 (special symbol variation with a variation time of 90 seconds), the third symbol variation effect is changed to the first variation pattern (0 after the start of the special symbol variation). ~30 seconds), a second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the special symbol fluctuation starts), and a third fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the special symbol fluctuation starts). The third symbol variation effect is set separately (variation pattern corresponding to a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start).

Here, in recent years, in order to prevent players from getting bored with the game early, it has been required to increase the types of performance patterns of the third symbol variation performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81. was. Therefore, as in the present control example, the applicant divides the period in which the third symbol variation effect is executed into multiple periods, and creates a series of effect patterns by combining the variation patterns set for each period. I thought of a process to do this.

With this configuration, the same type of effect pattern can be created with a smaller amount of data than when a series of effect patterns are individually stored. Therefore, it is possible to create more performance patterns using the same amount of data when storing each series of performance patterns, reduce the amount of data used for the third symbol variation performance, and create other performances (for example, by This makes it possible to increase the amount of data used for moving effects, bonus effects displayed during jackpots, etc., and allows players to set various effects within a limited amount of data. This had the effect of preventing players from getting bored with the game early.

However, when creating a series of effect patterns by combining a plurality of variation patterns, for example, if an operation effect is set in which the effect is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 in each of the consecutive variation patterns. was there. Further, among the continuous variation patterns, the operation effect is executed in the latter half of the variation pattern that is executed first. In the case where an operation effect is executed in the first half of the next variation pattern, a production pattern is created in which a plurality of variation patterns are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds).

Furthermore, by setting the period of the operation performance executed in at least one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns to be long, the period in which the player is motivated to play the game is continued, and the player is motivated to play the game. It may be possible to prevent the player from becoming bored early, but if such a configuration is used, a performance pattern in which multiple operation performances are executed at short intervals (for example, 3 seconds) is likely to be created. Met.

As described above, this control example solves the problem that occurs when executing a process that allows creating a plurality of effect patterns with a small amount of data.

In the first variation pattern, there is an operation effect with a valid operation period of 10 seconds that effectively discriminates the operation of the frame button 22 ("Variation B"), and in the second variation pattern, there is an operation effect with a valid operation period of 25 seconds ("SP2"). However, in the third variation pattern, an operation performance ("SSP2") with an operation validity period of 10 seconds can be set.

Specifically, "Variation B" that can be set as the first variation pattern has an operation validity period (10 seconds) 17 seconds after the first variation pattern starts (after the special symbol variation starts). It is set and ends 3 seconds after the operation validity period has passed. In the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol changes at high speed for the first 17 seconds, and after reaching a reach state in which the left and right third symbols stop at the same number, an operation effect indicating the expectation of a jackpot ( A valid operation period of 10 seconds) is executed, and a performance for notifying the player of the result of the operation performance is performed in the remaining 3 seconds.

"SP2", which can be set as the second variation pattern, is the next operation performance ( A display explaining the contents of the effective operation period (23 seconds) is executed, then the effective operation period (23 seconds) is set, and the operation ends 4 seconds after the operation effective period has elapsed. In this "SP2", the operation valid period is set as long as 23 seconds, but by operating the frame button 22 during this period, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (color change, (changes in comments, etc.), the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is variable (change in color, change in brightness, change in the presence or absence of lighting), and the drive provided in the pachinko machine 10 The driving mode of the device (see FIG. 7) is configured to be variable (change in the presence or absence of driving, change in driving speed, change in driving range). Therefore, the player changes various modes (display mode, light emission mode, drive mode) while operating the frame button 22 for a long period of time (23 seconds in this control example).

"SSP2", which can be set as the third variation pattern, is a 4-second period after the second variation pattern ends (60 seconds have passed since the start of the special symbol variation). A display explaining the content of the effect (operation valid period 10 seconds) is executed, then the operation valid period (10 seconds) is set, and 16 seconds after the operation valid period has passed, that is, after the special symbol fluctuation starts. It ends after 90 seconds. In this "SSP2", an effect is executed in which the user repeatedly presses the frame button 22 during the valid operation period. In addition, the effect for notifying the player of the result of determining the validity of the special symbol (lottery result) will be displayed during the period when the operation validity period is not set (from 15 seconds after the start of the third variation pattern until the end). period).

If "Variation B" is set in the first fluctuation pattern and "SP2" is set in the second fluctuation pattern, the operation valid period set in "Variation B" and "SP2" are set. The interval between the valid operation period and the operation valid period is 6 seconds. This 6 second interval is the interval at which additional effects can be executed. In addition, when "SP2" is set in the second fluctuation pattern and "SSP2" is set in the third fluctuation pattern, the operation validity period set in "SP2" and "SSP2" are set. The interval between the valid operation period and the valid operation period is 8 seconds. This 8 second interval is the interval at which additional effects can be executed.

Then, the remaining period until the operation validity period (25 seconds) starts when the operation timing of the frame button 22 in "variation B" is set to "SP2" is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of the operation timing, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (10 seconds) set in "variation B" is within 4 seconds, an additional effect is executed. It turns out. In addition, the operation timing for the frame button 22 in "SP2" is set to "SSP2" and the remaining period until the start of the operation valid period (10 seconds) is a predetermined period (within 10 seconds in this control example). In the case of timing, that is, if the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the operation valid period (25 seconds) set in "SP2" is within 2 seconds, an additional effect will be executed. Become.

In this way, when a plurality of operation effects for which operation validity periods are set are executed, additional effects are added based on the operation content of the previously executed operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 was operated). By using a configuration that determines whether to execute or not, a problem arises when multiple operation performances for which the operation validity period is set (i.e., the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of not operating it are repeated in a short period of time) As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as an increase in the operational burden on the player and the inability to concentrate on the game.

As described above, in this control example, when a plurality of operation effects for which operation validity periods are set are executed, the operation content of the previously executed operation effect (whether or not the frame button 22 was operated ), it is determined whether to perform an additional performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the additional effect may be executed at a predetermined interval (5 seconds) without determining the operation content.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an additional effect will be explained. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the operation effect when "SP2" is set as the second variation pattern, and FIG. 250(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a normal display in which "additional performance" is not executed during a period in which the set "additional performance" can be executed, and FIG. 250(c) is a case where "SSP2" is set. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the operation effect in.

As shown in FIG. 250(a), during "SP2", there is a validity period notification section S1 (a diagram imitating a frame button) that notifies the third symbol display device 81 that the operation validity period of the frame button 22 is over; A period display section M1 indicating the operation validity period in "SP2" is displayed, and the remaining period of the operation validity period (a in the figure) is displayed by the period display section M1. Then, in the comment column, the words "Press the button" are displayed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22.

When the player operates the frame button 22 during "SP2", the word "chance" is displayed in the comment field as a result of the operation, as shown in FIG. 250(b). Note that the timing shown in FIG. 250(b) is the timing when the operation valid period is not set (that is, the operation invalid period is set), so the valid period notification section S1 and the period display section M1 are not displayed. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250(c), "SSP2" is started, and the validity period notification section S1 (a diagram imitating a frame button ) and a period display section M2 indicating the operation validity period in "SSP2" are displayed, and the period display section M2 displays the remaining period of the operation validity period (a in the figure). Furthermore, the words "Continuous Hit" indicating the operation content during "SSP2" and the words "Turn the meter to MAX" indicating the performance content are displayed.

As shown above in FIGS. 250(a) to 250(c), when multiple operation effects are executed, the valid operation period of the frame button 22 during the period in between (the period in which FIG. 250(b) is displayed) Since there is no display on the validity period notification section S1 that informs that the operation is valid, no display on the period display section M2 that indicates the operation validity period, or a display that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, the player can The operation of the frame button 22 will be stopped. Then, when the operation effect is executed again, the display shown in FIG. 250(c) is displayed. If such a display (effect) is executed within a short period of time, the player's operations on the frame buttons 22 will become complicated, and there is a risk that the player's desire to play may decrease. On the other hand, in this control example, when multiple operation effects are executed, the above-mentioned problem does not occur by executing additional effects during the period between them (the period in which FIG. 250(b) is displayed). This prevents things from happening. Next, the display (effect) contents of the additional effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 251.

FIG. 251(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example displayed as an additional effect in this control example, and FIG. 251(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example displayed as an additional effect in this control example. , FIG. 251(c) is a schematic diagram showing a further different example displayed as an additional effect in this control example.

In the example shown in FIG. 251(a), with respect to the display content shown in FIG. 250(b), there is an additional effective period notification section Sa that notifies the effective period of operation set by the additional effect, and an additional effective period that indicates the effective period of the additional operation. The difference is that a period display section Ma is displayed, and the remaining period of the valid operation period (b in the figure) is displayed on the additional period display section Ma. By executing the additional effects in this way, the operation validity period of "SP2" is set (see FIG. 250(a)), and then the operation validity period of "SSP2" is set (see FIG. 250(c)). ), it is possible to notify the player that the operation period is valid continuously for the period up to ), making the operation of the frame button 22 by the player complicated and reducing the player's desire to play. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 251(a), the display mode (display format and display position) of the additional valid period notification section Sa that notifies the operation valid period is the same as the display mode of the valid period notification section S1 or S2. , the user does not feel uncomfortable with the fact that additional effects are being performed. Furthermore, as an additional effect, when the player operates the frame button 22, an additional comment is displayed in response to the comment displayed by the operation effect of "SP2". The displayed performance (operation performance) does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 251(a), only the additional period display section Ma is displayed, but other configurations may be used. Next, another example showing the operation validity period will be described with reference to FIG. 251(b) and FIG. 251(c).

FIG. 251(b) shows the display content when an additional effect is set so that the display content of "SP2" shown in FIG. 250(a) is continuously (extended) displayed. As shown in FIG. 251(b), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display section M1 indicating the operational validity period of "SP2" is displayed with no remaining period, and next to it ( An additional period display section Ma is displayed on the left side in FIG. 251(b). As a result, the remaining period a decreases in "SP2" (moves to the left side of the period display section M1), and when there is no remaining period (when the operation valid period has ended), in other words, the additional performance is When the additional period display section Ma is started, it is possible to display the additional period display part Ma, and it is possible to make the player recognize that the operation performance executed by the additional performance is an extension of the operation performance of "SP2". .

In addition, since the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed in which the word "chance" displayed during the operation effect of "SP2" is rewritten (updated), more additions are made. It is possible to make the user recognize that the operation performance executed by the performance is an extension of the operation performance of "SP2".

FIG. 251(c) shows the display content when an additional effect is set so that the display content of "SSP2" shown in FIG. 250(c) is displayed earlier. As shown in FIG. 251(c), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period display section M2 indicating the operational validity period of "SSP2" is displayed, and next to it (from the viewpoint of FIG. 251(b) An additional period display section Ma is displayed on the right side). As a result, the remaining period b in the additional performance decreases (moves to the left side of the period display area Ma), and when the remaining period is gone (when the operation valid period has ended), in other words, "SSP2" When the valid operation period starts, the remaining period in the period display section M2 can be displayed so as to decrease, and the operation effect executed by the additional effect for the player is the operation of "SSP2". It becomes possible to recognize that the performance is being executed in advance.

In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also an effect in which the display form of the meter that is increased by the operation effect of "SSP2" is changed (for example, the color of the meter changes, the effect around the meter is changed, etc.) By changing the effect, the effect that suggests that the meter reaches MAX in the operation effect of "SSP2" is executed, so the additional effect and the operation effect of "SSP2" are more related. can be recognized as such.

<About the electrical configuration of the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 254. In the pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example, compared to the second control example described above, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 are changed, and the contents in the RAM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. The difference is that the contents of , and the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 are changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 252, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 252 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a in this control example.

FIG. 252(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 252(a), the variation pattern selection table 222a defines various variation pattern selection tables for selecting detailed variation patterns according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the main controller 110. has been done. Specifically, the first variation is for selecting the production mode (first variation pattern) for a period of 30 seconds after the start of the variation (that is, the period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of the variation). A pattern selection table 222a1, a second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the production mode (second variation pattern) for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of variation, and a second variation pattern selection table 222a2 for the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of variation. A third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting a production mode (third variation pattern) for a period until the end of the period and an additional production selection table 222a4 for determining a production mode of an additional production are provided.

In this control example, the first to third variation patterns and additional effects are selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a according to the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the main controller 110, and a variation pattern that is a combination of them is selected. Based on this, one variation performance is executed. For example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and one fluctuation pattern is selected based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Execute the performance. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected in the main controller 110, the first fluctuation pattern is selected from the first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1, and the second fluctuation pattern is selected from the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2. Select a pattern, select a third variation pattern from the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, select an additional production from the additional production selection table 222a4, and perform one based on the selected first to third variation patterns and the additional production. Executes a variable performance.

Although not shown in the figure, if a fluctuation time other than the above-mentioned fluctuation time (30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds) is selected in the main controller 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time is selected. will be selected. For example, in the main controller 110, when a short error (variation time of 7 seconds) is selected, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in which variation patterns of 7 seconds are defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 252(b), the first variation pattern selection table 222a1 for selecting the first variation pattern (effect mode for a period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first variation pattern selection table 222a1.

As shown in FIG. 252(b), in the first variation pattern selection table 222a1, the first variation pattern (effect mode for a period from 0 seconds to 30 seconds from the start of variation) corresponds to the value of the first effect counter 223f1. It is stipulated as follows.

Specifically, a variation A, which is a performance mode in which the press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed, is defined for the value “0 to 99” of the first performance counter 223f1. Although not shown in the drawings, a plurality of types of effects are defined for the variation A, and the variation A is executed in one of these effects. This makes it possible to increase variations in the performance mode of variation A, thereby increasing player's interest.

Variation B, which is a performance mode in which a press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined for the value “100 to 198” of the first performance counter 223f1. Although not shown in the drawings, a plurality of types of effects are defined for variation B, similar to variation A, and variation B is executed in one of these effects. This makes it possible to increase variations in the performance mode of variation B, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(c), the second fluctuation pattern selection table 222a2 for selecting the second fluctuation pattern (effect mode for the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds from the start of fluctuation) will be described. FIG. 252(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second variation pattern selection table 222a2.

As shown in FIG. 252(c), in the second variation pattern selection table 222a2, the production mode from 31 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of variation is defined in correspondence with the value of the second production counter 223f2. There is.

Specifically, a variation SP1 is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the second performance counter 223f2, which is a performance mode in which the press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed. Incidentally, in the variation SP1 as well as the variation A, a plurality of types of presentation modes are defined, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. As a result, it is possible to increase the variations in the performance mode of the variable SP1, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A variation SP2 is defined for the value "100 to 198" of the second performance counter 223f2, which is a performance mode in which a press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is executed. Incidentally, in the variation SP2 as well as the variation B, a plurality of types of presentation modes are defined, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. Thereby, it is possible to increase variations in the performance mode of variable SP2, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252(d), the third variation pattern selection table 222a3 for selecting the third variation pattern (effect mode for the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds from the start of variation) will be described. FIG. 252(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third variation pattern selection table 222a3.

As shown in FIG. 252(d), in the third variation pattern selection table 222a3, the production mode from 61 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of variation is defined in accordance with the value of the third production counter 223f3. There is.

Specifically, a variation SSP1 is defined for the value "0 to 99" of the third performance counter 223f3, which is a performance mode in which the press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is not executed. Incidentally, in the variation SSP1, similarly to the variation A, a plurality of types of presentation modes are defined, and the presentation is executed in one of the presentation modes. This makes it possible to increase variations in the performance mode of the variable SSP1, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A variation SSP2, which is a performance mode in which a press performance of pressing the frame button 22 is executed, is defined for the value "100 to 198" of the third performance counter 223f3. Incidentally, in the variation SSP2, similarly to the variation B, a plurality of types of presentation modes are defined, and the presentation is executed in one of these presentation modes. This makes it possible to increase variations in the performance mode of the variable SSP2, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Although details will be described later, the first performance counter 223f1, the second performance counter 223f2, and the third performance counter 223f3 are counters that are updated independently. These independent counters identify each fluctuation period as a detailed fluctuation pattern (the first fluctuation pattern is a period from 0 to 30 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern is a period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and the period from 61 seconds to 90 seconds). Since the performance mode in the third variation pattern) is selected, variations in the performance mode can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

Here, in each fluctuation period (the first fluctuation pattern that is a period of 0 to 30 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern that is a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds, and the third fluctuation pattern that is a period of 61 seconds to 90 seconds), When the press effect of pressing the button 22 is executed continuously, for example, when the press effect is executed in the period from 0 to 30 seconds and the period from 31 seconds to 60 seconds, the press effect is executed first. If the press of the frame button 22 is slow during (a press effect executed in a period of 0 to 30 seconds), press the frame button 22 and then open a short interval and press the effect (a press effect executed in a period of 31 seconds to 60 seconds). (press effect) will be executed. In this case, even though you have released your hand from the frame button 22 after pressing the frame button 22 in the first press effect, the second press effect may be executed after a short interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, the player has to move his hand to the frame button 22 again at short intervals, which increases the operational burden on the player and may prevent him from concentrating on the game.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the press effects are executed continuously in one variable effect, if the press of the frame button 22 in the first press effect is slow, the first press effect ends. The configuration is such that an additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is selected and executed during a period from the end until the start of the next (second) press effect. As a result, from the start of the first press effect to the end of the second press effect, the press effect or additional effect of pressing the frame button 22 is continuously executed, so that the second press effect is It is only necessary to move the hand to the frame button 22 until the end, and the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed (prevented).

Here, the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table 222a4.

The additional performance selection table 222a4 is used to select an additional performance to be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed slowly in the first press performance when the press performances are executed consecutively in one variable performance as described above. This is the table.

As shown in FIG. 253, additional effects are defined when the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect are a specific combination (when press effects are continuous), If the press of the frame button 22 is slow in the first press performance of the consecutive press performances, the period from the end of the first press performance to the start of the next press performance, The specified additional performance is executed.

On the other hand, if the variation patterns (first to third variation patterns) of each variation period in one variation effect do not form a specific combination (if the press effects are not consecutive), no additional effects are specified, and additional effects are not specified. The performance is never performed.

Specifically, first, a case where the first variation pattern is "variation A (no press effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "variation A (no press effect)" and the second variation pattern is "variation SP1 (no press effect)", the third variation pattern is "none" (i.e. 60 The press effect must be executed continuously in one variable effect, regardless of whether it is "variable SSP1 (no press effect)" or "variable SSP2 (with press effect)". Since there is no additional performance, no additional performance is specified and no additional performance will be executed.

If the first variation pattern is "Variation A (no press effect)" and the second variation pattern is "Variation SP2 (with press effect)", the third variation pattern is "None", "Variation SSP1". (No press performance)”, no additional performance is specified because the press performance is not executed continuously in the first variable performance. On the other hand, if the third variation pattern is "Variation SSP2 (with press effect)", the press effect will be executed continuously in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so additional effect 2 will be stipulated.

If this additional performance 2 is defined, in the press performance executed in the second variation pattern, if the frame button 22 is pressed at a late timing, the additional performance 2 will be executed. Additional performance 2 is a performance in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, so the player is asked to continue pressing the frame button 22 until the press performance in the third variation pattern is executed. operations can be performed.

Next, a case where the first variation pattern is "variation B (with press effect)" will be described.

When the first variation pattern is "Variation B (with press effect)" and the second variation pattern is "Variation SP1 (without press effect)", the third variation pattern is "None" (i.e. 60 The press effect must be executed continuously in one variable effect, regardless of whether it is "variable SSP1 (no press effect)" or "variable SSP2 (with press effect)". Since there is no additional performance, no additional performance is specified and no additional performance will be executed.

When the first variation pattern is "Variation B (with press effect)" and the second variation pattern is "Variation SP2 (with press effect)", the third variation pattern is "None", "Variation SSP1". (No press effect)" or "Fluctuating SSP2 (with press effect),'' the press effect will be executed continuously in the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern, so each Additional performance 1 is defined.

Furthermore, if the third variation pattern is "variation SSP2 (with press effect)", the press effect will be executed continuously in the second variation pattern and the third variation pattern, so in this case, , in addition to additional performance 1, additional performance 2 is defined.

If additional performance 1 is defined, additional performance 1 will be executed when the frame button 22 is pressed at a late timing in the press performance executed in the first variation pattern. Since additional performance 1 is a performance in which a comment is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, the player is asked to continue pressing the frame button 22 until the pressing performance in the second variation pattern is executed. operations can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the contents of the RAM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 254 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example. The RAM 222 in this control example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the production counter 223f are changed and a valid period storage area 223ea is added, and other points are the same. Identical parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The production counter 223f includes a first variation counter 223f1 used to select the first variation pattern described above, a second variation counter 223f2 used to select the second variation pattern, and a second variation counter 223f2 used to select the third variation pattern. A third floating counter 223f3 is provided (see FIG. 254(b)).

The valid period storage area 223ea is an area for determining whether or not it is a period in which an effect is executed based on the press of the frame button 22 (that is, a period in which the press of the frame button 22 is valid). The period during which pressing of the button 22 is valid is set as a value of elapsed time (ms) since the start of the variable performance. This valid period storage area 223ea is used for the press effect to be executed when a variable pattern command for executing the press effect is set in the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 256) (S2031: Yes in FIG. 256). A period during which the operation of the corresponding frame button 22 is valid is set. In addition, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 257), if an additional effect is set (S6854 in FIG. 257: Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the additional effect is valid. is set (S6855 in FIG. 257). Although not shown, when one variable performance is completed, the contents of the valid period storage area 223ea are cleared.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the contents of the work RAM 233 in the display control device 114 in this control example will be described. FIG. 255 is a block diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration within the display control device 114 in this control example. The display control device 114 in this control example is different from the second control example described above in that the contents of the work RAM 233 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The work RAM 233 in this control example is different from the work RAM 233 in the second control example described above in that an additional effect data storage area 233n, an additional effect 1 flag 233p1, and an additional effect 2 flag 233p2 are added.

The additional performance data storage area 233n is an area for storing performance data for executing (displaying) additional performance 1 or additional performance 2. The additional effect data storage area 233n stores information in the received command when it is determined in the variable pattern command processing 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) that the received variable pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes). Corresponding additional performance data is stored. Then, in pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260), if execution of the additional performance is determined at the update timing of each additional performance (the additional performance flag is on), the data is stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n. The effect data currently displayed is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, additional effects will be executed.

The additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional performance 1 has been decided.If it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional performance 1 has been decided, and if it is off. In this case, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 1 has not been determined. The additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is set to ON when an additional performance command indicating additional performance 1 is received in the additional performance command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6903). Then, in pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260), if it is determined that it is the update timing for additional effect 1 (S3851: Yes), it is referred to (S3852), and if the value of additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on. If it is determined (S3852: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 1 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is a flag for determining whether or not the execution of the additional performance 2 has been decided. When it is on, it is determined that the execution of the additional performance 2 has been decided, and when it is off. In this case, it is determined that the execution of the additional effect 2 has not been decided. The additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON when an additional performance command indicating additional performance 2 is received in the additional performance command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) (S6902). Then, in pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260), if it is determined that it is the update timing for additional effect 2 (S3855: Yes), it is referred to (S3856), and if the value of additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on. If it is determined (S3856: Yes), the effect data of the additional effect 2 stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n is overwritten (updated) in the display data table buffer 233d.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device in the seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that variable display setting processing 6 (see FIG. 256) is executed instead of variable display setting processing 2 (see FIG. 170), and frame button input monitoring is performed. - The difference is that frame button input monitoring/performance processing 3 (see FIG. 257) is executed instead of the production process (see S1707 in FIG. 137); other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, details of the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 256. In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712) in this control example, in contrast to the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 170) in the second control example described above, when a variable pattern in which a press effect is executed is set (S2031 :Yes), the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 corresponding to the pressed effect to be executed is valid is set in the valid period storage area 223ea.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the press effect, slot effect, and point effect in the second control example were not executed, and the processes corresponding to these effects were not executed, but the press effect in the second control example , slot effects, and point effects may be executed, and processes corresponding to these effects may be executed. This makes it possible to perform a wide variety of performances, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the variable display setting process 6 (S1712), first, the processes from S2001 to S2003 are executed similarly to the variable display setting process 2 in the second control example (see FIG. 170). Then, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S2003 (that is, the fluctuation pattern received from the main controller 110) is stored in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (first fluctuation pattern selection table 222a1 to third fluctuation pattern selection table 222a3) and the effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1 to third effect counter 223f3) (S2091), and sets a display variation pattern command (S2006).

When the process of S2006 is finished, the process moves to S2031. In the process of S2031, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 is for executing a press effect (S2031: Yes), each variation pattern selected in the process of S2091 is The operational validity period of the corresponding frame button 22 is set in the validity period storage area 223ea (S2092), and the process moves to S2007.

On the other hand, in the process of S2031, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command set in the process of S2006 does not execute a press effect (S2031: No), the process of S2092 is skipped, and the process of S2007 is Move to processing.

When the process of S2031 or S2092 is finished, the process of S2007 to S2011 is executed similarly to the second control example, and the present process ends.

Next, details of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (S1707) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 257. In the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (S1707), a frame button press command is set based on the detection of the press of the frame button 22 during the valid operation period of the frame button 22. In addition, if the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the operation validity period of the press effect, the period until the next press effect is started is determined, and the period until the next press effect is started is short. (In this control example, it is 10 seconds or less), it is configured to set an additional effect command in order to execute an additional effect.

Specifically, in frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 3 (S1707), first, based on the information stored in the valid period storage area 223ea, the current period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid (frame button operation valid period) (S6851). In the process of S6851, if it is determined that the frame button operation is not valid period (S6851: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S6851, if it is determined that the frame button operation valid period has expired (S6851: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801).

In the process of S6801, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S6801: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S6801, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6801: Yes), a display frame button press command corresponding to the current period is set (S6852), and the process proceeds to S6853. Transition. The display frame button press command set in the process of S6852 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1702) of main process 2 (see FIG. 169). , and is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display frame button press command, it determines the period in which the command is set (for example, the period of the press effect in the second variation pattern) from the received command, and performs the effect according to the period (for example, the period of the press effect in the second variation pattern). For example, a comment display effect (see FIG. 250(b))) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After completing the process of S6852, it is determined whether the current period is a period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853). In the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is not the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S6853, if it is determined that the current period is the period in which the press effect is being executed (S6853: Yes), in order to determine whether or not to execute the additional effect, the process of S6854 is performed. Move to processing.

In the process of S6854, it is determined whether the remaining period until the start of the next press effect is 10 seconds or less. In the process of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next press effect starts is 10 seconds or less (S6854: Yes), an additional effect command for display is executed to execute the additional effect. is set (S6855), and the valid period storage area 223ea is updated based on the press valid period of the frame button 22 corresponding to the set additional effect (S6856), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6854, if it is determined that the remaining period until the next press effect starts is longer than 10 seconds (S6854: No), the processes of S6855 and S6856 are skipped, and the main process end.

<About the control process executed by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 to 260, the control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described. This control example differs from the second control example described above in that command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 258) is executed instead of command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 180), and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146) is executed. 259(a) is executed instead of (see (a)), additional production command processing (see FIG. 259(b)) is added, and pointer update processing is performed. The difference is that pointer update processing 2 (see FIG. 260) is executed instead of (see FIG. 153), and other points are the same. Identical parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 258, details of command determination processing 4 (S2502) executed in this control example will be described. In the command determination processing 4 (S2502) in this control example, in place of the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 180) in the second control example described above, the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 146(a)) is performed. The difference is that process 2 (see FIG. 259(a)) is executed and additional production command processing (see FIG. S259(b)) is added, but other points are the same.

In command determination processing 4 (S2502), first, similar to the second control example, the processing from S2601 to S2604 is executed. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (S2605: Yes), variation pattern command processing 2 is executed (S2605), and the process moves to S2601.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing 2 (S2605) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259(a). In the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2605) in this control example, when there is additional performance data, the additional performance data is added to the fluctuation pattern command processing in the second control example described above (see FIG. 146(a)). The difference is that the data is stored in the data storage area 233n, and the other points are the same.

In variable pattern command processing 2 (S2605), first, it is determined whether or not the received variable pattern command includes additional effect data (S2751). When additional effect data is set as a variation pattern command, as described above with reference to FIG. 253, when press effects are set (selected) consecutively in the first to third variation patterns. It is.

In the process of S2751, if it is determined that the received variation pattern command has additional effect data (S2751: Yes), the additional effect data corresponding to the command (the effect data corresponding to additional effect 1 or additional effect 2) is , is stored in the additional effect data storage area 233n (S2572), and the process moves to S2701.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that there is no additional effect data in the received variation pattern command (S2751: No), the process of S2752 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S2701.

When the process moves to S2701, similarly to the second control example described above, the processes from S2701 to S2706 are executed, and the present process ends.

In this way, when receiving a variable pattern command that has the possibility of executing an additional effect, by storing in advance the effect data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional effect in the additional effect data storage area 233n, When executing (displaying) additional effects, you can execute (display) additional effects without delay. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and performance data necessary for executing (displaying) the additional performance may be stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n only when performing the additional performance. This eliminates the need to store performance data in the additional performance data storage area 233n when the additional performance is not performed, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 258, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received (S2604: No), then the processes of S2606 to S2613 are executed similarly to the second control example.

In the process of S2612, if it is determined that an error command has not been received (S2612: No), then it is determined whether an additional effect command has been received (S2639). In the process of S2639, if it is determined that the additional effect command has been received (S2639: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S2640), and the process returns to S2601.

Here, details of the additional effect command processing (S2640) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 259(b). This additional effect command processing (S2640) is a process executed when an additional effect command indicating execution of an additional effect is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing (S2640), first, it is determined whether the received additional effect command is a command indicating execution of additional effect 1 (S6901).

In the process of S6901, if it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of additional effect 1 (S6901: Yes), the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is set on (S6903), and the main process end. As described above, additional performance 1 is an additional performance executed between the press performance of the first variation pattern and the press performance of the second variation pattern.

By setting the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 to ON through the process of S6903, additional effect 1 is executed at the execution start timing of additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the first variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated to (display).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received additional effect command is a command indicating the execution of additional effect 2 (S6901: No), the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is set to ON (S6902), and this processing ends. . As described above, the additional performance 2 is an additional performance executed between the press performance of the second variation pattern and the press performance of the third variation pattern.

By setting the additional performance 2 flag 233p2 to ON through the process of S6902, the additional performance 2 is executed (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press performance in the second variation pattern) at the update timing of the additional performance 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press performance in the second variation pattern). The display data table buffer is updated so that the data is displayed (displayed).

Returning to FIG. 258, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2639, if it is determined that the additional production command has not been received (S2639: No), the process of other commands is executed (S2614), and the process returns to S2601.

Next, the details of pointer update processing 2 (S3605) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 260. In the pointer update process 2 (S3605), in contrast to the pointer update process in the second control example described above (see FIG. 153), the execution (display) start timing of the additional effect is determined, and the update timing of the additional effect (in each variation pattern) is determined. The difference is that the additional effect is executed (displayed) 1 second before the end timing of the press effect, and the other points are the same.

In pointer update processing 2 (S3605), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3801). Then, based on the value of the pointer 233f added in the process of S3801, it is determined whether it is the update timing of additional effect 1 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the first variation pattern) (S3851 ).

In the process of S3851, if it is determined that it is the update timing of additional performance 1 (S3851: Yes), it is determined whether or not additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852). In the process of S3852, if it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is off (S3852: No), it is not the time to execute the additional effect 1 (the frame button 22 was pressed too soon or was not pressed , or the press effect is not executed in the second variation pattern), the present process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3852, if it is determined that the additional effect 1 flag 233p1 is on (S3852: Yes), it is the case that additional effect 1 is executed (from the press of the frame button 22 to the next press effect). (within 10 seconds until the start), the additional performance 1 data stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3853), and the additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is set to off. (S3854), and this process ends.

In the process of S3853, additional performance 1 data is overwritten starting from the area in the display data table buffer 233d where display data to be executed one second later is stored. Thereby, the additional performance 1 can be executed (displayed) from the point in time when 1 second has elapsed from the update timing of the additional performance 1 (1 second before the end timing of the press performance in the first variation pattern). Note that the update timing is not limited to one second before the end timing of the press effect, and may be changed as appropriate. In that case, the area to be updated in the display data table buffer 233d may be changed in accordance with the change.

In the process of S3851, if it is determined that it is not the update timing for additional effect 1 (S3851: No), it is the update timing for additional effect 2 (0.1 seconds before the end timing of the press effect in the second variation pattern). It is determined whether or not (S3855).

In the process of S3855, if it is determined that it is the update timing of the additional performance 2 (S3855: Yes), it is determined whether the additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856). In the process of S3856, if it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is off (S3856: No), it is not the time to execute the additional effect 2 (the frame button 22 was pressed too soon or was not pressed , or the press effect is not executed in the third variation pattern), the present process is ended as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3856, if it is determined that the additional effect 2 flag 233p2 is on (S3856: Yes), it is the case that additional effect 2 is executed (from the press of the frame button 22 to the next press effect). (within 10 seconds until the start), the additional performance 2 data stored in the additional performance data storage area 233n is overwritten in the display data table buffer 233d (S3857), and the additional performance 2 flag 233p2 is set to off. (S3858), and this process ends.

In the process of S3855, if it is determined that it is not the update timing of the additional effect 2 (S3855: No), the process of S3802 to S3806 is executed similarly to the second control example described above, and this process ends.

In this way, in the pointer update process 2 (S3605), at the update timing of each additional effect, the display data table buffer is overwritten (updated) with the effect data for executing (displaying) that additional effect in advance. The performance can be executed (displayed) without delay. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table buffer may of course be updated at the timing when an additional effect is started. For example, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of additional performance 1, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of additional performance 1, and the additional performance 1 flag 233p1 is on, the data of additional performance 1 is displayed. It is sufficient to overwrite (update) the data table buffer 233d.

In addition, in pointer update processing 2 (S3605), it is determined whether it is the update timing for each additional effect, and then it is determined whether the additional effect is to be executed (whether the additional effect flag is on or not). It is not limited to this. When it is determined that an additional performance is to be executed (that is, when the additional performance flag is on), it may be determined whether it is time to update the additional performance. As a result, when an additional effect is not executed, it is not necessary to determine whether it is time to update the additional effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

Note that this control example uses a configuration in which when multiple operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, additional effects are set for the intervals between them, but other configurations may also be used. For example, when multiple operation effects are executed at predetermined intervals, processing is performed to delay the start timing of the operation effect to be executed first by the predetermined interval, so that the multiple operation effects are executed in succession. Alternatively, the process may be configured to advance the start timing of the operation performance to be executed later by a predetermined interval.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of operation performances as one continuous operation performance without setting an additional performance between the plurality of operation performances. In this case, for example, by moving the start timing of the operation performance to be executed later forward by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds), the end timing of the operation performance to be executed later is also brought forward by a predetermined interval (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned additional effect after the end of the operation effect to be executed later, or to set a longer period of effect for displaying the result of the operation effect.

<Modified example of the seventh control example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. In the seventh control example described above, a case was explained in which a plurality of operation effects are set in the third symbol variation effect that is executed for one special symbol variation, but in this modification example, continuous special symbol variation is A case where multiple operation effects are set so as to straddle will be explained. Note that the same elements as those in each control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the flow of setting additional effects in this modification will be explained. FIG. 261 is a timing chart showing the flow of setting additional effects across a plurality of special symbol variations.

As shown in FIG. 261, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by the player operating the frame button 22, as in the sixth control example described above. The background change effect is set for a period (5 seconds) from 1 second to 6 seconds after the start of the special symbol change. During this period, the background (stage) of the third symbol display device 81 can be switched by the player operating the frame button 22.

Then, when the first variation pattern "Variation A" and the second variation pattern "SP2" are set as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds) (see Figure 253), the remaining period of the special symbol variation is 27 seconds. The operation effect is executed in a period of 2 to 4 seconds (23 seconds). For special symbol variation 1 (60 seconds), the end of the special symbol variation is the end timing of the second variation pattern "SP2", so the end timing of the operation valid period of "SP2" in special symbol variation 1 and the special symbol variation The period between the start timing of the valid operation period set in the background change effect of 2 (30 seconds) is 5 seconds.

Also during these 5 seconds, the same control as the seventh control example described above is executed, and the additional effect 3 is configured to be executed. Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the display contents of additional effect 3 displayed in this modification will be explained.

FIG. 262 is a diagram illustrating the display contents of additional effects when multiple operation effects are set over consecutive special symbol variations, and FIG. 262(a) is an example of the display contents during the normal background change effect period. FIG. FIG. 262(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display content when additional effect 3 is executed, and FIG. 262(c) is a schematic diagram showing display content during the background change effect period when additional effect 3 is executed. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

First, as shown in FIG. 262(a), in this modification, a display mode in which the background can be changed is displayed, similar to the sixth control example described above. Since the display contents are the same as those in FIG. 241(b) of the sixth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when the additional effect 3 is executed, as shown in FIG. 262(b), an additional effective period notification section Sa that notifies the effective period set by the additional effect 3, and an additional period display that indicates the effective period of the additional operation. The additional period display section Ma displays the remaining period of the valid operation period (b in the figure). Then, the words "Get a new background with MAX" explaining the game content in this additional performance 3 and a meter that can be changed by operating the frame button 22 are displayed.

In this additional effect 3, when the player repeatedly presses the frame button 22 and the meter displayed on the third symbol display device 81 reaches MAX, the background that cannot normally be selected becomes selectable in the background change effect. Become.

FIG. 262(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the background change effect when a new background is acquired in the additional effect 3. As shown in Figure 262(c), normally two types of backgrounds could be selected: the "sea" stage or the "mountain" stage (see Figure 262(a)), but since a new background was acquired with additional production 3. , the "River" stage is displayed for selection.

As explained above, in this modified example, an additional performance (additional performance 3) is executed in the same way as in the seventh control example described above even in multiple operation performances that are set to span multiple special symbol variations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operations performed by the player on the frame buttons from becoming complicated across a plurality of special symbol variations.

In addition, in additional performance 3, the condition for the meter to reach MAX may be the case where the operation content executed during the operation performance satisfies the operation condition, or the lottery result (correctness judgment result) of special symbol variation 2 may be determined in advance. It is also possible to make a determination (so-called pre-reading), and the determination result is a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot). Moreover, you may combine both.

Further, the additional effects used in the seventh control example and the modification of the seventh control example are those that additionally set both the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the operational validity period of the frame button 22. However, as shown in FIG. 263, it may be configured such that only the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, and the operational validity period of the frame button 22 is not changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, a case will be described in which only the presentation mode is changed as an additional presentation without changing the operational validity period of the frame button 22. FIG. 263(a) is a schematic diagram showing display content obtained by removing the display of the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation effective period from the display content of FIG. 251(a) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. , FIG. 263(b) is a display obtained by deleting the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation effective period and the period display section M1 from the display contents of FIG. 251(b) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. FIG. 263(c) is a schematic diagram showing the content, and FIG. 263(c) is a diagram showing the additional period display section Ma and the period display section M2 indicating the additional operation valid period based on the display content of FIG. 251(c) described above in the modification of the seventh control example. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing display contents with the display deleted.

As shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (c), since the effective period of operation of the frame button 22 is not changed as an additional effect, the period during which the additional effect is performed is a period for which no effective period of operation is set. Therefore, the period display sections M1 and M2 indicating the operation validity period and the additional period display section Ma indicating the additional operation validity period are not displayed.

However, as a production mode, the operation display section Sb is displayed in the same display mode as the validity period notification section Sa shown in FIG. 251 as a notification prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, During the period between the period and the operation valid period (operation invalid period), it is possible to prevent the player from canceling the operation of the frame button 22.

In this way, by executing the notification (display on the operation display section Sb) that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22 as a performance mode without changing the operation validity period as an additional performance, the player can This makes it possible to continuously operate the frame button 22 across multiple valid operation periods, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the act of operating the frame button 22 and the act of stopping it are repeated frequently. .

Note that in this case, as the presentation mode of the additional presentation, it is preferable to use a presentation mode in which the display mode is variable based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 even during the operation invalidation period. This makes it possible for the player to think that the display mode is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, even though it is actually the invalid operation period.

Specifically, the effects actually executed during the operation validity period include an effect in which an additional comment is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 251(a), and an effect as shown in FIG. 251(b). An effect in which the content of a comment changes midway based on the operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect in which a meter is accumulated based on the operation of the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. It is preferable to execute a pseudo effect mode that is executed in a pseudo manner regardless of the situation.

This allows the user to think that the display mode is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22. Further, the timing at which the display mode of the above-mentioned pseudo effect mode is varied may be changed based on the operation details (operation interval and number of operations) performed on the frame button 22 during the actual operation validity period. This makes it possible to make the user think that the performance mode during the operation invalidation period is changing based on the operation of the frame button 22.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 266. Each of the control examples described above constitutes various effects as operation effects in which the player operates the frame button 22. This control example is different in that the effect mode control when the operation effect is executed in each of the control examples described above is different.

Specifically, control is executed to vary the performance mode when the frame button 22 is operated, based on the remaining period of the operation validity period set for each operation performance. With this configuration, for example, if the frame button 22 is operated at a timing when the remaining period of the valid operation period is less than or equal to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds or less), the remaining period of the valid operation period will be changed to the predetermined time. To execute a production mode in which the amount of change in the production mode (increase amount of meter, amount of increase in numerical value, etc.) based on the operation of the frame button 22 is greater (larger) than in the above case (for example, more than 5 seconds). This allows you to enjoy the operation effects until the very end.

Furthermore, in an operation performance in which the performance mode changes when the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) (i.e., a long press operation), the remaining period of the operation validity period is less than or equal to the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). (seconds or less), the period for determining that a long press operation has been performed is short (for example, 1 second). With this configuration, it is possible to experience changes in the performance mode based on the long-press operation even at the end of the operation performance, so that the user can enjoy the operation performance until the end.

In this eighth control example, the processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the control examples described above, and the processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are partially changed. The difference lies in the changes made. Other points are the same as each control example described above. Hereinafter, the same elements as in each control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 264(a) and 264(b), the operation performance in this control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 264(a), during the variable display of the third symbol, a display mode is displayed that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22. A remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the symbol imitating the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is configured to change based on the decrease in remaining time. In this control example, the remaining time period is displayed in red, and when the remaining time decreases, the corresponding amount is changed to white (the part displayed in red decreases). (See FIG. 264(b)).

In addition, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, there is a "Long press to auto hit repeatedly" button that indicates that by long pressing the frame button 22, the state is automatically controlled (determined) as if the frame button 22 is being pressed repeatedly. characters are displayed. At the top of the display area, an indicator whose color changes based on repeated hits of the frame button 22 is displayed. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the scale is set to the degree of expectation that the winning result of the special symbol being changed will be a hit. If the player presses the frame button 22 repeatedly and the color of the indicator scale changes (changes from white to red) to a larger value and is displayed, the player will be able to judge whether the special symbol being changed is correct or not. You can expect that.

Also, as shown in FIG. 264(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (the frame button 22 is pressed for 3 seconds or 1 second continuously), the long press is placed on a pattern imitating the frame button 22. It has been detected and the text "Automatic continuous tapping" will be displayed to indicate that it is set to automatically perform continuous tapping. In addition, in this control example, the pressing period of the frame button 22 that is determined to be a long press is set to be variable depending on the remaining time for which the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time becomes 5 seconds or less, if the frame button 22 has been pressed for 3 seconds in a row, the setting that was determined as a long press will be changed to the frame button 22 for 1 second continuously. It is switched and set so that when is pressed, it is recognized as a long press. Thereby, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time is running low, more indicators can be stored and the button effect can be enjoyed.

In this embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed depending on the remaining time. It may be configured. In addition, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less), when the frame button 22 is operated, the indicator changes to the maximum value or the predetermined value (for example, the scale MAX If an effect that is displayed up to 1 is selected, the indicator may be variably displayed up to scale 1, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, regarding frame button input monitoring/production processing 4 (S1707), which is one of the processes in main processing 2 (see FIG. 169) of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. explain. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (S1707).

In frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 4 (FIG. 265, S1707), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time (frame button operation valid period) is a value greater than 0 (S7031). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 0 (less than or equal to 0) (S7031: No), the value of the SW valid time storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset. (S7032). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is a value greater than 0 (S7001: Yes), the SW valid time is updated by subtracting the elapsed time (S7033). Next, it is determined whether the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S7034: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S7035). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW valid time is not 5 seconds or less (S7034: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S7036).

In the process of S7037, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is incremented by 1 (S3078). Then, based on the value of the SW press counter (not shown), it is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than the long press determination value set in the process of S7035 or S7036 (S7040). If it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the long press judgment value (S7040: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 within the range of the effect value set in the fluctuation pattern (S7041), and A display command is set (S7042). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7040 that the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is less than the long press determination value (S7040: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the period in which the frame button 22 is not pressed is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). (S7043). If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S7043: Yes), a SW press counter (not shown) is reset to the initial value of 0 (S7044). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S7043: No), this process ends.

In this way, in this control example, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after being pressed, it is assumed that the button has been pressed repeatedly, and the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is incremented by 1. Update. Then, when the value exceeds the long press judgment value, the SW indicator is set to be changed. Note that the amount by which the SW indicator changes is set in advance for each variation pattern, and is set to represent the degree of expectation of the result of the judgment.

Therefore, the player can change the indicator by pressing the button for a long time or hitting it repeatedly. Further, since the long press determination value is set to be variable depending on the SW effective time, even if the SW effective time is running low, the player can be shown an effect that changes the indicator. Note that the speed at which the indicator is varied may be set to be faster depending on the value of the SW valid time.

The above-mentioned SW press counter (not shown) is configured to be able to measure the number of presses of the frame button 22 and also measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of presses of the frame button 22 (press count counter) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (press period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, at the timing when he starts pressing the frame button 22, the number of presses counter is incremented by 1, and the press period counter starts counting.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the number of presses counter is not incremented, but the value of the press period counter is incremented, and the value of the press period counter reaches a predetermined value ( The pressing period determining means determines whether the pressing period has reached a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds.

Then, when the press period determining means determines that the value of the press period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You can.

In this way, by providing the number of presses counter and the press period counter, it becomes possible to independently control the press operation (repeated press operation) and long press operation of the frame button 22.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a modification of the frame button input monitoring/presentation process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) will be described. In the frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) described above, if the remaining period of the SW valid time (button operation valid period) is a predetermined period (5 seconds or less), the frame button 22 is pressed and held. By shortening the long press judgment value (from 3 seconds to 1 second), even when the SW valid time (button operation valid period) is short, the long press operation is possible. In addition, when the long press judgment value is shortened, the speed at which the SW indicator is varied is increased, so that when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short, The SW indicator can be variably displayed until the end (up to the maximum range that is variably set in advance) by a long press operation (auto repeated presses) performed during the operation.

On the other hand, in this modification, when a long press operation (auto repeated presses) is executed in a state where the long press judgment value has been shortened, the long press operation (auto repeated presses) when the long press judgment value has not been shortened. The difference is that the SW press counter is configured so that the value of the SW press counter is incremented more than when the SW press is pressed repeatedly.

In addition, in this modification, when a long press operation (auto continuous press) is performed in a state where the long press judgment value is shortened, the value of the SW press counter is increased by a large amount (the continuous press interval of auto continuous press is shortened). However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the remaining period of the SW valid time (button operation valid period) is within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds), The value of the SW press counter may be increased by a large number due to automatic repeated hits.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) of this modification will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266).

When frame button input monitoring/production processing 5 (S1707 in FIG. 266) is executed, first, steps S7031 to S7037 are executed in the same way as frame button input monitoring/production processing 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. Processing is executed. Then, in the process of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S7037: Yes), it is determined whether the long press judgment value is set to 1 second (S7051), and it is determined that it is not 1 second. (3 seconds) (S7051: No), the processes of S7038, S7041, and S7042 are executed in the same way as the frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. , this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7051, if it is determined that it is 1 second (S7051: Yes), the value of the SW press counter (not shown) is incremented by 2 (S7052), and the value of the SW indicator is incremented by 2 ( S7053), a display command indicating the SW indicator is set (S7042), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S7037, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7037: No), the same as the frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (S1707 in FIG. 265) of the eighth control example described above. Then, the processes of S7043 and S7044 are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this modification, if the remaining period of the SW valid period (button operation valid period) is less than the predetermined period (5 seconds or less), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed and held. The value (time) of the switch is shortened (from 3 seconds to 1 second), and during the shortened period, the value of the SW press counter that is added due to automatic repeated press operations is configured to be increased more than usual. did.

As a result, the SW indicator can be variably displayed until the end (up to the maximum range that is variable and preset) by a long press operation (auto repeated presses) performed when the SW effective time (button operation effective period) is short. be able to.

Furthermore, unlike the eighth control example described above, since the configuration is such that the value added to the SW press counter increases, the value of the SW press counter and the value of the SW indicator can be correlated, and the control load It also has the effect of being able to reduce the

The above-mentioned SW press counter (not shown) is configured to be able to measure the number of presses of the frame button 22 and also measure the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed. A counter for measuring the number of presses of the frame button 22 (press count counter) and a counter for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed (press period measurement counter) may be provided separately. In this case, when the player performs a long press operation, first, at the timing when he starts pressing the frame button 22, the number of presses counter is incremented by 1, and the press period counter starts counting.

When the player continues to press the frame button 22, the value of the number of presses counter is not incremented, but the value of the press period counter is incremented, and the value of the press period counter reaches a predetermined value ( The pressing period determining means determines whether the pressing period has reached a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds.

Then, when the press period determining means determines that the value of the press period measurement counter has reached a predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1 second or 3 seconds), it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time. You can.

In this way, by providing the number of presses counter and the press period counter, it becomes possible to independently control the press operation (repeated press operation) and long press operation of the frame button 22.

The configurations explained above in each control example may be combined as appropriate, and in particular, each configuration of the reach navigation effect explained in the first control example and each configuration of the reach navigation effect explained in the fourth control example are combined. Or, each configuration of the composite press effect explained in the second control example may be combined with the configuration of each press effect in the sixth control example, the seventh control example, and the eighth control example, or the configurations explained in the second control example Each configuration of the continuous slot performance described in the above can be combined with each configuration of the continuous slot performance explained in the fifth control example, and each configuration of the point performance explained in the second control example can be explained in the third control example. It may be combined with each configuration of the point performance.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In the game machine, the game machine includes a base member, a displacement member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the base member, and an abutment member formed to be able to come into contact with the displacement member. A first member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the member, a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the first member is linearly displaceable on the first member. a second member disposed therein, the base member includes a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is brought into contact with the abutment member. Game machine A1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-57166). In this case, for example, the displacement member that is being displaced may be brought into contact with an abutment member, and the abutment member may be displaced together with the displacement member, or the abutment member may be disposed at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , when the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions or control, etc., the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper), etc. Are known.

However, the above-described conventional configuration has a problem in that the displacement member and the abutment member may be damaged when the displacement member abuts the abutment member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member will be impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the contact member while ensuring the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the rack gear of the second member is Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member through the pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member becomes larger than the first member. In the accelerated state, it can be linearly displaced relative to the base member. Thereby, it is possible to increase the displacement speed of the second member and ensure the production effect accompanying the displacement. On the other hand, since the displacement member brings the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, into contact with the abutment member, the impact upon contact is weakened and damage to the displacement member and the abutment member is suppressed. can do.

The first member may be driven relative to the base member, for example, by meshing a pinion gear disposed on the base member with a rack gear formed on the first member, and driving the pinion gear to rotate. By connecting the distal end of an arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by a base member to the first member and rotating the arm body, the first member can be moved to the base member. An example is one in which the object is linearly displaced relative to the object.

Further, the contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the displacement member is linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the protruding direction with respect to the first member, or , the displacement member may be linearly displaced in a direction in which the second member is relatively displaced in the storage direction with respect to the first member. In either case, the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, is brought into contact with the abutting member, thereby weakening the impact of the abutting, and causing the displacement member and the abutting member to Damage can be suppressed.

In gaming machine A1, the abutting member is disposed movably on the base member, and the movable direction of the abutting member is a straight line of the displacing member when the displacing member is abutted. A game machine A2 characterized in that the direction is a direction that allows displacement.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the abutting member is disposed movably on the base member, and the direction in which the abutting member can be displaced is such that the direction in which the displacing member abuts on the base member is displaceable. Since the direction allows the displacement of the displacement member, the abutment member receives the displacement of the displacement member and escapes, thereby exerting a buffering effect, thereby preventing damage to the displacement member and the abutment member. can be easily suppressed.

Note that the direction that allows linear displacement of the displacement member means that the direction of displacement of the abutment member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be rotational or curved (curvilinear) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the abutting member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that a direction in which the abutting member can be displaced is set to a direction parallel to a direction of linear displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the direction in which the abutting member can be displaced is set to a direction parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacing member, so that the displacing member can be abutted. At this time, the escape operation of the abutting member can be performed smoothly. Therefore, a buffering effect can be reliably exerted, and damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

A game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A3 includes a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the abutting member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A3, it is equipped with a guide member that guides the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the abutting member, so that the overall device can be made smaller. It is possible to aim for That is, when a first guide member for guiding the displacement member and a second guide member for guiding the abutment member are arranged side by side at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction of linear displacement, , the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement increases accordingly, leading to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, by using one of the guide members for the same purpose, space efficiency can be improved and downsizing can be achieved.

A game machine A5, which is any one of the game machines A2 to A4, and is characterized in that the contact member can be placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the abutting member can be placed in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacing member, so the displacing member can be placed in a position where the displacing member does not come into contact with the abutting member. It is possible to create a state in which they are not in contact with each other. In other words, when displacing a displacement member linearly at a relatively high speed, it is likely that the stopping position of the displacement member will extend beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions or control, so it is difficult to bring the displacement member into contact. When the displacement member is brought into contact with the member (the contact member functions as a stopper) and the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stopping position of the displacement member with the target position. By placing it in a position where it does not come into contact with the displacement member and preventing the two from coming into contact with each other, the number of times of contact is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to contact is reduced, and their lifespan is improved. can be achieved.

Any one of gaming machines A2 to A5 includes a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the abutting member, and the abutting member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the abutting member driving means. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to be displaced in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member disposed to be linearly displaceable on the base member, and a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the rack gear of the second member is By meshing with the rack gear of the base member through a pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member. Since the structure is such that it is linearly displaced relative to the base member while the speed is increased, the force required for driving is relatively large. Particularly, at the time of initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from a stopped state), the force required for driving becomes maximum due to the influence of inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (speed of linear displacement from a stopped state) becomes slow, and there is a possibility that the production effect accompanying the displacement may be inhibited.

In this case, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 to A5, the abutting member is formed to be able to be displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the abutting member driving means. Therefore, the initial movement of the displacement member (the start of linear displacement from a stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial movement and improve the presentation effect accompanying the displacement.

Note that the direction in which the displacement member is pushed back means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be rotational or curved (curvilinear) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the abutting member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not need to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In gaming machine A6, when the abutment member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the abutment member driving means, the abutment member abuts the first member of the displacement members. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, when the abutting member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacing member by the driving force of the abutting member driving means, some of the displacing members Since the displacement member is brought into contact with the first member of the displacement member, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be increased. That is, the contact member is brought into contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than the second member and pushes back the first member, so that an auxiliary force is applied from the contact member to the displacement member (first member). (i.e., the time from when the displacement member in a stopped state starts to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the abutment member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the abutment member) is made longer. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial movement of the displacement member can be increased.

In gaming machine A6 or A7, the first member and the abutting member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by a rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the same as that of the rack in the abutting member. A game machine A8 characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism with respect to the base member, the rack and pinion mechanism of the first member is Since the gear ratio is set to a larger gear ratio than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, it is possible to quickly linearly displace the displacement member from a stopped state, and after the start of linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the performance effect accompanying the displacement can be improved.

In other words, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the abutment member to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted, so the force of pushing back the displacement member by the abutment member is strengthened, and the displacement is reduced. The initial movement of the member (the start of linear displacement from a stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, by setting the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, so that the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. Speed can be increased.

Note that a large (small) gear ratio means that the distance of linear displacement of the rack gear when the pinion gear rotates once is large (small).

Here, in order to speed up the initial movement of the displacement member, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement will be reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slower. In other words, it was previously impossible to speed up the initial movement of the displacement member and increase the linear displacement speed of the displacement member (second member) after the initial movement. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, such a combination has become possible for the first time.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower combined unit 600 as an example>
A driving means, a displacement member driven by the driving means and formed to be displaceable toward a first position, and an abutted member abutted by the displacement member displaced to the first position. A game machine B1 characterized in that at least a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members are movable between a retracted position where they are arranged at a predetermined interval and a contact position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. A gaming machine that is formed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members that have been retracted to a retracted position are displaced in a direction closer to each other, and brought into contact (combined) at a contact position, thereby integrating the pair of displacement members. A performance is performed in which the characters transform into characters and form a single character.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the pair of displacement members come into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated and the posture becomes unstable, for example, because they are bounced back from each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact upon contact, the time it takes to integrate the pair of displacement members to form one character increases, The effect of the performance is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displaced member contacts the member to be contacted. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from rebounding from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since at least the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, the time required to integrate the displacement member with the abutted member to form one character can be reduced, thereby suppressing the length of time required. As a result, the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

Further, the abutted member may be a member that is stopped at the first position, or may be a member that is formed so as to be able to be displaced toward the first position. In the latter case, the abutted member is placed at the first position before the displaceable member (i.e., the displaceable member reaches the first position first and is in a stopped state with respect to the abutted member). (i.e., the displacement member and the abutted member, which are in a mutually displaced state, are brought into contact with each other in the first position). It may be.

In addition, forms in which the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position include forms in which it continuously decreases as it moves toward the first position, and forms in which it decreases stepwise as it moves towards the first position. , a combination of these, etc. are exemplified.

Furthermore, a decrease in the component in the direction toward the abutted member means that not only the velocity toward the abutted member is reduced, but also the velocity in the direction toward the abutted member becomes 0, and This is intended to include cases where the speed in the direction away from the abutted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the abutted member becomes negative).

The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means transmits the speed component of the displacement member when the driving state of the driving means is constant. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that at least a component of the component in the direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1, the transmission means reduces the decrease in at least the component in the direction toward the abutted member of the velocity component of the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position. Since this can be carried out with the drive state of the drive unit being constant, there is no need to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the drive state of the drive means in accordance with the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, control of the driving means can be simplified, reducing control costs and improving reliability.

An example of a state where the drive state is constant is, for example, when the drive means is an electric actuator (e.g., an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state where the supply current or voltage is constant. Ru. However, changes in state during transient response during starting and stopping shall be ignored.

The gaming machine B2 includes a base member on which the displacement member is displaceably disposed, and the transmission means is located at a rotation base rotatably connected to the base member and at a position spaced apart from the rotation base by a predetermined distance. a connecting member having a connecting tip formed therein and rotatably connected to the displacement member, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotating base in a direction in which the connecting tip approaches the first position. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

According to game machine B3, a connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip of the connecting member becomes an arc centered on the rotating base. That is, displacement in the tangential direction of the circular arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, the connecting member is rotated around the rotating base in a direction that brings the connecting tip closer to the first position, so that the first position (i.e., the abutted member) of the velocity component of the displacement member The component in the direction toward can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means has a connecting member interposed between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member, so in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the transmission means The structure of the means can be simplified.

The gaming machine B2 includes a base member on which the displacement member is disposed so as to be displaceable, the transmission means includes a guide groove that extends to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes: The guided part is guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove controls at least a component of the velocity of the guided part guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the abutted member. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the number of characters decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

According to game machine B4, the transmission means includes a guide groove that extends to the base member and guides the displacement member, and the displacement member includes a guided portion that is guided along the guide groove, and the guide groove includes: The guide groove is formed such that at least a component of the velocity of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the abutted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, since the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided part) and displaces the displacement member along the guide groove, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the transmission means The structure of can be simplified.

A game machine B5, which is any one of the game machines B2 to B3, and includes an intervening member whose one side is movably connected to the base member and whose other side is movably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the game machines B2 to B3, it includes an intervening member whose one side is movably connected to the base member and whose other side is movably connected to the displacement member. The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the intervening member can be applied to the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be a combination of displacement due to the action of the transmission means and displacement due to the action of the intervening member. This makes it possible to complicate the form of displacement of the displacement member and enhance the effects of the displacement.

A game machine B6 in the game machine B5, wherein the one side and the other side of the interposed member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support.

According to game machine B6, the interposed member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member on one side and the other side by pivot support, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the interposed member The other side is displaced in an arcuate trajectory with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Therefore, such arc-shaped displacement (that is, displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied from the intervening member to the displacement member. As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B5, it is possible to complicate the form of displacement of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the presentation by the displacement.

In any of gaming machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. A gaming machine B7 is characterized in that:

According to game machine B7, in any of game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is configured such that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member is at least approximately 0 at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts the abutted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from rebounding from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that a component of the velocity component of the displacement member in a direction toward the abutted member has a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed such that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the abutted member takes a negative value at the first position. In other words, since the displacement member has a component in the direction of separating from the abutted member at the first position, when the displacement member displaced to the first position abuts the abutted member, the displacement member can be released from the abutted member, thereby making it possible to more reliably suppress the occurrence of impact. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from rebounding from the abutted member, and the posture of the displacement member can be stabilized.

Furthermore, if the value is negative at the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the abutted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions or control, Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or has a negative value) can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of impact.

Any one of the game machines B2 to B8 includes a second drive means for driving the abutted member, and a second transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the second drive means to the abutment member, and The abutted member is formed to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmission means transmits the velocity component of the abutted member while the driving state of the second drive means is constant. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that at least a component of the component in the direction toward the displacement member decreases in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B2 to B8, the abutted member is formed to be able to be displaced toward the first position, so that the effect produced by bringing the pair of members into contact can be achieved. can increase the effectiveness of For example, by displacing the abutted member and the displacement member in a direction toward each other and abutting (combining) them at the first position, these pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the game machine B9, the second transmitting means transmits the driving force of the second driving means to the abutted member, and the second transmitting means transmits at least the velocity component of the abutted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the generation of impact when the abutted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress the abutted member and the displacement member from being bounced off each other, and the postures of the abutted member and the displacement member can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since at least the component of the velocity of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the Since the speed of displacement of the abutting member can be increased, the time required to integrate the abutting member with the displacing member to form one character is reduced for both the abutting member and the displacing member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the delay. As a result, the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the second transmission means reduces at least the component of the velocity of the abutted member in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position while the driving state of the second drive means is kept constant. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means depending on the displacement position of the abutted member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the second drive means, thereby reducing control costs and improving reliability.

Note that the abutted member, second drive means, and second transmission means in game machine B9 can be read and applied as the displacement member, drive means, and transmission means in game machines B2 to B8. Therefore, an intervening member in gaming machine B5 or B6 may be interposed between the base member and the abutted member.

<About the concept of the invention using the protruding unit 700 as an example>
A driving means, a first member and a second member that are displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a first transmission means and a second transmission means that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. In the gaming machine, the first transmission means includes a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is applied to the drive means, and a first drive force applied in the first predetermined section. The second transmission means can form a second predetermined section in which a second driving force is applied to the driving means. and a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force applied in the second predetermined section is applied to the drive means, and the first transmission means In a state in which a first predetermined section is formed, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section, and a state in which the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section. Here, the gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, a driving means, a first member and a second member that are displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a first transmission means that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, and A gaming machine including a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-53958). According to this gaming machine, since the two members (the first member and the second member) can be displaced by the one driving means, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in a configuration in which the first driving means displaces the second member, the driving force for driving both components is overlapped, which increases the load on the driving means, resulting in a decrease in its durability. Ta. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (the first member and the second member) are displaced alternately (one by one), the load on the driving means is reduced, but a state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be created; The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission means is capable of forming the first predetermined section and the first suppression section in which the load on the driving means can be made smaller than the first predetermined section, and In a state where the second transmission means is capable of forming a second predetermined section and a second suppression section in which the load on the drive means can be made smaller than the second predetermined section, and the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section, In a state in which the second transmission means forms a second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms a second predetermined section, the second transmission means forms a second suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section. One transmission means forms a first suppression zone, i.e. when one transmission means is subjected to a relatively high load, the other is placed under a relatively low load, and when the other is subjected to a relatively high load, the other is placed under a relatively low load. The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load on the driving means can be distributed, the load on the driving means can be reduced and its durability can be improved.

Furthermore, there is no need to alternately displace the first member and the second member (one by one), and a state can be created in which the first member and the second member are displaced together, so that the load on the driving means can be reduced, and It is possible to improve the performance effect.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and a cam member that is in friction contact with the circumferential surface of the cam member to rotate the first member or the second transmission means. a cam friction member that applies displacement to a second member, and in the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the cam friction member per unit rotation of the cam member is controlled to the first predetermined value. A game machine C2 characterized in that the load on the driving means is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the cam friction member per unit rotation of the cam member in a section or a second predetermined section.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a crank member having a pin portion located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. and a crank friction member having a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides, and wherein the pin portion slides along the guide groove to apply displacement to the first member or the second member. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the amount of displacement of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member is determined by the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. A game machine C3 characterized in that the load on the drive means is reduced by reducing the amount of displacement of the crank friction member.

According to the game machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank friction member. The unit rotation of the cam member and crank member depends on the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the center of rotation to the outer peripheral surface (friction surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank friction member (distance to the center of rotation of the crank member). The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member can be changed. In other words, the load on the drive means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is maintained constant, it is possible to change the speed of displacement of the first member and the second member. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speed of the first member and the second member, and while the production effect is enhanced, the first or second suppression In the section, it is possible to suppress the load on the driving means.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity, and A game machine C4 characterized in that in the second suppression section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement of the first member or the second member has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity. The load on the drive means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load on the drive means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

In addition, by changing the load on the driving means using the weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the interlocking of the cam member and the cam friction member or the movement of the crank member and the crank friction member can be achieved. When changing the load of the driving means, as in the case of using interlocking, there is no need to change the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member, and the speed of displacement of the first member or the second member is kept constant. It is possible to change the load on the driving means while maintaining the same.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means is in frictional contact with a cam member rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a circumferential surface of the cam member to apply displacement to the first member. the second transmission means includes a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means, a crank member having a pin portion located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body, and a crank member having a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means; a crank friction member that has a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and that applies displacement to the second member when the pin portion slides along the guide groove; A gaming machine C5 characterized in that a crank member is formed integrally with the crank member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C1 to C4, since the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, there is no space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately. can be made unnecessary, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Moreover, compared to the case where the first member and the second member are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the deviation in displacement of the first member and the second member, and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. A game machine C6 characterized in that a non-transmission section can be formed to maintain two members in a stopped state, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means transfers the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, it is possible to form a non-transmission section that maintains the first member or the second member in a stopped state, and the displacement of the first member or the second member starts after passing through the non-transmission section, so that the first member or the second member is in a stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when starting the displacement of the first member or the second member that is in a stopped state, the load on the driving means increases due to the influence of inertia force, so the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slower. , where it is difficult to displace the driving force smoothly, the provision of a non-transmission section that does not transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member and maintains the first member or the second member in a stopped state makes it possible to avoid such non-transmission. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to gain momentum, and after the momentum is gained (that is, after passing through a non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in a stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each of the non-transmission sections. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form a non-transmission section at the same time, and after passing through each non-transmission section, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, there is no need to displace either the first member or the second member, and during this time, the driving means can be idled with a small load. As a result, the force of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in a stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is reduced. has a downward displacement component in the direction of gravity, so when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state while displacing the other, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the force of the driving means can be increased, and the first member or the second member in a stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, even while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state, the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced, so that both the first member and the second member are stopped. It is possible to improve the presentation effect by avoiding this situation.

In any of gaming machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means includes a main body rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. and a guide groove in which a pin portion of the crank member slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to apply displacement to the first member or the second member. a crank friction contact member, a section where a guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is the non-transmission section, and a pin portion of the crank member is provided with a non-transmission section; After passing through the transmission section, displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion, which has reached a predetermined position in the guide groove, changes its sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. In the game machine C9, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines C6 to C8, a section where the guide groove of the crank friction member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. , the pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin part, which has reached a predetermined position in the guide groove, changes its sliding direction and moves to the non-transmission section. When the crank member is slid toward the non-transmission section, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that an excessive load on the driving means can be avoided.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank friction member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the drive means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), and the pin of the crank member In the structure in which the pin part reciprocates in the guide groove, after the pin passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position, the shape of the non-transmission section becomes an arc convex toward the center of rotation of the crank member. becomes. Therefore, when the pin passes through the non-transmission section after changing direction, not only does the sliding resistance increase, but the displacement of the crank friction member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the drive means load becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a base member, a slide member disposed on the base member so as to be slidable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to cause the slide member to slide, wherein the slide member is rotatable. and converting means for converting a sliding displacement of the sliding member with respect to the base member into a rotational movement of the rotating member, and the converting means converts the sliding displacement into rotational movement of the rotating member. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is capable of forming a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a slide member disposed on the base member so as to be slidable, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the slide member to cause the slide member to slide. (For example, JP 2013-236802). Also known is a gaming machine in which a sliding member is provided with a rotating member and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member disposed on the sliding member can be rotated while the sliding member is slidingly displaced (linearly moving), and it is possible to perform an effect that combines linearly and rotatingly moving. I can do it.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are disposed on the sliding member, the weight of the entire sliding member increases, and it is difficult to drive the sliding member. There was a problem in that the load on the driving means for (sliding displacement) was increased.

On the other hand, the gaming machine D1 includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the sliding member and a converting means that converts the sliding displacement of the sliding member with respect to the base member into a rotational movement of the rotating member. The rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member. In other words, since it is not necessary to provide the slide member with a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotary member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced accordingly, and the slide member can be driven (slide displacement The load on the drive means for (

In this case, according to the gaming machine D1, the converting means is capable of forming a state in which the sliding displacement is not converted into a rotational motion of the rotating member, so that only a state in which the rotating member is rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member is possible. Instead, for example, a configuration may be formed in which the sliding member is slid while the rotating member remains non-rotating. Thereby, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the sliding member and the rotating member can be increased, so that the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means is formed to be able to mesh with a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A game machine D2 comprising: a pinion gear, and a release means formed to be able to release the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, and disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine D2, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a pinion gear formed to be able to mesh with the rack gear and rotatably disposed on the slide member. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into rotational movement of the rotating member. Moreover, since the converting means includes a releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to create a state in which the sliding displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member. That is, in addition to a configuration in which the rotating member is rotated with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, for example, a configuration in which the sliding member is slid while the rotating member remains non-rotated can be formed. The number of combinations of member movements (linear and rotational movements) can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, the release means is provided on the base member, and there is no need to provide a means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and pinion gear on the slide member, so the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. . As a result, the load on the drive means for driving (slidingly displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D2, the release means rotates at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby disengaging the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is released.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the release means rotates at least the portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby releasing the rack gear. Since the meshing with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and miniaturization can be achieved.

In the gaming machine D3, the teeth of at least one of the rack gear and the pinion gear are formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D3, the teeth of at least one of the rack gear and the pinion gear are formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward one side in the tooth width direction. At least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the rack gear and the pinion gear are disengaged, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. , when the rack gear and pinion gear are meshed, such meshing can be performed smoothly.

In the gaming machine D2, the releasing means releases the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear by displacing at least a portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear. A game machine D5 featuring the following.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D2, the release means displaces at least the portion of the base member where the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear, thereby displacing the rack gear and pinion gear. Since the meshing is released, after the release, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction, and when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means is formed to be able to mesh with a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. A gaming machine D6, comprising: a pinion gear, wherein a part of the rack gear has teeth missing.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed so as to be meshable with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed on the rack gear, the slide member is slid with respect to the base member with the pinion gear meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into rotational movement of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, when the pinion gear passes through the part of the rack gear where teeth are missing, a state can be created in which the sliding displacement is not converted into rotational motion of the rotating member. . That is, according to this configuration, until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the tooth is missing, the rotating member can be rotated according to the sliding displacement of the slide member, while the tooth of the rack gear is By stopping the sliding displacement of the sliding member when the pinion gear reaches the missing portion, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by its inertia force.

In this way, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is not only rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also in a state where the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped. A configuration in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear and rotational movements) of the sliding member and the rotating member can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine D6, the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear is released by missing some teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to dispose the slide member in the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving (slidingly displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D6, the gaming machine D7 is characterized in that teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than other teeth.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear are made more rigid than other teeth, so that the durability thereof can be improved. can be achieved. In other words, the teeth adjacent to the missing part are easily damaged due to the collision of the pinion gear teeth that have passed through the missing part with the teeth of the rack gear, but by increasing their rigidity, durability is improved. be able to.

Note that, as a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, increasing the width of the teeth is exemplified. According to this example, rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration in meshing with the pinion gear.

In the gaming machine D1, the conversion means is formed to be able to mesh with a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and is rotatably disposed on the slide member. a pinion gear, and a one-way clutch disposed in a rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes between a state of allowing rotation transmission and a state of blocking it. A gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it can be formed.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D1, the converting means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, and a slide member formed so as to be able to mesh with the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably disposed on the rack gear, the slide member is slid with respect to the base member with the pinion gear meshed with the rack gear, thereby converting the slide displacement into rotational movement of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is configured to be able to change between a state in which transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which it is cut off, so by changing the one-way clutch to a state in which transmission of rotation is cut off, the slide displacement is It is possible to create a state that is not converted into rotational movement of the member. In other words, the one-way clutch is in a state in which rotation is allowed to be transmitted, and the rotating member is rotated as the slide member slides. The slide member is slidably displaced while the slide member remains non-rotating, or the one-way clutch is changed from a state in which transmission of rotation is allowed to a state in which it is cut off when stopping the displacement of the slide member. It is possible to form a configuration in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued due to its inertial force while the rotating member is stopped.

In this way, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is not only rotated in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the rotating member is not rotated while the sliding member is slid. It is possible to form a form in which the rotating member is displaced, or a form in which the rotating member is rotated while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, and the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotational movement) of the sliding member and the rotating member can be formed. can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine D8 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a driving means that drives the displacement member and is disposed on the slide member, and the one-way clutch is configured to transmit rotation. A game machine D9 comprising an operator operated to change between a state of allowing and a state of blocking, the operator being operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D8, it includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the slide member, and a driving means that drives the displacement member and is disposed on the slide member. In addition to the movement (linear movement and rotational movement) of the sliding member and the rotating member, the displacement of the displacement member can be combined, and the number of such combinations can be increased. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operator of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced member, the displacement member can serve both the role of producing effects through displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since there is no need to separately provide a means for operating the one-way clutch operator on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving (slidingly displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operator operated to change between a state in which transmission of rotation is allowed and a state in which transmission is interrupted, and the base member is configured to operate when the slide member is slidably displaced. A game machine D10 comprising an engaging part located on a displacement locus of the operator, and the operator is operated by the engaging part when the slide member is slid.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D8, the base member is provided with an engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the sliding member is slidably displaced, and the base member is provided with an engaging portion that is located on the displacement locus when the sliding member is slidably displaced. Since the operator is operated by the joint, there is no need to provide a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (i.e., operating the operator) on the slide member, which reduces the overall weight of the slide member. can be made lighter. As a result, the load on the drive means for driving (slidingly displacing) the slide member can be suppressed.

Note that the engagement portion may be disposed at any position on the displacement locus of the operator described above. For example, it may be at one end or the other end on the displacement trajectory, or it may be in the middle of the displacement trajectory.

The gaming machine D10 includes a second sliding member disposed on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second sliding member to slide the second sliding member, A gaming machine D11 characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member as the member slides.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed to be changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member in accordance with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the permissible state to the restricted state or from the restricted state to the permissible state. As a result, the position at which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed when the sliding member is slid, or the position at which the rotating member is rotated when the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped, can be adjusted depending on the gaming state, for example. can be changed, and as a result, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in addition to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, the second sliding member can also be slid, so that the performance effect can be increased accordingly. Since it also serves the role of changing the position of the engaging part, there is no need to provide a separate means for changing the position of the engaging part. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The gaming machine D10 includes a second sliding member disposed on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second sliding member to slide the second sliding member, A gaming machine D12 characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated as the member is slid.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where it is not operable as the second slide member slides. Therefore, when the slide member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a mode in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched and a mode in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched. That is, a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed while the slide member is being displaced from the starting end to the terminal end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is not changed while the sliding member is being displaced from the starting end to the terminal end. can be formed, and its presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in addition to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, the second sliding member can also be slid, so that the performance effect can be increased accordingly. Since it also serves the role of changing the position of the engaging part, there is no need to provide a separate means for changing the position of the engaging part. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In addition, in the game machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be provided on the second slide member or may be provided on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the second slide member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member and a shielding and opening means capable of forming a shielding state of shielding a predetermined area of the base member and an open state of opening the predetermined area of the base member, the shielding and opening means comprises: A first member arranged to be linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear. a second member disposed on the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a base side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first side pinion gear. By linearly displacing the two members to one side, the shielding state is formed, and by linearly displacing the first member and the second member to the other side opposite to the one side, the shielding state is formed. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member and a shielding/opening means that can form a shielding state in which a predetermined region of the base member is shielded and an open state in which a predetermined region is opened. For example, in JP-A No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotary plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined area, and the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotary plates are directed to the front to shield the predetermined area. (Form a shielded state) On the other hand, by rotating each rotary plate 90 degrees so that the thick part (side surface) faces the front, a gap is created between each rotary plate and a predetermined area is opened (forming an open state) ) will be disclosed.

However, according to the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating board remains in a predetermined area with its thick part (side surface) facing forward after being rotated 90 degrees. However, there is a problem in that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is made thinner, there is a limit to how thin the plate can be in order to ensure strength during rotation.

On the other hand, a single plate-like body having the same area as a predetermined area is disposed so as to be displaceable, and by displacing (arranging) this plate-like body to the predetermined area, the predetermined area is shielded (shielded). On the other hand, there is also known a gaming machine configured to open a predetermined area (form an open state) by retracting the plate-shaped body from the predetermined area (displacing it outside the predetermined area). There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the predetermined region can be completely opened by retracting the plate-shaped body from the predetermined region.

However, in a game machine with such a configuration, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space with the same area as the predetermined area is used as a space for arranging the plate-like body evacuated from the predetermined area. This poses a problem in that it becomes necessary, leading to an increase in size. Furthermore, since the plate-like body has the same area as the predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to evacuate the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to place it from the evacuated position to the predetermined area. However, there was a problem in that it was difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the gaming machine E1, the shield opening means includes a first member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member, and a first side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the first member. a second member having a second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the first member; and a base side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first side pinion gear. By linearly displacing the first member and the second member to one side, a shielding state is formed, and the first member and the second member are linearly displacing to the other side opposite to the one side. As a result, an open state is formed.

That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined area can be opened more widely. Furthermore, in the state where the first member and the second member are evacuated, the first member and the second member are overlapped, so the first member and the second member evacuated from these predetermined areas are arranged accordingly. It is possible to reduce the space required for this purpose and to achieve downsizing.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member at an increased speed than the first member. The time required to evacuate the second member from the predetermined area or to arrange the second member from the evacuated position to the predetermined area can be shortened, and switching between the shielded state and the open state can be quickly performed.

Note that the shielding state in which a predetermined region is shielded does not necessarily mean that the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, but may be a state in which a part of the predetermined region is open. may exist. Similarly, the open state in which a predetermined region is opened does not necessarily mean that the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely opened, but a portion of the predetermined region is partially opened by the first member or the second member. There may also be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, it is sufficient that the shielded area is relatively large compared to the open state. In other words, in the open state, the open area only needs to be relatively large compared to the shielded state.

In the game machine E1, the first member includes a first main body supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement part connected to the main body, and the second member a second main body portion having the second side rack gear meshed with the first side pinion gear and supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable; and a second displacement portion connected to the second main body portion. A game machine E2 comprising: a first main body portion of the first member supported by the base member outside the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first member includes a first main body supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement part connected to the main body. The second member is connected to a second main body portion that has a second side rack gear that is meshed with the first side pinion gear and is supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and is connected to the second main body portion. the first main body of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined area, so that when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side; In this case, only the trajectories of the first displacement part and the second displacement part can be overlapped in a predetermined area. That is, the first main body part and the second main body part can be caused to pass outside the predetermined area, and their trajectories can be prevented from overlapping with the predetermined area. As a result, when an open state is formed, the first displacement part and the second displacement part are completely evacuated from the predetermined area, and no part of the first member and the second member remains in the predetermined area. The entire surface of a predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. A gaming machine E3, wherein the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear is connected to the first member. The structure is such that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first side rack gear by the drive gear, so the structure for linearly displacing the first member can be made smaller. can be converted into That is, of the space required outside the predetermined area of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear; A game machine E4 comprising: a third member having a third side rack gear meshed with each other and disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the second member and includes a second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear. and a third side rack gear that is meshed with the second side pinion gear, and a third member disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member. When a member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the third member is linearly displaced to the other side, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side along with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, by linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined area to form a shielding state, and By linearly displacing the first member, second member, and third member to the other side, the first member, second member, and third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), an open state can be formed.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, when the first member, second member, and third member are retracted, the first member, second member, and third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined areas is The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and miniaturization can be achieved.

In particular, according to the structure in which a predetermined area is shielded by three members (first member, second member, and third member), compared to the case where a predetermined area with the same area is shielded by two members. As a result, the space for arranging the third member evacuated from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by overlapping three parts of a predetermined area than by overlapping two parts.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member at an increased speed than the first member, and the second member is displaced linearly with respect to the base member. Since the third member is linearly displaced relative to the base member while the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined area or from the retracted position. By shortening the time required to place the device in a predetermined area, switching between the shielded state and the open state can be performed more quickly.

In the gaming machine E4, the third member includes a third main body portion that has the third rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable; A game machine E5 comprising a third displacement section connected to the main body section.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear that is engaged with the second side pinion gear, and a third member that is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body part and the third displacement part connected to the third main body part are provided, when the first member, the second member, and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first Only the trajectories of the displacement part, the second displacement part, and the third displacement part can be overlapped in a predetermined area. That is, the first main body part, the second main body part, and the third main body part can be caused to pass outside the predetermined area, and their trajectories can be prevented from overlapping with the predetermined area. As a result, when an open state is formed, the first displacement part, the second displacement part, and the third displacement part are completely evacuated from the predetermined area, and the first member, second member, and third displacement part are moved to the predetermined area. Since no part of the member remains, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

Note that the technical idea (relationship of the third member to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be extended to create a game machine that further includes a fourth member, a fifth member, . . . , an n-th member.

That is, the shield opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably disposed on the second member and meshed with the base rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. A third member disposed linearly displaceably on the second member is extended, and the shield opening means is rotatably disposed on the n-th member and meshed with the base side rack gear. and an (n+1)th member having an (n+1)th side rack gear meshed with the nth side pinion gear and disposed so as to be linearly displaceable on the nth member ( However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member has a third side rack gear with which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and is connected to the third main body. Expanding the configuration including the third displacement part, the (n+1)th member has an (n+1)th side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed, and an (n+1)th main body part supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. and an (n+1)th displacement section connected to the (n+1)th main body section (where n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a third member disposed on the second member such that the first member and the second member are oriented toward one side or the other side. and third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the third member is linearly displaced by the first member and the second member. A gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, the shield opening means includes a third member disposed on the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a case where the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. and third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side in accordance with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved.

That is, by linearly displacing the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined area to form a shielding state, and By linearly displacing the first member, second member, and third member to the other side, the first member, second member, and third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), an open state can be formed.

In this case, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area by linear displacement to the other side, so that the predetermined area can be opened more widely. In addition, when the first member, second member, and third member are retracted, the first member, second member, and third member are overlapped, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined areas is The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed, and size reduction can be achieved.

In this way, according to the structure in which a predetermined area is shielded by three members (first member, second member, and third member), compared to the case where a predetermined area with the same area is shielded by two members As a result, the space for arranging the third member evacuated from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area is smaller when a predetermined area is divided into three parts and overlaid than when two parts are overlaid.

Furthermore, when the first member is linearly displaced relative to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced relative to the base member at an increased speed than the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilizing means linearly displaces the third member due to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the third member is moved by the increased speed of the second member. The linear displacement of the first member can be increased at least faster than that of the first member. The time required to evacuate the first member, second member, and third member from a predetermined area or to arrange them from the evacuated position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the switching between the shielding state and the open state is made easier. It can be done quickly.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the protruding unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as examples>
In a gaming machine that includes a first member and a second member that are formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. A gaming machine F1, wherein the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a first member and a second member that are formed to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-252533). In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member that have been retracted to the retracted position are moved to the extended position and brought into close proximity or contact with each other, thereby associating (integrating) the two members. , an effect is performed in which the player is made to see the character as a single character.

In this case, in order to enhance the presentation effect, it is effective to be able to form a larger character when the first member and the second member are displaced to the extended position. For this purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in large size.

However, in the conventional technology described above, since the first member and the second member are each displaced to the extended position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are increased in size, the first member and the second member are moved to the extended position. There is a risk that they will interfere with each other during displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to perform each displacement at a different time, which increases the time required to form a character. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first member is disposed at the extended position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. As a result, the first member and the second member are prevented from interfering with each other during displacement to the extended position. Therefore, since the first member and the second member can be displaced at the same time, the time required to form the character can be shortened and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed at the extended position by being displaced in a combination of rotational displacement and linear displacement.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the second member is disposed in the extended position by being displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement, so that the second member has a curved shape. can form a trajectory. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during displacement to the extended position.

The gaming machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member so that the second member is displaced in a manner that combines rotational displacement and linear displacement. The gaming machine F3 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the second member is provided with a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the second member can achieve rotational displacement and linear displacement. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the extended position, and the posture of the second member at the retracted position is free. You can increase the degree. That is, the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the extended position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member. It can be used as a displacement to avoid interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Furthermore, since the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the extended position, the degree of freedom in the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

The gaming machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device disposed in a gaming area, a retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the gaming area, and The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long position in the extended position and is arranged in a vertically long position in the retracted position.

Here, in a configuration in which the second member is formed into a horizontally elongated shape and arranged in a horizontally elongated posture at the extended position to form a character together with the first member, it is not possible to form a large character, and the production effect cannot be sufficiently achieved. I can't perform. That is, since the gaming area is formed vertically long, and the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the gaming area are relatively narrow, reducing the space for disposing the members. It is difficult to secure Therefore, in order to prevent the second member from protruding into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long position in the extended position, and is arranged in a vertically long position in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for disposing the members on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the second member can be made larger accordingly.As a result, the character formed together with the first member at the extended position can be can be made larger.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it includes a drive means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, there is a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, interference between the second member and the first member during displacement to the extended position can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be made larger accordingly, and the character formed together with the first member at the extended position can be made larger. . For example, even if the area is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for installing the member, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the gaming area, the second member can be retracted in such area. The second member can be made large while setting the position.

Any one of the game machines F1 to F5 includes a third member that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and the third member is in contact with the first member and the second member in the extended position. A game machine F6 is characterized in that it is arranged at different positions in the front and back direction.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, it includes a third member that is formed to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, so that the first member and the second member At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the production effect can be increased accordingly. In this case, since the third member is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the first member and the second member in the extended position, the third member does not come into contact with the first member and the second member in the extended position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other in the extended position, or when there is a possibility that they will come into contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of damage caused by the impact at the time of contact. , since it does not come into contact with the first member and the second member, its displacement speed can be made relatively fast. As a result, it is possible to create a mode in which, for example, the third member coming later is displaced so as to catch up with the first and second members coming first at the protruding position, and the production effect when forming a character can be enhanced. .

In the game machine F6, the third member includes a projecting portion formed to project to the same side as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction.

Here, if the positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made different in the front-rear direction, the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction increases accordingly. In order to suppress such an anteroposterior dimension, if the anteroposterior dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are each made smaller (thinner), it becomes difficult to ensure rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion that is formed to overhang on the same side as the first member and the second member in the front-rear direction. and the total of the second member and the third member), thereby reducing the size of the gaming machine in the front-rear direction, while increasing the front-rear dimension of the third member to ensure its rigidity. can do.

A game machine F8, which is any one of the game machines F1 to F7, and further includes an abutted member that is disposed on the first member and abuts a part of the second member in an extended position.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first member includes an abutted member with which a part of the second member abuts in the extended position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by contacting the abutting member.

Note that the abutted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly abutted when the first member and the second member are arranged in the extended position, or the abutted member It may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when the second member is placed in the extended position and the two move closer than the reference position due to control variations or dimensional variations.

In the game machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be movable in directions approaching and away from the first member, and the first member is in a state in which the abutted member is separated from the first member. A game machine F9 is arranged in an extended position.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be movable in directions approaching and away from the first member, and the first member is configured such that the abutted member Since it is arranged in the extended position in a state where it is spaced apart from the member, it is possible to make reliable contact with the second member in the extended position. Furthermore, since the abutted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger.

A gaming machine F10 in the gaming machine F9, wherein after the first member is placed in the extended position, the abutted member is displaced in a direction approaching the first member.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F9, since the abutted member is displaced in the direction approaching the first member after the first member is placed in the extended position, the second A space can be created for the member to be displaced. That is, when the first member is placed in the extended position, the abutted member is placed in a state separated from the first member, and while the second member plays a role of receiving displacement, thereafter, the contact member is moved to the first member. By displacing the abutted member in the approaching direction, the space formed due to the displacement can be used as a displacement space for the second member, and the performance effect can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

In the game machine F8, the abutted member is formed so as to be able to be displaced in directions approaching and away from the first member, and at least in the retracted position, the abutted member A gaming machine F11 is characterized in that it is brought into close proximity to the gaming machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F8, the abutted member is formed to be movable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is brought close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the space for disposing the first member in the retracted position. Furthermore, when the abutted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the extended position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger accordingly.

In the gaming machine F11, the abutted member is maintained in a state close to the first member until the first member is placed in the extended position. .

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F11, the abutted member is maintained in a state close to the first member until the first member is placed in the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abutted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the extended position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until a character is formed and enhance the production effect.

Any one of gaming machines F9 to F12 is provided with two sets of the second member and the abutted member, and when the second member abuts the abutted member in one set, the contact occurs. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the abutted member in the other group is displaced toward the second member in accordance with the above.

According to the game machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F9 to F12, there are two sets of the second member and the abutted member, and in one set, the second member abuts the abutted member. When contacted, the abutted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member due to the contact, so for example, in one set, the second member is moved to the reference position. When the contact member is displaced beyond this point and abuts on the abutted member, the abutted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other group along with the abutment. Therefore, since the abutted member in the other set is abutted against the second member, the impact caused by the contact of the second member to the abutted member in one set is not received by only the first member. Instead, it can also be received by the second member in the other group. Thereby, kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and damage to each member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a structure in which the abutted member in one group is displaced toward the second member as a result of contact in the other group, for example, the displacement of the abutted member in one group is caused by the displacement of the abutted member in the other group. A structure in which the displacement of the abutted member in one group is transmitted to the first member, and the abutted member in the other group is displaced toward the second member in accordance with the transmission; A structure in which the first member is displaced as a result of the transmission, and the abutted member in the other group is displaced toward the second member integrally with the first member, or a structure in which these are combined. is exemplified.

A game characterized in that any one of the game machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member in an extended position and is formed to be able to be periodically displaced. Machine F14.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines F1 to F13, the game machine F14 includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be able to come into contact with the first member and the second member at the extended position, and the periodic displacement member has the following effects. Since periodic displacement is possible, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, it is possible to vibrate the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member, thereby increasing the performance effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement members is shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and there is no need to provide a mechanism for periodically displacing the first member and the second member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Note that the first member and the second member may be in contact with each other in the extended position, or may be in a separated state (non-contact).

A gaming machine F15 in the gaming machine F14, wherein the periodic displacement member is disposed at a position where the longitudinal position in the extended position is forward of the first member and the second member.

According to the game machine F15, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the longitudinal position in the extended position is more forward than the first member and the second member, so that the game A member (periodic displacement member) disposed on the side closer to the user can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated using a member on the near side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to perform an effect that easily conveys the force of the vibration to the player.

A gaming machine F16, which is the gaming machine F14 or F15, wherein the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other in the extended position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is controlled by the periodic displacement member. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners without relating them to each other. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (number of parts and shapes of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they vibrate in different manners. Therefore, the portion of one character formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, product costs can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the upper combined unit 700, and the lower combined unit 800 as examples>
A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the extended position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the extended position, the first effect mode is formed by each displacement means of the first group, and the first effect mode is formed by the displacement means of the first group. In a gaming machine in which a second performance mode is formed by each displacement means of the second group when each displacement means is placed in the extended position, one of the displacement means of the first group and the A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising a dual-purpose means that also serves as one of the displacement means of the second group.

Here, a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, and a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position. A gaming machine equipped with a second group is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this gaming machine, when each displacement means of the first group is placed at the extended position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) and one character (the first On the other hand, when the respective displacement means of the second group are placed in the extended position, the respective displacement means of the second group are associated (integrated) and are recognized by the player as a different character. (Second performance mode) is a performance that the player recognizes. That is, in the first gaming state, each displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, and each displacement means of the first group is placed in the extended position. A first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second game state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to a retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to an extended position. By arranging them, an effect is performed in which the second characters are formed in the game area by the respective displacement means of the second group.

In this case, in order to enhance the production effect, it is effective to be able to form larger characters. For this purpose, it is necessary to make each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group large-sized.

However, as in the conventional technology described above, when a plurality of characters (production modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required to form the plurality of characters increases accordingly. Since the area (space) in which the displacement means can be kept is limited, there is a problem in that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to increase the size of each character (performance mode).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since it is provided with a dual-purpose means that serves as one displacement means of the first group and one displacement means of the second group, a plurality of (displacement means) The total number of displacement means required to form the first and second) presentation modes can be reduced, and each displacement means can be increased in size. As a result, each performance mode (character) can be made larger.

In the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means is located at a position where an overhang position is placed when forming the first performance mode and a position where the overhang position is placed when forming the second performance mode are different. A gaming machine G2 characterized by:

Here, if the dual-purpose means is arranged at the same protruding position when the first presentation mode is formed and when the second presentation mode is formed, the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode This makes it easier for players to recognize that a common displacement means (combined means) is used for both production modes, which impedes interest. In addition, if it is necessary to form the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode using dual-purpose means placed at the same position (overhanging position), the degree of freedom decreases accordingly. It becomes difficult to create a difference (shape or arrangement position) between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the dual-purpose means has an overhang position arranged when forming the first presentation mode and a second presentation mode. Since the projecting position is different from the position where the projecting part is placed at the time, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used for both the first performance mode and the second performance mode, which increases the interest. can be prevented from being inhibited. In addition, since the dual-purpose means can be placed in different positions (projected positions) for the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the degree of freedom can be increased. Differences (shapes and placement positions) can be easily formed.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 is characterized in that the dual-purpose means has a different posture when forming the first presentation mode and a posture when forming the second presentation mode. Game machine G3.

Here, when the first performance mode is formed and when the second performance mode is formed, if the dual-purpose means is the same posture, the first performance mode and the second performance mode are common. This makes it easier for players to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) is being used, which impedes interest. Furthermore, if it is necessary to form the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode using dual-purpose means with the same posture, the degree of freedom decreases accordingly, and the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode are It becomes difficult to create differences (shape and placement position) from the performance mode of

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dual-purpose means is a posture when forming the first presentation mode and a posture when forming the second presentation mode. Since the two are in different postures, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the dual-purpose means is used for both the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming interested. . In addition, since the first performance mode and the second performance mode can have different postures for the dual-purpose means, the degree of freedom can be increased, and the differences (shape and layout) between the first performance mode and the second performance mode can be installation position).

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is placed in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode, the dual-purpose means moves forward and backward with respect to at least one displacement means of the first group. A gaming machine G4 having different directional positions and at least partially overlapping when viewed from the front.

Here, the dual-purpose means has different protruding positions or (and) different postures when the first presentation mode is formed and when the second presentation mode is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. As a result, the control or structure becomes complicated, and variations in the stopped state (installation position and/or attitude) are likely to occur accordingly. In this case, in a structure in which the dual-purpose means contacts the first displacement means in the extended position (at least in part, the positions in the front and rear directions coincide), if the dual-purpose means does not reach the target position, the first displacement means While a gap is formed between the displacing means and the dual-purpose means, if the arrangement position or posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one of the displacing means is pushed out, causing a positional shift. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, when the dual-purpose means is placed at the extended position when forming the first performance mode, the first group At least one of the displacement means has different positions in the front-rear direction and at least partially overlaps when viewed from the front, so even if there is variation in the stopped state (extended position or (and) posture), The relationship between the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be easily maintained. That is, by partially overlapping in front view, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two displacement means, and by having different positions in the front and rear directions, the dual-purpose means can be Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to suppress one displacement means from being pushed out and positional deviation occurring. As a result, the relationship between one displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group are brought into contact with each other when placed in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode. The game machine G5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machine G4, when the one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group are arranged at the extended position when forming the first performance mode, Since they are brought into contact with each other, the one displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) to make it easier for the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the dual-purpose means tends to vary in the stopped state (the extended position or (and) posture), and the dual-purpose means is , in a structure that comes into contact with one displacement means (at least in part, the positions in the front and back directions match), if the installation position and posture of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, a gap will be created between it and the first displacement means. is formed, and association (integration) is inhibited. Similarly, even if the arrangement position and orientation of the dual-purpose means exceed the target position, one of the displacement means is pushed out and a positional shift occurs, which impedes association (integration). That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means of the first group are brought into contact with each other in the extended position, the configuration of the gaming machine G4 (where the front and rear positions are different and when viewed from the front) (partially overlap) is particularly effective.

In the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is placed in the extended position when forming the first performance mode, it is located further forward in the front-rear direction than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. , a game machine G6 characterized in that the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap in a front view with respect to the portions where they abut each other.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, when the dual-purpose means is placed in the extended position when forming the first presentation mode, the dual-purpose means is more effective than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The one displacement means and/or the other displacement means are located on the front side in the front-rear direction, and overlap in a front view with respect to the portion where the one displacement means and the other displacement means contact each other. When a deviation occurs in the target position and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap can be covered by the dual-purpose means to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means from being inhibited, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the dual-purpose means.

Any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member to combine rotational displacement and linear displacement. an overhanging position of the dual-purpose means that is displaced in a different manner and is disposed when forming the first presentation aspect, and an overhanging position of the dual-purpose means that is disposed when forming the second presentation aspect; are in different positions, and the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the first presentation mode is different from the posture of the dual-purpose means when forming the second presentation mode. Game machine G7 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G2 to G6, it is equipped with a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the dual-purpose means is rotatably disposed on the linear base member, so that the rotational displacement and the linear Since it is displaced in a combined manner with the displacement, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the protrusion position and posture when forming the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode.

A gaming machine G8, in the gaming machine G7, wherein the longitudinal position of one of the displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the longitudinal position of one of the displacement means of the first group is set between the linear base member and the recording means, so that it can be used for both purposes. By locating the means closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the means, and to bring the one displacement means and the dual-purpose means closer together in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by associating (integrating) one displacement means and the dual-purpose means, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In the gaming machine G8, in a state where one of the displacement means of the first group and the dual-purpose means are arranged at the retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view. The game machine G9 is characterized by:

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G8, in a state where one of the displacement means and the dual-purpose means of the first group is disposed at the retracted position, the first displacement means and the linear base member are Since they are arranged at overlapping positions in a front view, when the first displacement means and the linear base member (combined use means) are displaced to the extended position to form the first effect mode, the first displacement means It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the gaming machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means of the first group and the dual-purpose means are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position that does not overlap the linear base member in a front view. and while the other displacement means and the dual-purpose means are being displaced toward the extended position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position overlapping the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member A gaming machine G10 characterized in that an area where at least the other displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front is smaller in longitudinal dimension than an area where the first displacement means overlaps when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G9, when the other displacement means and the dual-purpose means of the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means While the other displacement means and the dual-purpose means are being displaced toward the extended position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position that overlaps the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member Since at least the area where the other displacement means overlaps in front view is smaller in the front-rear direction dimension than the area where one displacement means overlaps in front view, in order to form the first effect mode, the other displacement means And when the linear base member (combined-purpose means) is displaced to the extended position, it is possible to suppress other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

The gaming machine G10 is provided with a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose means, and the conversion mechanism includes: A game machine G11 characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base member is arranged in an area that overlaps with the other when viewed from the front in the retracted position.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G10, there is provided a driving means that applies a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism that converts the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the dual-purpose means. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual-purpose means can be synchronized, the relative positional accuracy (posture) of the dual-purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be improved. Therefore, by associating (integrating) the displacement means and the dual-purpose means, the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means for rotating the dual-purpose means, the dual-purpose means can be made larger accordingly, and the character formed at the extended position can be made larger. For example, even in areas where it is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for placing members, such as one side and the other side of a liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the gaming area, dual-purpose means materials can be evacuated in such areas. While setting the position, the dual-purpose means can be made large.

In this case, the conversion mechanism is arranged in an area where one of the displacement means of the linear base members overlaps in front view at the retracted position, so that the other area of the linear base members (where the conversion mechanism is not arranged) area) can be reduced in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined use means) are displaced to the extended position, it is possible to suppress the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

<Feature H group> (Indicator display corresponding to mode transition)
A production mode setting means that can set any production mode among a plurality of production modes, a display means that can display the production mode set by the production mode setting means, and a plurality of stage information on the display means. a stage information display means for displaying, a stage information changing means for varying the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and a case where the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information by the stage information changing means; a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect, and a switching means for switching a display mode of stage information displayed by the stage information display means to a display mode corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine H1 characterized by having the following.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of performance modes can be set as performance modes displayed on a display device, and when a specific performance mode is set, a predetermined score is given to a player, There are some games in which an effect is performed based on the cumulative value of points given (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-215579).

In such conventional gaming machines, points are awarded only in a specific production mode, so if the player moves to another production mode, all accumulated points are discarded. There was a problem in that the player's motivation to obtain points decreased and the player quickly became bored with the game. In addition, in order to reliably execute a production using the assigned points, it is necessary to fix the production mode to a specific production mode from the time the score is assigned until the production based on the score is executed. There was a problem that the production became monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, any one of a plurality of performance modes is set by the performance mode setting means, and the set performance mode is displayed on the display means. On the display means, stage information of a plurality of stages is variably displayed by the stage information display means, and when the stage information is changed to predetermined stage information, a specific performance is executed by the specific performance execution means. is executed. Then, the display mode of the stage information displayed by the stage information display means is switched by the switching means to the display mode corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means.

As a result, even if a different production mode is set, the stage information can be displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the currently set production mode, so even if the production mode is changed, the stage information can be continued to be used. It becomes possible to perform the performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

The gaming machine H1 includes a stage information storage means for storing the stage information displayed by the stage information display means, and the stage information display means is configured to, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the stage information is displayed based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. The stage information displayed by the stage information display means is stored by the stage information storage means. Then, when the display mode is switched by the switching means, the stage information is displayed by the stage information display means based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means.

Thereby, even if the display mode is switched by the switching means, it is possible to display the stage information based on the stage information stored in the stage information storage means. Therefore, even if a different performance mode is set, the performance using the stage information can be continuously executed, which has the effect of suppressing the player from getting bored with the game early.

Note that the display mode corresponding to the production mode is, for example, displaying identification information that can identify the points to be given, such as numbers, letters, symbols used in the currently set production mode, or characters appearing in the production mode. It is conceivable to use a display mode using . Another idea is to use an image that corresponds to the motif (for example, the sea or mountains) used in the currently set presentation mode for the image that accompanies the identification information that can identify the points awarded. It will be done. In this way, by displaying the stage information in a display mode that corresponds to the currently set performance mode, even if the performance mode changes while the performance displaying the stage information is being executed, the changed performance mode can be changed. It is possible to display stage information without giving a sense of discomfort.

A gaming machine H3 in the gaming machine H2, wherein the stage information storage means stores at least the predetermined stage information.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, at least the predetermined stage information is stored in the stage information storage means, so that different presentation modes can be set in a state where the predetermined stage information is displayed. Even if the display mode is switched, it is possible to display predetermined stage information in the display mode after switching. Therefore, even if the performance mode is switched while the performance in which stage information is displayed is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance.

A gaming machine H4 in the gaming machine H2 or H3, wherein the stage information storage means stores at least approximate stage information that approximates the predetermined stage information.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, the approximate stage information that approximates at least the predetermined stage information is stored in the stage information storage means, so that when the approximate stage information is displayed, Even if a different performance mode is set and the display mode is switched, it is possible to display the approximate stage information in the switched display mode. Therefore, if you switch the performance mode while approximate stage information indicating that the predetermined stage information is about to be displayed, stage information that does not approximate the predetermined stage information will be displayed, and the game will be interrupted. This has the effect of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

Here, as the approximate stage information in the gaming machine H4, for example, when using an indicator that can display stage information in seven stages, stage information indicating the seventh stage (MAX) is set as the predetermined stage information, and the approximate stage information is set as the predetermined stage information. It is preferable to set stage information indicating the sixth stage as the stage information.

Note that a plurality of pieces of this approximation stage information may be set depending on the degree of approximation to the predetermined stage information. Thereby, it is possible to further suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player when different performance modes are set and the display mode is switched.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the performance mode setting means includes a specific performance mode setting means for setting a specific performance mode when the specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means. A game machine H5 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when specific stage information is displayed by the stage information display means, a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means.

As a result, it is possible to switch the performance mode depending on the displayed stage information, so there is an effect that the performance effect of the performance displaying the stage information can be enhanced.

Here, if the gaming machine has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing so, since the presentation mode is switched in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, there is an effect that the presentation effect of the presentation in which the stage information is displayed can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, it is preferable to set the approximate stage information and the specific stage information to be different. By doing so, the performance mode is switched in a state where the approximate stage information is not displayed either, so there is an effect that the performance effect of the performance in which the stage information is displayed can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the stage information display means displays the predetermined stage information as the stage information when the specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means. Game machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, when a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means, predetermined stage information is displayed as stage information by the stage information display means. .

Thereby, a specific performance mode can be set when specific stage information is displayed, and predetermined stage information can be displayed when the display mode is switched. Therefore, in the performance in which stage information is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect the display mode to change, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting tired of the game early.

Here, if the gaming machine has the configuration of the gaming machine H3, the predetermined stage information and the specific stage information may be set differently. By doing this, the predetermined stage information is displayed by switching the performance mode in a state where the predetermined stage information is not displayed, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player, and There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine has the configuration of the gaming machine H4, it is preferable to set the approximate stage information and the specific stage information to be different. By doing this, the performance mode is switched in a state where neither the predetermined stage information nor the approximate stage information is displayed, that is, when the expectation of a jackpot is low in the performance where stage information is displayed, the predetermined stage information is displayed, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be further enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, variable amount determining means determines the variable amount of the stage information to be varied by the stage information changing means, and the variable amount determining means determines the variable amount determined by the variable amount determining means. A gaming machine H7 comprising variable information display means for displaying variable information corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable amount of the stage information to be varied by the stage information variable means is determined by the variable amount determining means, and based on the determined variable amount, the variable information corresponding to the performance mode set by the performance mode setting means is determined. Displayed by variable information display means.

Thereby, the player can easily understand the variable amount by which the stage information is changed by understanding the variable information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, since the variable amount by which the stage information is changed is displayed as variable information corresponding to the currently set production mode, the variable information is displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort even if the production mode is switched. It has the effect of being able to

The variable information displayed based on the variable amount may be information that specifically indicates the variable amount, information that suggests the variable amount (for example, information such as large variable amount or small variable amount), or information that indicates the variable amount (such as information such as large variable amount or small variable amount). If stage information is to be displayed, information indicating the stage information to be changed among a plurality of stage information may be used.

Further, the timing of displaying variable information may be set appropriately based on the variable information to be displayed. For example, if information specifically indicating a variable amount is to be displayed as variable information, the stage information variable means It is preferable to display the variable information after the stage information has been varied. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the manner in which the stage information changes, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

On the other hand, if information suggesting a variable amount or information indicating stage information to be varied is to be displayed as variable information, the variable information may be displayed before the stage information is varied by the stage information changing means. As a result, it is possible to make the user pay close attention to how the stage information is changed after grasping the displayed variable information, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H7, variable information differentiation means for differentiating the variable information displayed by the variable information display means into a plurality of small variable information, and a display for displaying the small variable information differentiated by the variable information differentiation means. A gaming machine H8 comprising: display timing setting means for setting timing.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable information displayed by the variable information display means is divided into a plurality of small variable information by the variable information differentiation means, and the display timing at which the small variable information is displayed is displayed by the display timing setting means.

This makes it possible to display variable information for varying stage information in multiple stages. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Here, as a method for differentiating variable information using the variable information differentiation means, if the variable information is something that displays a specific numerical value (for example, a score, etc.), that numerical value (score) is divided into multiple numerical values (small scores, etc.). ), or if the variable information is a display that suggests the variable contents of step-by-step information (for example, degree of change or variable target), it is advisable to divide it so that the suggested contents are displayed step by step. Bye. This makes it possible to keep the player's attention on the performance in which the stage information is varied, and it becomes possible to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, when displaying variable information (small variable information) differentiated by the variable information differentiation means, variable information that is advantageous to the player (high expectation that stage information will be changed to predetermined stage information) variable information) should be displayed later. By configuring the game in this manner, it is possible to execute the performance while keeping the player's expectations until the end.

The gaming machines H1 to H8 are characterized in that the performance mode setting means includes a setting regulating means for regulating the setting of a predetermined performance mode in accordance with the set performance mode. Game machine H9.

According to the gaming machine H9, the setting regulation means regulates that a predetermined performance mode is set according to the set performance mode, so that various performances can be executed by using a plurality of performance modes. In the configuration, it becomes possible to easily regulate switching of predetermined performance modes. Therefore, when the display mode of stage information is switched by the switching means, it is possible to suppress setting of a performance mode in which it is difficult to convey to the player that the performance displaying stage information is being continuously executed. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand performance can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machines H1 to H9, the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on the setting condition when any one of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied. and a priority order setting means for setting a priority order, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the production is performed based on the setting condition having the higher priority set by the priority order setting means. A gaming machine H10 characterized in that it sets a mode.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when any one of the plurality of setting conditions is satisfied, the performance mode is set based on the setting condition. Then, priorities are set for the plurality of setting conditions by the priority setting means, and when the plurality of setting conditions are satisfied, the performance is performed based on the setting condition with the highest priority set by the priority setting means. The aspect is set.

As a result, the performance mode is set based on the setting condition with a high priority, so there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Feature J group> (Production display position setting)
a display means having a display area; a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect on the display means for a predetermined period; In the gaming machine, the second performance execution means is configured to display the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first performance when the second performance is executed. A gaming machine J1 is characterized in that it executes the second performance.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute an effect in which points representing a predetermined value are displayed on a display device, and when the points reach a predetermined number, a bonus effect is given (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-179176).

In such conventional gaming machines, a dedicated area for displaying points is provided on the display device, and there is a problem in that the manner in which points are displayed becomes monotonous. In addition, if points are displayed without providing a dedicated area for displaying points on the display device, the display of points will overlap with the display of another effect executed on the display device, reducing the effect of the effect. There was a problem with this.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, a predetermined first effect is executed for a predetermined period by a first effect execution means on a display means having a display area, and while the first effect execution means is being executed, a second effect is executed. The performance execution means executes a predetermined second performance on the display area corresponding to the display mode of the first performance on the display means.

Thereby, the position where the second effect is displayed can be displayed in correspondence with the first effect being executed, and it is possible to prevent the first effect and the second effect from being displayed overlappingly. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine J1, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined permissible area of the display area of the display means, and when the second effect is executed, the second effect is executed. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it has an area changing means for changing the permissible area based on a display mode of one effect.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second effect execution means executes the second effect in a predetermined permissible area of the display area of the display means. Then, the allowable area is varied by the area changing means based on the display mode of the first effect when the second effect is executed.

This makes it possible to vary the permissible area in which the second effect is executed based on the display area in which the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to perform the second performance in the area related to the first performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine J2 includes a first effect discriminating means for determining a main display area in which a main image is displayed among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means; A game characterized in that the area changing means varies the permissible area in which the second effect can be executed based on the display area determined as the main display area by the first effect determining means. Machine J3.

According to gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine J2, the following effects are achieved. That is, among the first effects displayed in the display area by the first effect executing means, the main display area in which the main image is displayed is determined by the first effect determining means. Then, based on the display area determined as the subject display area by the first performance determining means, the area variable means changes the permissible area in which the second performance can be executed.

This makes it possible to vary the permissible area in which the second effect is executed based on the display area in which the main image in the first effect is displayed. Therefore, since it becomes possible to perform the second performance in the area related to the first performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine J3, the area variable means sets the display area determined as the main display area by the first effect discrimination means as a prohibited area in which it is difficult to perform the second effect, and sets the display area other than the main effect display area as the permissible area. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display area that is determined to be the main display area by the first performance determining means is set as a prohibited area in which it is difficult to perform the second performance by the area changing means. Then, the area variable means sets the area other than the subject display area as the permissible area.

This makes it possible to prevent the display area where the main image in the first effect is displayed and the display area where the second effect is executed from overlapping, which would reduce the effect of the effect. effective.

In the gaming machine J3, the first performance determining means determines a specific subject display area, which is a specific subject display area in which the subject image will no longer be displayed after a predetermined period of time, among the display areas determined to be the subject display area. A gaming machine J5 comprising a determining means, wherein the area changing means sets the display area determined to be the specific subject display area by the specific subject display area discriminating means as the permissible area.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved. That is, among the display areas determined to be the subject display area, the specific subject display area in which the main image will no longer be displayed after a predetermined period of time has been determined by the specific subject display area determination means, and the display determined to be the specific subject display area. The area is set as a permissible area by the area changing means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to set the display area after a predetermined period of time as the permissible area as the display area where the second effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the timing of executing the second performance, and it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player, which has the effect of increasing the performance effect.

In any of gaming machines J2 to J5, value information setting means capable of setting first value information indicating at least a predetermined value and second value information having a higher value than the first value information as the second performance. and a permissible area setting means capable of setting the permissible area to a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area, and the second effect executing means is configured to set the permissible area to a first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area. A gaming machine J6, characterized in that the value information is set to be displayed in the first permissible area and the second value information is displayed in the second permissible area.

According to gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines J2 to J5, the following effects are achieved. That is, first value information indicating at least a predetermined value and second value information having a higher value than the first value information are set as the second effect by the value information setting means, and the permissible area is set by the permissible area setting means. A first permissible area and a second permissible area different from the first permissible area are set. Then, the second performance execution means sets the first value information to be displayed in the first permissible area and the second value information to be displayed in the second permissible area.

This makes it possible to display the value information in a plurality of small areas, so that the value information can be displayed in a plurality of places in the display area, and there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, since it is possible to display value information indicating different values in different small areas, for example, even if the same value is displayed in total, the first value information can be displayed multiple times in the first allowable area. A plurality of display methods can be set, such as displaying the second value information or displaying the second value information only once in the second permissible area. Therefore, since the player looks at the value information displayed on the display means while paying close attention to the place where the value information is displayed and the number of times the value information is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. There is.

Any one of the gaming machines J1 to J7 includes display image creation means for creating a display image to be displayed on the display means, and the display image creation means includes at least a first layer in which the first effect is displayed. and a second layer in which the second effect is displayed to create the display image, and a first compositing process in which the first layer is superimposed on the front side of the second layer. and a second compositing process for transmitting the display area of the first image layer that corresponds to the display area where the second effect is executed.

According to gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines J1 to J7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display image displayed on the display means is created by the display image creation means by combining at least a first layer in which the first effect is displayed and a second layer in which the second effect is displayed. . Then, the first layer is superimposed on the front side of the second layer by the first compositing process, and the display area of the first layer corresponding to the display area where the second effect is performed is transparent by the second compositing process. be done.

Thereby, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed simultaneously on the display means, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine J8, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed for each of the plurality of small areas. The game machine J9.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J8, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second layer, the display area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the second effect is displayed in each of the plurality of small areas.

As a result, there is no need to change the display content of the second layer according to the area where the second effect is displayed, and the display area of the second layer that corresponds to the display area of the transparent first layer. Only the displayed second performance becomes visible to the player. Therefore, the first effect and the second effect can be easily displayed simultaneously on the display means, and there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

<Characteristic K group> (Changing the production navigation midway through)
a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player when the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result; and a result of discrimination by the discriminating means. In a gaming machine, the game machine is equipped with a performance execution means for executing a performance based on the performance, and a display means for displaying a performance mode based on the performance executed by the performance execution means. A period information display means for displaying specific period information indicating a specific period of the performance, a progress information display means for displaying progress information indicating an elapsed period since the start of the specific period, and information displayed by the progress information display means. a specific performance mode information display means for displaying specific performance mode information indicating a specific performance mode to be given to a player when the progress information satisfied a predetermined condition; and the progress displayed by the progress information display means. A gaming machine K1 comprising: performance mode changing means for changing the specific performance mode information based on information.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a time gauge that displays the progress of the performance to display the progress of the performance to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-6280). In such conventional gaming machines, the player predicts the lottery result while watching the progress of the progress meter and plays the game. Furthermore, since the performance continues, there is a problem in that the player's motivation to enjoy the game by looking at the progress meter decreases.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and if the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, the benefit granting means awards a benefit to the player. The performance execution means executes a performance based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and the performance mode based on the performance is displayed on the display means. Then, the period information display means displays specific period information indicating a specific period of the performance executed by the performance execution means, and the progress information display means displays progress information indicating the elapsed period since the start of the specific period. . Further, specific performance mode information indicating a specific performance mode to be given to the player when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed by the specific performance mode information display means, and the progress information The specific performance mode information is varied by the performance mode variable means based on the progress information displayed by the display means.

As a result, the specific performance mode information indicating the content of a specific production mode that is given when the progress information indicating the elapsed period since the start of the specific period satisfies a predetermined condition can be changed based on the progress information. It becomes possible. This has the effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the specific performance mode information display means displays, as the specific performance mode information, a specific performance mode indicating the specific performance mode and a plurality of pseudo specific performance modes different from the specific performance mode. A gaming machine K2, characterized in that the performance mode variable means changes the pseudo specific performance mode of the specific performance mode information.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific performance mode display means displays, as the specific performance mode information, a specific performance mode indicating the specific performance mode and a plurality of pseudo specific performance modes different from the specific performance mode, and displays the specific performance mode. Among the information, the pseudo specific performance mode is varied by the performance mode variable means.

As a result, the pseudo-specific performance mode that is displayed in a pseudo manner is varied based on the progress information, so it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the displayed content based on the progress information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, an expectation that can be displayed when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition is the expectation level in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine K3 comprising: a degree display means, and the performance mode variable means is capable of changing the specific performance mode information when the progress information satisfies the specific display condition.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the progress information displayed by the progress information display means satisfies a specific display condition, the progress information displayed by the progress information display means can be displayed by the expectation state display means, and the progress information is displayed by the progress information display means. When a specific display condition is satisfied, the specific performance mode information can be changed by the performance mode variable means.

This makes it possible to perform both the display of expectation level and the change of specific performance mode information at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

A gaming machine K4, which is any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, and includes a specific period extension means for extending the specific period when a predetermined performance mode is given as the specific performance mode.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, when a predetermined production mode is given as a specific production mode, the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. , it becomes possible to set a specific period according to the performance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play the game by looking at the progress information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine K4 is characterized by having extension period information display means for displaying the extension period extended by the specific period extension means using at least a part of the specific period information displayed by the specific period information display means. The game machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is displayed by the extension period information display means using at least a part of the specific period information. This has the effect that the capacity of display data for displaying the extension period can be reduced.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, at least a part of the elapsed information displayed by the elapsed information display means is used to generate elapsed information indicating the elapsed period since the start of the extended period extended by the specified period extension means. A gaming machine K6 characterized in that it has an extension progress information display means for displaying extension progress information.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4 or K5, the elapsed period since the start of the extension period extended by the specific period extension means is calculated using at least a part of the elapsed information. Since the information is displayed by the information display means, there is an effect that the capacity of display data for displaying the progress information of the extension period can be reduced.

Any one of the gaming machines K4 to K6 includes an expectation level display conversion means capable of converting the expectation level displayed by the expectation level display means when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means. The gaming machine K7 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K4 to K6, when the specific period is extended by the specific period extension means, the expectation level displayed by the expectation level displaying unit is converted by the expectation level converting unit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the specific period to be extended while playing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K7, the specific period information used when the extension period information display means displays the extension period includes the specific display for the expectation display means to display the expectation level. The condition includes a period during which the condition can be satisfied, and when the extended progress information display means indicates that the extended progress information exceeds the established period, the expectation level is converted by the expectation level conversion means. The gaming machine K8 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the extension period information display means displays the extension period, specific period information is used that includes a period during which a specific display condition for the expectation display means to display the expectation level can be satisfied. When the extension progress information has passed the established period, the expectation level is converted by the expectation level converting means.

As a result, when the expectation level is converted by the expectation level conversion means, it is possible to use the same display as the expectation level display displayed during the period in which the display by the period information display means and the progress information display means is being executed. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly display to the player that the expectation level will be converted.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the elapsed information display means displays a time gauge that moves on the time gauge. A gaming machine K9 is characterized in that it displays a human body.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the period information display means displays a time gauge indicating a period as the specific period information, and the elapsed information display means displays a moving object moving on the elapsed information time gauge.

Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the specific period using the time gauge, and to easily grasp the elapsed information based on the movement status of the moving body. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K9, the expectation level display means displays the expectation level when the condition is met when the moving object reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the extension period information display means The extension period is displayed using a part of the time gauge, and the extension progress information display means displays the extension progress information by moving the mobile object to a predetermined position on the time gauge. A gaming machine K10 characterized in that it displays a display.

According to the gaming machine K10, the condition is satisfied when the moving object reaches a specific position on the time gauge, and the expectation level is displayed by the expectation level display means. Then, the extension period information display means displays the extension period using a part of the time gauge. Further, the extended progress information display means displays the extended progress information by moving the mobile object to a predetermined position on the time gauge.

This makes it possible to display the extension period using the time gauge and the moving object. Therefore, the extension period can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. Furthermore, since the display data for displaying the specific period can be used as the display data for displaying the extended period, there is an effect that the data capacity can be reduced.

A gaming machine K11 in the gaming machine K9 or K10, wherein the time gauge has a plurality of routes along which the movable body can move.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K9 or K10, since the moving object has a plurality of routes along which the moving object can move, the player can predict which route the moving object will take. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the movable body to a position where the movable body can pass through a branch position where the time gauge branches into the plurality of routes. Game machine K12.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K11, the extension progress information display means moves the moving object to a position where the moving object can pass through a branching position where the time gauge branches into a plurality of routes. If the specific period is extended, the player can once again predict which route the moving object will take. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics L group> (Variable each production mode of continuous slot production)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a performance execution means that can execute a performance based on the operation on the operation means, and a display means that displays a performance mode based on the performance executed by the performance execution means; and the performance execution means executes a specific performance that can be executed multiple times within a specific period, at least an operation performance in which an operation validity period is set during which operation on the operation means is determined to be valid. Among the plurality of operation performances executed during the specific performance, based on information regarding an operation for at least one of the operation performances, the performance mode changing means changes the performance mode of another operation performance. A gaming machine L1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player, and by operating the operating means, an effect is executed in which predetermined symbols are aligned (for example, 2012-223651).

In such conventional gaming machines, a valid period is set for validating the operation of the operating means, and a specific performance is only executed by operating the operating means within the valid period, and the game becomes monotonous. As a result, there was a problem in that players quickly became bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine L1, a performance is executed by the performance execution means based on the operation on the operation means operable by the player, and a performance form based on the performance executed by the performance execution means is displayed on the display means. Is displayed. Furthermore, the performance execution means executes a specific performance that can be executed multiple times within a specific period, and has an operation performance set with an operation validity period in which at least the operation on the operation means is determined to be valid. Based on information regarding the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation performances executed during the performance, the performance mode of the other operation performance is varied by the performance mode variable means.

Thereby, in a specific performance in which a plurality of operation performances are executed, the performance mode of other operation performances can be varied based on the operation content of the operating means in one operation performance. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, it is possible to suppress early boredom with the games.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the performance mode variable means changes the operation validity period of the other operation performance.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the effective period of operation of other operation performances can be varied by the performance mode variable means, so that it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the presentation mode variable means changes the number of times of the other operation presentation.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the number of other operation performances can be varied by the performance mode variable means, so that it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game early.

In any of gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation performance is to execute a symbol performance that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation validity period, and A gaming machine L4 characterized in that it has a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege to a player when the symbols stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation productions in a specific production form a predetermined combination.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, a symbol performance that dynamically displays a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the operating means is operated during the valid operation period is executed as an operation performance, and a symbol that is stopped and displayed by a plurality of operation performances in a specific performance is displayed in a predetermined manner. When a combination is made, a privilege is awarded to the player by the privilege awarding means.

Thereby, it is possible to make the user pay attention to the symbols that are stopped and displayed individually in a plurality of operation performances executed during a specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early during the period when the specific performance is being executed.

Any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 has an operation timing determination means for determining the timing at which the operating means is operated during the operation validity period set for the operation performance, and the performance mode variable means A gaming machine L5 characterized in that the performance mode of the other operation performance is varied based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means in one operation performance.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation timing determining means determines the timing at which the operating means is operated during the valid operation period set in the operation effect. Then, based on the determination result of the operation timing determining means in one operation performance, the performance mode of the other operation performance is varied by the performance mode variable means.

Thereby, depending on the operation timing of the operating means in one operation performance, it is possible to vary the performance mode of another operation performance. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, it is possible to suppress early boredom with the games.

In the gaming machine L5, the performance mode variable means determines that the operation means is operated within a predetermined period after the operation validity period of the one operation performance starts by the operation timing determination means. , a game machine L6 that increases the number of times of the other operation effects.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated within a predetermined period after the operation validity period of one operation performance started, the performance mode variable means determines the number of times of the other operation performance. will be increased.

This makes it possible to increase the number of operation performances by operating the operation means early. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to operate the operating means with enthusiasm, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L5 or L6, the performance execution means is capable of executing the other operation performance a plurality of times, and the operation timing determining means determines that the performance execution means is capable of executing the other operation performance after the operation validity period of the first operation performance has started. If it is determined that the operation means has been operated for a period exceeding a predetermined period, a first operation performance is executed as the other operation performance, and the operation timing determination means determines that the operation of the first operation performance is valid. If it is determined that the operating means was operated within a predetermined period after the start of the period, it is determined that the operating means was operated within a predetermined period after the operation validity period of the first operation effect started. A game machine L7 is characterized in that it executes the same number of operation effects as the case.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L5 or L6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when another operation performance is executed by the performance execution means multiple times, and the operation timing determination means determines that the operation means has been operated for a predetermined period after the start of the operation validity period of the first operation performance. Then, the first operation performance is executed as another operation performance by the performance execution means. If it is determined that the operating means has been operated within a predetermined period after the start of the operation validity period of the first operation presentation, then within the predetermined period after the start of the operation validity period of the first operation presentation. The operation performance is executed the same number of times as when it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

As a result, even if it is not possible to operate the operating means within a predetermined period in one operation presentation, by operating the operating means within the predetermined period during the first operation presentation to be performed next, one operation can be performed. It becomes possible to perform the operation performance the same number of times as when the operation means is operated within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of operation presentations to a player who did not notice that the operation presentation was executed or who was unable to operate the operation means early because he/she was paying too much attention to the operation presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

In any of gaming machines L1 to L7, the performance execution means executes a normal performance in which the operation validity period is not set when the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period of the one operation performance. A game machine L8 characterized in that it is a game machine that executes games.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines L1 to L7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period of one operation performance, the performance execution means executes the normal performance in which the operation validity period is not set.

As a result, for players who did not operate the operating means during the valid operation period, that is, players who do not like the operation effects, the player's desire to play decreases by repeatedly performing the operation effects. It has the effect of suppressing the

A gaming machine L9 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines L4 to L8, the greater the number of times the operation performance is executed by the performance execution means, the more easily the bonus is awarded by the bonus granting means.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L4 to L8, the greater the number of operation performances performed by the performance execution means, the more likely the bonus is granted by the bonus granting means, which increases motivation for players. This has the effect of allowing the player to operate the operating means, thereby preventing the player's desire to play from decreasing.

<Feature M group> (Changes the mode of slot performance based on the remaining period of operation validity period)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation validity period setting means for setting an operation validity period for validly determining an operation on the operation means, and a performance execution means for executing a performance for which the operation validity period is set. , and display means for displaying a performance mode based on the performance executed by the performance execution means, wherein the performance execution means dynamically displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode. and executes a dynamic display effect in which predetermined identification information from among the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed by operating the operating means when the operation validity period is set. and when the operation validity period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode in the operation validity period is changed to a variable dynamic display mode for dynamic display. A gaming machine M1 characterized by:

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player, and by operating the operating means, an effect is executed in which predetermined symbols are aligned (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012- 223651).

In such conventional gaming machines, a valid period is set for validating the operation of the operating means, and a specific performance is only executed by operating the operating means within the valid period, and the game becomes monotonous. As a result, there was a problem in that players quickly became bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the operation validity period during which the operation on the operation means that can be operated by the player is determined to be valid is set by the operation validity period setting means, and the performance for which the operation validity period is set is executed. The performance is executed by the means, and the performance mode based on the performance is displayed on the display means. Then, the performance execution means dynamically displays the plurality of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and when the operation validity period is set, the plurality of identification information dynamically displayed by operating the operation means. When a dynamic display effect that stops displaying predetermined identification information from information is executed and the operation valid period in the dynamic display effect reaches a predetermined remaining period, the dynamic display mode during the operation valid period is changed. Displayed dynamically.

As a result, the dynamic display mode that is dynamically displayed is changed depending on the remaining period of the operation validity period during which the operation on the operation means is valid, so it is possible to have the player operate the operation means at various timings. becomes. Therefore, since it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, it is possible to suppress early boredom with the games.

In the gaming machine M1, the performance execution means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time, and the performance execution means dynamically displays the plurality of pieces of identification information in a predetermined dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time. a remaining period determining means for determining a period; and when the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is within the predetermined remaining period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to the variable dynamic display mode. A gaming machine M2 characterized by having a dynamic display mode variable means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined dynamic display manner by the performance execution means, and the remaining period of the valid operation period in the dynamic display performance is determined by the remaining period determination means. Ru. When the remaining period determining means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined remaining period, at least a part of the predetermined dynamic display mode is changed to a variable dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode changing means.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed when the valid operation period reaches a predetermined remaining period, so there is no need to set the dynamic display mode corresponding to the valid operation period in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity when executing the dynamic display mode can be reduced.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the variable dynamic display mode is configured to A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the specific identification information among the identification information has a dynamic display mode that makes it easier to identify than other identification information.

According to the gaming machine M3, when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed by the dynamic display effect by the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect is executed as the variable dynamic display mode by displaying the specific identification information among the plurality of identification information. This results in a dynamic display mode in which the information is easier to identify than other identification information.

As a result, the specific identification information that causes a specific effect to be executed when the display is stopped becomes a dynamic display mode that is easier to identify than other identification information, which motivates the player to operate the operating means. It is possible to increase it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine M3, the performance execution means executes a continuous dynamic display performance in which the dynamic display performance is set a plurality of times, and the specific performance execution means executes a continuous dynamic display performance during the continuous dynamic display performance. The specific effect is executed when the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects satisfies a predetermined condition. A gaming machine M4 characterized in that it has a dynamic display mode that dynamically displays a variable symbol that satisfies the predetermined condition by being stopped and displayed in a display performance.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the continuous dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display effect is set a plurality of times is executed by the effect execution means, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in the plurality of dynamic display effects executed during the continuous dynamic display effect. When the combination satisfies a predetermined condition, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect. Then, the variable dynamic display mode becomes a dynamic display mode in which a variable symbol that satisfies a predetermined condition is dynamically displayed by being stopped and displayed in one dynamic display performance.

As a result, even if the remaining period of the valid operation period becomes a period in which it is difficult to execute multiple dynamic display effects, a variable symbol that satisfies the predetermined conditions will be dynamically displayed in one dynamic display effect. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to operate the operating means during the continuous dynamic display performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the operation validity period setting means sets the operation validity period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed, and the remaining period determination means includes: A gaming machine M5 characterized in that it is determined whether the remaining period is the predetermined remaining period based on the remaining number of operations in the valid operation period.

According to gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines M2 to M4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation validity period setting means sets the operation validity period a plurality of times during the period in which the dynamic display effect is being executed. Then, a predetermined remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means based on the remaining number of operations in the effective period.

As a result, the dynamic display mode is changed to a variable dynamic display mode based on the number of remaining operation validity periods, so that the player is encouraged to operate the operation means voluntarily during the remaining operation validity period. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, an arrangement information storage means for storing arrangement information in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined arrangement; a start position setting means for setting a start position of dynamic display, the predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position of the array information, and the start position setting means is configured to set a start position of the dynamic display, and the start position setting means is configured to set a start position of the dynamic display. A first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display means, and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display means within the set operational validity period. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that it is possible to set the following.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the following effects are achieved. That is, array information in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are set in a predetermined array is stored in the array information storage means, and the start position of dynamic display using the array information stored in the array information storage means is determined by the start position setting means. Set by. Then, predetermined identification information is set at a predetermined position in the array information. A first start position where the predetermined position of the array information is likely to be displayed on the display means within the operation validity period set by the operation validity period setting means, and a second start position where the predetermined position of the array information is difficult to be displayed on the display means. is set by the start position setting means.

This makes it possible to perform dynamic display in which predetermined identification information is more likely to be displayed on the display means and dynamic display in which it is less likely to be displayed, using the same array information. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of display data for executing dynamic display can be reduced.

A gaming machine M7 in any one of the gaming machines M1 to M6, wherein the effect execution means includes a dynamic display speed variable means for varying the speed of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M6, the dynamic display speed variable means varies the dynamic display speed, so that the number of times the predetermined identification information is displayed within the valid operation period is reduced. It becomes possible to make the change variable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of performances to the players, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

<Feature N group> (Determines the next button effect based on the content of the button operation)
An operating means that can be operated by a player, a signal outputting means that outputs a signal based on the operation when the operating means is operated, a discriminating means that discriminates the signal output by the signal outputting means, and an operation performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation performance mode based on a determination result by the determination means; and a determination result determined by the discrimination means during a period in which the operation performance mode is being executed by the operation performance execution means. and a determination means for determining the second operation performance mode, when the second operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means within a period in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation performance mode is executed. A gaming machine N1 characterized in that it has an execution control means that switches the second operation performance mode to a specific operation performance mode and executes it based on a determination result by the determination means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as an operation performance using an operation button, there is an operation in which the operation button is actually pressed, and an operation in which a repeated tapping operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period of time. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

In such conventional game machines, in an operation performance that requires operating an operation button multiple times (for example, a continuous hit performance), the operation button is actually pressed multiple times, or the operation button is continuously pressed for a predetermined period of time or more. , it was possible to enjoy the operation effect by automatically performing a continuous tap operation, but when the operation effect is executed multiple times in a row, during the operation effect that is executed first. There is a problem in that the executed operation on the frame button may be executed in an operation performance that is executed later, and the performance effect of the operation performance that is executed later is reduced.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, the operation effects for operating the operation buttons include the above-mentioned operation effects (repeat effect) and operation effects for operating the operation buttons at a predetermined timing (e.g., timing push effect). Some devices have operation effects that allow you to perform different operations. In this case, if the timing push effect is executed after the repeated hit effect, the timing push effect will start while the operation performed during the continuous hit effect (repeated hit operation) is being continued. However, there is a problem in that the operation button is operated without aiming at the predetermined timing during the timing press performance, which reduces the performance effect of the timing press performance.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, performances are generally executed based on the variation period of special symbols, so it is necessary to execute multiple operation productions within the limited period of variation of special symbols. To do this, it was necessary to shorten the interval between multiple operation performances. Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it has not been possible to solve the problem simply by increasing the interval between executions of a plurality of operation effects.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine N1, when the operating means operable by the player is operated, a signal based on the operation is outputted by the signal outputting means and is discriminated by the discriminating means. A predetermined operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. During the period in which the operation performance mode is being executed by the operation performance execution means, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means. If the second operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation performance mode is executed, the execution control means controls the determination result by the determination means. Based on this, the second operation presentation mode is switched to a specific operation presentation mode and executed.

As a result, if the second operation performance mode is executed within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation performance mode is executed, while the first operation performance mode is being executed, It becomes possible to switch the second operation performance mode to a specific operation performance mode and execute it based on the operation content of the operation means performed by the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine N1, the determining means determines that the determination result determined by the determining means during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed is different from at least a first determination result. When the determination means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result, the execution control means determines the first determination result as the specific operation presentation mode. A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it causes a corresponding operation performance mode to be executed.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are achieved. That is, during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means to be a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result. . When the determination means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result, the execution control means executes the operation performance mode based on the first determination result as a specific operation performance mode.

Thereby, it becomes possible to execute, as the second operation performance mode, an operation performance mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation performance mode is being executed. Therefore, when the operation performance mode is executed continuously, the performance effect does not deteriorate. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance effect by making the operation performance mode consecutive can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times, and the execution control means determines that the operation of the operation means has been executed a plurality of times as the specific operation presentation mode. A gaming machine N3 is characterized in that it switches to an operation performance mode in which an operating means is operated multiple times.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination means determines as a first determination result that the operation of the operating means has been executed a plurality of times, and the execution control means switches the specific operation presentation mode to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is operated multiple times. It will be done.

Thereby, when the player operates the operating means multiple times in the first operation presentation mode, an operation presentation mode that causes the player to operate the operating means multiple times is executed as the second operation presentation mode. Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operating means, the performance effect of the second operation performance mode does not decrease, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play. .

In the gaming machine N3, during a period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, an operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operating means is operated, and a number of times counted by the operation number measuring means are determined. and a number-of-times determination means, wherein the determination means determines the first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result, based on the determination result of the number-of-times determination means. Gaming machine N4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N3, the following effects are achieved. That is, during the period in which the first operation performance mode is being executed, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the number of operations measuring means, and the number of times measured by the number of operations measuring means is determined by the number of times determining means. . Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines a first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result.

Thereby, it becomes possible to switch the operation presentation mode of the second operation presentation mode based on the number of times the operating means is operated during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed.

In the gaming machine N4, the determining means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result when the determination result of the number of times determining means is determined to be greater than a predetermined number of times. .

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, when the determination result of the number of times determining means is determined to be greater than the predetermined number of times, the determining means determines the first determination result. As a result, when the operating means is operated more than a predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation performance mode is being executed, the operation performance mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed as the second operation performance mode. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue to operate the operating means voluntarily.

In the gaming machine N4, the determining means determines the third determination result when the determination result of the number of times determining means is determined to be less than a predetermined number of times. .

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, when the determination result of the number of times determination means is determined to be less than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the third determination result. As a result, if the operating means is operated less than the predetermined number of times during the period in which the first operation performance mode is being executed, the operation performance mode corresponding to the first determination result is set as the second operation performance mode. You can prevent it from being executed.

In the gaming machine N2, the determination means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period, and the execution control means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period of time, and the execution control means determines that the operation of the operation means has been continuously executed for a predetermined period of time. The gaming machine N7 is characterized in that the gaming machine N7 switches to an operation performance mode in which the operating means is continuously operated.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determining means determines as the first determination result that the operation of the operating means has been continuously performed for a predetermined period of time. Then, the execution control means switches the specific operation performance mode to an operation performance mode in which the operating means is continuously operated.

As a result, when the player continuously operates the operating means for a predetermined period in the first operation presentation mode, the operation presentation mode that causes the player to continuously operate the operating means is executed as the second operation presentation mode. . Therefore, even if the player continues to operate the operating means, the performance effect of the second operation performance mode does not decrease, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play. .

Any of the gaming machines N1 to N7 includes a notification means for notifying that the specific operation performance mode is executed by the execution control means, and the notification means is configured to notify that the second operation performance mode is executed. A gaming machine N8 is characterized in that the game machine N8 is configured to notify that the specific operation performance mode will be executed until the end of the game.

According to gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines N1 to N7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the notifying means notifies that the specific operation performance mode is executed by the execution control means before the second operation performance mode is executed. Thereby, even if a specific operation performance mode is executed as the second operation performance mode, the player can play the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In the gaming machine N8, the determination means executes the determination while the first operation performance mode is being executed, and the notification means executes the determination after the determination by the determination means is executed. A gaming machine N9 is characterized in that it notifies that the specific operation performance mode will be executed until one operation performance mode ends.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N8, the following effects are achieved. That is, while the first operation performance mode is being executed, the determination by the determination means is executed, and from the time the determination is executed until the end of the first operation performance mode, the specific operation performance mode is The notification means notifies that the process will be executed.

This has the effect that it is possible to reliably notify that a specific operation performance mode will be executed before the second operation performance mode is started.

In the gaming machine N8 or N9, a mode display means for displaying the operation performance mode executed by the operation performance execution means, an operation content display means for displaying the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation performance mode; A gaming machine N10, characterized in that the notification means displays the operation contents of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation performance mode by the operation contents display means.

According to the gaming machine N10, the operation performance mode executed by the operation performance execution means is displayed by the mode display means, and the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the operation performance mode is displayed by the operation content display means. Then, the operation content display means displays the operation content of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation presentation mode.

As a result, the operation contents of the operation means corresponding to the specific operation performance mode are displayed, so that the player can play the game without being confused. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N10, the operation performance execution means is capable of executing a continuous operation performance mode in which the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode are executed consecutively. A gaming machine N11 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine N11, the continuous operation performance mode in which the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode are executed consecutively is executed by the operation performance execution means. This makes it possible to perform a performance in which the player can operate the operating means in a short period of time, and has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine N11 has a performance result display means for displaying the performance result of the operation performance mode executed by the operation performance execution means, and the performance result display means is configured to display the performance result of the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode. A gaming machine N12 characterized in that the performance result is displayed based on an operation performance mode.

According to the gaming machine N12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect result of the operation effect mode executed by the operation effect execution means is displayed by the effect result display means. The performance results are displayed based on the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode.

Thereby, it becomes possible to create a performance that associates the first operation performance mode and the second operation performance mode, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic P group> (Change the interval of automatic continuous hits)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation of the operation means, a signal discrimination means that discriminates a signal output by the signal output means, and the signal. a first setting means for setting a first effect mode in which a specific effect is executed when a discrimination result by the discrimination means satisfies a first condition; and a signal discrimination device in a state where the first effect mode is set. a specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect for each first period when a determination result by the means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition; and a case where the first effect mode is executed. a period variable setting means for variably setting an execution period of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means to a second period different from the first period, based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition; A gaming machine P1 characterized in that it has the following.

Here, in some game machines such as pachinko machines, as an operation effect using an operation button, a continuous hit operation is automatically executed by pressing the operation button for a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-180364 Publication No.).

In such conventional gaming machines, when a player needs to operate an operation button multiple times (for example, a continuous hit effect), the player can enjoy the continuous hit effect simply by continuously pressing the operation button. However, in operation performances other than the continuous hit performance (for example, timing push performance), the automatic repeated hit operation is executed, which impairs the operation performance other than the continuous hit performance, and the player gets tired of the game early. There was a problem with putting it away.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, a signal is output by the signal output means based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player, and the output signal is discriminated by the signal discrimination means. Then, when the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies the first condition, the first setting means sets a first production mode in which a specific production is executed, and in a state where the first production mode is set. When the discrimination result by the signal discrimination means satisfies a second condition different from the first condition, the specific effect execution means executes a specific effect every first period. Further, when the first performance mode is being executed, the period variable setting means sets the execution period of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means to the first period. are variably set in different second periods.

Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the intervals of the specific effects executed by the specific effects execution means. Therefore, various performances can be executed using the operating means while the specific performance execution means is being executed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting tired of the game early.

The gaming machine P1 includes a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege granting means for awarding a privilege to a player when the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a predetermined discrimination result. A gaming machine P2, wherein a predetermined variable condition is satisfied based on the result of the determination by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination means executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and when the result of the determination is a predetermined determination result, the benefit granting means grants the player a benefit. Then, a predetermined variable condition is established based on the result of the determination by the determining means.

Thereby, it becomes possible to understand the determination result of the determining means based on the execution period of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means. Therefore, the player will be forced to pay close attention to a specific performance executed based on the player's operation, and this has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early.

A gaming machine P3, which is the gaming machine P1 or P2, further comprising a notification means for notifying that the second condition is satisfied by the signal discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the notifying means notifies that the second condition is satisfied by the signal discriminating means. When the conditions are met, there is an effect that even if the execution period of a specific performance is changed, the player will not feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine P3 is characterized in that the notification means is for guiding the execution period set by the variable period setting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P3, the notification means informs the player of the execution period set by the period variable setting means, so that the player is informed of the timing when a specific performance will be executed next. It becomes possible to provide guidance. Therefore, even if the execution period of a particular performance is changed, there is an effect that the player will not feel uncomfortable.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, a valid period setting means for setting a valid period for validly determining the operation of the operating means, and a remaining period for determining the remaining period of the valid period set by the valid period setting means. and the signal determining means determines that the second condition is satisfied when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determining period, and the signal determining means determines that the second condition is satisfied when the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determining period, It is characterized by comprising a determination period variable means for changing the first determination period to a second determination period shorter than the first determination period when the determination means determines that the remaining period is a predetermined period. A gaming machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the validity period for determining whether the operation of the operating means is valid is set by the validity period setting means, and the remaining period of the validity period is determined by the remaining period determination means. If the operating means is continuously operated for a predetermined first determination period, the signal determination means determines that the second condition is satisfied, and the remaining period determination means determines that the remaining period is the predetermined period. The first discrimination period is changed to a second discrimination period shorter than the first discrimination period by the discrimination period variable means.

As a result, when the remaining period of the validity period in which the operation of the operating means is determined to be valid reaches the predetermined period, it is possible to make it easier to execute the specific performance that has been changed in the second period, thereby increasing the interest of the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

A gaming machine P6 in the gaming machine P5, wherein the predetermined period determined by the remaining period determining means is a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determination period.

According to the gaming machine P6, since the remaining period determining means determines a period in which the remaining period is shorter than the first determining period as the predetermined period, even if the valid period is in a state where there is little remaining, the specified period is changed to the second period. This has the effect that the effect can be enhanced until the end of the validity period.

<Feature Q group> (Connecting multiple button operation effects)
An operating means that can be operated by a player, a determining means for determining whether the operating means has been operated, and a validity period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is effectively determined by the determining means. , a notification means for notifying an operation notification mode for causing a player to operate the operation means, and an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect based on the determination of the operation of the operation means by the discrimination means; When the validity period setting means sets at least the first validity period and the second validity period under predetermined conditions, specifying the validity period across the first validity period and the second validity period. A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that it has a notification control means for causing the notification means to notify the operation notification mode.

Here, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines that can perform a plurality of operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-180364).

In such conventional gaming machines, multiple operation effects are executed, which increases the opportunity for the player to operate the operation buttons and increases the player's desire to play.However, the multiple operation effects are frequently set. If this happens, the player will have to frequently repeat the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the button, resulting in a problem that the player's desire to play will decrease.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, a valid period is set during which the operation of the operation button can be accepted, and if it is within the valid period, the performance will be executed based on the operation of the operation button, and even if it is outside the valid period, that is, the invalid period. For example, the game is configured so that effects based on the operation of the operation buttons are not executed, so when the player operates the operation buttons multiple times, some of the multiple operations are performed during the invalid period. However, there was a problem in that the effect was not executed even though the operation button was operated, resulting in a decrease in the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine Q1, the validity period is set as the validity period during which the determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated, and the determination means effectively determines that the operation of the operation means has been operated. The notifying device notifies the player of an operation notification mode that is set by the notifying device and allows the player to operate the operating device. Further, the operation effect is executed by the operation effect execution means based on the operation of the operation means being determined by the discrimination means.

Then, when the validity period setting means sets at least the first validity period and the second validity period under predetermined conditions, the notification control means causes the notification control means to set the validity period over the first validity period and the second validity period. to cause the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when the first validity period and the second validity period are set under predetermined conditions, a specific operation notification mode is notified across the first validity period and the second validity period, so that multiple It becomes possible to notify that the validity period is continuous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping operating the operating means between the first valid period and the second valid period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

Note that, as a predetermined condition for setting the first valid period and the second valid period in this case, it is desirable that the set interval is short (for example, within 5 seconds). By setting such conditions, it is possible to further suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

Furthermore, as a method for determining whether or not the first validity period and the second validity period are set according to predetermined conditions, a method of determining the actual period may be used, or a method in which multiple operation effects are set in advance Alternatively, a method may be used that determines that the settings are made using the specified combination.

Furthermore, as the operation performance in the gaming machine Q1, for example, the display mode displayed on the display device installed in the gaming machine, the driving mode of the driving object installed in the gaming machine, and the output from the audio output device installed in the gaming machine Possible examples include a sound mode in which the game machine is played, and a light emission mode output from a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine. In this way, it is sufficient that the player who operated the operating means can recognize the performance executed based on the determination of the operation on the operating means.

In addition, the operating means in the gaming machine Q1 may be anything that can be operated by the player, such as a button device that the player can press or a button device that detects the player's contact or proximity and reacts. Possible examples include a sensor device, a dial device that can be rotated by the player, and a lever device that can be operated forward, backward, left, and right by the player.

A gaming machine Q2, which is the gaming machine Q1, further comprising notification mode setting means for setting the specific operation notification mode based on the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, a specific operation notification mode is set by the notification mode setting means based on the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means, so that the first valid period It becomes possible to set a specific operation notification mode to be notified over the second valid period based on the operation effect executed during the first valid period or the second valid period.

This has the effect that it is possible to notify the player of a specific operation notification mode that is notified over the first validity period and the second validity period in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, an extended performance mode based on the first operation performance that is executed when the first validity period is set. A game machine Q3 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2, the notification mode setting means provides a first operation performance that is executed when the first validity period is set as a specific operation notification mode. Since the extension presentation mode based on the above is set, it is possible to make it appear as if the first valid period continues until the second valid period starts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, the notification mode setting means sets, as the specific operation notification mode, a preliminary performance mode based on the second operation performance that is executed when the second validity period is set. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that it is a machine that allows settings.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q2 or Q3, a second operation is performed when a second validity period is set as a specific operation notification mode by the notification mode setting means. Since the pre-presentation mode is set based on the production, it is possible to make it appear as if the second validity period is set continuously with the first validity period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to further suppress a decrease in his or her desire to play, which is caused by frequently repeating the act of operating the operation button and the act of not operating the operation button.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q4, during an invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means is simulated. A gaming machine Q5 characterized in that it has a pseudo effect execution means for executing.

According to gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, the following effects are achieved. That is, during the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, the operation performance executed by the operation performance execution means is executed in a pseudo manner by the pseudo performance execution means.

As a result, by displaying the operation effect in a pseudo manner, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the first validity period and the second validity period are set consecutively, and to press the operation button. This has the effect that it is possible to further suppress a decrease in the desire to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating and the act of not operating.

Note that, as the pseudo operation performance in the gaming machine Q5, it is preferable to perform a performance in which the performance mode is variable. As a result, in the period between the first validity period and the second validity period, when an invalid period is actually set, a player who has continuously operated the operation means is prohibited from operating the operation means. This has the effect of making the player think that the performance mode is variable, and increasing the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q3, it is possible to execute a pseudo operation effect as if the operation effect executed during the first validity period is extended, and it is possible for the player to This has the effect of providing a more easily understandable presentation.

Further, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q4, a pseudo operation performance can be executed so that the operation performance executed in the second validity period is executed continuously with the first validity period. This has the effect of making it possible to provide easier-to-understand effects to players.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the notification control means determines the specific operation notification mode based on the determination that a predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first validity period. A gaming machine Q6, characterized in that the notification means makes a notification.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the determination means determining that a predetermined operation condition is satisfied during the first valid period, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, even if the first validity period and the second validity period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operation means during the first validity period, a specific operation notification will be sent. The mode is not reported. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress unnecessary notification of a specific operation notification mode to a player who does not like the operation performance, and there is an effect that a decrease in the desire to play can be suppressed.

Note that even if the first validity period and the second validity period are set at short intervals, if the player does not operate the operating means during the first validity period, the above-mentioned problem, that is, will occur. , the problem that the player's desire to play decreases due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operation means and the act of not operating it does not occur, so even if a specific operation notification mode is not notified, the player's desire to play is reduced. There is no decline. Rather, it has the effect of being able to reduce the processing for notifying a specific operation notification mode, and also being able to provide the player with the performance that is performed in the normal state.

As the predetermined operating condition for the gaming machine Q6, it is preferable to set, for example, that the operating means has been operated a plurality of times during the first valid period. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who is actively operating the operating means from losing his or her desire to play. Further, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the first validity period is provided, and the operating means is operated in a state where the remaining period determining means determines that a predetermined remaining period (for example, within 5 seconds remaining). A state where a means is provided to determine the period until the second validity period starts, and a predetermined remaining period (for example, within 10 seconds remaining) is determined by the means. The operation condition may be set such that the operation means is operated in . Even with this configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play due to frequent repetition of the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine Q6, the determining means includes an operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the operating means is operated, and the operation number measuring means measures a predetermined number of operations during the first validity period. The gaming machine Q7 is characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied when the game machine is played.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the operation number measuring means included in the determining means. The operation condition is established when the number of operations measured by the operation number measuring means reaches a predetermined number during the first validity period.

Thereby, a specific operation notification mode is notified when the operation is performed a predetermined number of times during the first validity period. Therefore, for example, when an operation effect that causes the operation means to be repeatedly hit is executed during the first validity period, a specific operation notification mode may be notified to a player who is actively operating the operation means. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who is actively operating the operating means from frequently stopping the operation of the operating means, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play. The effect is that it can be done.

Furthermore, according to the configuration including the gaming machine Q5, by causing the player to execute an operation performance whose performance mode is frequently changed as a simulated operation performance, the player can This has the effect of being able to prevent people from feeling uncomfortable. Further, it is preferable that the pseudo-effect execution means is able to execute a plurality of operation effects corresponding to the number of times the effect mode is varied, and that the operation effect is set based on the number of times the measurement operation means is operated by the operation count measurement means. .

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. Machine Q8.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode based on the end timing of the first valid period. , it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the second validity period has been set until the first validity period ends. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect due to the player's understanding of the operation performance to be executed later.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q8, when at least the first validity period and the second validity period are set by the validity period setting means under the predetermined conditions, the first validity period and A gaming machine Q9 characterized in that it has a validity period changing means for changing the validity period so that the validity period is continuous with the second validity period.

According to gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when at least the first validity period and the second validity period are set under predetermined conditions by the validity period setting means, the validity period is set such that the first validity period and the second validity period are continuous. The validity period is changed by the change means.

As a result, when a plurality of validity periods are set, it is possible to make the plurality of validity periods continuous. In other words, since it is possible to eliminate the invalid period set between the first valid period and the second valid period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play due to the effect not changing despite operating the operating means. The effect is that it can be done.

Here, making the valid periods in the gaming machine Q9 consecutive means that a period is set between the first valid period and the second valid period in which the performance does not change even if the player operates the operating means. The validity period may be changed so that the first validity period and the second validity period are actually connected, or the first validity period and the second validity period may be changed. In between, there may be a period shorter than the period required to determine that the operating means has been operated.

The gaming machine Q9 is characterized in that the validity period changing means adds a period between the first validity period and the second validity period to the validity period.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q9, the validity period changing means additionally sets a validity period in the period between the first validity period and the second validity period. Thereby, a plurality of validity periods can be made consecutive without changing the first validity period and the second validity period, so that there is an effect that the control load on the validity period changing means can be reduced.

A gaming machine Q11 in the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, wherein the validity period changing means delays the start of the first validity period.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q9 or Q10, the start of the first effective period is delayed by the effective period changing means. Thereby, the first validity period and the second validity period can be made consecutive, so there is no need to set a new validity period, and there is an effect that the control load on the validity period changing means can be reduced.

A gaming machine Q12, characterized in that in any of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the validity period changing means is for accelerating the start of the second validity period.

According to the gaming machine Q12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q9 to Q11, the start of the second effective period is brought forward by the effective period changing means. Thereby, the first validity period and the second validity period can be made consecutive, so there is no need to set a new validity period, and there is an effect that the control load on the validity period changing means can be reduced.

In any of gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the notification means has a validity period display means for displaying the operation notification mode on the display means, and the notification means displays the operation notification mode based on the fact that the validity period has been changed by the validity period changing means. A gaming machine Q13 characterized in that it has a validity period display changing means for changing the operation notification mode displayed by the validity period display means.

According to gaming machine Q13, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q9 to Q12, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation notification mode is displayed on the display means by the validity period display means, and based on the fact that the validity period has been changed by the validity period change means, the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display change means.

Thereby, it is possible to display to the player that the validity period has been changed by the validity period changing means, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player.

A gaming machine Q14 in the gaming machine Q13, wherein the validity period display changing means changes the operation notification mode based on the elapse of the first validity period.

According to the gaming machine Q14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q13, the operation notification mode is changed by the validity period display changing means based on the fact that the first validity period has elapsed. As a result, the player grasps the contents of the operation performance to be executed later (the operation performance for which the second validity period is set) before the first validity period has elapsed, and the performance effect decreases. This has the effect of being able to prevent situations that would otherwise occur.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege award that grants a privilege to a player when the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the period effect execution means executes a composite effect in which a plurality of valid periods are set. A gaming machine Q15, wherein the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the determination means.

According to gaming machine Q15, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the benefit is granted by the benefit granting means. Then, based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the period performance execution means executes a composite performance in which a plurality of valid periods are set as a period performance for a predetermined period.

Thereby, it is possible to execute a composite performance based on the determination result by the determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q14, a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege award that grants a privilege to a player when the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result. and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect for a predetermined period based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the notification control means executes the period effect first among the continuous period effects. When the first validity period set in the first period effect and the second validity period set in the second period effect to be executed later are set under predetermined conditions. The gaming machine Q16 is characterized in that the notifying means is made to notify the specific operation notifying mode.

According to gaming machine Q16, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines Q1 to Q14, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the result of the determination performed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition is a specific determination result, the benefit is granted by the benefit granting means. Further, based on the result of the determination by the determining means, the period effect execution means executes the period effect for a predetermined period. Of the consecutive period effects, a first period of validity is set in the first period effect that is executed first, and a second period of validity is set in the second period effect that is executed later. is set under predetermined conditions, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode.

As a result, even if the first validity period and the second validity period are set across multiple period productions, the player frequently repeats the act of operating the operating means and the act of not operating it. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the desire to play due to this.

The gaming machine Q16 includes a determination condition storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of determination information based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a preliminary determination means for determining in advance the determination information stored in the determination condition storage means. a gaming machine, wherein the notification control means causes the notification means to notify the specific operation notification mode based on the determination result of the advance determination means for the second period performance. Q17.

According to the gaming machine Q17, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Q16, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of pieces of discrimination information based on the satisfaction of the discrimination condition are stored by the discrimination condition storage means, and the plurality of pieces of discrimination information stored are judged by the advance judgment means. Then, based on the determination result of the advance determination means for the second period effect, the notification control means causes the notification means to notify a specific operation notification mode.

As a result, when the first validity period and the second validity period are set across the first period performance and the second period performance, the preliminary determination corresponding to the second period performance to be executed later can be performed. A specific operation notification mode is notified based on the determination result of the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, G1 to G11, H1 to H10, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L9, M1 to M7, A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that in any one of N1 to N12, P1 to P6, and Q1 to Q17, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
BACKGROUND ART In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are machines that can perform operations corresponding to multiple button operations as operation effects using operation buttons (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-180364).
However, in the pachinko machines described above, there has been a demand for further improvement in the level of interest.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of the game.
<Means>
To achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a signal output means that outputs a signal based on the operation when the operating means is operated, and a signal outputting means that outputs a signal based on the operation when the operating means is operated. A discriminating means for discriminating the signal output by the signal outputting means, an operation performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation performance mode based on the determination result by the discrimination means, and an operation performance execution means that allows the operation performance mode to be executed by the operation performance execution means. a determining means for determining the discrimination result determined by the discriminating means during the execution period; and a determining means for determining the discrimination result determined by the discriminating means; and execution control means for switching and executing the second operation performance mode to a specific operation performance mode based on the determination result by the determination means when the second operation performance mode is executed. It is something.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the determining means at least determines the determination result determined by the determining means during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is executed. The execution control means determines a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the execution control means, when the determination means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result, As the specific operation performance mode, an operation performance mode corresponding to the first determination result is executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the determining means determines, as the first determination result, that the operation of the operating means has been executed a plurality of times, and The execution control means switches the specific operation performance mode to an operation performance mode in which the operation means is operated a plurality of times.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, further comprising an operation number measuring means for measuring the number of times the operating means is operated during a period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed. , and a number determining means for determining the number of times measured by the number of operation measuring means, and the determining means determines the first determination result and the first determination based on the determination result of the number of times determining means. A third determination result different from the result is determined.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, when the determination means determines that the determination result of the number of times determination means is greater than a predetermined number of times, the first determination result It is determined that
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, when the player operates the operation means, a signal based on the operation is outputted by the signal output means and determined by the determination means. A predetermined operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. During the period in which the operation performance mode is being executed by the operation performance execution means, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means. If the second operation performance mode is executed by the operation performance execution means within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation performance mode is executed, the execution control means controls the determination result by the determination means. Based on this, the second operation presentation mode is switched to a specific operation presentation mode and executed.
As a result, if the second operation performance mode is executed within a period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the first operation performance mode is executed, while the first operation performance mode is being executed, The effect is that the interest of the game can be improved because it is possible to switch the second operation presentation mode to a specific operation presentation mode and execute it based on the operation content of the operation means performed by the player. There is.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1. That is, during the period in which the first operation presentation mode is being executed, the determination result determined by the determination means is determined by the determination means to be a first determination result and a second determination result different from the first determination result. . When the determination means determines that the first determination result is the first determination result, the execution control means executes the operation performance mode corresponding to the first determination result as a specific operation performance mode.
Thereby, it becomes possible to execute, as the second operation performance mode, an operation performance mode corresponding to the determination result determined during the period in which the first operation performance mode is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 2. That is, the determination means determines as a first determination result that the operation of the operating means has been executed a plurality of times, and the execution control means switches the specific operation presentation mode to an operation presentation mode in which the operation means is operated multiple times. It will be done.
Thereby, when the player operates the operating means multiple times in the first operation presentation mode, an operation presentation mode that causes the player to operate the operating means multiple times is executed as the second operation presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 has the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3. That is, during the period in which the first operation performance mode is being executed, the number of times the operating means is operated is measured by the number of operations measuring means, and the number of times measured by the number of operations measuring means is determined by the number of times determining means. . Then, based on the determination result of the number of times determination means, the determination means determines a first determination result and a third determination result different from the first determination result.
With this, it is possible to switch the operation presentation mode of the second operation presentation mode based on the number of times the operating means is operated during the period when the first operation presentation mode is being executed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be done.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 4. That is, when the determination result of the number of times determination means is determined to be greater than the predetermined number of times, the determination means determines the first determination result.
This has the effect of allowing the player to continue operating the operating means voluntarily.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
S2006 first performance execution means
S2038 Second performance execution means

Claims (1)

a first performance execution means for executing a first performance that changes the performance mode from at least the first mode to any second mode among a plurality of second modes different from the first mode;
A gaming machine comprising a second performance execution means for executing a second performance different from the first performance,
The first performance execution means is capable of executing the first performance so as to hide the second performance in a situation where the execution position of the first performance overlaps the execution position of the second performance,
The second performance execution means is
The execution position is a position that is easier for the player to visually recognize in a situation where the first effect is executed in the second mode than in a situation where the first effect is executed in the first mode . It is possible to execute the second performance ,
The second effect can be executed at a predetermined execution position that cannot be hidden by the first effect, as a position that is easily visible to the player;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine has a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance in which the performance mode of the first mode is not changed to the second mode .

Images